Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 2000-R0287 - Grant Application - FAA - Airport Rescure And Firefighting Training Facility - 08/24/2000Resolution No. 2000 RO287 August 24, 2000 Item No. 39 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock, a Grant Application for Federal Assistance, in substantially the form of the Agreement, attached hereto, by and between the City of Lubbock and the Federal Aviation Administration for funding the construction of an Airport Rescue and Firefighting Training Facility and upgrade Airfield Guidance Signage and Airfield Electrical Vault, and related documents. Said Agreement is attached hereto and incorporated in this resolution as if fully set forth herein and shall be included in the minutes of the City Council. Passed by the City Council this 24th _ day of August , 2000. YS Y ATTEST: Ea4jl"�i Kaythle Darnell13. City Secretary h APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: viation Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: illiam de Haas Competition and Contracts Manager/Attorney Dh/Ccdocs/Federal Aviation Administration.res August 9, 2000 Resolution No. 2000—RO287 UMB Approval No. U348-0043 APPLICATION FOR 2. WE SUBMITTED APO-1tdentifier FEDERAL ASSISTANCE July.21; ao0o 4615.8107 1. TYPE OF 3. DATE RECEIVED BY STATE State Application Identifier SUBMISSION: Name and telephone number of the person to be contracted on matters involving $ .00 Application Preapplication XX Construction p Construction $ .00 this application (give area code) 4. DATE RECEIVED BY FEDERAL AGENCY federal Identifier Non -Construction 0 Non -Construction 17. ISTHE APPLICANT DELINQUENT ON ANY FEDERAL DEBT? Lubbock County Legal Name: I Ending Datea. 07/01 Applicant District 19 t rganlzauonai unr: City of Lubbock 18. IS APPLICATION SUBJECT TO REVIEW BY STATE EXECUTIVE ORDER 12372 PROCESS? a. YES, THIS PREAPPLICATIONlAPPLICATION WAS MADE AVAILABLE TO THE STATE EXECUTIVE ORDER 12372 PROCESS FOR REVIEW ON X DATE: 08/10/99 ................. b. NO ❑ PROGRAM IS NOT COVERED BY E. O. 12372 ❑ OR PROGRAM HAS NOT BEEN SELECTED BY STATE FOR REVIEW Lubbock International i Address (give city, cowrty, state, and zip code) b. Applicant $ 365,737 .00 Name and telephone number of the person to be contracted on matters involving $ .00 d. Local $ .00 this application (give area code) Rt. 3 Bax 389 L Program income $ .00 17. ISTHE APPLICANT DELINQUENT ON ANY FEDERAL DEBT? Lubbock County Mark N. Earle Lubbock; Texas 79401-9710 Director of Aviation (A061 775-3126 EMPLOYER IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (EIN): TYPE OF APPLICANT: (enter appropriate letter in box) C 7 ❑ 00County EI -0 ❑ 0 ❑ © ® ® State H. Interdependent School District rA.1. State Controlled Institution of Higher Learning Municipal J. Private University D. Township K. Indian Tribe E. Interstate L. Individual S. TYPE OF APPLICATION: ® New ❑ Continuation ❑ Revision F. Intermunicipal M. Profit Organization G. Special District N. Other (Specify) If Revision, enter appropriate letter(s) in box(es): ❑ ❑ A Increase Award B Decrease Award C Increase Duration D Decrease Duration Other (specify) 10. CATALOG OF FEDERAL DOMESTIC ASSISTANCE NUMBER Q TITLE: ID o [I Airport Improvement rolz 1Z. AREAS AFFECTED BY PROJECT (cities, counties, states, etc.). City of Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas Federal Aviation Administration Ft. Worth, Texas 76193-0600 11. DESCRIPTIVE TITLE OF APPLICANTS PROJECT: l.Construct an Airport Rescue and Firefighti Training Facility 2.Upgrade Airfield Guidance Signage and Airfield Electrical Vault Start Date 10/00 I Ending Datea. 07/01 Applicant District 19 b. Project 1 District 19 15. ESTIMATED FUNDING 18. IS APPLICATION SUBJECT TO REVIEW BY STATE EXECUTIVE ORDER 12372 PROCESS? a. YES, THIS PREAPPLICATIONlAPPLICATION WAS MADE AVAILABLE TO THE STATE EXECUTIVE ORDER 12372 PROCESS FOR REVIEW ON X DATE: 08/10/99 ................. b. NO ❑ PROGRAM IS NOT COVERED BY E. O. 12372 ❑ OR PROGRAM HAS NOT BEEN SELECTED BY STATE FOR REVIEW a. Federal $ 3,291,642 •00 b. Applicant $ 365,737 .00 c. State $ .00 d. Local $ .00 a. Other $ .00 L Program income $ .00 17. ISTHE APPLICANT DELINQUENT ON ANY FEDERAL DEBT? g. TOTAL S 3,657,379 '00 ❑ Yes Nyes,attach anexplanation No 18. TO THE BEST OF MY KNOWLEDGE AND BELIEF, ALL DATA IN THIS APPLICATION ARE TRUE AND CORRECT, THE DOCUMENT HAS BEEN DULY AUTHORIZED BY THE GOVERNING BODY OF THE APPLICANT AND THE APPLICANT WILL COMPLY WITH THE ATTACHED ASSURANCES IF THE ASSISTANCE IS AWARDED a. Typed Name of Authorized Representative b. Title c. Telephone number Mark Earle/ / -) I Director d.ignature of/Au d resentative e. Date Signed %�.Z �/00 Previous Edi ' sable Standard Form 424 (REV 4-88) Authorized for Local Reproduction Prescribed by OMB Circular A-102 I • PREAPPLICATION FOR FEDERAL ASSISTANCE PART II 1. Does this assistance request require State, local, regional or other priority rating? Yes X No 2. Does this assistance request require State or local advisory, educational or health dearance? Yes _� No 3. Does lois assistance request require Clearinghouse review? X Yes No 4. Does this assistance request require State, local, regional or other planning approval? Yes X No 5. Is the proposed project covered by an approved comprehensive plan? �_ Yes No 6. WWII the assistance requested serve a Federal Installation? Yes _L No 7. Wil the assistance request be on Federal land or installation? Yes X No 8. Will the assistance requested have an effect on the environment? Yes X No 9. Will the assistance requested cause the displacement of individuals, families, businesses, or farms? Yes __K_ No 10. Is there other related assistance for this project previous. pending, or anticipated? Yes _ X No PART III - PROJECT BUDGET FEDERAL CATALOG NUMBER a TYPE OF ASSISTANCE LOAN, GRANT, ETC. b FIRST BUDGET PERIOD C BALANCE OF PROJECT d TOTAL e L 20,106 AIP Grant 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Total Federal Contribution a $ a 3,291,642 7. State Contribution B. Applicant Contribution 365,737 9. Other Contribution 10. Total S 5 S 3.657 , 379 PART IV - PROGRAM NARRATIVE STATEMENT (Attach per instruction) SEA -ADO- Fornr AI a Page 2 PART IV PROGRAM NARRATIVE 1. Objective: This grant includes two projects. The major portion of the funding will go towards the construction of an Airport Rescue and Firefighting (ARFF) Training Facility on the airport. The City has contracted with Delta Airport Consultants, Inc. to provide an engineering report, preliminary design engineering and final design documents. The balance of the funding will go towards the construction necessary to Upgrade the Airfield Guidance Signage and Airfield Electrical Vault. The City has contracted with Parkhill, Smith and Cooper to provide an engineering report, preliminary design engineering and final design documents. 2. Benefits: One benefit of having an on-site ARFF Training Facility is that it will insure that the City will be able to meet the federal requirement of training personnel in aircraft rescue and firefighting techniques. Additionally, the City will be able to train its personnel more efficiently and with more frequency since the facility is on site. The benefits of the guidance sign and electrical vault project are that the City will be able to continue to meet FAA Certification standards for airfield operations, enhance aircraft safety during taxi operations and ensure continued reliability of the runway and taxiway electrical lighting system through improvements made in the airfield electrical vault. The geographic location of these projects is shown on the attached Exhibit B. L-3uuuLi runs Associaw.uu ul Commissioner James Kitten, Lubbock County' PRESIDENT August 10, 1999 Mr. Mark Earle Lubbock International Airport RT 3, Box 389 Lubbock, TX 79401 %XUV. V�iiiii1�a• -J AUG 1 1999 BY: SUBJECT: GA99-0084-SAI-TX-R 99-07-19-0009-02-00 Westport Apron and Taxiway Expansion -South Jerry D. Cassteveru EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR GA99-0085-W-7X-R-99-07-19-0010-02-00 Y2K Upgrade, ARFF Equipment and Training Equipment GA99-0086-SAI-TX-R-99-07-19-0011-02-00 ARFF Training Area and Burn Pit Dear Mr. Mark Earle: At its meeting on Tuesday, August 10, 1999 the South Plains Assocation of Governments Board of Directors reviewed the application cited above and took the fallowing action: FAVORABLE COMMENT for the following reasons: I. The application meets the review criteria. 2. There is a clearly defined need for this type of program. You will need to ensure that your funding agency m4wives a copy of this letter. Thank. you for the opportunity to review this application. If we may be of further assistance, please do not hesitate to call. Sincerely Tanury rows Regional Services Specialist 1323 58th St . P.O. Sox 3730 Fw dom Station . Lubbock. Texas 79452-3730 - 606/7624721 - Fax 8061765-9344 - 11800-858.1609 Web Site: bttrJ/Www•inter0zc0uthpa6 E20ice/ i3m a 0 000 N L.. Q z ry CONSTRUCT RFF TRAINING FACILITY ARFF GRANT PROPOSAL EVALUATION FORM 1. Grant is: NEW ❑ 2. Match required: YES IF YES: % of Match 10 Amount 365.737 In-kind OR Cash X Source Passenger Facility Charges CONTINUING Number of years 22 NO ❑ 3. Are there any indirect costs, i.e. building use, computer time, administrative support associated with the grant? YES ❑ NO IF YES: Estimated Costs 4. If there are indirect costs, are they reimbursed by the grant? YES ❑ NO ❑ IF YES: % Reimbursed 5. Are audit costs reimbursed? YES ❑ NO IF YES: % Reimbursed 6. What are the audit requirements for this grant? Falls under Single Audit Act ATTACHMENT Page 1 of 4 7. Can this grant be renewed? YES ❑ IF YES: How many times? What are the terms of renewal? 8. Does the grant require the City to gradually assume the cost of the program? YES ❑ NO IF YES: What is the timetable? 9. Please address whether other agencies are currently administering similar programs and whether any other agencies are available to administer this program. AIP grants are airport specific grants 10. For the "Current Year" please identify how expenditures are to be made in the following categories and how the program will be funded. If the grant is for an on-going program, please project revenue and expenditures for future years. If the grant is for one year, show any on-going costs to the City, such as the cost of maintenance on equipment purchased by the grant. EXPENDITURES Current Year 20 01 Year 2 20 Year 3 20 Year 4 20 Year 5 20 Personnel Full-time Salary TMRS Social Security Medical Dental Life LTD Supplies Maintenance Other Capital 3,657,379 TOTAL EXPENDITURES 3,657, 379 ATTACHMENT 2 Page 2 of 4 11. Please list the title, job grade and number of personnel funded by this grant. Indicate whether it is new or existing. Job Title New or Existing Job Grade # of Personnel N/A 12. Please list any capital items to be purchased: 1. ARFF Burn Pit 2. Airfield guidance signs & electrical vault 13. Please discuss how this program will impact current employee allocation and utilization and whether it will have a long term financial or personnel impact. Attach additional pages if needed. Niether project has any effect on airport employee allocation or utilization. Operation costs and maintenance are anticipated to be offset by the savings accrued by not sending firefighters away for mandated ARFF trainina. ATTACHMENT 2 Page 3 of 4 Current Year 20 01 Year 2 20 Year 3 20 Year 4 20 Year 5 20 REVENUE Federal Grant 3,291,642 State Grant Local Match 365,737 Other TOTAL REVENUE 3,657,379 11. Please list the title, job grade and number of personnel funded by this grant. Indicate whether it is new or existing. Job Title New or Existing Job Grade # of Personnel N/A 12. Please list any capital items to be purchased: 1. ARFF Burn Pit 2. Airfield guidance signs & electrical vault 13. Please discuss how this program will impact current employee allocation and utilization and whether it will have a long term financial or personnel impact. Attach additional pages if needed. Niether project has any effect on airport employee allocation or utilization. Operation costs and maintenance are anticipated to be offset by the savings accrued by not sending firefighters away for mandated ARFF trainina. ATTACHMENT 2 Page 3 of 4 14. In narrative form, please provide a brief description of the program. Include: • The need which will be addressed; • The goals and objectives of the program; • The target population to be served; • Other significant aspects of the application. Attach additional pages if needed. 1. Objective: This grant includes two projects. The major portion of the funding will go towards the construction of an Airport Rescue and Firefighting (ARFF) Training Facility on the airport. The City has contracted with Delta Airport Consultants Inc to provide an engineering reportpreliminary design engineering and final design documents. The balance of the funding will no towards the construction necessary to Upgrade the Airfield Guidance Sionage and Airfield Electrical Vault. The City has contracted with Parkhill. Smith and Cooper to provide an engineering report, preliminary design engineering and final design documents. 2. Benefits: One benefit of having an on-site ARFF Training Facility is that it will insure that the City will be able to meet the federal requirement of training personnel in aircraft rescue and firefighting techniques. Additionally, the City will be able to train its personnel more efficiently and with more frequency since the facility is on site. The benefits of the guidance sign and electrical vault project are that the City will be able to continue to meet FAA Certification standards for airfield operations, enhance aircraft safety during tax! operations and ensure continued reliability of the runway and taxiway electrical lighting system through improvements made in the airfield electrical vault. ATTACHMENT Page 4 of 4 Resolution No. 2000-R 0287 August 24, 2000 Item No. 29 Caw GRANT AGREEMENT U.S. Department of Transportation FOR DEVELOPMENT PROJECT Federal Aviation Administration Date of Offer: AVG 14 Y000 Airport: Lubbock International TO: CITY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS (herein referred to as the "Sponsor") PART I -OFFER Project No. 3-48-0138-2200 Contract No. DOT FA 00 SW -8220 FROM: The United States of America (acting through the Federal Aviation Administration, herein referred to as the "FAA") WHEREAS, the Sponsor has submitted to the FAA a Project Application (also called an Application for Federal Assistance) dated for a grant of Federal funds for a project for development of the Lubbock International Airport (herein called the "Airport"), together with plans and specifications for such project, which Application for Federal Assistance, as approved by the FAA is hereby incorporated herein and made a part hereof; and WHEREAS, the FAA has approved a project for development of the Airport (herein called the "Project") consisting of the following -described airport development: CONSTRUCT AIRCRAFT RESCUE AND FIREFIGHTING (ARFF) TRAINING FACILITY; INSTALL RUNWAY/TAXIWAY GUIDANCE SIGNS all as more particularly described in the property map and plans and specifications incorporated in the said Application for Federal Assistance. ---------- FAA Form 5100-37 (10-89) Development or Noise Program Page I of 5 Pages ASW Form 5100-37 (1-99) NOW THEREFORE, pursuant to and for the purpose of carrying out the provisions of Title 49, United States Code, herein called "Title 49 U.S.C.," and in consideration of (a) the Sponsor's adoption and ratification of the representations and assurances contained in said Project Application and its acceptance of this Offer as hereinafter provided, and (b) the benefits to accrue to the United States and the public from the accomplishment of the Project and compliance with the assurances and conditions as herein provided, THE FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION, FOR AND ON BEHALF OF THE UNITED STATES, HEREBY OFFERS AND AGREES to pay, as the United States share of the allowable costs incurred in accomplishing the Project, ninety percentum of all allowable project costs. This Offer is made on and subject to the following terms and conditions: Conditions 1. The maximum obligation of the United States payable under this offer shall be $3,291,642 2. The allowable costs of the project shall not include any costs determined by the FAA to be ineligible for consideration as to allowability under Title 49 U.S.C. 3. Payment of the United States share of the allowable project costs will be made pursuant to and in accordance with the provisions of such regulations and procedures as the Secretary shall prescribe. Final determination of the United States share will be based upon the final audit of the total amount of allowable project costs and settlement will be made for any upward or downward adjustments to the Federal share of costs. 4. The sponsor shall carry out and complete the Project without undue delays and in accordance with the terms hereof, and such regulations and procedures as the Secretary shall prescribe, and agrees to comply with the assurances which were made part of the project application. 5. The FAA reserves the right to amend or withdraw this offer at any time prior to its acceptance by the sponsor. 6. This offer shall expire and the United States shall not be obligated to pay any part of the costs of the project unless this offer has been accepted by the sponsor on or before thirty days from Grant Offer or such subsequent date as may be prescribed in writing by the FAA. 7. The sponsor shall take all steps, including litigation if necessary, to recover Federal funds spent fraudulently, wastefully, or in violation of Federal antitrust statutes, or misused in any other manner in any project upon which Federal funds have been expended. For the purposes of this grant agreement, the term "Federal funds" means funds, however, used or disbursed by the sponsor that were originally paid pursuant to this or any other Federal grant agreement. It shall obtain the approval of the Secretary as to any determination of the amount of the Federal share of such funds. It shall return the recovered Federal share, including funds recovered by settlement, order or judgment, to the Secretary. It shall furnish to the Secretary, upon request, all documents and records pertaining to the determination of the amount of the Federal share or to any settlement, litigation, negotiation, or other efforts taken to recover such funds. All settlements or other final positions of the sponsor, in court or otherwise, involving the recovery of such Federal share shall be approved in advance by the Secretary. 8. The United States shall not be responsible or liable for damage to property or injury to persons which may arise from, or be incident to, compliance with this grant agreement. 9. Unless otherwise approved by the FAA, the sponsor will not acquire or permit any contractor or subcontractor to acquire any steel or manufactured products produced outside the United States to be used for any project for airport development or noise compatibility for which funds are provided under this grant. The sponsor will include in every contract a provision implementing this special condition. 10. The property map referred to on Page 1 of this Grant Agreement is the Property Map, Exhibit "A", attached to the Application for Federal Assistance. 11. It is mutually understood and agreed that if, during the life of the project, the FAA determines that the grant amount exceeds the expected needs of the sponsor by $5,000 or five (5%) percent, whichever is greater, the grant amount can be unilaterally reduced by letter from the FAA advising of the budget change. Conversely, if there is an overrun in the eligible project costs, FAA may increase the grant to cover the amount of overrun not to exceed the statutory fifteen (15%) percent limitation , and will advise FAA Form 5100-37 (10-89) Development or Noise Program Page 2 of 5 Pages ASW Form 5100-37 (1-99) the sponsor by letter of the increase. Upon issuance of either of the aforementioned letters, the maximum obligation of the United States is adjusted to the amount specified. 12. If a letter of credit is to be used, the sponsor agrees to request cash drawdowns on the authorized letter of credit only when actually needed for its disbursements and to timely reporting of such disbursements as required. It is understood that failure to adhere to this provision may cause the letter of credit to be revoked. 13. The Sponsor agrees to perform the following, if this project contains more than $250,000 of paving: a. Furnish a construction management program to FAA prior to the start of construction which shall detail the measures and procedures to be used to comply with the quality control provisions of the construction contract, including, but not limited to, all quality control provisions and tests required by the Federal specifications. The program shall include as a minimum: 1. The name of the person representing the sponsor who has overall responsibility for contract administration for the project and the authority to take necessary actions to comply with the contract. 2. Names of testing laboratories and consulting engineer firms with quality control responsibilities on the project, together with a description of the services to be provided. 3. Procedures for determining that testing laboratories meet the requirements of the American Society of Testing and Materials standards on laboratory evaluation, referenced in the contract specifications (D 3666, C 1077). 4. Qualifications of engineering supervision and construction inspection personnel. 5. A listing of all tests required by the contract specifications, including the type and frequency of tests to be taken, the method of sampling, the applicable test standard, and the acceptance criteria of tolerances permitted for each type of test. 6. Procedures for ensuring that the tests are taken in accordance with the program, that they are documented daily, and that the proper corrective actions, where necessary, are undertaken. b. Submit at completion of the project, a final test and quality control report documenting the results of all tests performed, highlighting those tests that failed or did not meet the applicable test standard. The report shall include the pay reductions applied and reasons for accepting any out -of -tolerance material. An interim test and quality control report shall be submitted, if requested by the FAA. c. Failure to provide a complete report as described in paragraph b, or failure to perform such tests, shall, absent any compelling justification, result in a reduction in Federal participation for costs incurred in connection with construction of the applicable pavement. Such reduction shall be at the discretion of the FAA and will be based on the type or types of required tests not performed or not documented and will be commensurate with the proportion of applicable pavement with respect to the total pavement constructed under the grant agreement. d. The FAA, at its discretion, reserves the right to conduct independent tests and to reduce grant payments accordingly if such independent tests determine that sponsor test results are inaccurate. 14. The plans and specifications referred to on Page 1 of this Grant Agreement are the plans and specifications as indicated in the Master Certification list . 15. The sponsor attests any automated facility, technology system, or equipment acquired, assessed, tested, installed or repaired under this Airport Improvement Program project has completed, or will complete, successful verification and validation of the year 2000 (Y2K) date change data processing. The sponsor shall ensure Y2K compliance of the facilities, systems, or equipment prior to its acceptance and/or commissioning to verify it meets operational standards. The sponsor must provide for continuous operation and maintenance of such, or alternate courses of action. The future Y2K awareness, assessment (including associated testing), renovation, validation, and implementation work related to the project will be the responsibility of the sponsor or its contractor. The Government will not participate in additional costs of Y2K assessment, testing, or repair work for the automated data processing subject to this grant agreement. FAA Forth 5100-37 (10-89) Development or Noise Program Page 3 of 5 Pages ASW Forth 5100-37 (1-99) The Sponsor's acceptance of this Offer and ratification and adoption of the Project Application incorporated herein shall be evidenced by execution of this instrument by the Sponsor, as hereinafter provided, and this Offer and Acceptance shall comprise a Grant Agreement, as provided by Title 49 U.S.C., constituting the contractual obligations and rights of the United States and the Sponsor with respect to the accomplishment of the Project and compliance with the assurances and conditions as provided herein. Such Grant Agreement shall become effective upon the Sponsor's acceptance of this Offer. UNITED STATES OF AMERICA FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION offltom" 1j" J. ichael Nicely, Acting, Manager Texas Airports Development Office FAA Form 5100-37 (10-89) Development or Noise Program Page 4 of 5 Pages ASW Form 5100-37 (1-99) PART II - ACCEPTANCE The Sponsor does hereby ratify and adopt all assurances, statements, representations, warranties, covenants, and agreements contained in the Project Application and incorporated materials referred to in the foregoing Offer and does hereby accept this Offer and by such acceptance agrees to comply with all of the terms and conditions in this Offer and in the Project Application. Executed this 24th day of August , 20 00 CITY OF LUBBOCK, EXAS (Name o 114)(SE(Spon sigrnated Officia e Windy Ston Title: wra�rnr Attest: Kaythie Darnell Title: CERTIFICATE OF SPONSOR'S ATTORNEY I, William deHaas ,acting as Attorney for the Sponsor do hereby certify: That in my opinion the Sponsor is empowered to enter into the foregoing Grant Agreement under the laws of the State of ;'7e- x #. d . Further, I have examined the foregoing Grant Agreement and the actions taken by said Sponsor relating thereto, and find that the acceptance thereof by said Sponsor and Sponsor's official representative has been duly authorized and that the execution thereof is in all respects due and proper and in accordance with the laws of the said State and Title 49 U.S.C. In addition, for grants involving projects to be carried out on property not owned by the Sponsor, there are no legal impediments that will prevent full performance by the Sponsor. Further, it is my opinion that the said Grant Agreement constitutes a legal and binding obligation of the Sponsor in accordance with the terms thereof. Dated at Lubbock., Texas this c>nLcd- day of W� ,20 Cid (signature of Sponsor's Attorney) APP93VED AS TO CONTENT: c David Jones Deputy Director lor Business Development APPROVED AS TO F1OFM: William deHaas Competition and Contracts Manager FAA Form 5100-37 (10-89) Development or Noise Program Page 5 of 5 Pages ASW Form 5100-37 (1-99) OMB Avuroval No. 0348-0043 APPLICATION FOR 2• DATE SUBMITTED Applicant Identifier FEDERAL ASSISTANCE July 21, .2000 4615.8107 1. TYPE OF 3. DATE RECEIVED BY STATE State Application Identifier SUBMISSION: Application Preapplcation X$ Construction Cl Construction 4. DATE RECEIVED BY FEDERAL AGENCY Federal Identifier ❑ Non -Construction ❑ Non -Construction 5. APPLICANT INFORMATION Legal Name: Organizational Unit: City of Lubbock Lubbock International Airport Address (give city, county, state, and zip code) Name and telephone number of the person to be contracted on matters involving this application (give area code) Rt. 3 Box 389 Lubbock County Mark N. Earle Lubbock, Texas 79401-9710 Director of Aviation (RO6) 77S-1126 EMPLOYER IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (EIN): 7. TYPE OF APPLICANT: (enter appropriate letter in box) C ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ El ❑ © ® ❑ A. State H. Interdependent School District _ 7 5 6 0 0 0 B. County 1. State Controlled Institution of Higher Learning C. Municipal J. Private University D. Township K. Indian Tribe E. Interstate L. Individual 8. TYPE OF APPLICATION: ® New ❑ Continuation ❑ Revision F. Intermunicipal M. Profit Organization G. Special District N. Other (Specify) If Revision, enter appropriate letter(s) in box(es): ❑ ❑ A Increase Award B Decrease Award C Increase Duration D Decrease Duration Other (specify) 9. NAME OF FEDERAL AGENCY Federal Aviation Administration Ft. Worth, Texas 76193-0600 10. CATALOG OF FEDERAL DOMESTIC 11. DESCRIPTIVE TITLE OF APPLICANTS PROJECT: ASSISTANCE NUMBER 1:1 [11© l.Construct an Airport Rescue and Firef ighti TITLE: Q. Airport I rovement ram Training Fac i l i t y 2 . Upgrade Airfield Guidance Signage and 12. AREAS AFFECTED BY PROJECT (cities, counties, states, etc.): Airfield Electrical Vault City of Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas 13. PROPOSED PROJECT 14. CONGRESSIONAL DISTRICTS OF Start Date Ending Date a. Applicant b. Project 10) 1 07/01 District 19 District 19 15. ESTIMATED FUNDING 18. IS APPLICATION SUBJECT TO REVIEW BY STATE EXECUTIVE ORDER 12372 PROCESS? a. YES, THIS PREAPPLICATION/APPLICATION WAS MADE AVAILABLE TO THE a. Federal $ 3,291,642 .00 STATE EXECUTIVE ORDER 12372 PROCESS FOR REVIEW ON g DATE: 08/10/99 ........PR........ b. NO ❑ OG.RAM IS NOT COVERED BY E. O. 12372 ❑ OR PROGRAM HAS NOT BEEN SELECTED BY STATE FOR REVIEW b. Applicant $ 365,737 .00 c. State $ .00 d. Local $ .00 e. Other $ .00 III. Program income $ .00 17. ISTHE APPLICANT DELINQUENT ON ANY FEDERAL DEBT? ❑ Yes If yes, attach an explanation :0 No g. TOTAL $ 3,657,379 .00 18. TO THE BEST OF MY KNOWLEDGE AND BELIEF, ALL DATA IN THIS APPLICATION ARE TRUE AND CORRECT, THE DOCUMENT HAS BEEN DULY AUTHORIZED BY THE GOVERNING BODY OF THE APPLICANT AND THE APPLICANT WILL COMPLY WITH THE ATTACHED ASSURANCES IF THE ASSISTANCE IS AWARDED a. Typed Name of Authorized Representative b. Title c. Telephone number Mark Earle Director of Aviation d.�gnature ofA resentative e. Date Signed / l f/ "1/00 Previous Edit+tsmsiv6f Usable Standard Fonn 424 (REV 4-88) l/// Authorized for Local Reproduction Prescribed by OMB Circular A-102 U.S DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION . FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION PART II PROJECT APPROVAL INFORMATION SECTION A Item 1 Does this assistance request requires State, local, Name of Governing Body regional , or other priority rating? Primary Rating _Yes X No Item 2. Does this assistance request require State, or local Name of Agency or advisory, educational or health clearances? Board _____Yes X No (Attach Documentation) Item 3. Does this assistance request require clearinghouse review (Attach Comments) in accordance with OMB Circular A-95? CUB NO. 80-80184 ._Yes No Item 4. Does this assistance request require State, local, Name of Approving Agency regional or other planning approval? Date ___._Yes X No Item 5 Check one: State a Is the proposal project covered by an approved Local a comprehensive plan? Regional O --E—Yes Location of Plan Lubbock Int' 1 Airport Item 6. Name of Federal Installation Will the assistance requested serve a Federal Installation? Federal Population benefiting from Project _Yes X No Item 7. Name of Federal Installation Will the assistance requested be on Federal land or installation? Location of Federal Land ._,___Yes X No Percent of Project Item 8. Will the assistance requested have an impact or effect See instruction for additional information to be on the environment? provided —____Yes X No Item 9. Number of: Will the assistance requested cause the displacement of Individuals individuals families, businesses, or farms? Families _Yes X No Businesses Farms Item 10. Is there other related Federal assistance on this See instructions for additional information to be project previous, pending, or anticipated? provided. Yes =No FAA Form 5100-100 (6.73) SUPERSEDES FAA FORM 5100-1- PAGES 1 THRU 7 Page 2 U.S DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION - FEDERAL AVIATION ADbI1NISTRAWN PART II - SECTION C The Sponsor hereby represents and certifies as follows: -tae NO. 04-R0209 1. Compatible Land Use. - The Sponsor has taken the following actions to assure compatible usage of land adjacent to or in the vicinity of the airport: Height Hazard Zoning 2. Defaults. - The Sponsor is not in default on any obligation to the United States or any agency of the United States Government relative to the development, operation, or maintenance of any airport, except as stated herewith: None 3. Possible Disabilities. - There are no facts or circumstances (including the existence of effective or proposed leases, use agreements or other legal instruments affecting use of the Airport or the existence of pending litigation or other legal proceedings) which in reasonable probability might make it impossible for the Sponsor to carry out and complete the Project or carry out the provisions of Part V of this Application, either by limiting its legal or financial ability or otherwise, except as follows: None 4. Land. - (a) The Sponsor holds the following property interest in the following areas of land* which are to be developed or used as part of or in connection with the Airport, subject to the following exceptions, encumbrances, and adverse interests, all of which areas are identified on the aforementioned property map designated as Exhibit "A": See Attached Exhibit A *State character of property interest in each area and list and identify for each all exceptions, encumbrances. and adverse interests of every kind and nature. including liens. easements, leases, etc. The separate areas of land need only be identified hereby the area numbers $/,air#: on the property map. FAA Forth 5100-900 (476) Page 3a U.S OEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION - FEDERAL AVIATION A6MINIS7RATI0lI OMB NO. 04-R0209 PART II - SECTION C (Continued) The Sponsor further certifies that the above is based on a title examination by a qualified attorney or title company and that such attorney or title company has determined that the Sponsor holds the above interests. (b) The Sponsor will acquire within a reasonable time, but in any event prior to the start of any construction work under the Project, the following property interest in the following areas of land' on which such construction work is to be performed, all of which areas are identified on the aforementioned property map designated as Exhibit "A": NA (C) The Sponsor will acquire within a reasonable time, and if feasible prior to the completion of all construction work under the Project, the following property interest in the following areas of land" which are to be developed or used as part of or in connection with the Airport as it will be upon completion of the Project, all of which areas are identified on the aforementioned property map designated as Exhibit "A": NA S. Exclusive Rights. - There is no grant of an exclusive right for the conduct of any aeronautical activity at any airport owned or controlled by the Sponsor except as follows: None State character of property Interest in each area and list and Identify far each all exceptions, encumbrances. and adverse interests of every kind and nature, including liens, easements, leases etc. The separate areas of land need only be identified here by the area numbers shown on the property map. FAA Form 5100-100 (476) Page 3b FAA AC 81-06913 - r=PMAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION PART 111- BUDGET INFORMATION - CONSTRUCTION SECTION A - GENERAL 1. Federal ,Domestic Assistance Catalog No .................. 2. Functional or Other Breakout ................................ ................. 20.106 SECTION B -CALCULATION OF FEDERAL GRANT Cost Classification 1. Administration expense 2. Preliminary expense 3. Land, structures, right-of-way 4. Architectural engineering basic fees 5. Other Architectural engineering fees 6. Project inspection fees 7. Land development 8. Relocation Expenses 9. Relocation payments to Individuals and Businesses 10. Demolition and removal 11. Construction and project improvement 12. Equipment 13. Miscellaneous 14. Total (tines 1 through 13) 15. Estimated Income (if applicable) 16. Net Project Amount (Une 14 minus 15) 17. Less: Ineligible Exclusions 18. Add: Contingencies 19. Total Project Amt. (Excluding Rehabilitation Grants) 20. Federal Share requested of Line 19 21. Add Rehabilitation Grants Requested (100 Percent) 22. Total Federal grant requested (lines 20 & 21) 23. Grantee share 24. Other shares 25. Total Project (Ones 22, 23 & 24) Use only for revisions t.atestApprovedI Adjustment I Total Amount Amount + or (-) Required 121 402 2,549,850 213,887 3,657,379 3,291,642 36 5.737 "' 3, 657, 379 PAGES 1 THRU 7 Page 4 US DEPARTMENT OF Taenennn�.-..... 1 -1 "`+��Qr_U= rfw rUKM 5100-10 PAGES 1 THRU 7 Page 5 - - - reuaeeAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION OMB NO. 80-110184 - SECTION C - EXCLUSIONS _ Classification Ineligible for Excluded From 26 Contingency Provision Participation 1 ( Z) a. b. C. d. e. f. Totals $ $ SECTION D - PROPOSED METHOD OF FINANCING NON-FEDERAL SHARE 27. Grantee Share $ a. Securities b. Mortgages c. Appropriations B Applicant) d. Bonds e. Tax Levies f. Non Cash Other (Explain) Passen er Facility Char es h. TOTAL - Grantee share -365,737 28. Other Shares 365,737 a. State b. Other C. Total Other Shares 29. TOTAL $ 365,737 SECTION E - REMARKS PART IV PROGRAM NARRATIVE (Attach - See Instructions) _ 1 -1 "`+��Qr_U= rfw rUKM 5100-10 PAGES 1 THRU 7 Page 5 PREAPPLICATION FOR FEDERAL ASSISTANCE PART II 1. Does this assistance request require State, local, regional or other priority rating? Yes X No 2. Does this assistance request require State or local advisory, educational or health clearance? Yes _ No 3. Does this assistance request require Clearinghouse review? X Yes No 4. Does this assistance request require State, local, regional or other planning approval? Yes X No 5. Is the proposed project covered by an approved comprehensive plan? X Yes No 6. Will the assistance requested serve a Federal installation? Yes X No 7. Will the assistance request be on Federal land or installation? Yes X No 8. Will the assistance requested have an effect on the environment? Yes X No 9. Will the assistance requested cause the displacement of individuals, families, businesses , or farms? Yes X No 10. Is there other related assistance for this project previous, pending, or anticipated? Yes X No PART III - PROJECT BUDGET FEDERAL CATALOG NUMBER a TYPE OF ASSISTANCE LOAN, GRANT, ETC. b FIRST BUDGET PERIOD c BALANCE OF PROJECT d TOTAL e 1. 20.106 AIP Grant 3,291,642 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Total Federal Contribution $ $ $ 3,291,642 7. State Contribution 8. Applicant Contribution 365,737 9. Other Contribution 10. Total $ $ $ 3,657,379 PART IV - PROGRAM NARRATIVE STATEMENT (Attach per instruction) SEA -ADO- Form A ]a Page 2 PART IV PROGRAM NARRATIVE 1. Objective: This grant includes two projects. The major portion of the funding will go towards the construction of an Airport Rescue and Firefighting (ARFF) Training Facility on the airport. The City has contracted with Delta Airport Consultants, Inc. to provide an engineering report, preliminary design engineering and final design documents. The balance of the funding will go towards the construction necessary to Upgrade the Airfield Guidance Signage and Airfield Electrical Vault. The City has contracted with Parkhill, Smith and Cooper to provide an engineering report, preliminary design engineering and final design documents. 2. Benefits: One benefit of having an on-site ARFF Training Facility is that it will insure that the City will be able to meet the federal requirement of training personnel in aircraft rescue and firefighting techniques. Additionally, the City will be able to train its personnel more efficiently and with more frequency since the facility is on site. The benefits of the guidance sign and electrical vault project are that the City will be able to continue to meet FAA Certification standards for airfield operations, enhance aircraft safety during taxi operations and ensure continued reliability of the runway and taxiway electrical lighting system through improvements made in the airfield electrical vault. The geographic location of these projects is shown on the attached Exhibit B. EIVED South Plai%zs Association of Go vernm AUG 1 1999 BY: Commissioner James Kitten, Lubbock County PRESIDENT August 10, 1999 Mr. Mark Earle Lubbock International Airport RT 3, Box 389 Lubbock, TX 79401 SUBJECT: GA99-0084-SAI-TX-R-99-07-19-0009-02-00 Westport Apron and Taxiway Expansion -South Jerry D. Cassrevens EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR GA99-0085-SAI-TX-R-99-07-19-0010-02-00 Y2K Upgrade, ARFF Equipment and Training Equipment GA99-0086•SAI-TX-R-99-07-19-0011-02-00 ARFF Training Area and Burn Pit Dear Mr. Mark Earle: At its meeting on Tuesday, August 10, 1999 the South Plains Assocation of Governments Board of Directors reviewed the application cited above and took the following action: FAVORABLE COMMENT for the following reasons: 1. The application meets the review criteria. 2. There is a clearly defined need for this type of program. You will need to ensure that your funding agency receives a copy of this tetter. Thank, you for the opportunity to review this application. If we may be of further assistance, please do not hesitate to call. Sincerely C] Tammy rown Regional Services Specialist 1323 58th St. - P.O. Box 3730 Freedom Station - Lubbock. Texas 79452-3730 - 806/762-8721 - Fax 806!765-9544 - t/800.858-1809 Web Site: http://www.intmz.com/sPag CCC11�6CCCCEEICCC�661i�111 9t a =. 0 00 al, 4 u PART V ASSURANCES Airport Sponsors A. General. 1. These assurances shalt be complied with in the performance of grant agreements for airport development, airport planning, and noise compatibility program grants for airport sponsors. 2. These assurances are required to be submitted as part of the project application by sponsors requesting funds under the provisions of Title 49, U.S.C., subtitle VII, as amended. As used herein, the term "public agency sponsor" means a public agency with control of a public -use airport; the term "private sponsor" means a private owner of a public -use airport; and the term "sponsor includes both public agency sponsors and private sponsors. 3. Upon acceptance of the grant offer by the sponsor, these assurances are incorporated in and become part of the grant agreement. B. Duration and Applicability. 1. Airport development or Noise Compatibility Program Projects Undertaken by a Public Agency Sponsor. The terms, conditions and assurances of the grant agreement shall remain in full force and effect throughout the useful life of the facilities developed or equipment acquired for an airport development or noise compatibility program project, or throughout the useful life of the project items installed within a facility under a noise compatibility program project, but in any event not to exceed twenty (20) years from the date of acceptance of a grant offer of Federal funds for the project However, there shall be no limit on the duration of the assurances regarding Exclusive Rights and Airport Revenue so long as the airport is used as an airport. There shall be no limit on the duration of the terms, conditions, and assurances with respect to real property acquired with federal funds. Furthermore, the duration of the Civil Rights assurance shall be specified in the assurances. 2. Airport Development or Noise Compatibility Projects Undertaken by a Private Sponsor. The preceding paragraph 1 also applies to a private sponsor except that the useful life of project items installed within a facility or the useful life of the facilities developed or equipment acquired under an airport development or noise compatibility program project shall be no less than ten (10) years from the date of acceptance of Federal aid for the project. 3. Airport Planning Undertaken by a Sponsor. Unless otherwise specified in the grant agreement, only Assurances 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 13, 18, 30, 32, 33, and 34 in section C apply to planning projects. The terms, conditions, and assurances of the grant agreement shall remain in full force and effect during the life of the project. C. Sponsor Certification. The sponsor hereby assures and certifies, with respect to this grant that: 1. General Federal Requirements. it will comply with all applicable Federal laws, regulations, executive orders, policies, guidelines, and requirements as they relate to the application, acceptance and use of Federal funds for this project Including but not limited to the following: Federal Legislation a. Title 49, U.S.C., subtitle VII, as amended. b. Davis -Bacon Act - 40 U.S.C. 276(a), et sea. I c. Federal Fair Labor Standards Act - 29 U.S.C. 201, et sea. d. Hatch Act - 5 U.S.C. 1501, et sea.2 e. Uniform Relocation Assistance and Real Property Acquisition Policies Act of 1970 Title 42 U.S.C. 4601, et sea.1 2. f. National Historic Preservation Act of 1966 - Section 106 -16 U.S.C. 470(f).1 g. Archeological and Historic Preservation Act of 1974 -16 U.S.C. 469 through 469c. h. Native Americans Grave Repatriation Act - 25 U.S.C. Section 3001, et sea. I. Clean Air Act, P.L. 90-148, as amended. j. Coastal Zone Management Act, P.L. 93-205, as amended. k. Flood Disaster Protection Act of 1973 - Section 102(a) - 42 U.S.C. 4012a.1 I. Title 49 ,U.S.C., Section 303, (formerly known as Section 4(0) m. Rehabilitation Act of 1973 - 29 U.S.C. 794. n. Civil Rights Act of 1964 - Title VI - 42 U.S.C. 2000d through d-4. o. Age Discrimination Act of 1975 - 42 U.S.C. 6101, et sea. p. American Indian Religious Freedom Act, P.L. 95-341, as amended. q Architectural Barriers Act of 1968 -42 U.S.C. 4151, et sea.1 r. Power plant and Industrial Fuel Use Act of 1978 - Section 403- 2 U.S.C. 8373. s. Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act - 40 U.S.C. 327, et sec.1 t Copeland Antikickback Act - 18 U.S.C. 874.1 u. National Environmental Policy Act of 1969 - 42 U.S.C. 4321, et sea.1 v. Wild and Scenic Rivers Act, P.L. 90-542, as amended. w. Single Audit Act of 1984 - 31 U.S.C. 7501, et sea.2 x. Drug -Free Workplace Act of 1988 - 41 U.S.C. 702 through 706. Airport Assurances (9199) V-1 Executive Orders , Executive Order 11246 - Equal Employment Opportunityl Executive Order 11990 - Protection of Wetlands Executive Order 11998 — Flood Plain Management Executive Order 12372 - Intergovernmental Review of Federal Programs. Executive Order 12699 - Seismic Safety of Federal and Federally Assisted New Building Construction) Executive Order 12898 - Environmental Justice Federal Regulations a. 14 CFR Part 13 - investigative and Enforcement Procedures. b. 14 CFR Part 16 - Rules of Practice For Federally Assisted Airport Enforcement Proceedings. c. 14 CFR Part 150 - Airport noise compatibility planning. d. 29 CFR Part 1 - Procedures for predetermination of wage rates.) a. 29 CFR Part 3 - Contractors and subcontractors on public building or public work financed in whole or part by loans or grants from the United States.) f. 29 CFR Part 5 - Labor standards provisions applicable to contracts covering federally financed and assisted construction (also labor standards provisions applicable to non -construction contracts subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act).l g. 41 CFR Part 60 - Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs, Equal Employment Opportunity, Department of Labor (Federal and federally assisted contracting requirements).) h. 49 CFR Part 18 - Uniform administrative requirements for grants and cooperative agreements to state and local govemments.3 1. 49 CFR Part 20 - New restrictions on lobbying. j. 49 CFR Part 21 - Nondiscrimination in federally -assisted programs of the Department of Transportation - effectuation of Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964. k. 49 CFR Part 23 - Participation by Disadvantage Business Enterprise in Airport Concessions. 1- 49 CFR Part 24 - Uniform relocation assistance and real property acquisition for Federal and federally assisted programs. 1 2 m. 49 CFR Part 26 — Participation By Disadvantaged Business Enterprises in Department of Transportation Programs. n. 49 CFR Part 27 - Nondiscrimination on the basis of handicap in programs and activities receiving or benefitting from Federal financial assistance.) o. 49 CFR Part 29 — Government wide debarment and suspension (non -procurement) and government wide requirements for drug- free workplace (grants). p. 49 CFR Part 30 - Denial of public works contracts to suppliers of goods and services of countries that deny procurement market access to U.S. contractors. q. 49 CFR Part 41 - Seismic safety of Federal and federally assisted or regulated new building construction.) Office of Management and Budget Circulars a. A-87 - Cost Principles Applicable to Grants and Contracts with State and Local Governments. b A-133 - Audits of States, Local Governments, and Non -Profit Organizations These laws do riot apply to airport planning sponsors. These laws do not apply to private sponsors. 49 CFR Part 18 and OMB Circular A-87 contain requirements for State and Local Governments receiving Federal assistance. Any requirement levied upon State and Local Governments by this regulation and circular shall also be applicable to private sponsors receiving Federal assistance under Title 49, United States Code. Specific assurances required to be included in grant agreements by any of the above laws, regulations or circulars are incorporated by reference in the grant agreement. 2. Responsibility and Authority of the Sponsor. a. Public Agency Sponsor. It has legal authority to apply for the grant, and to finance and carry out the proposed project; that a resolution, motion or similar action has been duly adopted or passed as an official act of the applicant's governing body authorizing the filing of the application, including all understandings and assurances contained therein, and directing and authorizing the person Identified as the official representative of the applicant to act in connection with the application and to provide such additional information as may be required. b. Private Sponsor. It has legal authority to apply for the grant and to finance and carry out the proposed project and comply with all terms, conditions, and assurances of this grant agreement. It shall designate an official representative and shall in writing direct and authorize that person to fife this application, including all understandings and assurances contained therein; to act in connection with this application; and to provide such additional information as may be required. 3. Sponsor Fund Availability. It has sufficient funds available for that portion of the project costs which are not to be paid by the United States. It as sufficient funds available to assure operation and maintenance of items funded under the grant agreement which it will own or control. 4. Good Title. a. It, a public agency or the Federal government, holds good title, satisfactory to the Secretary, to the landing area of the airport or site thereof, or will give assurance satisfactory to the Secretary that good title will be acquired. b. For noise compatibility program projects to be carried out on the property of the sponsor, it holds good title satisfactory to the Secretary to that portion of the property upon which Federal funds will be expended or will give assurance to the Secretary that good title will be obtained. Airport Assurances (9199) V-2 5. Preserving Rights and Powers. a. It will not take or permit any action which would operate to deprive it of any of the rights and powers necessary to perform any or all of the terns, conditions, and assurances in the grant agreement without the written approval of the Secretary, and will act promptly to acquire, extinguish or modify any outstanding rights or claims of right of others which would interfere with such performance by the sponsor. This shall be done in a manner acceptable to the Secretary. b. It will not sell, lease, encumber, or otherwise transfer or dispose of any part of its title or other interests in the property shown on Exhibit A to this application or, for a noise compatibility program project, that portion of the property upon which Federal funds have been expended, for the duration of the terms, conditions, and assurances in the grant agreement without approval by the Secretary. If the transferee is found by the Secretary to be eligible under Title 49, United States Code, to assume the obligations of the grant agreement and to have the power, authority, and financial resources to cant' out all such obligations, the sponsor shall insert in the contract or document transferring or disposing of the sponsor's interest, and make binding upon the transferee all of the terms, conditions, and assurances contained in this grant agreement. c. For all noise compatibility program projects which are to be carried out by another unit of local government or are on property owned by a unit of local government other than the sponsor, it will enter into an agreement with that government. Except as otherwise specified by the Secretary, that agreement shall obligate that government to the same terms, conditions, and assurances that would be applicable to it if it applied directly to the FAA for a grant to undertake the noise compatibility program project. That agreement and changes thereto must be satisfactory to the Secretary. It will take steps to enforce this agreement against the local government if there is substantial non-compliance with the terms of the agreement. d. For noise compatibility program projects to be carried out on privately owned property, it will enter into an agreement with the owner of that property which includes provisions specified by the Secretary. It will take steps to enforce this agreement against the property owner whenever there is substantial non-compliance with the terms of the agreement e. If the sponsor is a private sponsor, it will take steps satisfactory to the Secretary to ensure that the airport will continue to function as a public -use airport in accordance with these assurances for the duration of these assurances. f. If an arrangement is made for management and operation of the airport by any agency or person other than the sponsor or an employee of the sponsor, the sponsor will reserve sufficient rights and authority to insure that the airport will be operated and maintained in accordance Title 49, United States Code, the regulations and the terms, conditions and assurances in the grant agreement and shall insure that such arrangement also requires compliance therewith. 6. Consistency with Local Plans. The project is reasonably consistent with plans (existing at the time of submission of this application) of public agencies that are authorized by the State in which the project is located to plan for the development of the area surrounding the airport. 7. Consideration of Local Interest It has given fair consideration to the interest of communities in or near where the project may be located. 8. Consultation with Users. In making a decision to undertake any airport development project under Title 49, United States Code, it has undertaken reasonable consultations with affected parties using the airport at which project is proposed. 9. Public Hearings. In projects involving the location of an airport, an airport runway, or a major runway extension, it has afforded the opportunity for public hearings for the purpose of considering the economic, social, and environmental effects of the airport or runway location and its consistency with goals and objectives of such planning as has been carried out by the community and it shall, when requested by the Secretary, submit a copy of the transcript of such hearings to the Secretary. Further, for such projects, it has on its management board either voting representation from the communities where the project Is located or has advised the communities that they have the right to petition the Secretary concerning a proposed project. 10. Air and Water Quality Standards. In projects involving airport location, a major runway extension, or runway location it will provide for the Governor of the state in which the project is located to certify in writing to the Secretary that the project will be located, designed, constructed, and operated so as to comply with applicable air and water quality standards. In any case where such standards have not been approved and where applicable air and water quality standards have been promulgated by the Administrator of the Environmental Protection Agency, certification shall be obtained from such Administrator. Notice of certification or refusal to certify shall be provided within sixty days after the project application has been received by the Secretary. 11. Pavement Preventive Maintenance. With respect to a project approved after January 1, 1995, for the replacement or reconstruction of pavement at the airport, it assures or certifies that it has implemented an effective airport pavement maintenance -management program and it assures that it will use such program for the useful life of any pavement constructed, reconstructed or repaired with Federal financial assistance at the airport it will provide such reports on pavement condition and pavement management programs as the Secretary determines may be useful. 12. Terminal Development Prerequisites. For projects which include terminal development at a public use airport, as defined in Title 49, it has, on the date of submittal of the project grant application, all the safety equipment required for certification of such airport under section 44706 of Title 49, United States Code, and all the security equipment required by rule or regulation, and has provided for access to the passenger enplaning and deplaning area of such airport to passengers enplaning and deplaning from aircraft other than air carrier aircraft. 13. Accounting System, Audit, and Record Keeping Requirements. a. It shall keep all project accounts and records which fully disclose the amount and disposition by the recipient of the proceeds of the grant, the total cost of the project in connection with which the grant is given or used, and the amount or nature of that portion of the cost of the project supplied by other sources, and such other financial records pertinent to the project The accounts and records shall be kept in accordance with an accounting system that will facilitate an effective audit in accordance with the Single Audit Act of 1984. b. It shall make available to the Secretary and the Comptroller General of the United States, or any of their duly authorized representatives, for the purpose of audit and examination, any books, documents, papers, and records of the recipient that are pertinent to the grant. The Secretary may require that an appropriate audit be conducted by a recipient. In any case in which an independent audit is made of the accounts of a sponsor relating to the disposition of the proceeds of a grant or relating to the project in connection with which the grant was given or used, it shall file a certified copy of such audit with the Comptroller General of the United States not later than six (6) months following the close of the fiscal year for which the audit was made. Airport Assurances (9199) V-3 14. Minimum Wage Rates. It shag include, in all contracts in excess of $2,004 for work on any projects funded under the grant agreement which involve labor, provisions establishing minimum rates of wages, to be predetermined by the Secretary of Labor, in accordance with the Davis -Bacon Act, as amended (40 U.S.C. 276$-276a-5), which contractors shall pay to skilled and unskilled labor, and such minimum rates shalt be stated in the invitation for bids and shall be included in proposals or bids for the work. 15. Veteran's Preference. It shall include in all contracts for work on any project funded under the grant agreement which involve labor, such provisions as are necessary to insure that, in the employment of labor (except in executive, administrative, and supervisory positions), preference shall be given to Veterans of the Vietnam era and disabled veterans as defined in Section 47112 of Title 49, United States Code. However, this preference shall apply only where the individuals are available and qualified to perform the work to which the employment relates. 16. Conformity to Plans and Specifications. It will execute the project subject to plans, specifications, and schedules approved by the Secretary. Such plans, specifications, and schedules shalt be submitted to the Secretary prior to commencement of site preparation, construction, or other performance under this grant agreement, and, upon approval of the Secretary, shall be incorporated into this grant agreement. Any modification to the approved plans, specifications, and schedules shall also be subject to approval of the Secretary, and incorporated into the grant agreement. 17. Construction Inspection and Approval. It will provide and maintain competent technical supervision at the construction site throughout the project to assure that the work conforms to the plans, specifications, and schedules approved by the Secretary for the project. It shall subject the construction work on any project contained in an approved project application to inspection and approval by the Secretary and such work shall be in accordance with regulations and procedures prescribed by the Secretary. Such regulations and procedures shall require such cost and progress reporting by the sponsor or sponsors of such project as the Secretary shall deem necessary. 18. Planning Projects. In carrying out planning projects: a. It will execute the project in accordance with the approved program narrative contained in the project application or with the modifications similarly approved. b. it will furnish the Secretary with such periodic reports as required pertaining to the planning project and planning work activities. c. It will include in all published material prepared in connection with the planning project a notice that the material was prepared under a grant provided by the United States. d. It will make such material available for examination by the public, and agrees that no material prepared with funds under this project shall be subject to copyright in the United States or any other country. e. It will give the Secretary unrestricted authority to publish, disclose, distribute, and otherwise use any of the material prepared in connection with this grant. f. t will grant the Secretary the right to disapprove the sponsors employment of specific consultants and their subcontractors to do all or any part of this project as well as the right to disapprove the proposed scope and cost of professional services. g. It will grant the Secretary the right to disapprove the use of the sponsors employees to do all or any part of the project. h. It understands and agrees that the Secretary's approval of this project grant or the Secretarys approval of any planning material developed as part of this grant does not constitute or imply any assurance or commitment on the part of the Secretary to approve any pending or future application for a Federal airport grant. 19. Operation and Maintenance. a. The airport and all facilities which are necessary to serve the aeronautical users of the airport, other than facilities owned or controlled by the United States, shall be operated at all times in a safe and serviceable condition and in accordance with the minimum standards as may be required or prescribed by applicable Federal, state and local agencies for maintenance and operation. It will not cause or permit any activity or action thereon which would interfere with its use for airport purposes. It will suitably operate and maintain the airport and all facilities thereon or connected therewith, with due regard to climatic and flood conditions. Any proposal to temporarily close the airport for non -aeronautical purposes must first be approved by the Secretary. In furtherance of this assurance, the sponsor will have in effect arrangements for - (1) Operating the airport's aeronautical facilities whenever required; (2) Promptly marking and lighting hazards resulting from airport conditions, including temporary conditions; and (3) Promptly notifying airmen of any condition affecting aeronautical use of the airport. Nothing contained herein shall be construed to require that the airport be operated for aeronautical use during temporary periods when snow, flood or other climatic conditions interfere with such operation and maintenance. Further, nothing herein shall be construed as requiring the maintenance, repair, restoration, or replacement of any structure or facility which is substantially damaged or destroyed due to an act of God or other condition or circumstance beyond the control of the sponsor. b. It will suitably operate and maintain noise compatibility program items that it owns or controls upon which Federal funds have been expended. 20. Hazard Removal and Mitigation. It will take appropriate action to assure that such terminal airspace as is required to protect instrument and visual operations to the airport (including established minimum flight altitudes) will be adequately cleared and protected by removing, lowering, relocating, marking, or lighting or otherwise mitigating existing airport hazards and by preventing the establishment or creation of future airport hazards. 21. Compatible Land Use. It will take appropriate action, to the extent reasonable, including the adoption of zoning laws, to restrict the use of land adjacent to or in the immediate vicinity of the airport to activities and purposes compatible with normal airport operations, including landing and takeoff of aircraft. In addition, 9 the project is for noise compatibility program implementation, it will not cause or permit any change in land use, within its jurisdiction, that will reduce its compatibility, with respect to the airport, of the noise compatibility program -measures upon which Federal funds have been expended. Airport Assurances (9/99) V-4 22. Economic Nondiscrimination. a. it will make the airport available as an airport for public use on reasonable terms and without unjust discrimination to all types, kinds and classes of aeronautical activities, including commercial aeronautical activities offering services to the public at the airport. b. In any agreement, contract, lease, or other arrangement under which a right or privilege at the airport is granted to any person, firm, or corporation to conduct or to engage in any aeronautical activity for furnishing services to the public at the airport, the sponsor will Insert and enforce provisions requiring the contractor to - (1) furnish said services on a reasonable, and not unjustly discriminatory, basis to all users thereof, and (2) charge reasonable, and not unjustly discriminatory, prices for each unit or service, provided that the contractor may be allowed to make reasonable and nondiscriminatory discounts, rebates, or other similar types of price reductions to volume purchasers. c. Each fixed -based operator at the airport shall be subject to the same rates, fees, rentals, and other charges as are uniformly applicable to all other fixed -based operators making the same or similar uses of such airport and utilizing the same or similar facilities. d. Each air carer using such airport shall have the right to service itself or to use any fixed -based operator that Is authorized or permitted by the airport to serve any air carrier at such airport. e. Each air carrier using such airport (whether as a tenant, nontenant, or subtenant of another air carrier tenant) shall be subject to such nondiscriminatory and substantially comparable rules, regulations, conditions, rates, fees, rentals, and other charges with respect to facilities directly and substantially related to providing air transportation as are applicable to all such air carers which make similar use of such airport and utilize similar facilities, subject to reasonable classifications such as tenants or nontenants and signatory carriers and nonsignatory carriers. Classification or status as tenant or signatory shall not be unreasonably withheld by any airport provided an air carrier assumes obligations substantially similar to those already imposed on air carriers in such classification or status. f. it will not exercise or grant any right or privilege which operates to prevent any person, firth, or corporation operating aircraft on the airport from performing any services on its own aircraft with its own employees [Including, but not limited to maintenance, repair, and fueling] that it may choose to perform. g. In the event the sponsor itself exercises any of the rights and privileges referred to in this assurance, the services involved will be provided on the same conditions as would apply to the furnishing of such services by commercial aeronautical service providers authorized by the sponsor under these provisions. h. The sponsor may establish such reasonable, and not unjustly discriminatory, conditions to be met by all users of the airport as may be necessary for the safe and efficient operation of the airport. I. The sponsor may prohibit or limit any given type, kind or class of aeronautical use of the airport if such action is necessary for the safe operation of the airport or necessary to serve the civil aviation needs of the public. 23. Exclusive Rights. it will permit no exclusive right for the use of the airport by any person providing, or intending to provide, aeronautical services to the public. For purposes of this paragraph, the providing of the services at an airport by a single fixed -based operator shall not be construed as an exclusive right if both of the following apply: a. It would be unreasonably costly, burdensome, or impractical for more than one fixed -based operator to provide such services, and b. If allowing more than one fixed -based operator to provide such services would require the reduction of space leased pursuant to an existing agreement between such single fixed -based operator and such airport It further agrees that it will not, either directly or indirectly, grant or permit any person, firm, or corporation, the exclusive right at the airport to conduct any aeronautical activities, including, but not limited to charter flights, pilot training, aircraft rental and sightseeing, aerial photography, crop dusting, aerial advertising and surveying, air carrier operations, aircraft sales and services, sale of aviation petroleum products whether or not conducted in conjunction with other aeronautical activity, repair and maintenance of aircraft, sale of aircraft parts, and any other activities which because of their direct relationship to the operation of aircraft can be regarded as an aeronautical activity, and that it will terminate any exclusive right to conduct an aeronautical activity now existing at such an airport before the grant of any assistance under Title 49, United States Code. 24. Fee and Rental Structure. It will maintain a fee and rental structure for the facilities and services at the airport which will make the airport as self-sustaining as possible under the circumstances existing at the particular airport, taking Into account such factors as the volume of traffic and economy of collection. No part of the Federal share of an airport development, airport planning or noise compatibility project for which a grant is made under Title 49, United States Code, the Airport and Airway Improvement Act of 1982, the Federal Airport Act or the Airport and Airway Development Act of 1970 shall be included in the rate basis in establishing fees, rates, and charges for users of that airport. Airport Assurances (9/99) V-5 25. Airport Revenues. a. All revenues generated by the airport and any local taxes on aviation fuel established after December 30, 1987, will be expended by it for the capital or operating costs of the airport; the local airport system; or other local facilities which are owned or operated by the owner or operator of the airport and which are directly and substantially related to the actual air transportation of passengers or property, or for noise mitigation purposes on or off the airport. Provided, however, that if covenants or assurances in debt obligations issued before September 3, 1982, by the owner or operator of the airport, or provisions enacted before September 3, 19132, in goveming statutes controlling the owner or operatoes financing, provide for the use of the revenues from any of the airport owner or operators facilities, Including the airport, to support not only the airport but also the airport owner or operator's general debt obligations or other facilities, then this limitation on the use of all revenues generated by the airport (and, in the case of a public airport, local taxes on aviation fuel) shall not apply. b. As part of the annual audit required under the Single Audit Act of 1984, the sponsor will direct that the audit will review, and the resulting audit report will provide an opinion concerning, the use of airport revenue and taxes in paragraph (a), and indicating whether funds paid or transferred to the owner or operator are paid or transferred in a manner consistent with Title 49, United States Code and any other applicable provision of law, including any regulation promulgated by the Secretary or Administrator. c. Any civil penalties or other sanctions will be imposed for violation of this assurance in accordance with the provisions of Section 47107 of Title 49, United States Code. 26. Reports and inspections. It will: a. submit to the Secretary such annual or special financial and operations reports as the Secretary may reasonably request and make such reports available to the public; make available to the public at reasonable times and places a report of the airport budget in a format prescribed by the Secretary; b. for airport development projects, make the airport and all airport records and documents affecting the airport, including deeds, leases, operation and use agreements, regulations and other instruments, available for inspection by any duly authorized agent of the Secretary upon reasonable request; C. for noise compatibility program projects, make records and documents relating to the project and continued compliance with the terms, conditions, and assurances of the grant agreement including deeds, leases, agreements, regulations, and other instruments, available for inspection by any duly authorized agent of the Secretary upon reasonable request; and d. in a format and time prescribed by the Secretary, provide to the Secretary and make available to the public following each of its fiscal years, an annual report listing in detail: () all amounts paid by the airport to any other unit of government and the purposes for which each such payment was made; and (ii) all services and property provided by the airport to other units of government and the amount of compensation received for provision of each such service and property. 27. Use by Govemment Aircraft. It will make available all of the facilities of the airport developed with Federal financial assistance and all those usable for landing and takeoff of aircraft to the United States for use by Government aircraft in common with other aircraft at all times without charge, except, if the use by Government aircraft is substantial, charge may be made for a reasonable share, proportional to such use, for the cost of operating and maintaining the facilities used. Unless otherwise determined by the Secretary, or otherwise agreed to by the sponsor and the using agency, substantial use of an airport by Government aircraft will be considered to exist when operations of such aircraft are in excess of those which, in the opinion of the Secretary, would unduly interfere with use of the landing areas by other authorized aircraft, or during any calendar month that - a. Five (5) or more Government aircraft are regularly based at the airport or on land adjacent thereto; or b. The total number of movements (counting each landing as a movement) of Government aircraft is 300 or more, or the gross accumulative weight of Government aircraft using the airport (the total movement of Government aircraft multiplied by gross weights of such aircraft) is in excess of five million pounds. 28. Land for Federal Facilities. It will furnish without cost to the Federal Government for use in connection with any air traffic control or air navigation activities, or weather -reporting and communication activities related to air traffic control, any areas of land or water, or estate therein, or rights in buildings of the sponsor as the Secretary considers necessary or desirable for construction, operation, and maintenance at Federal expense of space or facilities for such purposes. Such areas or any portion thereof will be made available as provided herein within four months after receipt of a written request from the Secretary. 29. Airport Layout Pian. It will keep up to date at all times an airport layout plan of the airport showing (1) boundaries of the airport and all proposed additions thereto, together with the boundaries of all offsite areas owned or controlled by the sponsor for airport purposes and proposed additions thereto; (2) the location and nature of all existing and proposed airport facilities and structures (such as runways, taxiways, aprons, terminal buildings, hangars and roads), including all proposed extensions and reductions of existing airport facilities; and (3) the location of all existing and proposed nonaviation areas and of all existing improvements thereon. Such airport layout plans and each amendment, revision, or modification thereof, shall be subject to the approval of the Secretary which approval shall be evidenced by the signature of a duly authorized representative of the Secretary on the face of the airport layout plan. The sponsor will not make or permit any changes or alterations in the airport or any of its facilities which are not in conformity with the airport layout plan as approved by the Secretary and which might, in the opinion of the Secretary, adversely affect the safety, utility or efficiency of the airport. Airport Assurances (9/99) V-6 b. If a change or alteration in the airport or the facilities is made which the Secretary determines adversely affects the safety, utility, or efficiency of any federally owned, leased; o'r funded property on or off the airport and which is not in conformity with the airport layout plan as approved by the Secretary, the owner or operator will, if requested, by the Secretary (1) eliminate such adverse effect in a manner approved by the Secretary; or (2) bear all costs of relocating such property (or replacement thereof) to a site acceptable to the Secretary and all costs of restoring such property (or replacement thereof) to the level of safety, utility, efficiency, and cost of operation existing before the unapproved change in the airport or its facilities. 30. Civil Rights. it will comply with such rules as are promulgated to assure that no person shall, on the grounds of race, creed, color, national origin, sex, age, or handicap be excluded from participating in any activity conducted with or benefiting from funds received from this grant. This assurance obligates the sponsor for the period during which Federal financial assistance is extended to the program, except where Federal financial assistance is to provide, or is in the form of personal property or real property or interest therein or structures or improvements thereon in which case the assurance obligates the sponsor or any transferee for the longer of the following periods: (a) the period during which the property is used for a purpose for which Federal financial assistance is extended, or for another purpose involving the provision of similar services or benefits, or (b) the period during which the sponsor retains ownership or possession of the property. 31. Disposal of Land. a. For land purchased under a grant for airport noise compatibility purposes, it will dispose of the land, when the land is no longer needed for such purposes, at fair market value, at the earliest practicable time. That portion of the proceeds of such disposition which is proportionate to the United States' share of acquisition of such land will, at the discretion of the Secretary, 1) be paid to the Secretary for deposit in the Trust Fund, or 2) be reinvested in an approved noise compatibility project as prescribed by the Secretary. b. (1) For land purchased under a grant for airport development purposes (other than noise compatibility), it will, when the land is no longer needed for airport purposes, dispose of such land at fair market value or make available to the Secretary an amount equal to the United States' proportionate share of the fair market value of the land. That portion of the proceeds of such disposition which is proportionate to the United States' share of the cost of acquisition of such land will, (a) upon application to the Secretary, be reinvested in another eligible airport improvement project or projects approved by the Secretary at that airport or within the national airport system, or (b) be paid to the Secretary for deposit in the Trust Fund if no eligible project exists. (2) Land shall be considered to be needed for airport purposes under this assurance if (a) it may be needed for aeronautical purposes (including runway protection zones) or serve as noise buffer land, and (b) the revenue from interim uses of such land contributes to the financial self-sufficiency of the airport. Further, land purchased with a grant received by an airport operator or owner before December 31, 1987, will be considered to be needed for airport purposes if the Secretary or Federal agency making such grant before December 31, 1987, was notified by the operator or owner of the uses of such land, did not object to such use, and the land continues to be used for that purpose, such use having commenced no later than December 15, 1989. c. Disposition of such land under (a) or (b) will be subject to the retention or reservation of any interest or right therein necessary to ensure that such land will only be used for purposes which are compatible with noise levels associated with operation of the airport. 32. Engineering and Design Services. It will award each contract, or sub -contract for program management, construction management, planning studies, feasibility studies, architectural services, preliminary engineering, design, engineering, surveying, mapping or related services with respect to the project in the same manner as a contract for architectural and engineering services is negotiated under Title IX of the Federal Property and Administrative Services Act of 1949 or an equivalent qualifications -based requirement prescribed for or by the sponsor of the airport. 33. Foreign Market Restrictions. It will not allow funds provided under this grant to be used to fund any project which uses any product or service of a foreign country during the period In which such foreign country is listed by the United States Trade Representative as denying fair and equitable market opportunities for products and suppliers of the United States in procurement and construction. 34. Policies, Standards, and Specifications. It will carry out the project in accordance with policies, standards, and specifications approved by the Secretary including but not limited to the advisory circulars listed in the Current FAA Advisory Circulars for AIP projects, dated 711199 and included in this grant, and in accordance with applicable state policies, standards, and specifications approved by the Secretary. 35. Relocation and Real Property Acquisition. (1) It will be guided in acquiring real property, to the greatest extent practicable under State law, by the land acquisition policies in Subpart B of 49 CFR Part 24 and will pay or reimburse property owners for necessary expenses as specified in Subpart B. (2) it will provide a relocation assistance program offering the services described in Subpart C and fair and reasonable relocation payments and assistance to displaced persons as required in Subpart D and E of 49 CFR Part 24. (3) It will make available within a reasonable period of time prior to displacement, comparable replacement dwellings to displaced persons in accordance with Subpart E of 49 CFR Part 24. 36. Access By Intercity Buses. The airport owner or operator will permit, to the maximum extent practicable, intercity buses or other modes of transportation to have access to the airport, however, it has no obligation to fund special facilities for intercity buses or for other modes of transportation. 37. Disadvantaged Business Enterprises. The recipient shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin or sex in the award and performance of any DOT -assisted contract or in the administration of its DBE program or the requirements of 49 CFR Part 26. The Recipient shall take all necessary and reasonable steps under 49 CFR Part 26 to ensure non discrimination in the award and administration of DOT -assisted contracts. The recipient's DBE program, as required by 49 CFR Part 26, and as approved by DOT, is incorporated by reference in this agreement Implementation of this program is a legal obligation and failure to carry out its terns shall be treated as a violation of this agreement. Upon notification to the recipient of its failure to carry out its approved program, the Department may impose sanctions as provided for under Part 26 and may, in appropriate cases, refer the matter for enforcement under 18 U.S.C. 1001 and/or the Program Fraud Civil Remedies Act of 1986 (31 U.S.C. 3801). Airport Assurances (9/99) V-7 CURRENT FAA ADVISORY CIRCULARS FOR AIPIPFC PROJECTS ,Updated on: 7/1/99 The following apply to both AIP and PFC Proiects NUMBER TITLE 70/7460-1J Obstruction Marking and Lighting 15015000-13 Announcement of Availability—RICA Inc., Document RTCA-221, Guidance and Recommended Requirements for Airport Surface Movement Sensors 150/5210-5B Painting, Marking and Lighting of Vehicles Used on an Airport 150/5210-76 Aircraft Fire and Rescue Communications 150/5210-13A Water Rescue Plans, Facilities, and Equipment 150/5210-14A Airport Fire and Rescue Personnel Protective Clothing 150/5210-15 Airport Rescue & Firefighting Station Building Design 150/5210-18 Systems for Interactive Training of Airport Personnel 150/5210-19 Driver's Enhanced Vision System (DEVS) 150/5220-4B Water Supply Systems for Aircraft Fire and Rescue Protection 150/5220-10B Guide Specification for Water/Foam Type Aircraft Rescue and Firefighting Vehicles 150/5220-13B Runway Surface Condition Sensor Specification Guide 150/5220-16B Automated Weather Observing Systems for NonFederal Applications 150/5220-17A Design Standards for Aircraft Rescue Firefighting Training Facilities 150/5220-18 Buildings for Storage and Maintenance of Airport Snow and Ice Control Equipment and Materials 150/5220-19 Guide Specification for Small, Dual -Agent Aircraft Rescue and Firefighting Vehicles 150/5220-20, CHG 1 Airport Snow and Ice Control Equipment 150/5220-21A Guide Specification for Lifts Used to Board Airline Passengers With Mobility Impairments 150/5300-13, CHG 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Airport Design 150/5300-14 Design of Aircraft Deicing Facilities 150/5320-5B Airport Drainage 150/5320-61) Airport Pavement Design and Evaluation 150/5320-12C Measurement, Construction, and Maintenance of Skid Resistant Airport Pavement Surfaces 150/5320-14 Airport Landscaping for Noise Control Purposes 150/5320-16 Airport Pavement Design for the Boeing 777 Airplane 150/5325-4A, CHG 1 Runway Length Requirements for Airport Design 150/5340-1 G Standards for Airport Markings 150/5340-4C, CHG 1 & 2 Installation Details for Runway Centerline Touchdown Zone Lighting Systems 150/5340-5B, CHG 1 Segmented Circle Airport Marker System 150/5340-14B, CHG 1 & 2 Economy Approach Lighting Aids 150/5340-17B Standby Power for Non -FAA Airport Lighting Systems 150/5340-18C, CHG 1 Standards for Airport Sign Systems 150/5340-19 Taxiway Centerline Lighting System 150/5340-21 Airport Miscellaneous Lighting Visual Aids 150/5340-23B Supplemental Wind Cones 150/5340-24, CHG 1 Runway and Taxiway Edge Lighting System 150/5340-27A Air -to -Ground Radio Control of Airport Lighting Systems 150/5345-3D Specification for L821 Panels for Remote Control of Airport Lighting 150/5345-5A Circuit Selector Switch 150/5345-7D, CHG 1 Specification for L824 Underground Electrical Cable for Airport Lighting Circuits Airport Assurances (9/99) V-8 CURRENT FAA ADVISORY CIRCULARS FOR AIP/PFC PROJECTS Updated on: 7/1/99 NUMBER TITLE 15015345-10E Specification for Constant Current Regulators Regulator Monitors 150/5345-12C Specification for Airport and Heliport Beacon 150/5345-13A Specification for L841 Auxiliary Relay Cabinet Assembly for Pilot Control of Airport Lighting Circuits 15015345-26B, CHG 1 & 2 Specification for L823 Plug and Receptacle, Cable Connectors 150/5345-27C Specification for Wind Cone Assemblies 150/5345-28D, CHG 1 Precision Approach Path Indicator (PAPI) Systems 150/5345-39B, CHG 1 FAA Specification L853, Runway and Taxiway Centerline Retroreflective Markers 150/5345-42C, CHG 1 Specification for Airport Light Bases, Transformer Housings, Junction Boxes and Accessories 150/5345-43E Specification for Obstruction Lighting Equipment 150/5345-44F, CHG 1 Specification for Taxiway and Runway Signs 150/5345-45A Lightweight Approach Light Structure 150/5345-46A Specification for Runway and Taxiway Light Fixtures 150/534547A Isolation Transformers for Airport Lighting Systems 150/5345-49A Specification L854, Radio Control Equipment 150/534550, CHG 1 Specification for Portable Runway Lights 150/5345-51, CHG 1 Specification for Discharge -Type Flasher Equipment 150/534552 Generic Visual Glideslope Indicators (GVGI) 150/534553A,(including addendum Airport Lighting Equipment Certification Program 150/5360-9 Planning and Design of Airport Terminal Facilities at NonHub Locations 150/5360-12A Airport Signing & Graphics 150/5360-13, CHG 1 Planning and Design Guidance for Airport Terminal Facilities 150/5370-2C Operational Safety on Airports During Construction 150/5370-10A CHG 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 Standards for Specifying Construction of Airports 150/5390-2A Heliport Design 150/5390-3 Vertiport Design The following apply to AIP Projects only NUMBER TITLE 150/5100-14C Architectural, Engineering, and Planning Consultant Services for Airport Grant Projects 150/5200-30A, CHG 1 & 2 Airport Winter Safety and Operations 150/5200-33 Hazardous Wildlife Attractants On or Near Airports 150/5300-15 Use of Value Engineering for Engineering Design of Airport Grant Projects 150/5370-11, CHG 1 Use of Nondestructive Testing Devices in the Evaluation of Airport Pavements 150/5370-12 Quality Control of Construction for Airport Grant Projects 15015370-66 Construction Progress and Inspection Report -Airport Grant Program The following apply to PFC Projects only NUMBER TITLE 150/5000-12 Announcement of Availability - Passenger Facility Charge (PFC) Application FAA Form 5500-1) Airport Assurances (9/99) V-9 Part I - AIP Grant Master Certification • Sponsor Certification for Selection of Consultants • Sponsor Certification for Project Plans and Specifications • Sponsor Certification Equipment/Construction Contracts Sponsor's Name: City of Lubbock Airport: Lubbock International Airport Project Number: Project Description: _Construct an Airport Rescue and Firefighting Training Facility and upgrade Airfield Guidance Signage and Airfield Electrical Vault Section 47105 (formerly 509(d)) of the Airport and Airway Improvement Act of 1982, as amended (herein called the Act), authorizes the Secretary to require certification from sponsors that they will comply with statutory and administrative requirements. The following list of certified items includes major requirements for this aspect of project implementation. However, the list is not comprehensive, nor does it relieve sponsors from fully complying with all applicable statutory and administrative standards. Every certified item must be marked. Each certified item with a "no" response must be fully explained in an attachment to this certification. If the item is not applicable to this project, mark the item "N/A." I certify that, for the project identified herein, the responses to the following items are correct as marked, and that the attachments, if any, are correct and complete. Signed: Mark Earle, Director of Aviation Typed Name and Title of Sponsor's Representative Dated: August 14, 2000,_ This certification shall be submitted to the appropriate FAA Airport Development Office after bids have been secured and prior to entering into the contract. This master development certification is a reformatted version of Sponsor Certifications included within Attachments 1 through 3 of AIP Guidance Letter 91-1. Part I - Master Development Certification 9/98 SPONSOR CERTIFICATION FOR SELECTION OF CONSULTANTS General procurement standards for consultant services within Federal grant programs are described in 49 CFR 18.36. Sponsors may use other qualifications -based procedures provided they are equivalent to specific standards in 49 CFR 18 and Advisory Circular 150/5100-14C. 1. Advertisements were placed to ensure fair and open competition from a wide area of interest. Yes _X No N/A 2. For contracts over $25,000, consultants were selected using competitive procedures based on qualifications, experience, and disadvantaged business enterprise requirements with the fee determined through negotiation. Yes X_ No N/A 3. An independent cost analysis was performed, and a record of negotiations has been prepared reflecting the considerations involved in the establishment of fees. Yes _X No N/A 4. If engineering or other services are to be performed by sponsor force account personnel, prior approval was obtained from FAA. Yes No N/A_X 5. The consultant services contracts clearly establish the scope of work and delineate the division of responsibilities between all parties engaged in carrying out elements of the project. Yes _X No N/A 6. Costs associated with work ineligible for AIP funding are clearly identified and separated from eligible items. Yes _X_ No N/A 7. All mandatory contract provisions for grant -assisted contracts have been included in all consultant services contracts. Yes X_ No N/A Part I - Master Development Certification 9/98 8. If the contract is awarded without competition, pre -award review and approval was obtained from FAA. Yes No N/A_X 9. Cost -plus -percentage -of -cost methods of contracting prohibited under Federal standards were not used. Yes No X N/A 10. If the services being procured cover more than the single grant project referenced in this certification, the scope of work was specifically described in the advertisement, and future work will not be initiated beyond five years. Yes No N/A X SPONSOR CERTIFICATION FOR PROJECT PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS General AIP standards are described in Advisory Circulars 150/5100-6,150/5100-15, and 150/5100-16. A list of current advisory circulars with specific standards for design or construction of airports and procurement or installation of airport equipment and facilities is referenced in Grant Assurance 34. 1. The plans and specifications were developed in accordance with all applicable Federal standards and requirements, and no deviation from or modification to standards set forth in the advisory circulars was necessary other than those previously approved by FAA. Yes X No N/A 2. Specifications for the procurement of equipment are not proprietary or written so as to restrict competition. At least two manufacturers can meet the specification. Yes _X No N/A 3. The development included in the plans is depicted on an airport layout plan approved by FAA. Yes X No N/A 4. Development which is ineligible for AIP funding has been identified in the plans and specifications. Yes _X No N/A Part I - Master Development Certification 9/98 5. Process control and acceptance tests required for the project by standards contained in Advisory Circular 150/5370-10 are included in the project specifications. Yes X No N/A As applicable. 6. If a value engineering clause is incorporated into the contract, concurrence was obtained from FAA. Yes No N/A_X 7. The plans and specifications incorporate applicable requirements and recommendations set forth in the Federally -approved environmental finding. Yes _X No N/A 8. For construction activities within or near aircraft operational areas, the requirements contained in Advisory Circular 150/5370-2 have been discussed with FAA and incorporated into the specifications. A safety/phasing plan has been prepared, and FAA concurrence has been obtained, if required. Yes No N/A_X 9. The project will be physically completed without Federal participation in costs due to errors or omissions in the plans and specifications which were foreseeable at the time of project design. Yes No N/A X SPONSOR CERTIFICATION FOR EQUIPMENT/CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS Standards for advertising and awarding equipment and construction contracts within Federal grant programs are described in 49 CFR 18.36. Sponsors may use their procurement procedures reflecting State and local laws or regulations provided procurements conform to specific standards in 49 CFR 18 and Advisory Circulars 150/5100-6, 150/5100-15, and 150/5100-16. 1. A code or standard of conduct is in effect governing the performance of the sponsor's officers, employees, or agents in soliciting and awarding procurement contracts. Yes _X No N/A 2. Qualified personnel are engaged to perform contract administration, engineering supervision, and construction inspection and testing. Yes _X_ No N/A 3. The procurement was publicly advertised using the competitive sealed bid method of procurement. Yes _X_ No N/A Part I - Master Development Certification 9/98 4. The request for bids clearly and accurately describes all administrative and other requirements of the equipment and/or services to be provided. Yes X No N/A 5. Concurrence was, obtained from FAA prior to contract award under any of the following circumstances: a. Only one qualified person/firm submits a responsive bid; b. The contract is to be awarded to other than the lowest responsive and responsible bidder; c. Life cycle costing is a factor in selecting the lowest responsive bidder, and d. Proposed contract prices are more than 10 percent over the sponsor's cost estimate. Yes No N/A _X Bids open in September and concurrence will be obtained before awarding contract. 6. All contracts exceeding $100,000, require a bid guarantee of 5 percent, a performance bond of 100 percent, and a payment bond of 100 percent. Yes X_ No N/A 7. Contracts exceeding $100,000 contain provisions or conditions specifying administrative, contractual, and legal remedies, including contract termination, for those instances in which contractors violate or breach contract terms. They also contain provisions requiring compliance with applicable standards and requirements issued under Section 306 of the Clean Air Act (42 USC 1857 (h)), Section 508 of the Clean Water Act (33 USC 1368), Executive Order 11738, and environmental protection regulations (40 CFR Part 15). Yes X No N/A 8. All construction contracts involving labor contain provisions ensuring that in the employment of labor honorably discharged Vietnam era veterans and disabled veterans will be given preference. Yes _X_ No N/A 9. All construction contracts exceeding $2,000 contain provisions requiring compliance with the Davis -Bacon Act and bid solicitations contain a copy of the current Federal wage rate determination. Provisions requiring compliance with Sections 103 and 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 USC 327-330) and the Copeland "Anti -Kick Back" Act are included. Yes X No N/A 10. All construction contracts exceeding $10,000 contain appropriate clauses from 41 CFR Part 60 for compliance with Equal Employment Opportunity Executive Order 11246. Yes X No N/A Part I - Master Development Certification 9/98 11. All contracts and subcontracts contain clauses required from Title VI Civil Rights Assurances and 49 CFR 23 for Disadvantaged Business Enterprises. Yes X No N/A 12. Appropriate checks have been made to assure that contracts or subcontracts are not awarded to those individuals or firms suspended, debarred, or voluntarily excluded from doing business with any DOT element and appearing on the DOT Unified List. Yes X No N/A Part I - Master Development Certification 9/98 No Text No Text LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT VOLUME 2 OF 2 �.. CONSTRUCT AIRCRAFT RESCUE AND FIREFIGHTING TRAINING FACILITY • � • � tiT r t . For The • :• LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS for CONSTRUCT AIRCRAFT RESCUE AND FIREFIGHTING TRAINING FACILITY PROCESS SYSTEMS AND CONTROL BUILDING SPECIFICATIONS Copyright CH2M HILL, INC. 2000 --a Project No. 158870.A1.FN CH2M HILL Boise, Idaho August 2000 11 1 LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS for CONSTRUCT AIRCRAFT RESCUE AND FIREFIGHTING TRAINING FACILITY PROCESS SYSTEMS AND CONTROL BUILDING SPECIFICATIONS OF ®"w C2 77• % 4 GARY n. MAT7_EN - 66977 p Copyright CH2M HILL, INC. 2000 _ Project No. 158870.A1.FN CH2M HILL Boise, Idaho August 2000 2 SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS for CONSTRUCT AIRCRAFT RESCUE AND FIREFIGHTING TRAINING FACILITY PROCESS SYSTEMS AND CONTROL BUILDING SPECIFICATIONS Copyright CH2M HILL, INC. 2000 Project No. 158870.A1.FN CH2M HILL Boise, Idaho August 2000 3 PROCESS SYSTEMS AND CONTROL BUILDING SPECIFICATION INDEX Pages 3 01300 Submittals.............................................................................................1- 8 Supplement: Typical Maintenance Summary Form 02200 Earthwork.............................................................................................1- 10 03100 Concrete Formwork..............................................................................1- 6 03210 yj Reinforcing Steel.................................................................................. l- 4 03251 Expansion, Construction, And Control Joints......................................1- 5 03300 Concrete................................................1- 28 03370 Concrete Curing...................................................................................1- 3 03600 Grout.....................................................................................................1- 10 03605 Doweling In Concrete..........................................................................1- 6 �P 04230 Reinforced Unit Masonry .....................................................................1- 11 05050 Welding................................................................................................1- 4 Supplement: Welding and Nondestructive Testing 05500 Fabricated Metalwork And Castings....................................................1- 18 .: 06000 Carpentry ..............................................................................................1- 5 06190 Prefabricated Wood Trusses.................................................................1- 5 06200 Finish Carpentry �.v 07114-01 Geomembrane Lining High Density Polyethylene (HDPE).................1- 17 07114-02 Geotextiles............................................................................................1- 5 07114-03 Drainage Net.........................................................................................1- 4 07114-04 Electrical Leak Detection Testing........................................................1- 3 07114-05 Vacuum Leak Detection.......................................................................1- 2 07210 Building Insulation...............................................................................1- 3 07610 Sheet Metal Roofing and Fascia...........................................................1- 7 07700 Roof Specialties and Accessories.........................................................1- 2 BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 1 INDEX LIST FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS AND CONTROL BUILDING SPECIFICATIONS Pages 07900 Joint Sealants........................................................................................1- 7 08001 Door and Hardware Schedule...............................................................1- 2 Supplement: Door and Hardware Schedule 08002 Window and Relight Schedule.............................................................1- 2 Supplement: Window and Relight Schedule 08100 Metal Doors and Frames......................................................................1- 4 08410 Aluminum Entrances and Window Walls............................................1- 5 08710 Door Hardware.....................................................................................1- 10 08800 Glazing..................................................................................:..............1- 5 09000 Finish Schedules...................................................................................1- 3 Supplement: Interior Finish Schedule Supplement: Exterior Finish Schedule 09250 Gypsum Board......................................................................................1- 4 09300 Tile.......................................................................................................1- 5 09650 Resilient Flooring.................................................................................1- 6 09680 Carpet...................................................................................................1- 6 09900 Painting.................................................................................................1- 19 Supplement: Paint System Data Sheet 10150 Compartments and Cubicles.................................................................1- 2 10200 Louvers.................................................................................................1- 4 Supplement: Wall Louver and Vent Schedule 10400 Identifying Devices..............................................................................1- 4 Supplement: Sign Schedule 10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories.................................................................1- 3 10999 Miscellaneous Specialties....................................................................1- 3 11307 Pumps—General..................................................................................1- 4 11307-01 Detail Pump Specification for Diesel Fuel Pumps ...............................1- 4 11307-02 Detail Pump Specification for Submersible Pumps .............................1- 3 B0I158870.A I.FN JULY 12, 2000 2 INDEX LIST FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS AND CONTROL BUMDING SPECIFICATIONS Pages 11307-03 Detail Pump Specification for Eductor Pump......................................1- 3 13119 Fuel/Water Separator............................................................................1- 4 13202 Fuel Tank and Equipment....................................................................1- 4 13401 Process Instrumentation and Control Systems (PICS) .........................1- 69 Supplement: Component Specifications Supplement: Loop Specifications Supplement: Instrument List 15060 Plant Piping—General..........................................................................1- 12 15060-01 Detail Piping Specification Dual Wall Pipe.........................................1- 2 15060-02 Detail Piping Specification Natural Gas Plastic Pipe...........................1- 3 15060-03 Detail Piping Specification Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings ..............1- 5 15060-04 Detail Piping Specification Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) and05 Pipe and Fittings...................................................................................1- 4 15101 Valves and Miscellaneous Piping Components...................................1- 9 15119 Fire Hydrant.........................................................................................1- 4 15420 Building Services Piping......................................................................1- 18 15445 Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment.......................................................1- 6 15500 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems ...........................1- 4 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements..............................................................1- 4 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods...............................................1- 24 16110 Raceways..............................................................................................1- 17 16120 Conductors...........................................................................................1- 12 16450 Grounding.............................................................................................1- 6 16480 Low Voltage Motor Control.................................................................1- 11 16950 Electrical Testing..................................................................................1- 14 END OF SECTION B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 3 INDEX LIST FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS AND CONTROL BUILDING SPECIFICATIONS No Text SECTION 01300 SUBNHTTALS PARTl GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Requirements and procedures necessary for scheduling, preparation, and submission of submittals. B. Requirements for preparation of progress schedules. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Individual Specification sections in these Contract Documents contain additional and special submittal requirements. Individual sections shall take precedence in the event of a conflict with this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES l A. OWNER reserves the right to modify the procedures and requirements for submittals, as necessary to accomplish the specific purpose of each submittal. Direct inquiries to ENGINEER regarding the procedure, purpose, or extent of any submittal. B. Review, acceptance, or approval of substitutions, schedules, Shop Drawings, lists of materials, and procedures submitted or requested by CONTRACTOR shall not add to the Contract amount, and additional costs which may result therefrom shall be solely the obligation of CONTRACTOR. C. OWNER is not precluded, by virtue of review, acceptance, or approval, from obtaining a credit for construction savings resulting from allowed concessions in the Work or materials therefore. D. OWNER is not responsible to provide engineering or other services to protect CONTRACTOR from additional costs accruing from submittals. E. Submittals processed by ENGINEER do not become Contract Documents and are not Change Orders; the purpose of submittal review is to establish a reporting procedure and is intended for CONTRACTOR's convenience in organizing the Work and to permit ENGINEER to monitor CONTRACTOR's progress and understanding of the design. F. Delays caused by the need for resubmittal shall not constitute basis for claim. i BOI158870.A1.FN DULY 11, 2000 it - 01300 1 SUBNII'TTALS 1.4 SCHEDULES A. General: 1. Submit estimated progress schedule and preliminary schedule of submittals in duplicate to ENGINEER. 2. Revise and resubmit as specified, and identify all changes made from previous schedule submittal. B. Progress Schedule and Quantity Chart: See Volume 1 of 3. C. Schedule of Submittals: 1. Preliminary Schedule of Submittals: Indicate submittals required by Specification section number with brief description, starting and completion dates for respective submittal preparation, and submittal review by ENGINEER. 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS A. General: IH 1. Shop Drawings, as defined herein, consist of all Drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data which are specifically prepared by or for CONTRACTOR to illustrate some portion of the Work; and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams, and other information prepared by a manufacturer and submitted by CONTRACTOR to illustrate material or equipment for distinct portions of the Work. 2. Submittal of incomplete or unchecked Shop Drawings will not be acceptable. Shop Drawing submittals which do not clearly show CONTRACTOR's review stamp or specific written indication of CONTRACTOR review will be returned to CONTRACTOR for resubmission. 3. Submittal of Shop Drawings not required under these Contract Documents and not shown on the schedule of submittals will be returned to CONTRACTOR unreviewed and unstamped by ENGINEER. B. Procedures: 1. Submit to ENGINEER for review and approval in accordance with the accepted schedule of submittals, six copies of Shop Drawings. 2. Transmit each submittal on ENGINEER accepted form. 3. Sequentially number the transmittal forms; resubmittals to have original number with an alphabetic suffix. 4. Identify project, CONTRACTOR, Specification section number, pertinent Drawing sheet and detail number(s), products, units and U B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 i 01300 2 SUBNOTTALS 3 assemblies, and the system or equipment identification or tag number as shown. 5. Apply CONTRACTOR's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction work, and coordination of information, is in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents. 6. Transmit submittals in accordance with finalized schedule of submittals, and deliver to the ENGINEER. 7. Provide space for ENGINEER review stamps, 4 inches by 4 inches. 8. Revise and resubmit submittals as required; identify all changes made since previous submittal. 9. Submittals will be acted upon by ENGINEER and transmitted to CONTRACTOR not later than 30 working days after receipt by ENGINEER. 10. When Shop Drawings have been reviewed by ENGINEER, three copies will be returned to CONTRACTOR with appropriate required annotations. C. Foreign Manufacturers: Submit names and addresses of companies within the United States that maintain technical service representatives; include complete inventory of spare parts and accessories for each foreign -made item proposed for incorporation into the Work. Failure to prove these capabilities shall be just cause for rejection of foreign -manufactured items. D. Seismic Design: Machinery, equipment, and components such as tanks, piping, and electrical panels, including their supports and anchorages, designed by manufacturers or suppliers, shall be designed in accordance with the provisions of the latest edition of the Uniform Building Code to withstand seismic loads in addition to other loads. Design shall be performed by an appropriately licensed professional engineer familiar with seismic design. Submittals shall be certified, by the Design Engineer, that designs are in conformance with Uniform Building Code requirements. E. Interfacing Work: Where called for in the Specifications, and as determined necessary by ENGINEER to provide proper correlation with other work, complete interface information shall be submitted. This interface information shall be accurate and contain all information necessary to allow for manufacturing and construction of the interfacing or connecting work. F. Material and Equipment Colors: ENGINEER will provide a schedule of selected colors within 30 days after approval of submittals and after receiving samples of the manufacturers' standard colors for those items requiring OWNER's selection. BOI158870.A1.FN 01300 3 JULY 11, 2000 SUBMITTALS 1.6 1.7 SAMPLES AND TEST SPECIMENS A. Where required in the Specifications, and as determined necessary by ENGINEER, submit test specimens or samples of materials, appliances, and fittings to be used or offered for use in connection with the Work. Include information as to their sources, prepay cartage charges, and submit such quantities and sizes for proper examination and tests to establish the quality or equality thereof, as applicable. B. Submit samples and test specimens in ample time to enable ENGINEER to make tests or examinations necessary, without delay to the Work. C. Submit additional samples as required by ENGINEER to ensure equality with the original approved sample and/or for determination of Specification compliance. D. Laboratory tests and examinations that OWNER elects to make in its own laboratory will be made at OWNER's cost except that, if a sample of any material or equipment proposed for use by CONTRACTOR fails to meet the Specifications, CONTRACTOR shall bear cost of testing subsequent samples. E. Tests required by the Specifications to be performed by an independent laboratory shall be made by a laboratory licensed or certified in accordance with state statutes. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS A. General: ENGINEER will determine adequacy of each O&M Manual as to content, organization, quality, and adequacy. Furnish acceptable manuals as reviewed by the ENGINEER. B. Procedures: 1. Where specified, furnish four copies of complete instruction manual for installation, operation, maintenance, and lubrication requirements for each unit or common units of mechanical and electrical equipment or system. CONTRACTOR shall assemble the O&M Manuals into one set for the entire Project. 2. Furnish initial manual 45 days prior to field test or equipment startup of the respective equipment. Correct deficiencies found in the submitted manual within 30 calendar days following notification of the deficiencies. 3. Manuals shall be customized to describe the equipment actually furnished, and shall not include extraneous data for models, options, or sizes not furnished. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 01300 4 SUBMITTALS a. Where more than one model, option, or size of an equipment type is furnished, clearly indicate the information pertaining to each model, option, or size furnished. b. Manufacturer's preprinted literature may be accepted provided it has been customized to clearly indicate the models, options, and sizes actually furnished, and that equipment models not furnished have been clearly crossed out or deleted. 4. Assemble each copy of the manual in one or more three-ring, hard -back type binders. a. Clearly label each binder to designate the system or equipment for which it is intended with reference to the building and equipment number, and the Specification section where the equipment is specified. b. Provide each binder with title page, typed table of contents with page numbers, and heavy section dividers with numbered plastic index tabs. C. Divide each manual into sections paralleling the equipment Specifications. d. Where more than one binder is required, they shall be labeled "Vol. 1", "Vol. 2", and so on. Place the table of contents for the entire set, identified by volume number, in each binder. e. Submit manual organization and format to ENGINEER for approval prior to manual preparation. f. Punch all data for binding and composition; arrange printing so that punching holes does not obliterate data. 5. Material in manuals shall be suitable for photographic reproduction. Where copies of identical material are included, clarity and quality of copies shall equal the original. C. Contents: Each manual shall be complete in all respects for equipment, controls, accessories, and associated appurtenances, and shall include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Diagrams and illustrations. Detailed description of the function of each principal component of the system. Performance and nameplate data. Installation instructions. Procedure for starting. Proper adjustment. Test procedures and results of factory tests where required. Procedure for operating. Shutdown instructions for both short and extended durations. Emergency operating instructions and troubleshooting guide. Safety precautions. Maintenance and overhaul instructions, illustrated with detailed assembly Drawings showing each part with part numbers and BOI158870.A1.FN 01300 5 JULY 11, 2000 SUBMITTALS r 1.8 sequentially numbered parts list. Include instructions for ordering spare parts, and complete preventive maintenance and overhaul instructions required to ensure satisfactory performance and longevity of the equipment. 13. Lubrication instructions and diagrams showing points to be greased or oiled; recommend type, grade, and temperature range of lubricants and frequency of lubrication; see Paragraph MAINTENANCE SUMMARY FORMS. 14. List of electrical relay settings and control and alarm contact settings. 15. Electrical interconnection wiring diagram for equipment furnished, including all control and lighting systems. 16. Results of field functional and performance tests as required under Article CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. 17. See Division 16, ELECTRICAL, for additional specific O&M Manual requirements. D. Maintenance Summary Forms: 1. In addition to the O&M Manuals, provide Maintenance Summaries in the format of the form bound at the end of this Section and described below; submit at same time as prescribed above for the OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS. 2. Compile individual Maintenance Summary Form for each equipment item following the outline provided; submit four copies for review by ENGINEER. The manufacturer's standard form will not be acceptable as a substitute for the Maintenance Summary. 3. The term "Maintenance Operation" as used in the TYPICAL MAINTENANCE SUMMARY FORM is defined to mean any routine operation required to ensure the satisfactory performance and longevity of the equipment. Examples of typical Maintenance Operations are lubrication, belt tensioning, adjustment of pump packing glands, and routine adjustments. 4. The Maintenance Summary may take as many pages as required; however, the order and format shown must be adhered to. Use only 8-1/2-inch by 11-inch paper. C�Z�7.II r C7_�iil Ir��i7.� �L�Ii111�. �: ►� � r r : . A. Record Drawings: 1. See Special Provision SP.7 Record Drawings in Volume 1 of 3. 2. Submit complete sets of reproducible final Shop Drawings before, or at the time of, delivery of equipment to the site. 3. Deliver service records maintained on each item of equipment, prior to final acceptance of the Project. BOI158870.A1.FN DULY 11, 2000 01300 6 SUBMITTALS B. Startup Training: Deliver audio and video tapes made of training sessions as specified in Section MANUFACTURERS' SERVICES. C. O&M Manuals: 1. Submit final revised O&M Manual incorporating field testing results and additional instructions deemed necessary by ENGINEER after testing and startup. 2. Revise and resubmit manuals, or portions of manuals, found to be missing or incomplete from ENGINEER's punch list. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) PART 4 PAYMENT 4.1 GENERAL A. This item shall be incidental to this Project and no separate payment will be made for this item. (Typical Maintenance Summary Form -attached) END OF SECTION BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 01300 7 SUBMITTALS TYPICAL MAINTENANCE SUMMARY FORM 1. EQUIPMENT ITEM, 2. MANUFACTURER 3. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS) 4. WEIGHT OF INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS (OVER 100 POUNDS) 5. NAMEPLATE DATA (hp, voltage, speed, etc.) 6. MANUFACTURER'S LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE Name Telephone No. Address 7. MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS Maintenance Ooeration List briefly each maintenance operation required & refer to specific information in manufacture's standard maintenance manual, if applicable. 8. LUBRICANT LIST Lubricant Frequent (If Applicable) List required Refer by symbol to frequency of each lubricant list required. maintenance operation. Comments Reference Symbol Shell Std. Oil Gulf Arco Or Equal List symbols used List equivalent lubricants, as distributed by in Item7. above. each manufacturer for the specific use recommended. 9. SPARE PARTS. Include your recommendations regarding what spare parts, if any, should be kept on the job. t B01158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 01300 8 ST TRMTTTAT: S SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK PART1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. This Section covers the Work necessary for the earthwork for Process Facilities. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Relative Compaction: The ratio, in percent, of the as -compacted field dry density to the laboratory maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698. Corrections for oversize material may be applied to either the as -compacted field dry density or the maximum dry density, as determined by the ENGINEER. B. Optimum Moisture Content: Determined by the ASTM standard specified to determine the maximum dry density for relative compaction. Field moisture content shall be determined on the basis of the fraction passing the 3/4-inch sieve. C. Relative Density: As defined by ASTM D4253 and D4254. D. Prepared Ground Surface: The ground surface after clearing, grubbing, stripping, excavation, and scarification and/or compaction. E. Completed Course: A course or layer that is ready for the next layer or next phase of the Work. F. Well -Graded: A mixture of particle sizes that has no specific concentration or lack thereof of one or more sizes. Well -graded does not define any numerical value that must be placed on the coefficient of uniformity, coefficient of curvature, or other specific grain size distribution parameters. Well -graded is used to define a material type that, when compacted, produces a strong and relatively incompressible soil mass free from detrimental voids. G. Truck Measure: The truck volume shall be determined by leveling off selected loads in the truck box after the material has been transported from the site of loading to the site of placement. The ENGINEER may call for such measurement at any time. The CONTRACTOR shall cooperate with the ENGINEER in the measurement, and they shall together determine and agree upon the volume of material in the truck box. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 02200 1 EARTHWORK and prevent rock falls to ensure that persons working in or near the excavation are protected. 1.7 CODES, ORDINANCES, AND STATUTES A. CONTRACTORS shall familiarize themselves with, and comply with, all applicable codes, ordinances, statutes, and bear sole responsibility for the penalties imposed for noncompliance. 1.8 TOLERANCES A. All material limits shall be constructed within a tolerance of 0.1 foot except where dimensions or grades are shown or specified as minimum. All grading shall be performed to maintain slopes and drainage as shown. No reverse slopes will be permitted. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to accomplish the Work specified in this Section. 2.2 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION A. Excavation is unclassified. Complete all excavation regardless of the type, nature, or condition of the materials encountered. Make own estimate of the kind and extent of the various materials to be excavated in order to accomplish the Work. The excavation of rock boulders or intact rock will be considered incidental. Provide dewatering for excavations below the groundwater table. 2.3 EARTHFH.L A. Excavated site material free from roots, organic matter, trash, debris, rocks larger than 3 inches, and other deleterious materials. Provide imported material of equivalent quality, if required to accomplish the Work. 2.4 SELECT EARTHFILL A. As specified for Earthfill, except the maximum particle size shall be 1 inch and the material shall contain sufficient fines for proper compaction into firm subgrade. Provide imported material of equivalent quality, if required to accomplish the Work. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 02200 4 EARTHWORK 2.5 GRANULAR FILL (BURN PTT GRAVEL SURFACE) A. Imported 1 inch to 2 inches, crushed gravel or crushed rock, angular surfaces, hard and durable, washed, free from sand, dirt, clay, and organic material, well graded from 1 inch to 2 inches. 2.6 SANDFILL A. Imported sand, maximum size 1/4 inch; 95 percent shall pass a No. 4 sieve, free from clay and organic material, with a maximum of 10 percent passing the No. 200 sieve. 2.7 STRUCTURAL FILL A. Structural fill shall be in accordance with T-DOT Item 247 Type D Class 6 Specifications. 2.8 TRENCH EXCAVATION A. Trench excavation is unclassified. Remove all material regardless of the nature, type, or condition of the material encountered. Excavation of intact rock or rock boulders will be considered incidental. 2.9 WATER FOR COMPACTION A. Furnish as required. 2.10 COMPACTION EQUIPMENT A. Compaction equipment shall be of suitable type and adequate to obtain the densities specified. B. Compaction equipment shall be operated in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Equipment shall be maintained in such condition that it will deliver the manufacturer's rated compactive effort. If inadequate densities are obtained, larger and/or different types of additional equipment shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR. Hand -operated equipment shall be capable of achieving the specified densities. 2.11 MOISTURE CONTROL EQUIPMENT A. Equipment for applying water shall be of a type and quality adequate for the f Work, shall not leak, and shall be equipped with a distributor bar or other approved device to assure uniform application. Equipment for mixing and drying out material shall consist of blades, discs, or other approved equipment. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 02200 5 EARTHWORK PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL EXCAVATION A. Perform all excavation of every description, regardless of the type, nature, or condition of material encountered, as specified, shown, or required to accomplish the construction. 3.2 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION A. Excavation is unclassified. Excavate for structures to the lines and grades shown or as required to accomplish the construction. Perform all excavation regardless of the type, nature, or condition of the material encountered. The method of excavation used is optional; however, no equipment shall be operated within 5 feet of existing structures or newly completed construction. Excavation that cannot be accomplished without endangering the present or new structures shall be done with hand tools. 3.3 L WFS OF EXCAVATION A. Excavate to the depths and widths, as shown. Allow for forms, working space, and fill as shown or required. Do not carry excavation for footings and slabs deeper than the elevation shown. Excavation carried below the grade lines shown or established by the ENGINEER shall be replaced with the same fill material as specified for the overlying fill or backfill, and compacted as required for such overlying fill or backfill. Where the overlying area is not to receive fill or backfill, replace the overexcavated material and compact to a density not less than that of the underlying ground. Excavations under footings shall be filled with concrete of strength equal to that of the footing. Cuts belowgrade shall be corrected by similarly cutting adjoining areas and creating a smooth transition. Correct all overexcavated areas at the CONTRACTOR's sole expense. 3.4 FOUNDATION PREPARATION A. After completion of excavation, and prior to foundation or fill construction, proof -roll the excavation surface with a loaded dump truck or similar heavy - wheeled vehicle to detect soft or loose zones. Notify the ENGINEER prior to commencement of proof -rolling. If soft or loose zones are found, excavate the soft or loose material to a depth accepted by the ENGINEER, then fill and compact as specified for the overlying fills. 3.5 SUBGRADE PREPARATION FOR LINER A. After the burn pit excavation has been completed, roll the bottom subgrade with a steel wheel roller. Roll until all vehicle tracks and surface irregularities have been removed. After rolling, visually inspect the prepared subgrade for B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 i 02200 6 EARTHWORK_ objects protruding through the ground surface. Remove all angular objects found on the surface and any rounded objects protruding more than 1/2-inch. The tolerance for grading the subgrade shall be 0.05 feet. Spread a 6-inch layer of sandfill over all areas of the burn pit. Roll the surface with a motorized roller, add moisture as required and add additional material as required to fill voids, repeat rolling until the final liner surface elevations have been achieved and the surface is smooth and hard, and free from any projecting objects. The fill shall be compacted to 95 percent of the modified proctor maximum dirt density. The CONTRACTOR shall perform compaction tests. 3.6 PLACING SANDFILL OVER LINER A. Place the specified material over the liner as soon after liner placement as is practical. A 12-inch minimum thickness of material shall be placed on the liner. The equipment used to perform the spreading shall be equipped with cleatless tracks sufficiently large to reduce the weight square foot to the liner manufacturer's recommendations. The equipment must be approved by the ENGINEER. Maintain 12 inches minimum cover over the liner between the spreading equipment and the liner. A 3-foot minimum cover shall be maintained over the liner on the routes used by the transportation equipment. B. Care must be taken with the equipment used so as not to puncture the lining. All methods and equipment must be approved by the ENGINEER and any changes to the above requirements suggested by the liner manufacturer or installer, must be approved by the ENGINEER. Any damage to the liner will - e be repaired by the CONTRACTOR at the CONTRACTOR's sole expense. C. Sandfill shall be placed in maximum 12-inch lifts and each lift compacted to 95 percent of the modified proctor maximum dry density. The final sandfill grade surface shall be rolled to a smooth finish. The tolerance for the finished grade shall be 0.05 foot. D. Install mechanical and electrical in the burn pit after the final sand grade is achieved. For mechanical and electrical lines installed within the sandfill, use hand tools to excavate narrow trenches at the surface to the depth necessary to install the lines. For the steel igniter boxes use a leveling course of sandfill or hand tool excavation, if necessary to provide the igniter boxes at the elevation shown on the plans to within 0.01 foot tolerance. For mechanical and electrical lines installed at or just above the final sand grade, provide a compacted leveling course to provide a continuous and firm pipe base. After all mechanical, electrical, and igniter boxes have been installed, and igniter box elevations checked and approved by the ENGINEER, place 3 to 4 inches of sand over exposed mechanical and electrical lines and compact with a hand roller. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 e__ s 02200 7 EARTHWORK i 3.7 PLACING GRANULAR FILL IN OVER SANDFILL IN BURNPIT A. Using light load bearing trackless equipment and hand tools, place granular fill to final elevation in the burn pit. Equipment shall be operated on previously placed granular fill. Granular fill shall be placed in a single lift. Fill around igniter boxes shall be placed by hand to prevent any movement. The granular fill final grade on side slopes and berm edges shall be achieved using hand tools to a finished final grade tolerance of 0.05 foot. The granular fill final grade at the water surface elevation of 100.0 feet shall be finished using the water filled pit, with a water surface elevation of 100.0 feet, as a guide to grade and level the gravel fill. The top of the gravel fill, when the water elevation is at 100.0 feet, will extend above the water surface between 1/4 and 1/2 inch. A. Backfill Around Concrete Structures: 1. Backfill around structures shall be select earthfill. Backfill around concrete structures only after the concrete has attained the specified compressive strength indicated in Section 03300, CONCRETE. Remove all form materials and trash from the excavation before placing any backfill. Obtain the ENGINEER's acceptance of concrete work and attained strength prior to backfilling. 2. Do not operate earth -moving equipment within 5 feet of walls of concrete structures for the purpose of depositing or compacting backfill material. Compact backfill adjacent to concrete walls with hand - operated tampers or similar equipment that will not damage the structure. B. Backfill Under Concrete Structures: 1. Backfill under concrete structures shall be structural fill. a. Place minimum 12 inches of structural fill under all structures or as shown, not to exceed 6-inch lifts. Compact each lift to not less than 95 percent of the modified proctor maximum dry density. b. Place minimum 12 inches of structural fill under the fuel containment structure. Compact lift to not less than 95 percent of the modified proctor maximum dry density. 3.9 FILLS NOT UNDER STRUCTURES OR FACILITIES A. Place hereinbefore specified select EARTHFIIL, to the lines and grades shown. Place fill material in maximum 12-inch lifts and compact each lift to 41 not less than 95 percent of the modified proctor maximum dry density. Make proper allowance for finished grade material where required. BOI158870.A1.FN DULY 11, 2000 ' 02200 8 EARTHWORK t_ 3.10 COMPACTION A. Compact all materials by mechanical or manual means as specified. Flooding or jetting will not be permitted. If compaction tests indicate that compaction or moisture content is not as specified, material placement shall be terminated and corrective action shall be taken by the CONTRACTOR prior to continued placement. B. Compaction tests will be performed at a frequency of 1 test per 1,000 square feet of fill surface of each lift for fill areas greater than 5,000 ft2, 1 test per 500 ft2 of fill surface of each lift for fill areas less than 500 ft2, a minimum of 2 tests for each lift for a specific compacted fill placement. Provide submittals of all testing to the ENGINEER. 3.11 MOISTURE CONTROL A. During all compacting operations, maintain optimum practicable moisture content required for compaction purposes in each lift of fill. Maintain moisture content uniform throughout the lift. Insofar as practicable, add water to the material at the site of excavation. Supplement, if required, by sprinkling the fill. At the time of compaction, the water content of the material shall be at optimum moisture content, ±2 percentage points. 3.12 TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. This Article applies to trench excavation and backfill. B. Excavation: Excavate for the installation of piping, utilities, and 3 appurtenances. All obstructions, such as tree roots, stumps, abandoned concrete structures, and other material of any type shall be removed. C. Trench Width: Minimum width of unsheeted trenches or the minimum clear width of sheeted trenches in which pipe is to be laid shall be 18 inches greater than the inside diameter of the pipe. Sheeting requirements shall be independent of trench width. The maximum clear width at the top of the pipe or above the pipe will not be limited, except in cases where excess width of excavation would cause damage to adjacent structures. D. Grade: Carry the bottom of the trench to the line and grade shown, or as established by the ENGINEER. Allow for pipe thickness and for pipe base or special bedding when specified. Backfill any part of the trench excavated belowgrade with granular fill material and compact to a density equal to the undisturbed trench bottom. E. Shoring, Sheeting, and Bracing of Trenches: Erect, maintain, and remove shoring, sheeting, and bracing as required by all federal, state and local laws, 3 codes, and ordinances. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 02200 9 EARTHWORK F. Removal of Water: Removal of water shall be accomplished as specified hereinbefore. G. Pipe Base: Place a minimum 4-inch thickness of select earthfill pipe base of the type hereinbefore specified. Place for the full width of the trench with the top of the base at flow line grade. Bed the pipe in the base so that the flow line is at the required grade and elevation. Place and finish the base to grade ahead of the pipe laying operation. H. Pipe Zone Backfill: Backfill the pipe zone to 6 inches above the outside of the pipe for the full width of the trench with select earthfill. Place in the trench in horizontal lifts not exceeding 6 inches in uncompacted thickness on both sides of the pipe. Thoroughly tamp and supplement by "walking in" the material. Use particular attention in placing material on the underside of the pipe to provide a solid backing and to prevent lateral movement during the final backfilling procedure. I. Trench Backfill Above the Pipe Zone: Backfill above the pipe zone with earthfill material in horizontal lifts not exceeding 6 inches in uncompacted thickness. Compact to not less than 95 percent of the modified proctor maximum dry density. Repair any subsequent damage caused by settlement of trenches at the CONTRACTOR's sole expense. J. Pipe base and pipe zone fill for the plastic natural gas and dual wall fuel pipe that runs from the pipe sump to the burn pit shall be sand. 3.13 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS EXCAVATION A. Dispose of all excess excavation, not required or suitable for backfill or filling, in the designated area, as described in other Specification sections. PART 4 PAYMENT 4.1 GENERAL A. Payment for Work in this Section will be included as part of the lump sum price for the appropriate item described in Volume 1 of 3, Special Provisions, SP-18 "Mechanical Process and Systems—ARFF Trainer". END OF SECTION BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 ` 02200 10 EARTHWORK SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK PARTl GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work necessary to design, furnish, and install, complete, concrete formwork as specified herein. 1.2 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Schedule work for embedded, buried, or other items of work that affects form layout before completing concrete formwork. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIAL A. Wall Forms: 1. General: a. Form Surfaces: In "new and undamaged" condition of either plywood, hard plastic finished plywood, overlaid waterproof particle board, or steel of sufficient strength and surface smoothness to produce specified finish. b. Concrete Finish Requirements: As specified in Section 03300, CONCRETE. C. Design joints in forms to remain watertight and withstand placing pressures without bulging outward or creating surface patterns. d. Do not use formwork that leaks mortar. e. Wall forms shall contain pouring windows as hereinafter specified. f. Panel Deflections: Limit as required to achieve tolerances specified herein. 2. Rustications and Corner Strips: Nonabsorbent material, compatible with form surface, fully sealed on all sides, to prohibit loss of paste or water between the two surfaces. 3. Form Sealer: a. Concrete surface sealer that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces when applied to most forms or form liners. A ready - to -use water based material formulated to reduce or eliminate surface imperfections, containing no mineral oil or organic solvents. Environmentally safe meeting local, state, and federal regulations and can be used in clean water treatment plants. B0I158870.A1.FN 03100 1 JULY 11, 2000 CONCRETE FORMWORK b. Manufacturers: 1) Master Builders, Inc., Rheofinish. 2) Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. B. All Other Forms: Materials as specified for wall forms, unless otherwise approved by ENGINEER. 2.2 FORM DESIGN AND WINDOWS A. General: 1. Design formwork prior to fabrication, placing order, or use on jobs. 2. Design shall account for tolerances, form ties, finishes, architectural features, rebar supports, construction joint locations, and other nonstructural formwork requirements specified. 3. Design formwork strong enough to hold high liquid heads without form distortion and to meet tolerances as specified herein. Coordinate form design with admixture company information and concrete slump. 4. Forms for walls shall contain pouring and observation windows to allow placement of concrete through windows and staged to allow visual observation at all times of fresh concrete to ensure correct placement and vibration. 5. Free Fall Limit of Concrete: As specified in Section 03300, CONCRETE. 6. Structurally design forms, falsework, shoring, and other structural formwork and meet applicable safety regulations, current OSHA regulations, and other codes. 7. A licensed ENGINEER shall prepare formwork, falsework, and shoring designs to meet these Specifications and to meet all federal and state requirements. 8. Make designs available to any governing, agency upon request. 9. Meet applicable portions of ACI 347, ACI 318 current edition, and these Specifications. 2.3 REINFORCING SPACERS AND REBAR SUPPORTS A. As specified in Section 03210, REINFORCING STEEL. B. Walls: Provide positive spacers for wall forms to hold forms at correct dimension. 2.4 FORM TIES A. General: 1. Inserts: a. Conical or spherical type inserts. b. Fixed so they remain in contact with forming material. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 03100 2 CONCRETE FORMWORK C. Construct so no metal is within 1 inch of concrete surface when forms, inserts, and tie ends are removed. 2. Do not use wire ties. 3. Ties shall withstand form pressures and limit form deflection to specified tolerances. 4. Flat bar ties for panel forms shall have plastic or rubber inserts with minimum 1-inch depth and sufficient dimensions to permit proper patching of tie hole. B. Water Stop Ties: 1. Provide for water -holding structures or dry structures with access such as basements, pipe galleries, etc., that are below finish grade. 2. Ties shall have either an integral steel water stop 0.103 inch thick and 0.625 inch in diameter tightly and continuously welded to tie, or neoprene water stop 3/16 inch thick and 15/16 inch in diameter whose center hole is 1/2 diameter of snap tie, or a molded plastic water stop of comparable size. 3. Flat snap ties meeting these Specification may be provided. 4. Water Stop: Oriented perpendicular to tie and symmetrical about center of tie. 5. Construct ties to provide positive means of preventing rotation or disturbance of center portion of tie during removal of ends and prevent water leaking along tie. C. Alternate Form Ties —Through -Bolts: 1. Form ties consisting of tapered through -bolts as shown with minimum 1 inch in diameter at smallest end, or through -bolts utilizing a removable tapered sleeve of same minimum size may be provided as an option. Through hole requires preparation of concrete surface prior to patching; see detail. 2. Elastic Vinyl Plug: a. Size to allow insertion using insertion tool to elongate plug, place it at correct location, and.allow plug to return to original length and diameter upon removal to form watertight seal. b. Manufacturer: 1) Dayton Superior Co., Miamisburg, OH, Dayton Sure Plug, size to fit tapered hole. 2) Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. B0I158870.A1.FN 03100 3 JULY 11, 2000 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Wall Forms: 1. Do not reuse form surfaces that have been damaged and are no longer in smooth "new and undamaged" condition unless otherwise approved in writing. 2. Provide specified smooth form surfaces meeting tolerance requirements prior to each reuse. B. Form Ties: 1. Locate on exposed surfaces in uniform pattern or as shown. 2. Construct so tie remains embedded in wall, except for removable portion at each end. 3.2 FORM TOLERANCES A. General: 1. Surface, design, and construct forms to meet ACI 318 and the following minimum tolerances for specified finishes. 2. Failure of forms to produce specified tolerances will be grounds for rejection of concrete work. Upgrade concrete finish or replace to meet specification requirements. B. Wall Tolerances: 1. Straight Vertical or Horizontal Wall Surface: Flat planes within tolerance as specified herein. 2. Surface Finish: As specified in Section 03300, CONCRETE. 3. Plumb within 1/4 inch in any 10 feet or within 1/2 inch in entire height from top to bottom for walls over 20 feet high. 4. Depressions In Wall Surface: Maximum 1/8 inch when 10-foot straightedge is placed on high points in any direction or at any location. 5. Wall Thicknesses: Maximum 1/4 inch minus or 1/2 inch plus from dimension shown. C. Slab Tolerances: 1. Exposed Slab Surfaces: Comprise of flat planes as shown or as required within tolerances specified herein. 2. Slab Finish Tolerances and Slope Tolerances: Floor surface shall not have crowns so high as to prevent 10-foot straightedge from resting on end B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 03100 4 CONCRETE FORMWORK 0 blocks, nor low spots that allow a block of twice the tolerance in thickness to pass under the supported 10-foot straightedge. 3. Finish Slab Elevation: Within 1/2 inch of elevation specified except slabs which are designed and detailed to drain to floor drain or gutter shall adequately drain regardless of tolerances. 4. Repair floor slopes in an approved manner if necessary to provide complete drainage. 5. Thickness: Maximum 1/4 inch minus or 1/2 inch plus from thickness shown. 3.3 FORM SURFACE PREPARATION A. Thoroughly clean form surfaces in contact with concrete of previous concrete, dirt, and other surface contaminants prior to coating surface. B. Exposed Wood Forms in Contact with Concrete: Apply the same single thin coat as recommended by the surface sealer material manufacturer. C. Do not over spray sealer on to concrete to be bonded to next concrete placement. D. Steel Forms: 1. Coat contact surfaces of forms with a light uniform film (a coverage rate of 1,200 square feet per gallon or higher) of the surface consolidation agent. 2. Surface Sealer: Shall be applied to steel forms as soon as they are cleaned to prevent discoloration of concrete from rust, and nontoxic after 30 days. 3.4 BEVELED EDGES (CHAMFER) A. Form 3/4-inch bevels at all exposed concrete edges. B. Where beveled edges on existing adjacent structures are other than 3/4 inch, obtain ENGINEER's approval of size prior to placement of bevel form strip. 3.5 FORM REMOVAL A. CONTRACTOR shall assume responsibility for damage resulting from improper and premature removal of forms. B. Satisfy applicable OSHA requirements with regard to safety of personnel and property. C. Leave forms and shoring for elevated structural slabs or beams in place in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 6, and until concrete has reached compressive strength equal to 80 percent of the specified 28-day compressive strength as determined by test cylinders. BOI158870.A1.FN 03100 E JULY 11, 2000 CONCRETE FORMWORK 3.6 CONCRETE FINISHES A. As specified in Section 03300, CONCRETE. B. Where poor formwork is used and finish obtained is less than specified, upgrade finish to an acceptable finish at no additional cost. 3.7 FIELD TESTS A. Wall Finish Tolerances: Test for compliance with tolerances as specified in Section 03300, CONCRETE. B. Slab Finish Tolerances and Slope Tolerances: Measure and test for compliance as specified in Section 03300, CONCRETE. C. Finish Tolerance Failures: Repair or replace concrete as specified in Section 03300, CONCRETE. PART 4 PAYMENT 4.1 LUMP SUM ITEMS A. Payment for Work in this Section will be included as part of the lump sum price for the appropriate item described in Volume 1 of 3, Special Provisions, SP-18 "Mechanical Process and Systems—ARFF Trainer". END OF SECTION BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 03100 6 CONCRETE FORMWORK SECTION 03210 REINFORCING STEEL PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work necessary to furnish and install, complete, reinforcing steel and welded wire fabric. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Furnish the following: 1. Prepare in accordance with 1980 CRSI Manual of Standard Practice (MSP-2-01) and ACI Detailing Manual 1980 (SP-66): a. Bending lists. b. Placing Drawings. 2. Shop Drawings showing weld splice, Cadweld splice, and/or mechanical threaded splice where required or where proposed. B. Quality Control Submittals: Furnish the following: 1. Mechanical Threaded Connections: a. Furnish current International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO) Research Report or equivalent code agency report listing findings to include acceptance, special inspection requirements, and restrictions. b. Provide verification that device threads have been checked and meet all requirements for thread quality, in accordance with manufacturer's published methods. 2. Welding Prequalification: Approved submittal required prior to any welding. Furnish qualifications and radiographic nondestructive testing procedures for review as specified in the Structural Welding Code, Reinforcing Steel, AWS D1.4-79, published by the American Welding Society and the applicable portions of ACI 318, current edition. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Unloading, storing, and handling bars on the job shall meet CRSI publication "Placing Reinforcing Bars", and the following: 1. Deliver steel with suitable hauling and handling equipment. 2. Tag steel for easy identification. �. 3. Store to prevent contact with the ground. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 03210 1 REINFORCING STEEL PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DEFORMED BILLET -STEEL REINFORCING BARS A. Meet ASTM A615, Grade 60, including Supplemental Requirements S 1 where welding is not required, or meet ASTM A706, Grade 60, including Supplemental Requirements for reinforcing to be welded. B. Stirrups and Column Ties: Grade 40 bars. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Tie Wire: 1. 16-gauge, black, soft -annealed wire where tie wire is not closer than 1 inch from surface of wall after tying in place. 2. Provide nylon-, epoxy-, or plastic -coated tie wire to fasten noncoated reinforcing steel, unless tie wire is bent to maintain a minimum of 1 inch from surface of wall. B. Bar Supports and Spacers: 1. Precast concrete bar supports, cementitious fiber -reinforced bar supports, or all -plastic bar supports and side form spacers meeting the requirements of the CRSI 1988 Supplement to Manual of Standard Practice, 24th Edition, 1986.Other types of supports or spacers shall not be used. 2. In Beams, Columns, Walls, and Slabs Exposed to View After Stripping: Small rectangular concrete blocks made up of same color and same strength as concrete being placed around them or all -plastic bar supports and side form spacers. 3. Coat wire projecting from precast concrete bar supports with dielectric material, epoxy, or plastic. 4. Provide precast concrete supports for reinforcing in concrete placed on grade. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Meet requirements in a manual titled, "Placing Reinforcing Bars", published by Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI). B. Bend all bars cold. C. Notify ENGINEER when reinforcing is ready for inspection and allow sufficient time for this inspection prior to placing concrete. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 03210 2 REINFORCING STEEL 3.2 PLACING REINFORCING STEEL A. Clean metal reinforcement of any loose mill scale, oil, earth, and other contaminants. B. Bundle or space bars as approved on Shop Drawings, instead of bending where construction access through reinforcing is necessary. C. Install in accordance with approved Shop Drawings. D. Protection, Spacing, and Positioning: Conform with reviewed placing Drawings, design Drawings, and current edition of the ACI Standard Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete (ACI 318). E. Location Tolerances: Meet current edition of "Placing Reinforcing Bars" published by Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute and the Details and Notes on the Drawings. F. Splicing: 1. As shown and as specified in current edition of ACI 318. 2. Use lap splices unless otherwise shown or permitted in writing by ENGINEER. 3. Mechanical Splices: Mechanical threaded connections may be used at CONTRACTOR's option when shown on approved Shop Drawings. Mechanical connection shall develop at least 125 percent of specified yield strength of the bar. 4. As an alternative, perform splices using metal sleeve as specified. 5. Stagger splices in adjacent bars. G. Tying Deformed Reinforcing Bars: 1. Meet current edition of "Placing Reinforcing Bars" published by Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute and the Details and Notes on the Drawings. 2. Tie every other intersection on mats made up of #3-#4-#5-#6 in such a manner to hold bars at required spacing. 3. All noncoated tie wire shall be bent to prevent the tie wire from being closer than 1 inch from the surface of the concrete. Wire that is found to be close after the pour shall be chipped out to a depth of 3/4 inch, cut off, and the hole patched. H. Reinforcement Around Openings: 1. Place an equivalent area of steel around pipe or opening and extend on each side sufficiently to develop bond in each bar. 2. Refer to Details on Drawings for bar extension length on each side of opening. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 03210 3 REINFORCING STEEL 3. Where welded wire fabric is used, provide extra reinforcing using fabric or deformed bars. I. Welding Reinforcement: 1. Do not perform any welding unless required submittal is approved as specified. 2. Meet ASTM A706. Do not weld other bars. 3. Field Testing: Test 10 percent of all welds using radiographic, nondestructive testing procedures referenced in Structural Welding Code, Reinforcing Steel, AWS D1.4-79. 3.3 FIELD BENDING A. Straightening and Rebending: Reinforcing steel bars shall not be straightened or bent in a manner injurious to the concrete or steel. B. Unless permitted by ENGINEER, do not cut reinforcing bars in the field. PART 4 PAYMENT 4.1 LUMP SUM BID A. Payment for Work in this Section will be included as part of the lump sum price for the appropriate item described in Volume 1 of 3, Special Provisions, SP-18 "Mechanical Process and Systems—ARFF Trainer". END OF SECTION B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 03210 4 REINFORCING STEEL SECTION 03251 EXPANSION, CONSTRUCTION, AND CONTROL JOINTS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work necessary to furnish and install, complete, the expansion, construction, and control joints including premolded, pourable, and gun grade fillers. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS 1.3 1.4 Section Item CONCRETE Grout JOINT SEALANTS Joint Sealants REINFORCING STEEL Reinforcing Steel SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Furnish for the following: 1. Water stop. B. Shop Drawings: Furnish information listed below: 1. Plastic Type Water Stops: Details of construction joint types; show in sufficient detail water stop support used in both concrete pours to demonstrate water stop will remain secure until complete encasement. 2. Construction Joints: Layout and location indicating type to be used. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Prepare and protect materials for shipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Acceptance at Site: Verify that water stops delivered meet the cross-section dimensions shown and manufacturer's reviewed product data prior to unloading and storage at the site. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 03251 1 EXPANSION, CONSTRUCTION, AND CONTROL JOINTS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC WATER STOP A. Extruded from an elastomeric plastic compound of which the basic resin shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC). Reclaimed PVC in the compound is not acceptable. B. Specific Gravity: Approximately 1.37. C. Shore Durometer Type A Hardness: Approximately 80. D. Performance Requirements: Corps of Engineers' Specification CRD-C-572. E. Type: Center bulb with a number of parallel ribs or protrusions on each side of strip center. 1. Corrugated or tapered type water stops are not acceptable. 2. Standard Water Stop Geometry: As shown. F. Size: As shown. G. Thickness: Constant from bulb edge to the outside stop edge. H. Minimum Weight per Foot of Water Stop: 1. 0.90 pound for 3/16-inch by 6-inch. 2. 1.62 pounds for 3/8-inch by 6-inch. 3. 2.30 pounds for 3/8-inch by 9-inch. I. Provide for expansion and control joints indicated on the Drawings. J. Manufacturers and Catalog Numbers: 1. Vulcan Metal Products, Inc., Construction Materials Division, Birmingham, AL; Catalog No. 3/81-15M: Type 8067 (4-inch by 3/16-inch), Type 8069 (6-inch by 3/8-inch), and Type 8070 (9-inch by 3/8-inch). 2. Vinylex Corp., Knoxville, TN; Catalog No. 03250/VIN (1987): No. RB6-38H (6-inch by 3/8-inch) and No. RB9-38H (9-inch by 3/8-inch). 3. Greenstreak Plastic Products, St. Louis, MO; Catalog No. 03250/GRD (1987): Style 732 (6-inch by 3/8-inch) and Style 735 (9-inch by 3/8-inch). B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 03251 2 EXPANSION, CONSTRUCTION, AND CONTROL JOINTS 4. A. C. Horn, Inc., Beltsville, MD; Catalog No. CSP-162 (1987): Type 3 (4-inch by 3/16-inch), Type 9 (6-inch by 3/8-inch), and Type 10 (3/8-inch by 9-inch). 5. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. 2.2 WIRE LOOPED PLASTIC WATER STOP A. May be provided as an alternative to specified plastic water stops without wire loops. B. Comply with hereinbefore specified material and geometry requirements of Article 2.1, PLASTIC WATER STOP, except as follows: 1. Add continuous galvanized wire looping at plastic water stop edge for convenience in positioning and securing stop in -place in the forms. C. Manufacturer and Catalog Numbers: 1. The Schlegel Corp., Rochester, New York; "Wire Stop Water Stop"; geometry numbers 05-151-ACR-4361, 05-15 1 -ACR-6380, 05-151-ACR-9380 as shown on Schlegel Corp., Drawing No. 05-151-ACR dated 11-30-82. 2. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. 2.3 BOND BREAKER A. Provide either bond breaker tape as hereinbefore specified or a bond prevention material, nonstaining type, as specified in Section 03300, CONCRETE, except where a tape is specifically called for. 2.4 PREMOLDED JOINT FILLER A. Bituminous Type: ASTM D994 or D1751. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Nonshrink Grout: 1. As specified in Section 03600, GROUT. 2. Compatible with joint sealant. B. Roofing Felt: 30-pound asphalt -saturated; ASTM D226, Type H; or a tar - saturated roofing felt of equal quality. C. Reinforcing Steel: As specified in Section 03210, REINFORCING STEEL. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 - . 03251 3 EXPANSION, CONSTRUCTION, AND CONTROL JOINTS D. Nails: Provide for securing bituminous type premolded joint filler. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Locate joints as shown. B. Verify conformance of water stops with dimensions shown and with reviewed product data; prior to embedding water stops in concrete. C. Construct straight joints; make vertical or horizontal, except where walls intersect sloping floors. D. Commence concrete placement after the joint preparation is complete. E. Time Between Concrete Pours: Should concrete placement sequence result in cold joint located below finished water surface, install water stop in joint prior to additional concrete placement. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Construction Joints: Prior to placement of abutting concrete, clean contact surface: 1. Remove laitance and spillage from reinforcing steel and dowels. 2. Roughen surface to a minimum of 1/4-inch amplitude: a. Sandblast after the concrete has fully cured. b. Water blast after the concrete has partially cured. C. Green cut fresh concrete with high pressure water and hand tools. 3. Perform cleaning so as not to damage water stop, if one is present. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF WATER STOPS A. General: 1. Join water stops at intersections to provide continuous seal. 2. Center water stop on joint. 3. Secure water stop in correct position to avoid displacement during concrete placement. 4. Repair or replace damaged water stop. 5. Vibrate concrete to obtain impervious concrete in the vicinity of all joints. 6. Joints in Footings and Slabs: a. Ensure that space beneath plastic water stop is completely filled with concrete. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 03251 4 EXPANSION, CONSTRUCTION, AND CONTROL JOINTS b. During concrete placement, make a visual inspection of the entire water stop area as shown. C. Limit concrete placement to elevation of water stop in first pass, vibrate the concrete under the water stop, lift the water stop to confirm full consolidation without voids, then place remaining concrete to full height of slab as shown. d. Apply procedure to full length of plastic water stops. B. Plastic Water Stop: Install in accordance with details shown and manufacturer's written instructions. C. Splices and Joints: In accordance with the water stop manufacturer's written instructions using a thermostatically controlled heating iron. Butt splice unless specifically detailed otherwise. 1. Allow at least 10 minutes before the new splice is pulled or strained in any way. 2. Finished splices shall provide a cross-section that is dense and free of porosity with tensile strength of not less than 80 percent of the unspliced materials. PART 4 PAYMENT 4.1 LUMP SUM BID A. Payment for Work in this Section will be included as part of the lump sum price for the appropriate item described in Volume 1 of 3, Special Provisions, SP-18 "Mechanical Process and Systems—ARFF Trainer". END OF SECTION B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 03251 5 EXPANSION, CONSTRUCTION, AND CONTROL JOINTS ,,., ,„,h ,,,,,,,,,,,,,„ ,.,..,,. �� �„„n..,,,.,,,� �,„,,,,.„.,,„,„„� � . ,,� � ,,,.„�, � � x, � ��� ,„� �.�,»o �, ,�,� �«„�«„,� ,. ��� � ° _. .. .... SECTION 03300 CONCRETE PARTl GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work necessary to furnish and install, complete, cast -in -place concrete. B. CONTRACTOR is responsible to have all leaking cracks in water -holding structures repaired by the epoxy injection method. The Work shall be done by a certified applicator of the epoxy manufacturer. A water -holding structure shall be one that contains liquids or one that is to prevent liquids, from penetrating to a dry area. The costs shall be included in the lump sum bid amount. C. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for all patching and finishing hereinafter specified. The costs shall be included in the lump sum bid amount. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The CONTRACTOR shall have available in the field office a copy of the following publications: 1. ACI Field Reference Manual SP-15 (88) as published by the American Concrete Institute. 2. ASTM C494 (latest publication). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data, recommendations, and instructions for specific use on this Project for products listed below: 1. Bonding Agent. 2. Bond Breaker. B. Shop Drawings: Furnish the following: 1. Concrete placement Drawings identifying time between adjacent pours, and location of each type of construction joint to be used. C. Quality Control Submittals: Furnish as follows: 1. Experience and qualification record of proposed Superintendent when specified hereinafter under Article QUALITY ASSURANCE. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 03300 1 CONCRETE 2. Admixtures: Furnish the following for each admixture to be incorporated into the Project: a. Manufacturers' Certifications of Compliance. b. Manufacturers' Certifications of Installation and Proper Usage. C. Manufacturers' Job Service Reports as specified hereinafter. d. Fly Ash: 1) Source Test Analysis Report(s): Submit most recent test prior to shipment of material to jobsite and as requested by ENGINEER throughout project life. 2) Manufacturer Certification of Compliance. 3. Aggregates: Furnish the following for each type used: a. Certification of Aggregate Quality, including a statement that aggregates will not cause popouts, staining, or other defects. b. Test reports prepared by an independent testing laboratory including statement concerning aggregates reactivity. C. Gradation for coarse and for fine aggregates and for the coarse and fine combined together (three separate gradings listed as percent passing versus sieve sizes). 4. Bonding Agent: a. Manufacturer's Certification of Compliance, including statement that product is suitable for and will meet job requirements including surface finish, pot life, set time, vertical or horizontal application, and forming restrictions. b. Manufacturer's recommendations for application specific to this Project. Have information available on project site. 5. Cold Weather Curing and Protection: Detailed plan for cold weather curing and protection of concrete to be placed and/or cured in weather below 40 degrees F. Include requirements and recommendations of ACI 306 and ACI 318, for minimum 7-day period. 6. Bond Breaker: Manufacturer's data, recommendations, and instructions for specific use on this Project. Rx] 7. Concrete: Furnish the following reports from a certified testing laboratory prior to placing concrete: a. Concrete mix designs. b. Certified trial mix laboratory test reports for each mix design. C. Certified cylinder test results from laboratory mixes. 8. Concrete Delivery Tickets:s a. Furnish to ENGINEER at project site with each batch of concrete before unloading at site. b. Information: As stated in Section 16 of ASTM C94, record of _ drum revolution counter, and type, brand, test certification, and amount of fly ash, if used. 9. Water -Holding Basin Repair Methods: As necessary if water -holding basins fail tests as specified. Leaking cracks shall be repaired by the epoxy injection process. j B01158870.A1.FN DULY 7, 2000 t 03300 2 CONCRETE "_ 10. Concrete Finish Tolerances: Where Work does not meet tolerances, submit proposed method to upgrade finish to compensate for inferior appearance or to repair or provide an acceptable alternate solution. D. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Admixtures: a. Manufacturers' Certification of Installation that admixtures were used in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. b. Manufacturer's job service report. 2. Crack Repair Report: Epoxy injection materials manufacturer certification that crack repair was performed by a licensed and certified applicator per the manufacturer's recommendations. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pre -Installation Conferences: 1. Depending upon size of Project and quantity of concrete to be produced, the pre -installation conference formality and attendance can vary. 2. Conference Attendees: Include CONTRACTOR representative, ready - mix producer, admixture representative, testing personnel, superintendent placing concrete, and ENGINEER. 3. Schedule and conduct prior to incorporation of respective products into the Project. Notify ENGINEER of location and time. 4. Conference shall include: a. Admixture types, dosage, and performance. b. Mix designs. C. Placement techniques and equipment. d. Slump and placement time. e. Finish and curing. f. Other specified requirements requiring coordination. 5. Provide minimum 3 days' advance notice prior to conducting meetings or demonstrations to allow ENGINEER to attend. 6. Coordinate meeting requirements with respective manufacturers, CONTRACTOR personnel, and other parties as specified herein. 7. Conference Minutes: Prepare in writing and submit to ENGINEER. B. Demonstrations: Schedule by authorized manufacturer's representative: 1. 2. Concrete Admixtures: Demonstrate special features, product performance, product mixing, testing, and placement or installation for each type of admixture. Bonding Agent: Demonstrate product performance, product mixing, and placement or installation. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 03300 3 CONCRETE PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CEMENT A. Portland Cement Type I or Type H: l . Meet ASTM C 150, including low alkali provisions of Table 2 of that specification. 2. Tricalcium Aluminate Content of Type I Cement: Maximum 12 percent. 3. Nonhydraulic Abovegrade Structures: Use either Type I or Type H cement. 4. Hydraulic and Belowgrade Structures and Sewers: Use either Type H cement or combination of Type I mixed with fly ash. 5. Fly Ash: a. Fly ash may be used in combination with any cement provided requirements of these Specifications are met. b. Combine fly ash at batch plant or during production of the cement (Type IP cement). C. For combination fly ash and cement (Type IP cement), cement and fly ash shall meet the requirements of these Specifications. 2.2 WATER A. Clean potable water containing less than 500 ppm of chlorides. 2.3 CONCRETE AGGREGATES A. General: 1. Natural aggregates, free from deleterious coatings and substances, meeting ASTM C33, together with referenced ASTM Standard Specifications, except as modified herein. 2. Natural aggregates that are free of materials or aggregate types that cause popouts, discoloration, staining, or any other defects on the surface of the concrete. Process aggregates to remove these materials or import aggregates free of these materials. Performance history showing that an aggregate source produces these problems shall also be used to reject the aggregates. 3. Nonpotentially reactive as defined in Appendix XI of ASTM C33. 4. In accordance with ASTM C33, Appendix XI, paragraph X1.1, evidence of reactive problems on existing structures will be used to prove sources of aggregates are reactive and are unsuitable for use in the Work. 5. Import nonreactive aggregates if local aggregates are reactive. 6. Thoroughly and uniformly wash before use. 7. Import aggregates if local aggregates and concrete produces shrinkage volume changes in excess of specified amount. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 03300 4 CONCRETE 8. Aggregate Soundness: a. Testing For Fine and Coarse Aggregates: In accordance with ASTM C33 and ASTM C88 using a sodium sulfate solution. b. Do not use local aggregates not in compliance with soundness and durability requirements of this standard except with prior written approval of ENGINEER and provided special testing or a record of past performance shows these aggregates produce concrete of adequate strength and durability. 9. Aggregates used on this Project that produces "popouts", staining, or other defects that are unacceptable for the finish specified hereinafter shall be considered unacceptable and their use shall be discontinued, and aggregates that do not cause defects shall be imported. All repair costs to provide finishes acceptable to the OWNER shall be included in the lump sum bid amount. 10. Blending of aggregates which meet all of the above requirements and from different sources shall not be permitted without written approval by the ENGINEER. B. Fine Aggregates: 1. Clean, sharp, natural sand. 2. Meet ASTM C33. 3. Materials Passing 200 Sieve: 4 percent maximum. 4. Limit deleterious substances as shown in Table 1 of ASTM C33 with material finer than 200 sieve limited to 3 percent and coal and lignite limited to 0.5 percent. C. Coarse Aggregate: 1. Natural gravels, a combination of gravels and crushed gravels, crushed stone, or a combination of these materials containing no more than 15 percent flat or elongated particles (long dimension more than five times the short dimension). 2. Materials Passing 200 Sieve: 0.5 percent maximum. 3. Limit deleterious substances as shown in Table 3 of ASTM for exposed architectural concrete. All concrete surfaces that are exposed inside or outside of structures regardless whether above water or below shall be considered to be exposed architectural concrete. D. Combined Aggregates: Meet combined aggregate gradings required under Article 2.10, CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS, specified hereinafter. A. Source: Provide all admixtures used in the concrete mix from the same manufacturer. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 ' 03300 5 CONCRETE B. Admixture Performance: Provides dense, durable concrete resistant to chemical attack, wear, rebar corrosion, freeze -thaw attack, cracking, and segregation. All admixtures used shall be compatible. All admixtures shall be free of chlorides or other corrosive chemicals. C. Air -Entraining Admixture: 1. Use in all concrete unless specified otherwise. 2. Provide for use in all concrete mixes specified herein. 3. Meet ASTM C260, except be nontoxic after 30 days and contain no chlorides or other chemicals causing corrosion. 4. Concrete with air -entrainment admixture added shall maintain air percentage as batched, within plus or minus 2 percent for the time required for placement into the structure. D. Water -Reducing Admixtures: 1. Complex, multi -component, nonchloride, noncorrosive admixture providing unique performance qualities unobtainable from conventional water -reducing admixtures. 2. Meet ASTM C494, Type A or Type D. 3. Manufacturer and Product: a. Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH, Pozzolith or Pozzolith Polyheed. b. W. R. Grace & Co., Cambridge, MA, WRDA HYCOL. C. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH, Eucon WR-90. d. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. E. Superplasticizers: 1. Meet ASTM C494 and use only Type F or G. 2. Hold slump of 5 inches or greater for the time required for placement into the structure. 3. Type F Superplasticizer: Batch plant added to extend plasticity time, control temperature of fresh concrete, reduce water 20 to 30 percent, and give higher strengths at all ages. 4. Type G Superplasticizer: Batch plant added to extend plasticity time, maintain setting characteristics similar to normal concrete throughout its recommended dosage range and at varying concrete temperatures, reduce water 30 to 40 percent, and give high -early and ultimate strengths. 5. Manufacturer and Product: a. Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH, Rheobuild or Pozzolith Polyheed at a dosage greater than 10 ounces per 100 pounds of cement. b. W. R. Grace & Co., Cambridge, MA, Daracem 100. BOI158870.A1.FN MLY 7, 2000 03300 6 CONCRETE C. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH, Eucon Super F or 537G. d. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. F. Pozzolan (Fly Ash): 1. Class C or Class F fly ash meeting ASTM C618-84, including requirements of Table 1 and 2, except as modified herein: a. Loss on Ignition: Maximum 3 percent. b. Water Requirement: Maximum 100 percent of control. C. Ca0 % -5 : Maximum 1.5 Fe203(%) d. Requirements of Table lA apply when aggregates or any portion of coarse or fine aggregates used are reactive as specified under Article CONCRETE AGGREGATES. e. Requirements of Table 2A, Reactivity with Cement Alkalies, apply when aggregates or portions of aggregates are reactive as specified under Article CONCRETE AGGREGATES. f. Requirements of Table 2A, Uniformity Requirements, apply when loss on ignition of fly ash furnished exceeds 3 percent. 2. For fly ash not meeting the requirements of the chemical ratio listed above, provide the following: a. Test fly ash in accordance with ASTM C 1012. b. Furnish test data confirming fly ash in combination with cement to be used meets all strength requirements, is compatible with air - entraining agents and other additives, and provides increased sulfate resistance equivalent to or better than Type II cement. C. Conduct tests using proposed fly ash and cement samples together with control samples using Type II cement without fly ash. 2.5 CRACK REPAIR EPDXY A. SCB Process by Adhesive Engineering Co., San Carlos, CA. B. Two -component epoxy injection by Sika Chemical Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ. C. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. 2.6 BONDING AGENT A. Provide as recommended by manufacturer to meet project requirements including surface finish, pot life, set time, vertical or horizontal application, and forming restrictions. L.: B01158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 03300 7 CONCRETE 2.7 2.9 2.10 B. Manufacturer: 1. Sika Chemical Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ. 2. Adhesive Engineering Co., San Carlos, CA. 3. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. BOND BREAKER A. Nonstaining type, providing a positive bond prevention. B. Manufacturer and Product: 1. Williams Distributors, Inc., Seattle, WA, Williams Tilt -Up Compound. 2. SCA Construction Supply Division, Superior Concrete Accessories, Franklin Park, IL, Silcoseal 77. 3. Burke Co., San Mateo, CA, Burke Clean Lift Bond Breaker or Burke Tilt Free Bond Breaker. 4. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. RUBBER PAD A. Neoprene meeting ASTM D2000-80, Type M2BC414. SPONGE RUBBER A. Neoprene, closed -cell, expanded, meeting ASTM D 1056-85, Type 2C5 with compression deflection, 25 percent deflection (limits), 119 to 168 kPa (17 to 24 psi) minimum. CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. General: 1. Design, select and proportion ingredients, and test concrete mix through an approved independent testing laboratory meeting ASTM E329, and signed by a registered engineer. 2. Prepare trial mix reports and cylinder tests for each design mix. 3. Concrete Compressive Strength, F'c: a. 4,000 psi at 28 days, unless otherwise shown. b. Design lab -cured trial mix cylinders to meet the requirements of this Section. C. Use additional cement or cement plus fly ash above minimum specified if required to meet average compressive strength, F'cr. d. Use F'cr as a basis for selection of concrete proportions as set forth in Chapter 5 of ACI 318-89 and commentary ACI 318R-89 in the Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 03300 8 CONCRETE e. F'cr: Equal to F'c plus 1200 when data is not available to establish standard deviation. 4. Combined Aggregate Grading: Grading combination specified herein, unless otherwise shown. 5. Concrete topping where shown: a. Design for 5,000 psi at 28 days using 1-inch aggregate, 5-inch maximum slump and 0.40 maximum water cement ratio. b. Use water reducers as specified herein. C. Provide minimum cement content of 658 pounds per cubic yard. B. Proportions: 1. Design mix to meet aesthetic and structural concrete requirements. 2. In accordance with ACI 211 unless specified otherwise. 3. Water -cement ratio (or water -cement plus fly ash ratio) which shall control the amount of total water added to concrete for the following conditions: Concrete With Superplasticizer Without Su er lasticizer Aggregate Size W/C Ratio W/C Ratio 1-1/2 inch 0.40 0.46 1 inch 0.385 0.45 3/4 inch 0.375 0.44 4. Minimum Cement Content (or combined cement plus fly ash content when fly ash is used): a. 517 pounds per cubic yard for concrete with 1-1/2-inch maximum size aggregate. b. 540 pounds per cubic yard for 1-inch maximum size aggregate. C. 564 pounds per cubic .yard for 3/4-inch maximum size aggregate. d. Increase cement content or combined cement plus fly ash content, as required to meet strength requirements. C. Admixtures: 1 2. Air Content: a. Range: 4 to 6 percent. b. Test in accordance with ASTM C231. Fly Ash: Maximum 25 percent, minimum 15 percent of total weight of fly ash plus cement. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 03300 9 CONCRETE Fol 3. Water Reducers: a. Use water -reducing admixtures in all concrete without superplasticizers. b. Use water -reducing admixtures in all concrete with superplasticizers to allow proper mixing prior to adding superplasticizer. 4. Superplasticizers: a. Use type as recommended by manufacturer in the applicable temperature ranges allowed. b. Accomplish variations in slump, working time, and air content for flowable mixes by increasing or reducing'superplasticizer dose or air -entraining admixture dose at the ready -mix plant only. Adjust the slump or air content at the jobsite by adding admixtures for a particular load when approved by the OWNER's representative, then the plant dose shall be adjusted to meet the specifications for the rest of the placement. This additional dosage at the jobsite shall be through an approved dispenser, supplied by the admixture manufacture. C. Effect on Slump: Maintain required slump throughout time of concrete placement and consolidation. Discontinue use of superplasticizer if it fails to maintain slump in required range. d. Meet design strengths, slumps, water -cement ratio, and other requirements as specified at slump required for placement. e. Use water reducers in combination with superplasticizers as required for mixing. Slump Range at Project Site: Concrete Concrete Without Superplasticizer Concrete with Su er lasticizer 3-1/2 to 5 inches 5 to 9 inches _J 1. Take design mix test cylinders from concrete with slump equal to that to be used on the Project. Combined Aggregate Gradings: 1. For Structures: Grading, as shown in table unless otherwise specified or shown. 2. Limit the water -cement ratio to the value specified hereinbefore for the combined grading selected. BOI158870.A1.FN DULY 7, 2000 03300 10 CONCRETE 3. Grading Limits: As follows: Percenta a Passing, Sieve Sizes 1-1/2" Max. 1" Max. 3/4" Max. 2" -100 — — 1-1/2" 95-100 -100 — 1" 65-85 90-100 -100 3/4' 55-75 70-90 92-100 1/2" — — 68-86 3/8' 40-55 45-65 57-74 No. 4 30-45 31-47 38-57 No. 8 23-38 23-40 28-46 No. 16 16-30 17-35 20-36 No. 30 10-20 10-23 14-25 No. 50 4-10 2-10 5-14 No. 100 0-3 0-3 0-5 No. 200 0-2 0-2 0-2 2.11 CONCRETE MDUNG A. General: Meet ACI 304 current edition and other requirements as specified for mix design, testing, and quality control. B. Truck Mixers: 1. Equip with electrically actuated counters to readily verify the number of revolutions of the drum or blades. 2. Counter: a. Resettable, recording type, mounted in driver's cab. b. Actuated at time of starting mixers at mixing speeds. 3. Performance Requirements: a. Truck mixer operation shall provide a concrete batch as discharged within acceptable limits of uniformity with respect to consistency, mix and grading. b. If slump tests taken at approximately the 1/4 and 3/4 points of the load during discharge give slumps differing by more than 1 inch when specified slump is 3 inches or less, or differing by more than 2 inches when specified slump is more than 3 inches, discontinue B0I158870.A1.FN 03300 11 DULY 7, 2000 CONCRETE r-; �3 use of truck mixer unless causing condition is corrected and satisfactory performance is verified by additional slump tests. C. Check mechanical details of mixer, such as water measuring, and discharge apparatus, condition of blades, speed of rotation, general mechanical condition of unit, and clearance of drum before _3 attempting to reuse unit. 4. Do not use nonagitating or combination truck and trailer equipment for transporting ready -mixed concrete. C. Mixing Process: 1. Concrete Volume In Truck: a. Limit to 63 percent of total volume capacity per ASTM C94 when truck mixed. b. Limit to 80 percent of total volume capacity when central mixed. 2. Mix each batch of concrete in truck mixer for minimum 70 revolutions of drum or blades at rate of rotation designated by equipment manufacturer. 3. Perform additional mixing, if required, at speed designated by equipment manufacturer as agitating speed. 4. Place materials, including mixing water, in mixer drum before actuating the revolution counter for determining the number of mixing revolutions. D. Admixtures: 1. Superplasticizers and Air Admixture: a. Add at concrete plant only through equipment furnished and/or approved by admixture manufacturer. b. Equipment shall provide for easy and quick visual verification of admixture amount used for each dose. C. Discharge amount to be added to each load of concrete into separate dispensing container, measured verified as to amount, then add to concrete. d. Redosing of Concrete: Not permitted except when supervised by the OWNER'S representative and only after quality tests show this practice does not decrease the quality as specified of the concrete. Any redosing done shall be through equipment furnished and/or approved by the admixture manufacturer. } BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 03300 12 CONCRETE _ 2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Admixtures: 1. Fly Ash: a. Test in accordance with ASTM C311-77. b. Analysis: Show items pertinent to this Specification. C. Source Acceptance: At discretion of ENGINEER based on data submitted. d. Continuing Quality Analysis: Submit throughout life of Project from approved source. e. - Do not change fly ash source without retesting and providing new submittals for ENGINEER's review. B. Batch Plant Inspection: 1. ENGINEER shall have access to and have the right to inspect batch plants, cement mills, and supply facilities of suppliers, manufacturers, subcontractors, and contractors providing products included in these Specifications. 2. Batch Plant Certification: a. Current. b. Weighing Scales: Tested and certified to be within tolerances as set forth in the National Bureau of Standards Handbook No. 44. 3. Batch Plant Equipment: Either semiautomatic or fully automatic meeting the requirements of ASTM C94. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PLACING CONCRETE A. General: 1. Upon completion of forms and placing of reinforcing steel, prior to placing concrete, notify other trades whose work is connected to, combined with, or influenced by concrete work. Allow reasonable time for other trades to complete Work which must be completed before concrete is placed. 2. Meet requirements and recommendations of ACI 304 and ACI 318, except as modified herein. 3. Review methods with ENGINEER prior to start of Work. 4. Inspection: a. Notify ENGINEER at least 1 full working day in advance before starting to place concrete. b. Complete all Work ready for inspection on the portion of Work for which concrete is to be placed prior to such notification. BOI158870.A1.FN DULY 7, 2000 03300 13 CONCRETE C. Correct defective or incomplete work discovered by the ENGINEER in a timely fashion to allow for reinspection and further corrective action if necessary. B. Discharge Time: 1. If Superplasticizers Are Not Used: Within 1-1/2 hours after adding cement to water or aggregates. 2. High -Early -Strength Concrete Mixes: Within 45 minutes. 3. If Water -Reducing and Superplasticizers and Retarding Admixtures Are Used: As determined by set time. Coordinate information with admixture manufacturer and ENGINEER prior to start of concreting. C. Placement Into Formwork: 1. Before depositing concrete, remove debris from space to be occupied by concrete. 2. Prior to placement of concrete, dampen gravel fill under slabs on ground, dampen sand where vapor barrier is specified, and dampen all wood forms. 3. Reinforcement: Secure in position and acceptable to ENGINEER before placing concrete. 4. Place concrete as soon as possible after leaving mixer, without segregation or loss of ingredients, without splashing forms or steel above, and in layers not over 1.5 feet deep. Place and consolidate successive layers prior to initial set of first layer to prevent cold joints. 5. Use placement devices, such as chutes, pouring spouts, and pumps, as required. 6. Vertical Free Fall Drop to Final Placement: a. 5 feet in forms 8-inch or less wide and 8 feet in forms wider than 8 inches, except as hereinafter specified. b. Superplasticized Mixes: Up to 15 feet if slump is over 6 inches. 7. Do not use aluminum pipe or other aluminum conveying devices. 8. Provide sufficient illumination for interior of forms so concrete at places of deposit is visible to permit confirmation of consolidation quality. D. Conveyor Belts and Chutes: 1. Design and arrange ends of chutes, hopper gates, and other points of concrete discharge throughout conveying, hoisting, and placing system such that concrete passing from them will not become segregated. 2. Do not use chutes longer than 50 feet. 3. Minimum Slopes of Chutes: Angled to allow concrete of specified consistency to readily flow without segregation. B0I158870.A1.FN JULy 7, 2000 03300 14 CONCRETE In Cl 4. Conveyor Belts: a. Approved by ENGINEER. b. Wipe clean with a device which does not allow mortar adhering to the belt to be wasted. C. Cover conveyor belts and chutes. Retempering: For concrete or mortar in which cement has partially hydrated is not permitted. Pumping of Concrete: 1. General: a. Pumping is the preferred method of placing concrete. b. If pumped concrete does not produce satisfactory end results, discontinue pumping operation until the problem is corrected, with placing using conventional methods. The attendees of the "Preinstallation Conference" shall meet to find a way to produce satisfactory pumped concrete. C. At CONTRACTOR's option, other approved methods of placement may be used. 2. Equipment: a. Provide standby pump, conveyor system, crane and concrete bucket, or other system acceptable to ENGINEER, onsite during pumping, for adequate redundancy to assure completion of concrete placement without cold joints in case of a primary placing equipment breakdown. b. Minimum Pump Hose (Conduit) Diameter: 4 inches. C. Replace pumping equipment and hoses (conduits) that are not functioning properly. d. Do no use aluminum conduits for conveying concrete. 3. Field Control (For Pumped Concrete): Take concrete samples for slump (ASTM C143) and test cylinders (ASTM C31 and C39) and shrinkage specimens (ASTM C157) at placement (discharge) end of line. Maximum Size of Concrete Placements: 1. Limit size of each pour regardless whether slabs or walls, to allow for strength gain and volume change due to shrinkage to take place. Size shall be as specified hereinafter. 2. Expansion or Control Joints and Construction Joints: a. Unless otherwise shown, where expansion joints or control joints are shown at 60 feet spacing or less, intermediate construction joints are not required. b. Where expansion joints or control joints are not shown or where expansion joints or control joints are spaced at more than 60 feet, BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 03300 15 CONCRETE 3.2 provide intermediate construction joints at maximum spacing of 40 feet. C. Locate joints, where not otherwise shown, on Shop Drawings and obtain approval. d. Alternate pours at each side of construction joints with 10 days minimum time between pours. e. Alternate pours at each side of control joints with 6 days minimum time between pours. f. Alternate pours at each side of expansion joints with 1 day minimum time between pours. Allow sufficient time between adjacent pours at expansion joints to allow preparation of joint and for inspection and repair of voids if these exist. H. Removal of Water: Remove all water from space to be occupied -by concrete. I. Consolidation and Visual Observation: 1. Consolidate concrete with internal vibrators with minimum frequency of 8,000 vpm and amplitude required to consolidate concrete in section being placed. 2. Provide at least one standby vibrator in operable condition at placement site prior to placing concrete. 3. Consolidation equipment and methods shall meet ACI 309. 4. Provide sufficient windows in the forms or limit form height to allow visual observation of concrete. 5. Vibrator operator shall be required to see concrete being consolidated to ensure good quality workmanship, or an individual shall actually observe the vibration of concrete at all times and advise vibrator operator of any changes needed to ensure complete consolidation. 6. Consolidation and placement locations shall be planned and accomplished so that vibrators shall be inserted in the concrete as it is placed and in locations not -to exceed a distance of 5 feet from point of placement. PLACING CONCRETE IN HOT WEATHER A. Prepare ingredients, mix, place, cure, and protect in accordance with ACI 305 and as specified herein. B. Admixtures: Use in such quantities as recommended by the manufacturer to ensure concrete is workable, and lift lines will not be visible in architectural concrete finishes. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 03300 16 CONCRETE 3.3 C. Concrete Temperature: 1. Maintain below 80 degrees F at time of placement or prove by trial mixes on jobsite that placement using superplasticizers will work up to a temperature of 90 degrees F. 2. Ingredients may be cooled before mixing or a superplasticizer as specified added to allow placement with concrete temperature up to 90 degrees F when proven on the jobsite to produce effective and acceptable results. 3. Concrete thermometers will be used as the basis for acceptance or rejection of concrete. 4. Make provisions for windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, or wet cover, when necessary. 5. Evaporation Retardant: Apply as specified in Section 03370, CONCRETE CURING. 6. Reflective Cracking: a. Prevent reflective cracking due to differential temperatures between concrete and reinforcing steel. b. If reinforcement is in direct sunlight or is more than 20 degrees F higher in temperature than concrete temperature before placement, wet reinforcement to cool it with water fog spray 10 minutes before placing concrete. C. Verify temperature of reinforcing is not more than 20 degrees F higher than fresh concrete. PLACING CONCRETE IN COLD WEATBER A. General: 1. Do not place concrete when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F or approaching 40 degrees F and falling, without special protection as specified or as approved by the ENGINEER. 2. Do not place concrete against frozen earth or ice, or against forms and reinforcement with frost or ice present. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 03300 17 CONCRETE B. Concrete Mix Temperatures: 1. As shown below for various stages of mixing and placing: Concrete Temperatures Section size, minimum dimension, inch (nun) < 12" 12-36" (300- 36-72" (900- > 72" Air Temp. (300 mm) 900 mm) 1,800 mm) (1,800 mm) a. Minimum concrete temperature as mixed for indicated weather: Above 30 F (-1 C) 60 F (16 C) 55 F (13 C) 50 F (10 C) 45 F (7 C) 0to30F(-18to-1C) 65F(18C) 60F(16C) 55F(13C) 50F(10C) Below 0 F (-18 C) 70 F (21 C) 65 F (18 C) 60 F (16 C) 55 F (13 C) b. Maximum allowable gradual temperature drop in first 24 hours after curing period and after end of protection: 413t 40F 1 30F 1 20F C. Curing and Protection: 1. Maintain surface temperature of concrete above 40 degrees for a minimum of 7 days. 2. Surface Temperature: a. The actual temperature of concrete surface determines effectiveness of protection, regardless of air temperatures or whether the objective is durability or strength. b. Because corners and edges of concrete are most vulnerable to freezing and usually are more difficult to maintain at required temperature, monitor their temperatures to evaluate and verify protection provided. C. Provide a sufficient number of thermometers placed on concrete surfaces spaced throughout the Work to allow inspection and monitoring of concrete surface temperatures representative of all the Work. 3. Meet requirements and recommendations of ACI 306 and ACI 318, and these Specifications. 4. Strength requirements may require additional protection and curing during cold weather due to delayed field strength gain. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 03300 18 CONCRETE 5. Determine strength attainment, and the requirement for continued protection, from field test cylinders as specified under Article 3.11, FIELD TESTS. 6. External Heating Units: a. Vent heating units and do not locally heat or dry concrete. b. Do not exhaust flue gases directly into an enclosed area to prevent concentrated carbon dioxide from causing concrete carbonation. C. Ensure fire safety and fire prevention measures are enforced during use of heating units. 7. Maintain curing conditions which will foster normal strength development without excessive heat, and without critical saturation of concrete at the close of the protection period. 8. Limit rapid temperature changes, particularly before strength has developed sufficiently to withstand temperature stresses. Sudden chilling of concrete surfaces or exterior members in relation to interior structure can promote cracking to the detriment of strength and durability. 9. At end of the required period, discontinue protection in such a manner that the drop in temperature of any portion of concrete will be gradual and will not exceed, in 24 hours, the amount shown in the table specified herein. 3.4 CONCRETE BONDING A. To New Concrete Horizontal Construction Joints: 1. New concrete is defined as less than 60 days old. 2. Thoroughly clean and saturate joint with water. 3. Cover horizontal wall surfaces with minimum 2 inches of grout, as specified in Section 03600, GROUT, and immediately place concrete. 4. Limit concrete lift placed immediately on top of grout to 12 inches thick. 5. Thoroughly vibrate to mix and consolidate grout and concrete together. 6. Provide inspection windows to allow close visual inspection of this Work. B. Bonding to Old Concrete: 1. Mechanically roughen the existing concrete surfaces to a clean, rough surface, and provide a minimum roughness profile of 1/4 inch. 2. Then coat contact surfaces with bonding agent as specified. Apply bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. BO1158870.A1.FN 03300 19 t JULY 7, 2000 CONCRETE i C. Bonding Topping to Slab with S-2 Finish: 1. Clean existing surface completely. 2. Then coat contact surfaces with bonding agent as specified. Apply bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.5 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. As specified in Section 03251, EXPANSION, CONSTRUCTION, AND CONTROL JOINTS. 3.6 PATCHING A. General: 1. Leaking cracks shall be epoxy injected by qualified applicators using two -component epoxy as hereinbefore specified. 2. Prior to starting patching work, obtain quantities of color -matched Category II grout, as specified in Section 03600, GROUT, and grout manufacturer's detailed instructions for use so as to provide an acceptable structural patch and a patch technique with an acceptable finish. 3. Develop patching techniques and mixes with grout manufacturer on the mockup panel, a concrete test panel at least 4 feet by 8 feet in area constructed for this purpose, or a portion of as -cast surface of concrete, requiring patching, selected by ENGINEER for this purpose. 4. Dress surface of patches that will remain exposed to view to match color and texture of adjacent surfaces. 5. Patching of concrete shall provide an acceptable and structurally sound surface finish uniform in appearance or upgrade the finish by other means until acceptable. 6. Provide patching to correct defects due to unacceptable aggregates and other ingredients. 7. Patching material shall be certified by manufacturer prior to use that it contains no chlorides or other chemicals causing corrosion. B. Concrete Finish Tolerances: 1. Where Work does not meet specified tolerances repair or replace rejected work. 2. Obtain written approval of repair method used on the mockup panels or other panels specified hereinbefore before proceeding with Work. 3. Repair work or work on an alternate finish solution is assumed to be the result of poor workmanship in not achieving specified quality of finish. No additional compensation for time or cost will be allowed for such work. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 03300 20 CONCRETE C. Tie Holes: 1. Fill with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, Category I or 11, except where sealant is indicated. Use only enough water to dry pack. 2. Color of grout after curing shall match color of adjacent concrete. 3. Compact grout using steel hammer and steel tool to drive grout to high density. Cure grout with water. D. Alternate Form Ties —Through -Bolts: 1. Seal through -bolt hole by sandblasting or mechanically cleaning and roughening entire interior surface of hole, epoxy coating roughened surface and driving elastic vinyl plug and then dry packing entire hole on each side of plug with Category II nonshrink grout, as specified in Section 03600, GROUT. Use only enough to dry pack grout. 2. Fill through -bolt openings with Category II nonshrink grout as specified in Section 03600, GROUT. 3. Dry pack while the epoxy is still tacky or remove epoxy by mechanical means and reapply new epoxy. 4. Compact grout using steel hammer and steel tool to drive grout to high density. Cure grout with water. 5. Any leaks or dampness on exterior of through -bolt patches during or after water testing shall require repair or replacement of patch. E. Defective Areas: 1. Remove defective concrete such as honeycombed areas, rock pockets, popouts, staining, and other defects out to sound concrete. 2. Small shallow holes caused by air entrapment at surface of forms shall not be considered defects unless amount is so great as to be considered not the standard of the industry and due primarily to poor workmanship. 3. If chipping is required, make edges perpendicular to the surface. Do not feather edges. 4. Fill defective area with nonshrink, nonmetallic, Category II grout. 5. Use approved bonding agent on horizontal patches prior to placing nonmetallic, nonshrink grout. 6. Demonstrate methods for repair of vertical surfaces using actual materials, methods, and curing procedures required by material manufacturers. Consult with bonding agent manufacturer and nonshrink grout manufacturer on techniques. F. Blockouts at Pipes or Other Penetrations: 1. 2. Meet details shown or submit proposed blockouts for review. Use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, Category I or H. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 03300 21 CONCRETE 6M SCHEDULE OF CONCRETE FINISHES Required Form Area Type of Finish Tolerances Exterior Wall Surfaces Abovegrade/exposed (above a point 6" below finishgrade) W-3 W-B Backfilled/not waterproofed (below a point 6" below finalgrade) W-1 W-A Interior Wall Surfaces Open top water -holding tanks and basins/not painted or coated W-3 W-A Buildings, pipe galleries, and other -dry areas/not painted or coated W-3 W-A Exterior Slabs Water -holding basin slabs receiving topping S-2 S-B Water -holding tanks and basins/top of wall/toppin fuel containment basin S-1 S-B CONCRETE WALL FINISHES A. General: All wall surfaces containing popouts, staining, or other defects caused by aggregates or other concrete ingredients shall be repaired by an acceptable procedure by the CONTRACTOR. The costs shall be included in the lump sum bid amount. B. Type W-1: 1. Fill snap -tie holes with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. 2. Knock off projections. 3. Patch honeycomb areas and rock pockets. Small air holes do not require patching. C. Type W-2 (Waterproofing): 1. Cracks shall be epoxy injected. 2. Fill snap -tie holes with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. 3. Knock off projections. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 03300 22 CONCRETE 4. Patch honeycomb areas and rock pockets. Small air holes do not require patching. 5. Backfill waterproof wall surface as per Specifications. 1. Fill snap -tie holes with approved nonshrink, nonmetallic color matched grout. 2. Grind off projections, fins, and rough spots. 3. Repair other defects such as honeycomb areas, rock pockets, and rough spots resulting from form release agent failure or other reasons with color matched nonshrink grout. 3.8 CONCRETE SLAB FINISHES A. General: 1. Do not excessively use "jitterbugs" or other special tools designed for the purpose of forcing coarse aggregate away from the surface and allowing a layer of mortar to accumulate. 2. Do not dust surfaces with dry materials. 3. Thoroughly compact slabs and floors by vibration. 4. Round off all edges of slabs and tops of walls with a steel edging tool, except where a cove finish is shown. Steel edging tool radius shall be 1/4 inch for all slabs subject to wheeled traffic. 5. After applying the final floor finish and after curing as specified in Section 03370, CONCRETE CURING, cover slabs with Visqueen or other material to keep floor clean and protect it from material and damage due to other construction work. 6. Repair defects caused by aggregates or other concrete ingredients. Costs shall be included in lump sum bid. B. Type S-1, Concrete Slab Finish Steel Troweled Finish: 1. Finish by screeding and floating with straightedges to bring surfaces to required finish elevation shown. 2. While concrete is still green, but sufficiently hardened to bear a person's weight without deep imprint, wood float to true, even plane with no coarse aggregate visible. 3. Use sufficient pressure on wood floats to bring moisture to surface. 4. After surface moisture has disappeared, hand trowel concrete to produce smooth, impervious surface, free from trowel marks. 5. Burnish surface with an additional troweling. Final troweling shall produce a ringing sound from trowel. 6. Do not use dry cement or additional water during troweling, nor will excessive troweling be permitted. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 03300 23 CONCRETE W 7. Power Finishing: a. An approved power machine may be used in lieu of hand finishing for finishing concrete floors and slabs in accordance with directions of machine manufacturer. b. Do not use power machine when concrete has not attained the necessary set to allow finishing without introducing high and low spots in slab. C. Do first steel troweling for slab S-1 finish by hand. C. Type S-2, Slab Finish Wood Float: 1. Finish slabs to receive fill and mortar setting beds by screeding with straightedges to bring surface to required finish plane. 2. Wood float slab to compact and seal surface. 3. Remove all laitance and leave surface clean. 4. Coordinate with other finish procedures. D. Type S-3, Underside Elevated Slab: 1. When forming is removed, grind off projections on underside of slab, repair rock pockets and honeycomb area defects, including small shallow air pockets. 2. Apply painting per Section 09900, PAINTING, where required by the Finish Schedule on the Drawings. E. Type S-5, Broomed Finish: 1. Finish as specified for Type S-1 floor finish, except omit final troweling and finish surface by drawing a fine -hair broom lightly across the surface. 2. Brooming: In same direction and parallel to expansion joints, or, in the case of inclined slabs, perpendicular to slope, except for round roof slab, broom surface in radial direction. F. Type S-6, Sidewalk Finish: 1. Slope walks down 1/4 inch per foot away from structures, unless otherwise shown. 2. Strike off surface by means of strike board and float with wood or cork float to a true plane, then flat steel trowel before brooming. 3. Broom surface at right angles to direction of traffic. 4. Lay out sidewalk surfaces in blocks with an approved grooving tool as shown or as directed by ENGINEER. 3.9 CURING OF CONCRETE A. As specified in Section 03370, CONCRETE CURING. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 03300 24 CONCRETE 3.10 BACKFIIJ AGAINST WALLS A. Do not backfill against walls until concrete has been in place at least seven days and has obtained compressive strength equal to specified 28-day compressive strength. B. Place backfill simultaneously on both sides of wall where required to prevent differential pressures. 3.11 FIELD TESTS A. OWNER's Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete: 1. OWNER's representative will make or have tests made to determine compliance with Specifications. CONTRACTOR will pay all testing costs. 2. CONTRACTOR's Responsibilities: a. Cooperate in making of such tests by furnishing necessary labor to assist testing agencies and/or ENGINEER in obtaining, handling, and protecting and/or curing samples at jobsite. b. Provide adequate facilities for safe storage and proper curing of concrete test cylinders on project site for first 24 hours, and for additional time as may be required before transporting to test lab. C. For mixes with superplasticizers provide samples to OWNER's representative at slump to be used on Project's placements. d. Provide concrete for testing of slump, air content, and for making cylinders from the point of discharge into forms. When concrete is pumped, samples used shall be taken from discharge end of pump hose. 3. Evaluation will be in accordance with ACI Standard Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete (ACI 318-89), Chapter 5 and these Specifications. Where the term "building official" is used, the term shall be redefined to "the OWNER'S representative". 4. Specimens will be made, cured, and tested in accordance with ASTM C31 and ASTM C39. 5. Concrete testing will be paid for by the CONTRACTOR. 6. Frequency of testing may be increased at discretion of ENGINEER. 7. CONTRACTOR will conduct segregation tests and cold weather placement tests as specified hereinafter at the direction of the ENGINEER. B. Admixtures: 1. Segregation Test: Required to determine overwet, segregating concrete. Test each truck prior to use on job. Test will be made by the CONTRACTOR at ENGINEER's direction. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 03300 25 CONCRETE 2. Segregation Test Objective: Concrete with 5-inch to 10-inch flow must stay together when slumped. Segregation is assumed to cause mortar to flow out of mix even though aggregate may stay piled enough to meet slump test. 3. Test Procedure: a. Make slump test and check for excessive slump and observe to see if mortar or moisture flows from slumped concrete. Test will be made by the CONTRACTOR at ENGINEER's direction. b. Concrete Failing Segregation Test: OWNER's representative will reject concrete failing test and direct CONTRACTOR to remove from project site at CONTRACTOR's expense. C. Cold Weather Placement Tests: 1. During cold weather concreting, CONTRACTOR will cast cylinders for field curing as follows. Use method which will produce greater number of specimens: a. Six extra test cylinders from the last 100 cubic yards of concrete. b. Minimum three specimens for each 2 hours of placing time or for each 100 yards. 2. These specimens shall be in addition to those cast by ENGINEER for lab testing. 3. Protect test cylinders from the weather until they can be placed under same protection provided for the parts of the structure which they represent. 4. Keep field test cylinders in same protective environment as the parts of the structure they represent, to determine if specified strength has been obtained and no further protection is needed. 5. Test cylinders in accordance with applicable sections of ASTM C31 and C39. 6. Evaluation and Acceptance: As specified herein. D. Concrete Tolerances: 1. Measure and inspect walls for compliance with tolerances specified in Section 03100, CONCRETE FORMWORK. 2. Slab Finish Tolerances and Slope Tolerances: a. Floor flatness measurements will be made the day after floor is finished and before shoring is removed, to eliminate effects of shrinkage, curing, and deflection. b. Support 10-foot long straightedge at each end with steel gauge blocks of thicknesses equal to specified tolerance. C. A check for adequate slope and drainage will also be made to confirm compliance with these Specifications. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 03300 26 CONCRETE`' E. Water Leakage Tests: 1. Purpose: Determine integrity of water recycle tank and fuel containment tank finished concrete and to show exposed wall surfaces are visually acceptable. 2. All Water -Holding Structures: a. Perform leakage tests after concrete has cured and obtained its design strength, and before backfill, brick or CMU facing, or other work which will cover concrete wall surfaces is begun. b. Make other equipment, i.e., stop gates, sluice gates, etc., or temporary bulkheads watertight prior to test. C. Fill with water to within 1 inch of the top of the wall prior to leak testing, and maintain level for 48 hours for moisture. absorption by concrete. d. Close all valves and gates to the structure and plug all wall pipes and floor drains and measure the change in water surface for a 48-hour period. e. During test period, examine exposed portions of structure for dampness or leaks and mark visible leaks or damp spots. 3. Test Evaluation Criteria: Running seepage is not present on walls or other areas exposed to view. 4. Excessive Leakage and Leakage Test Failure: If leakage exceeds test evaluation criteria. 5. Repairs: If leakage exceeds specified limit, drain water -holding structure, epoxy inject all leaking cracks, patch all surface areas and damp spots previously marked, and make necessary repairs and retest basin. 6. Retest: a. Refill water -holding structure and test for leakage until structure 7. 91 meets test criteria. b. Successful Test: If leakage limit criteria is met and damp spots and seepage problems are corrected. The testing shall be conducted after the construction of the burn pit, fuel containment tank, and wastewater recycling tank mechanical and electrical is completed. Tank testing water will be drained to the burn pit. If tank testing water fills the burn pit, the recycle water eductor pump will be used to transfer excess water in the burn pit to fill the tanks for testing. The water recycling tank CMU will be constructed after the tank testing is acceptable. BO1158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 03300 27 CONCRETE PART 4 PAYMENT 4.1 LUMP SUM BID A. Payment for Work in this Section will be included as part of the lump sum price for the appropriate item described in Volume 1 of 3, Special Provisions, SP-18 "Mechanical Process and Systems—ARFF Trainer". END OF SECTION BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 03300 28 CONCRETE I -A SECTION 03370 CONCRETE CURING La PART GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work necessary to provide, complete, Concrete Curing as specified herein. B. Crack repair shall be as specified in Section 03300, CONCRETE. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's data, recommendations, and instructions for specific use on this Project for products listed below: 1. Evaporation Retardant. 2. Curing Compound. B. Quality Control Submittals: Furnish the following: 1. Curing Compound: Manufacturer's Certification of Compliance, to include statement that product is a solvent based product with high solids content and meets ASTM C309, and additional maximum moisture loss requirements of 0.030 gm/square cm/72 hours, and statement shows one -coat coverage to comply with requirements of these Specifications. 2. Curing method and procedures to be used in compliance with these Specifications. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 CURING COMPOUND A. Do not use curing compound on water holding basin slabs or where additional finishes such as hardeners, paintings, and other special coatings are required. Use water curing as specified instead. B. Do not use curing compound where solvents in the curing compounds are prohibited by state or federal air quality laws. Use only water curing methods. C. Provide solvent -based curing compound where permitted meeting requirements of ASTM C309, with additional requirement that the moisture loss shall not exceed 0.030 gm/square cm/72 hours. B01158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 03370 CONCRETE CURING D. Manufacturer's certification shall state that this compound can be applied in one coat and shall show the quantity or coverage required to meet or exceed the above moisture retention. E. Manufacturer (When Certifications are Furnished): 1. Master Builders Co., Cleveland, OH, Masterkure. 2. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH, Euco Super Floor Coat. 3. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. 2.2 EVAPORATION RETARDANT A. Provide to retard rapid evaporation of water from fresh exposed concrete. B. Fluorescent color tint which shall disappear completely upon drying is optional. C. Manufacturer: 1. Master Builders Co., Cleveland, OH, CONFILM or CONFILM LL-898 2. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH, Eucobar. 3. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CURING OF CONCRETE A. Curing shall be continuous for 7 days unless otherwise shown or approved in writing by the ENGINEER. B. Determine the best method for the Project and use one of the following as x approved by ENGINEER: 1. Walls: a. General: Where walls are to receive coatings, painting, cementitious material, or other similar finishes, or where solvent based coating as specified with high quantity of solids are not permitted, do not use curing compounds. Use only water curingu procedures. b. Method 1: Leave concrete forms in place and keep entire exposed surfaces wet at all times. C. Method 2: Apply specified solvent based with high solids content curing compound as specified, where allowed, immediately after removal of forms. d. Method 3: Continuously sprinkle 100 percent of all exposed surfaces. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 if 03370 2 CONCRETE CURING 1 2. Slabs and Curbs: a. Method 1: Protect surface by ponding. b. Method 2: Cover with burlap or cotton mats and keep continuously wet. C. Method 3: Cover with 1-inch layer of wet sand, earth, or sawdust, and keep continuously wet. d. Method 4: Continuously sprinkle exposed surface. e. Other agreed upon method that will provide moisture to be present and uniform at all times on all surface of slabs. 3.2 EVAPORATION RETARDANT APPLICATION A. Spray onto surface of fresh concrete immediately after screeding to react with surface moisture. B. Reapply after smoothing surface with a bull float to ensure continuous, compacted monomolecular layer until final finishing is completed. C. After finishing, apply water curing as specified. 3.3 CURING AND PROTECTION IN COLD WEATHER A. Meet cold weather concreting procedures as specified in Section 03300, CONCRETE and in ACI 306. B. Where water curing as specified herein for slabs is not possible, use an approved curing compound as herein specified at manufacturer's recommended coverage per gallon. C. Where specified curing compound cannot be used, special methods using moisture shall be agreed upon prior to pouring the concrete slabs. D. Protect slabs during cold weather with polyethylene sheeting or other material inside required heated enclosure if foot traffic is permitted on slabs. E. Repair or replace concrete damaged by cold weather. PART 4 PAYMENT 4.1 LUMP SUM BID A. Payment for Work in this Section will be included as part of the lump sum price for the appropriate item described in Volume 1 of 3, Special Provisions, _ s SP-18 "Mechanical Process and Systems—ARFF Trainer". END OF SECTION B0I158870.A1.FN DULY 11, 2000 03370 3 CONCRETE CURING No Text PART 1 1.1 1.2 SECTION 03600 GROUT GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. Work necessary to furnish and install, complete, grout as specified herein. A. Quality Control Submittals: Furnish the following: 1. Nonshrink Grout, Types I, II, and III, Categories A and B, as applicable and other grout specified: Grout test reports transmitted directly from testing laboratory to ENGINEER for the following: a. 24-hour evaluation of nonshrink grout test and report with independent test laboratory letterhead and signature. Test requirements and forms are specified hereinafter on attached form. Test shall be run at room temperature of 80 degrees for Category I, II -A, and III -A. Tests shall be run at room temperature of 100 degrees and at 40 degrees for full duration of test (1 hour for flow cone test and 2 hours for bleed test). Strength test specimens shall be cured at 70 degrees F. These tests shall have been run by the independent test laboratory within the past 18 months. b. Standard test method for measuring changes in height of cylinder specimens from hydraulic cement grout (CRD-C600-89 or ASTM C1090-88). All grouts shall show positive volume changes (increase) when compared to measurements taken previously during this test (1, 3, 14, 28 day). Any grout that shows a volume measurement decrease from the previous volume measurement (1, 3, 14, 28 day) shall be rejected. The grouts shall be tested at the following consistencies: 2. Type I: Flowable consistency, 125 to 145 flow (Flow Table - 5 drops - CRD-C227. 3. Type II -A and III -A: Fluid consistency, 20 to 30 seconds (flow cone - CRD-C611) at 80 degrees F ambient temperatures. 4. Type II-B and III-B: Fluid consistency, 20 to 30 seconds (flow cone - CRD-C611) at 40, 80, and 100 degrees F ambient temperatures. a. Test results and service report from demonstration tests and from testing throughout project duration as specified. b. Grout mix designs for grout other than nonshrink grout. C. Certified trial mix laboratory test reports for each mix design on grout other than nonshrink grout. BOI158870.A1.FN DULY 7, 2000 03600 1 GROUT d. Certified cylinder test results from laboratory mixes for grout other than nonshrink grout. e. Grout test results for grouts proposed to be used other than as specified herein. f. Certification and test results proving that grouts to be used for patching of concrete, through -bolts, and form ties contains no chlorides, or other chemicals causing corrosion. Provide also test results from grout samples tested in an independent testing laboratory using ASTM C 114 or equivalent method to obtain measured chloride content. B. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Manufacturers' certification of installation, including manufacturer's job service report, certifying grouts were used in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 NONSHRINK GROUTS A. All grouts shall be free of chlorides and other chemicals which cause corrosion. B. Nonshrink Grout: 1. Provide nonshrink grout for applications in the grout category as specified in the following table: Tempera re Range Max. Placing Time 60 deg F 40 deg F to to Application 80 deg F 100 deg F 20 min 90 min -Filling tie holes I I I I Blockouts for gate I II-B I II-B -guides Precast joints I II-B I II-B Column base -plates I II-B I II-B single -story Machine bases II -A II-B II -A II-B 25 hp or less B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 03600 2 GROUT Tempera re Range Max. Placing Time 60 deg F 40 deg F to to Application 80 deg F 100 deg F 20 min 90 min Bases for precast II -A U-B II -A II-B wall sections Baseplates for II -A II-B II -A II-B columns over one story Precast base joints II -A II-B II -A II-B higher than one story Through -bolt II -A II-B II -A II-B openings Patching concrete II -A II-B II -A II-B walls Machine bases III -A III-B III -A III-B 26 hp and u Baseplates and/or III -A III-B III -A III-B soleplates with vibration, thermal movement, etc. 2. Category B grouts meet all requirements of Category A and may be used for Category A as an option. C. Nonshrink Grout, Category I: Nonmetallic, nongas-liberating flowable grouts meeting the specified test requirements and applications. Manufacturers claiming to have grouts meeting these requirements and applications are: 1. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc., Omaha, NE, Crystex. 2. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH, EUCO NS Grout. 3. Master Builders Co., Cleveland, OH, Set Grout. 4. Gifford Hill & Co., Dallas, TX, Supreme Grout. 5. UPCO Co., Cleveland, OH, UPCON "Super Flow". 6. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. D. Category II -A Grouts: 1. Fluid consistency at 80 degrees (20- to 30-second flow cone). 2. Positive volume change at all stages of test, CRD-C600-89. B0I158870.A1.FN 03600 JULY 7, 2000 3 GROUT 3. Fluid and able to be placed for 20 minutes at fluid consistency from time of initial mixing. 4. Minimum strength of 1,000 psi at 1 day, 4,500 psi at 7 days, and 6,500 psi at 28 days with cubes made at fluid consistency specified above at 80 degrees F and cured at 70 degrees F. 5. Capable of being used at dry pack consistency or other consistency as required for application. 6. Color match to surrounding concrete where required by Specifications. 7. Meets all 24-hour evaluation test form requirements except extended time flow test and tests at temperatures above 80 degrees F. 8. Manufacturers: Manufacturers claiming to have grouts that meet these Category II -A requirements and applications are: a. Fosroc, Twinsburg, OH, Conbextra High Flow. b. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH, EUCO NS Grout. C. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc., Omaha, NE, Crystex. d. Master Builders Co., Cleveland, OH, Master Grout 713. e. Gifford Hill & Co., Dallas, TX, Supreme Grout. f. UPCO Co., Cleveland, OH, UPCON "Super Flow". g. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. E. Category II-B Grouts: 1. Fluid consistency at 80 degrees F (20- to 30-second flow cone). 2. Fluid consistency at 100 degrees F (20- to 30-second flow cone). 3. Fluid consistency at 40 degrees F (20- to 30-second flow cone). 4. Meets all 24-hour evaluation test form requirements, including extended time flow of 60 minutes at 40, 80, and 100 degrees F. 5. Minimum strength of 1,000 psi at 1 day, 4,500 psi at 3 days, and 7,000 psi at 28 days with cubes made from grout flowing through flow cone after 60 minutes at ambient temperature of 40, 80, and 100 degrees F and all samples cured at 70 degrees F. 6. Capable of being used at dry pack consistency or other consistency as required for application. 7. Color match surrounding concrete where required by Specifications. 8. Positive volume change at all stages of test, CRD-C600-89. 9. Manufacturers: Manufacturers claiming to have grouts that meet these Category II-B requirements and applications are: a. Master Builders Co., Cleveland, OH, Master Flow 928. b. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. F. Category III -A Grouts: 1. Noncatalyst metallic grout free of gas producing or gas releasing agents, free of oxidizing catalysts, free of inorganic accelerators, and free of chlorides. 2. Fluid consistency at 80 degrees F (20- to 30-second flow cone). B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 03600 4 GROUT 3. Positive volume change at all stages of test, CRD-C600-89. 4. Fluid and able to be placed for 20 minutes at fluid consistency from time of initial mixing. Do not use on placements at higher temperatures or for times longer than 20 minutes. 5. Minimum strength of 1,000 psi at 1 day, 5,000 psi at 7 days, and 8,000 psi at 28 days with cubes made at fluid consistency specified above at 80 degrees F and cured at 70 degrees F. 6. Capable of being used at dry pack consistency or other consistency as required for application. 7. Meets all 24-hour evaluation test form requirements except extended time flow tests and tests above 80 degrees F. 8. Manufacturers: Manufacturers claiming to have grouts that meet these Category III -A requirements and applications are: a. Master Builders Co., Cleveland, OH, Embeco 636. b. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH, Euco M-Mod. C. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. G. Category III-B Grouts: 1. Noncatalyst metallic grout free of gas producing or gas releasing agents, free of oxidizing catalysts, free of inorganic accelerators, and free of chlorides. 2. Fluid consistency at 40 degrees'F (20- to 30-second flow cone). 3. Fluid consistency at 80 degrees F (20- to 30-second flow cone). 4. Fluid consistency at 100 degrees F (20- to 30-second flow cone). 5. Meets all 24-hour evaluation test form requirements, including extended time flow of 60 minutes at 40, 80, and 100 degrees F. 6. Minimum strength of 1,000 psi at 1 day, 6,000 psi at 7 days, and 8,000 psi at 28 days with cubes made from grout flowing through flow cone after 60 minutes at ambient temperatures of 40, 80, and 100 degrees F and all samples cured at 70 degrees F. 7. Capable of being used at dry pack consistency or other consistency as required for application. 8. Positive volume change at all stages of test, CRD-C600-89. 9. Manufacturers: Manufacturers claiming to have grouts that meet these Category III-B requirements and applications are: a. Master Builders Co., Cleveland, OH, Embeco 885. b. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. H. Grout For Horizontal Construction Joints in Walls: Flowable, consisting of sand, water, and minimum 12 sacks of cement per cubic yard. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 03600 5 GROUT PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PLACING GROUT A. Place and cure nonshrink grout as directed by manufacturer. B. Nonshrink Grout, Category I and II: For formwork tie holes or through -bolt holes, fill conical section with dry pack dense grout hammered in with steel tool and steel hammer. For through bolt holes coordinate the dry pack dense grout application with the vinyl plug as specified in Section 03100, CONCRETE FORMWORK and the bonding agent specified in Section 03300, CONCRETE. C. Location for Use of Nonshrink Grout Category III: As shown or as specified. D. Horizontal Construction Joints in Reinforced Concrete Walls: 1. Use positive measuring device such as a bucket or other device that will contain only enough grout for depositing in one place in the wall to ensure that portion of the form does not receive too much grout. Limit grout placement to 2-inch maximum thickness. 2. Do not deposit grout from pump hoses or large concrete buckets unless inspection windows close to the joint are available to allow visual measurement of grout thickness and means for grout removal are available for removal of excess grout. 3.2 GROUTING MACHINERY FOUNDATIONS A. Block out original concrete or finish off a sufficient distance below bottom of machinery base to provide for thickness of grout as shown. B. Set machinery in position and wedge to proper elevation by steel wedges. C. Fill space between bottom of machinery base and original concrete pour with pourable nonshrinking type grout as specified and in accordance with manufacturer's demonstration instructions. PART 4 PAYMENT 4.1 LUMP SUM BID A. Payment for Work in this Section will be included as part of the lump sum price for the appropriate item described in Volume 1 of 3, Special Provisions, SP-18 "Mechanical Process and Systems—ARFF Trainer". BOI158870.A1.FN 03600 3 JULY 7, 2000 GROUT 8 (Test Lab Name) (Address) (Phone No.) 24-HOUR EVALUATION OF NONSHRINK GROUT TEST FORM DESCRIPTION: 24-hour evaluation and analysis of nonshrink grout in accordance with requirements listed herein. * This evaluation does not supersede any standard ASTM, CRD, or other tests required by specifier to qualify as an approved grout for the Project at hand. OBJECTIVE: To define a standard set of tests that any local certified independent laboratory can perform and complete within a 24-hour period. Costs to run tests will be borne by the manufacturer of the grout to be tested or by whoever requests a substitute for the specified grouts. SCOPE: Utilize test procedures providing 24-hour results which attempt to duplicate field grouting demands. This evaluation is intended to prove a manufacturer's quality and viability to perform to standards described by specifier. PRIOR TO TEST: Secure five bags of each grout to be tested: 1. From local dealer/jobber, preferably from ultimate supplier of grout to the job for which grout is specified. 2. All five bags should be of the same lot number. 3. Obtain data/literature pertaining to grout being tested. B. Is all product data and warranty information contained in company literature/data? Yes_ No- C. Is it pertinent? Do literature and bag information agree? Yes_ No_ BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 03600 7 GROUT D. Does the manufacturer warranty the grout in accordance with project specifications? Yes_ No- E. Does warranty extend beyond grout replacement value and allows participation with CONTRACTOR in replacing and repairing defective areas? Yes_ No- F. Are water demands and limits printed on bag? Yes_ No- G. Is mixing information printed on the bag? Yes_ No- H. Are temperature restrictions printed on bag? Yes_ No_ *Disqualification of a grout if one or more NO answers are noted. GROUT TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. Bagged Material: 1. List lot numbers. 2. List expiration date. 3. Weigh bags and record weight. Disqualify grout if bag weights have misstated measure ±2 pounds by more than one out of five bags. B. Mixing and Consistency Determination: 1. Mix full bag of grout in a 10-gallon pail. 2. Use an electric drill with a paddle device to mix the grout (a jiffy or jiffler type paddle). 3. Use maximum water allowed per the water requirements listed in the bag instructions. 4. Mix grout maximum time listed on bag instructions. 5. Using CRD-C611 (flow cone) determine time of mixed grout through the flow cone. seconds 6. Add water needed to attain 20- to 30-second flow per CRD-C611. 7. Record time of grout through cone at new water demand. seconds BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 03600 8 GROUT 8. Record total water needed to get 20- to 30-second flow. pounds 9. Record percent of water over manufacturer's recommendations. percent C. When fluid grout is specified and additional water is required above manufacturer's listed maximum water, CRD-C621 must be run at the new water/grout ratio to determine whether this grout passes using the actual water requirements to be fluid. Use this new water/grout ratio on all remaining tests. D. Bleed Test: 1. Fill two gallon cans half full of freshly mixed grout at ambient temperatures required for each category and at consistency specified for each. 2. Place one can of grout in tub of ice water; leave one can at ambient temperature. 3. Cover top of both cans with a glass or plastic plate to prevent evaporation. 4. Maintain 38 to 42 degrees F temperature with grout placed in ice, maintain ambient temperature for second container, for 1 hour. 5. Visually check for bleed water at 15-minute intervals for 2 hours. 6. Make final observation at 24 hours. Disqualify grout if it bleeds even a small amount at the temperatures specified for the category intended for use. E. Extended Time Flow Test (for Category II-B and III-B): 1. Leave the grout in the mix can and mix it with the drill mixer every 5 minutes for 20 seconds. Maintain this process for 1 hour at ambient temperatures of 40, 80, and 100 degrees F. 2. Take a CRD-C611 flow cone test of the grout at 20, 40, and 60 minutes and record the flow time. a. 20 min _, sec. @ 40 degrees F. b. 40 min _, sec. @ 40 degrees F. C. 60 min _, sec. @ 40 degrees F. d. 20 min _, sec. @ 80 degrees F. e. 40 min _, sec. @ 80 degrees F. f. 60 min _, sec. @ 80 degrees F. g. 20 min _, sec. @ 100 degrees F. h. 40 min _, sec. @ 100 degrees F. i. 60 min _, sec. @ 100 degrees F. BOI158870.A1.FN DULY 7, 2000 03600 9 GROUT Disqualify any Category B grout that will not go through the flow cone at 60 minutes. Disqualify any Category B grout for high temperature grouting environments that will not go through the flow cone at 60 minutes at temperatures 40, 80, and 100 degrees F. Qualified Disqualified F. 24-Hour Strength Test: 1. Using the grout left in the mixing cans per CRD-C621-89 as specified hereinbefore for the mixing and consistency determination test and for the extended time flow test, make a minimum of nine cube samples. 2. Store cubes at 70 degrees F for 24 hours. 3. Record average compressive strength of nine cubes at 24 hours. Disqualify grout if 24-hour compressive strengths are under 1,000 psi for grouts claiming fluid placement capabilities. Grouts that have not been disqualified after these tests are OK for use on the Project for the application shown in the specified table. Signature of Independent Test Lab Date Test Conducted Personnel Supervising and Certifying these Test and Test Results END OF SECTION B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 03600 10 GROUT SECTION 03605 DOWELING IN CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work necessary to place reinforcing dowels in concrete using a two - component epoxy adhesive. A. Product Data: Furnish technical data for epoxy adhesive, vinyl ester adhesives, grouts, and bonding agents suggested for the project work including installation instructions, independent laboratory test results, and handling and storage instructions. B. Quality Control Submittals: Furnish the following: 1. Manufacturer's specific instructions for drilling of holes, installation of anchors and epoxy or vinyl ester, and handling of cartridges, nozzles, and equipment. 2. Procedures for testing and verifying product meets specified requirements. 3. Special Inspection: Provide detailed step-by-step instructions for the special inspection procedure as required by ICBO reports and Section 306 of the Uniform Building Code. 4. Provide specific instructions from manufacturer for all products for all phases of installation and handling including hole size, preparation, placement, and safe handling and safe installation instructions to CONTRACTOR staff handling and installing these anchors. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage of Epoxy Components: 1. 3. B0I158870.A1.FN 03605 Store epoxy components on pallets or shelving in a covered storage area with locking door. Control temperature above 60 degrees F and dispose of product if shelf life has expired. If stored at temperatures below 60 degrees F, test components prior to use to determine if they still meet specified requirements. JULY 11, 2000 1 DOWELING IN CONCRETE PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Like Items of Materials: End products of one manufacturer in order to achieve structural compatibility, singular responsibility, and standardization for maintenance, and replacement. B. Use epoxy adhesive for doweling into concrete. 2.2 EPDXY ADHESIVES A. Epoxy Adhesive for Doweling: 1. Meet ASTM C881, Type 1, Grade 3, Class A, B, or C, depending onsite conditions. 2. Two -component, 100 percent solids, nonsag, paste, insensitive to moisture, designed to be used in adverse freeze/thaw environments and gray in color. 3. Cure Temperature, Pot Life, and Workability: Compatible for intended use and environmental conditions. 4. Container Markings: Include manufacturer's name, product name, batch number, mix ratio by volume, product expiration date, ANSI hazard classification, and appropriate ANSI handling precautions. B. Component "A" Base Resin: 1. Modified biphenyl -A type epoxy. 2. Viscosity: Light paste, 350 cps maximum prior to mixing to ensure proper wetting of moist concrete surfaces. 3. Fillers: 100 percent solids, fumed silica and selected annular micro silica powders. Do not use micro spheres, fly ash, or asbestos. 4. Color: White. C. Component `B" Hardener or Curing Agent: 1. Viscosity: Light paste. 2. Fillers: 100 percent solids, fumed silica and selected annular micro silica powders. Do not use micro spheres, fly ash, or asbestos. 3. Color: Black. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 03605 2 DOWELING IN CONCRETE D. Mixed Epoxy Adhesive: 1. Nonsag light paste consistency with ability to remain in a 1-inch diameter overhead drilled hole without runout, holding the following properties: a. Slant Shear Strength, ASTM C881/882, No Failure In Bond Line, Dry/Moist Conditions: 5,000 psi. b. Compressive Strength, ASTM D695: 14,000 psi, minimum. C. Tensile Strength, ASTM D695: 4,500 psi. d. Heat Deflection Temperature, ASTM D648: 135 degrees F, minimum. 2. Manufacturers: a. Adhesives Technology Corp., 21850 88th Place South, Kent, WA 98031, Anchor -It Fastening Systems, HS 200 Epoxy Resin, telephone 1-800-2624748. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head, P.O. Box 90, Paris, KY 40361, Epcon Ceramic 6 Epoxy Anchor System. C. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. 2.3 ANCHOR RODS A. Threaded Rods: Sized for design loads required and adhesive system used, by adhesive manufacturer: 1. ASTM A307, Grade A. 2. ASTM A193 (138), Type 304, stainless steel. B. Reinforcing Bars: As specified in Section 03210, REINFORCING STEEL. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Dispensing, Metering, or Mixing Epoxy Adhesive Components: Use portable, automatic metering and mixing device or machine capable of maintaining prescribed mix ratio within deviation of 5 percent or less, by volume. Do not use where fire and elevated temperatures can occur. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's specific quality control submittal specified hereinbefore. C. Dispense components through specially designed static mixing nozzle that thoroughly mixes components and places mixed adhesive at base of predrilled hole. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 :' 03605 3 DOWELING IN CONCRETE PART 4 PAYMENT 4.1 LUMP SUM BID A. Payment for Work in this Section will be included as part of the lump sum price for the appropriate item described in Volume 1 of 3, Special Provisions, SP-18 "Mechanical Process and Systems—ARFF Trainer". END OF SECTION B0I158870.Al.FN JULY 11, 2000 03605 6 DOWELING IN CONCRETE PART 1 1.1 SECTION 04230 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY GENERAL REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 405, Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A82, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for concrete Reinforcement. b. A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. C. C90, Standard Specification for Load -Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. d. C140, Standard Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units. e. C144, Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. f. C 150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. g. C207, Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. h. C270, Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. i. C404, Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout. j. C476, Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry. k. C652, Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale). 1. C744, Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units. 3. International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO): a. UBC Structural Engineering Design Provisions, Volume 2, Chapter 21. b. UBC Standard 21-16, Field Test Specimens for Mortar. C. UBC Standard 21-17, Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms (ASTM E447). d. UBC Standard 21-18, Method of Sampling and Testing Grout (ASTM C 1019). B0I158870.A1.FN DULY 11, 2000- 04230 1 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY B. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): I. ASTM C90, Type I medium weight. 2. Nominal Size: 16 inches long by 8 inches high by thickness shown on Drawings. 3. Color of Units: Natural. 4. Surface Texture on Exposed Surfaces: As shown on Drawings. 5. Surface Texture on Interior, Concealed Exterior, and Surfaces Below a Point 1 foot 0 inch Below Finished Grade: Smooth. 2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, or II, portland cement. B. Lime: ASTM C207, Type S hydrated. C. Aggregates: 1. Mortar: ASTM C144, sand. 2. Grout: ASTM C404. D. Water: Fresh, clean, potable. E. Mortar Plasticizer Admixture: American Colloid Co.; EasylSpred Plasticizer. F. Grout Admixture: Controlled expansion additive. 1. Manufacturer: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ; Grout Aid. 2.4 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcement: Clean and free from loose rust, scale, and coating that reduce bond. B. Furnish special manufactured corner and wall intersection pieces. C. Manufacturer: Duro-O-Wall National, Inc., Arlington Heights, IL. D. Deformed Bars: As specified in Section 03210, REINFORCING STEEL. 2.5 PREFORMED CONTROL JOINTS A. Solid rubber extrusions as manufactured by: 1. Dur-O-Wall National, Inc., Arlington Heights, IL; Regular Rapid Control Joint. 2. Sonneborn-Contech Co., Oakland, CA; Sonneborn Control Joint. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 04230 4 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY A. Minimum average mortar 28-day compressive strength 1,800 psi. B. Proportions: In accordance with ASTM C270, Type S. C. Mixing: 1. Machine mix in approved mixers. 2. Keep mixer drums clean and free of debris and dried mortar. 3. Mix by placing 1/2 water and 1/2 aggregate in operating mixer. 4. Add cement. 5. Add remaining aggregate and water and mix for at least 2 minutes. 6. Add lime and continue mixing as long as needed to secure a uniform mass, but no less than 3 minutes after addition of lime. 7. Time addition of admixture in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Procedure used for adding it to mix shall provide good dispersion. 8. Follow manufacturer's instructions for mortar plasticizer admixture. 2.7 GROUT MIXES A. Proportions: Conform to ASTM C476 for coarse grout except as follows: 1. Compressive Strength: Minimum 2,000 psi at 28 days. 2. For Pouring: a. Fluid consistency (suitable for pouring without segregation) meeting requirements of ASTM C476. b. Conform to Uniform Building Code, Tables No. 21-B and 21-C, except as noted. 3. For Pumping: Fluid consistency with minimum seven sacks of cement in each cubic yard. B. Mixing: 1. Onsite: Follow procedure specified in Article MORTAR. 2. Transit -Mixed Grout: Meet requirements of ASTM C476. 3. Add approved grout expansion admixture in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Premix admixture with water and add resulting solution to grout mix and thoroughly mix. Do not exceed quantity of admixture recommended by manufacturer. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 �_ = 04230 5 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare surface contact area on foundation concrete for initial mortar placement by one of following methods: 1. Sandblasting foundation and reinforcing dowels after concrete has fully cured to remove laitance and spillage and to expose sound aggregate. 2. Water blasting foundation and reinforcing dowels after concrete has partially cured to remove laitance and spillage and to expose sound aggregate. 3. Green cutting fresh concrete with high pressure water and hand tools to remove laitance and spillage from foundation and reinforcing dowels and to expose sound aggregate. B. Clean surfaces of loose material prior to initial mortar placement. C. Prevent surface damage to foundation concrete that will be exposed to view outside of contact area. 3.2 LAYING REINFORCED MASONRY UNITS A. General: 1. Conform to the Building Code applicable to this Project as supplemented by these Specifications. 2. Do not start laying masonry units unless foundation wall is plumb within 1/4 inch in 10 feet or not straight within 5/16 inch in 10 feet. 3. Finish Tolerances (Measured on Interior Surfaces): a. Maximum Permissible Variation From Plumb of Masonry Wall or of Line of Joints in Masonry Wall: 1/16 inch per foot of height, and 1/4 inch in the total height of the wall. b. Maximum Permissible Variation From Horizontal Line Along Base of Wall or for Lines of Horizontal Joints: 1/16 inch per block, 1/4 inch per 50 feet of wall with proportionately greater tolerance for longer walls up to 1/2 inch in total length of wall. 4. Place units with chipped edges or corners within permissible ASTM limits in wall such that chipped area is not exposed to view. B. Wall Units: 1. General: a. If necessary to move a unit after once set in place, remove from wall, clean, and set in fresh mortar. b. Toothing of masonry units is not permitted. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 04230 6 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY IN 2. Running Bond: a. Unless otherwise shown, lay up walls in straight, level, uniform courses using a running bond pattern. b. Place units for continuous vertical cells and mortar joints to prevent materials such as grout or poured insulation from escaping from cell being filled to adjacent cells where material is not intended to be placed. C. Special Shapes: 1. Provide and place such special units as corner block, door jamb block, lintel block fillers, and similar blocks as may be required. 2. Use required shapes and sizes to work to corners and openings, maintaining proper bond throughout wall. 3.3 BUILT-IN ITEMS A. Position door frames, windows, vents, louvers, and other items to be built in the wall, and construct wall around them. B. Install masonry anchors to secure items to wall. C. Fill spaces around items with mortar or grout. D. Do not place electrical, instrumentation, or water conduits in a cell containing reinforcement unless approved in writing by ENGINEER. 3.4 MORTAR JOINTS A. General: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5 B0I158870.A1.FN 04230 Straight, clean, with uniform thickness of 3/8 inch. Horizontal and vertical mortar joints shall have full mortar coverage on face shells. Vertical Head Joints: a. Butter well on each unit for a width equal to face shell of unit, shove tightly so mortar bonds well to both units. b. Solidly fill joints from face of block to at least the depth of face shell. As units are laid, remove excess mortar from grout space of cells to be filled. Place mortar before initial setting of cement takes place. Do not retemper mortar that has started to set. JULY 11, 2000 7 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY B. Exposed Joints: 1. Tool joints exposed to view after final construction, unless otherwise noted or shown. 2. Cut joints flush and, as mortar takes its initial set, tool to provide a concave joint. 3. Perform tooling when mortar is partially set but still sufficiently plastic to bond. 4. Perform tooling with a tool which compacts mortar, pressing excess mortar out rather than dragging it out. 5. Rake out joints which are not tight at time of tooling, point, and then tool. 6. Rake and tool joints at split -face surfaces, interior and exterior. C. Concealed Joints: Strike flush with no further treatment required. 3.5 CONTROL JOINTS A. Preformed Control Joints: 1. Omit mortar from vertical joints. 2. Place rubber control joint material as wall is built. 3. After wall is grouted, cured, and cleaned, install backing rod and sealant. 4. Place and tool sealant to match depth of typical joint. 3.6 REINFORCING A. Foundation Dowels: 1. Size, number, and location of foundation dowels shall match vertical wall reinforcing, unless otherwise noted. 2. When foundation dowel does not line up as intended, with vertical core, do not slope more than 1 horizontal to 6 vertical to bring it into alignment. B. Vertical Reinforcing: 1. Use deformed bars. 2. Hold in position near the ends of bars by wire ties to dowels or by reinforcing positioners. 3. Hold in position at maximum intervals of 160 bar -diameters by reinforcing positioners. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 04230 8 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY C. Horizontal Reinforcing: 1. Use deformed bars. 2. Lay on webs of bond beam units, and place as wall is built. 3. Lap reinforcing bars 48 bar -diameters minimum where spliced and wire tie together. 4. Minimum Bar Clearance: 1 bar -diameter from masonry and from additional parallel bars in same grout space. 3.7 GROUTING A. General: 1. Do not mix, convey, or place with equipment constructed of aluminum. 2. Secure vertical and horizontal reinforcement, ties, bolts, anchors, and other required embedments in place, inspect and verify before placing grout. 3. Grout beams over openings in one continuous operation. 4. Maintain vertical alignment in accordance with UBC Table 21-C. 5. Place grout as soon as possible after mortar has set to reduce shrinkage cracking of vertical joints. 6. Vertical Reinforcement: a. First wire tie to foundation dowels, then build wall around it. b. Provide reinforcing positioners or approved cross -bracing to secure top of steel in place. C. Do not drop in vertical steel after block is laid unless reinforcing positioners are provided in the course above previously grouted course. B. Grouting Requirements: 1. Partial Grouting Requirements: a. Fill cells containing reinforcing steel and others as shown with grout. b. Construct cells to be filled to confine grout within cell. C. Cover tops of unfilled vertical cells under a bond beam with metal lath to confine grout fill to bond beam section. 2. Form horizontal construction joints between pours by stopping the grout pour 1-1/2 inches below a mortar joint except at a bond beam, stop the pour 1/2-inch below the top of the masonry unit. 3. Partial Grouting with Insulation Fill: a. Where cells of masonry units are to receive masonry fill insulation in some cells and to receive grout in some cells, provide continuous mortar on block webs on each side of cells to be filled with grout to ensure that insulation will not enter grout cells. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 04230 9 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY b. Where bond beams are required together with both masonry fill insulation and grout, limit pours to less than 6 feet in height. 4. Fully embed horizontal steel by grout in an uninterrupted pour. 5. Do not construct wall more than one course above top of grout pour prior to placing grout. 6. Vibration: a. Use internal "pencil' type vibrator to thoroughly consolidate grout and reduce amount of air voids. b. After waiting sufficient time to permit the grout to become plastic, but before it has taken any set, reconsolidate grout. C. Waiting period will vary depending upon weather conditions and block absorption rates, but under "normal' weather conditions with average masonry units the waiting period should be between 30 to 60 minutes. A. Special inspection shall be provided as required on the Drawings. B. Masonry shall be tested by a testing agency retained by OWNER, in accordance with UBC Standard 21-17. C. Masonry test prisms shall be constructed onsite with the same materials and workmanship to be used for the Project. D. Provide adequate facilities for safe storage and proper curing of masonry prisms, mortar samples, and grout samples, as applicable, onsite for first 24 hours, and for additional time as may be required before transporting to test lab. E. Masonry Testing: 1. Prism Testing, see Article 1.3.A, QUALITY ASSURANCE, within this Section: a. Method and frequency of sampling and testing in accordance with UBC Section 2105.3.2. b. Prior to start of construction, construct and test a set of three prisms. C. During construction, construct and test an additional set of three prisms for each 5,000 square feet of wall area. d. Prepare and submit a test report for each set of prisms which includes name of testing lab and individual, dimensions, descriptions of materials, age of prism, maximum test load, net area, and compressive strength for each prism and for the set. B0I158870.A1.FN JLJLY 11, 2000 04230 10 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 3.9 CLEANING A. Immediately after completion of grouting, clean masonry surfaces, using clean water and fiber brushes, of excess mortar, grout spillage, scum, stains, dirt, and other foreign substances. B. Clean walls not requiring painting or sealing such that there are no visible stains. 3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Do not allow grout and mortar stains to dry on face of exposed masonry. B. When moisture protection is required, use light fog spray nozzles to cure mortar. C. Protect tops of walls at all times. Cover tops of walls with waterproof paper when rain or snow is imminent and when Work is discontinued. D. Adequately brace walls until walls and roof are completed. E. Provide sufficient bracing to protect walls against damage from elements, including wind and snow. F. Protect masonry against freezing for minimum 72 hours after being laid. G. Protect masonry from damage until final acceptance of Work. Damaged units will not be accepted. BOI158870.A1.FN 04230 END OF SECTION JULY 11, 2000 11 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SECTION 05050 WELDING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Society for Testing & Materials (ASTM): A370, Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products. 2. American Welding Society (AWS): a. B2.1, Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification. b. D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel. C. D1.2, Structural Welding Code - Aluminum. d. D1.3, Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. e. D 1.4, Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel. f. QC 1, Standard for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors. 1.2 DEFINMONS A. CWI-Certified Welding Inspector. B. NDT-Nondestructive Testing. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Shop and field welding procedure specifications (WPS). 2. Procedure qualification records (PQR). 3. Welding Documentation: Submit on appropriate forms in referenced welding codes. B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Welder/welding operator performance qualifications (WPQ). 2. Certified welding inspector (CWI) credentials. 3. Testing agency personnel credentials. 4. Welding inspector's report. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Welding Procedure Specifications: In accordance with AWS 131.1 (Annex E) or AWS B2.1 (App. A). BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 05050 1 WELDING B. Welder/Welding Operator: In accordance with AWS D1.1 (Annex E), AWS B2.1 (App. A). C. Welding Inspector: Certified in accordance with AWS QC I, and having prior experience with the welding codes specified. 1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Unless otherwise specified, all Submittals required in this Section shall be submitted and approved prior to commencement of welding operations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. The CWI shall be present whenever shop welding is performed. The CWI shall perform inspection before, during, and after welding. CWI duties include: 1. Verifying conformance of specified job material and proper storage. 2. Monitoring conformance with approved WPS. 3. Monitoring conformance of WPQ. 4. Inspecting weld joint fit -up and in -process inspection. 5. Providing 100 percent visual inspection of all welds. 6. Supervising nondestructive testing personnel and evaluating test results. 7. Maintaining records and preparing report confirming results of inspection and testing comply with the Work. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Welding and Fabrication by Welding: Conform to governing welding codes referenced in the attached Welding and Nondestructive Testing Table. 3.2 NONDESTRUCTIVE WELD TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. Weld Inspection Criteria: 1. Selection of Welds to be Tested: As agreed upon between ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR. 2. Weld Acceptance: a. Visual Inspection (VT): 1) Perform 100 percent VT of all welds. 2) Structural Tubing: AWS D1.1, paragraph 6.9, Visual Inspection, Tubular Connections; BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 05050 2 WELDING 3) All Other Structural Steel: AWS D1.1, paragraph 6.9, Visual Inspection, Statically Loaded Nontubular Connections. 4) Stud Connections: AWS D1.1, paragraph 7.8.1. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The CWI shall be present whenever field welding is performed. CWI shall perform inspection before, during, and after welding. CWI duties include: 1. Verifying conformance of specified job material and proper storage. 2. Monitoring conformance with approved welding procedure specifications (WPSs). 3. Monitoring conformance of welder/welding operator qualification (WPQs)- 4. Providing 100 percent visual inspection of all welds. 5. Supervising nondestructive testing personnel and evaluating test results. 6. Maintaining records and preparing report confirming results of inspection and testing. 3.4 WELD DEFECT REPAIR A. Repair and retest rejected weld defects until sound weld metal has been deposited in accordance with appropriate welding codes. 3.5 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplements listed below, following "END OF SECTION," are a part of this Specification. 1. Welding and Nondestructive Testing table. END OF SECTION BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 05050 3 WELDING WELDING AND NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING Submit Submit Written Submit Welder/ Onsite Nondestructive Welding Welding Welding Testing Nondestructive Specification Governing Welding Procedure Operator Inspector Procedure Testing Section Codes or Standards Spec, Qual. R 'd Specifications Requirements 05120 AWS D1.1, Structural Yes Yes No Yes 100% VI(4) STRUCTURAL Welding Code -Steel STEEL 05410 AWS D1.1, Structural Yes Yes No Yes 100% V'It4) LOAD BEARING Welding Code -Steel METAL or AWS D1.3, FRAMING Structural Welding SYSTEMS Code -Sheet Steel 05500 AWS D1.1, Structural Yes Yes No Yes 10% UT`1) or RTt of METAL Welding Code -Steel all groove -and -butt FABRICATIONS or AWS D1.2, joint welds, 10% AND CASTINGS Structural Welding M70) of all fillet Code -Aluminum welds 05520 AWS DI. I. Structural Yes Yes No Yes 100% VT0) HANDRABS Welding Code -Steel or AWS D1.2, Structural Welding Code -Aluminum 05530 AWS DIA, Structural Yes Yes No Yes 100% V'It4) METAL Welding Code -Steel GRATING or AWS D1.2, Structural Welding Code -Aluminum trkUT-Ultrasonic Testing. (2)RT-Radiographic Testing. (3)MT-Magnetic Particle Testing. (4)VT-Visual Testing BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 05050 SUPPLEMENT 1 WELDING .� � M�..,,,„„� , �.,�„�.� M..�.„,„,� � �„,,.. �„p � ��m� x, �� .. � a m��.,� q 5 SECTION 05500 FABRICATED METALWORK AND CASTINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work necessary to furnish and install, complete, fabricated metalwork and castings as shown or as required to secure various parts together and provide a complete installation. 1.2 SUBNMALS A. Product Data: Furnish the following: 1. Wedge Anchors: ICBO (International Conference of Building Officials) or other similar building code organization recommendations regarding safe allowable design loads. 2. Expansion Anchors: ICBO or other similar code organizations' recommendations regarding safe allowable design loads. 3. Epoxy Anchors: ICBO evaluation report for anchoring threaded rods into stone aggregate concrete. 4. Adhesive Anchors: ICBO evaluation report for anchoring threaded rods into stone aggregate concrete. 5. Product Data and Installation Instructions: Furnish for all materials and products used, including miscellaneous fabricated metals. B. Shop Drawings: Submit for all metalwork. C. Samples: Furnish the following: 1. Epoxy Anchor: Two self-contained epoxy adhesive cartridges for each batch of epoxy delivered to project site, for independent testing. 2. Color samples of abrasive nosings. D. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Epoxy Anchors: Furnish the following: a. Manufacturer's past project experience data on at least three similar projects supplied with proposed system within the last 3 years, to include client name, address, contact person, phone number, project location, and description of Work. b. Test reports for each batch of epoxy delivered to site. Provide manufacturer's written certification that each batch delivered BOI158870.A1.FN 05500 JULY 7, 2000 1 FABRICATED METALWORK AND CASTINGS meets these Specifications, the intended uses on Project, and capability to bond to damp or wet concrete surfaces. C. Manufacturer's written letter of certification identifying CONTRACTOR employees qualified for installing epoxy anchors, trained through jobsite instruction conducted by manufacturer. 2. All Concrete Anchors: Provide specific instructions for all phases of installation including hole size, preparation, placement, and procedures. Provide also specific instructions for safe handling and installation of all anchors to CONTRACTOR staff handling and installing these anchors. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Qualify welding operators in accordance with requirements of current AWS Standard Qualification Procedure D1.1, Chapter 5. 1. Qualification Tests: Performed by a recognized testing laboratory. B. Certification: Certify welders of structural and reinforcing steel for all positions of welding in accordance with such procedure. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Preparation for Shipment: 1. Insofar as practical, factory assemble items specified herein. 2. Package and clearly tag parts and assemblies that are of necessity shipped unassembled, in a manner that will protect materials from damage, and facilitate identification and field assembly. B. Storage of Epoxy Adhesive: 1. Store epoxy cartridges on pallets or shelving in a covered storage area. 2. Control temperature above 60 degrees F and dispose of cartridges if shelf life has expired. 3. If stored at temperatures below 60 degrees F, test adhesive prior to use to determine if adhesive meets specified requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Like Items of Materials: End products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, maintenance, and replacement. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 05500 2 FABRICATED METALWORK AND CASTINGS B. Lifting Lugs: Provide on equipment and equipment components weighing over 100 pounds. C. Furnish miscellaneous items: 1. Miscellaneous metalwork and castings as shown, or as required to secure various parts together and provide a complete installation. 2. Items specified herein are not intended to be all-inclusive. Provide metalwork and castings shown, specified, or which can reasonably be inferred as necessary to complete the Project. D. Unless otherwise indicated, materials shall meet the latest issue of ASTM Specifications as follows: Item Steel Shapes & Plates Steel Pipe Columns Structural Steel Tubing Stainless Steel: Bars & Shapes Steelplate, Sheet, & Strip Bolts Nuts Aluminum, Structural Shapes, & Plates ASTM Specification A36 A501 or A53, Type ERRS, Grade B A500, Grade B A276, Type 316 A 167, Type 316 A193, Type 316, BBMN, B8M2, or B8M3 A194, Type 316, BBMN, B8M2, or B8M3 Alloy 6061-T6, meeting referenced specifications & ASTM sections found in Aluminum Association current Construction Manual Series Connection Bolts for Steel A325-N, F959-85, F436 (Washers) Members; Use Hardened Washers also Under Head & Nut Anchor Bolts & Nuts: Carbon Steel A307 or A36 Stainless A193, Type 316 Galvanized Steel Bolts & Nuts A153, Zinc Coating for A307 or A36 Flat Washers (Unhardened) 17844, Use A153 for Zinc Coating.. B0I158870.A1.FN DULY 7, 2000 05500 3 FABRICATED METALWORK AND CASTINGS Item ASTMSpecification Steel Shapes & Plates A36 Threaded Bars A36 Connection Bolts for Aluminum A2024-T4; or Use Appropriate Stainless Steel Cast Iron A48, Class 30 2.2 ANCHOR BOLTS A. General Use: 1. Stainless Steel: For equipment and machinery, where permanently anchored into concrete, unless otherwise shown. 2. Diameter, Length, and Bend Dimensions: As required by equipment or machinery manufacturer. Unless otherwise required, provide 3/4-inch minimum diameter and other geometry as shown. 3. Furnish minimum two nuts and a washer of same material for each bolt. 4. Provide sleeves as required or as shown for location adjustment. B. Mockup Fabrication: 1. Galvanized steel. 2. Minimum Size: 3/4-inch-diameter, length as required, unless otherwise shown. 3. Furnish two nuts and one washer per bolt of same material as bolt, unless otherwise shown. C. For anchoring structural building columns, or other components where connection will be protected or dry: 1. Galvanized steel. 2. Minimum Size: 3/4-inch-diameter by 12-inch-long, unless otherwise shown. 3. Furnish two nuts and one washer per bolt of same material as bolt, unless otherwise shown. D. For anchoring fabricated metalwork or structural building, or structural frame components in areas of wet use, washdown areas, or areas outside heated buildings: 1. Stainless steel. 2. Minimum Size: 3/4-inch-diameter by 12-inch-long, unless otherwise shown. BOI158870.A1.FN J,y 7, 2000 05500 4 FABRICATED METALWORK AND CASTINGS 3. Furnish two nuts and one washer per bolt of same material as bolt, unless otherwise shown. 2.3 ANCHOR BOLT SLEEVE A. High Density Polyethylene Plastic: 1. Single unit construction with deformed sidewalis such that the concrete and grout lock in place. 2. The top of the sleeve shall be self -threading to provide adjustment of the threaded anchor bolt projection. 3. Material requirements shall conform to the following: a. Plastic: High density polyethylene. b. Density: ASTM D 1505. C. Vicat Softening Point: ASTM D1525. d. Brittleness Temperature: ASTM D746. 4. Manufacturer: Sinco West, 655 East Cochran Street, Simi Valley, CA 93085, telephone 805/522-3901; or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. B. Fabricated Steel Sleeve: 1. Material: A36 steel. 2. Dimensions, welding, and sizes as shown. 2.4 STAINLESS STEEL FASTENERS LUBRICANT (ANTISEIZING) A. Provide for stainless steel nuts and machined bolts, anchor bolts, concrete anchors, and all other threaded fasteners. B. Lubricant shall contain substantial amounts of molybdenum disulfide, graphite, mica, talc, or copper as manufactured by: 1. Loc Tite Co., Permatex. 2. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. 2.5 ANCHORING SYSTEMS FOR CONCRETE A. Wedge Anchors: 1. 100 percent 316 stainless steel. 2. Do not provide for submerged conditions. 3. Sizes: As shown. 4. Manufacturer: a. ITT Phillips Drill Div., Michigan City, IN. b. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK, Hilti Super Kwik-Bolt, stud type. C. Wej-It Corp., Broomfield, CO, Wej-It. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 05500 5 FABRICATED METALWORK AND CASTINGS d. Molly Division of Emhart Corp., Temple, PA, Parabolt Concrete Anchors. e. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. B. Expansion Anchors: 1. Self -drilling anchors, snap -off type or flush type. 2. Provide anchors for use with hot -dipped galvanized bolts. 3. Nondrilling Anchors: Flush type for use with bolt or stud type with projecting threaded stud. 4. Provide in dry areas only where future corrosion is not a problem unless expansion anchors are 316 stainless steel. 5. In wet or damp areas, provide wedge anchors as specified, or in submerged conditions, adhesive anchors as specified. 6. 316 stainless steel expansion anchors may be provided as defined for stainless wedge anchors. 7. Manufacturer: a. ITT Phillips Drill Div., Michigan City, IN. b. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK, Hilti HDI Drop -In anchors. C. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. C. Epoxy Anchors: 1. Provide for anchoring metal components at or below a point 1 foot 6 inches above maximum water surface elevation in water -holding structures, or buried in earth conditions. Do not use where fire or elevated temperatures can occur. 2. Anchor Rod: 316 stainless steel threaded rod free of grease, oil, or other deleterious material with a 45-degree chisel point. 3. Epoxy Adhesive: a. Meet ASTM C881, Type 1, Grade 3, Class A, B, or C. f` b. Two -component, 100 percent solids, nonsag, paste, insensitive to moisture, designed to be used in adverse freeze/thaw" environments and gray in color. C. Cure Temperature, Pot Life, and Workability: Compatible for 1. intended use and environmental conditions. 4. Mixed Epoxy Adhesive: a. Nonsag paste consistency with ability to remain in a 1-inch z diameter overhead drilled hole without runout, holding the following properties:-� 1) Slant Shear Strength, ASTM C881/882, No Failure In Bond Line, Dry/Moist Conditions: 5,000 psi. 2) Compressive Strength, ASTM D695: 14,000 psi minimum. 3) Tensile Strength, ASTM D695: 4,500 psi. BOI158870.A1.FN JITLY 7, 2000 05500 6 FABRICATED METALWORK AND CASTINGS 2.7 4) Heat Deflection Temperature, ASTM D648: 135 degrees F, minimum. 5. Epoxy Adhesive Packaging: a. Disposable, self-contained cartridge system capable of dispensing both epoxy components in the proper mixing ratio, and fit into a manually or pneumatically operated caulking gun. b. Dispense components through a mixing nozzle that thoroughly mixes components and places epoxy at base of predrilled hole. C. Mixing Nozzles: Disposable, manufactured in several sizes to accommodate sizes anchor rods. d. Cartridge Markings: Include manufacturer's name, batch number, mix ratio by volume, product expiration date, ANSI hazard classification, and appropriate ANSI handling precautions. 6. Manufacturers: a. Adhesives Technology Corp., 21850 88th Place South, Kent, WA, 98031, Anchor -It Fastening Systems, HS 200 Epoxy Resin. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head, P.O. Box 90, Paris, KY 40361, Epcon Ceramic 6 Epoxy Anchor System. C. Covert Operations, Long Beach, CA or Chester, NJ, CIA Epoxy Anchors with viscosity to suit application. d. Rawlplug Co., Inc., New Rochelle, NY, Rawl/Sika Foil Fast Epoxy Injection Gel System. e. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. PIPE SLEEVES A. Provide as follows: 1. Stainless steel, Schedule 40 steel pipe sleeves where shown for piping passing through concrete or masonry. 2. Holes drilled with a rotary drill may be provided in lieu of sleeves in existing walls. 3. Provide a center flange for water stoppage on sleeves in exterior or water -bearing walls. 4. Provide a rubber caulking sealant or a modular mechanical unit to form a watertight seal in the annular space between pipes and sleeves. STRUCTURAL STEEL SUPPORTS A. Provide structural steel supports of sizes and weights shown. Weld connections, unless otherwise shown. BOI158870.A1.FN 05500 JULY 7, 2000 7 FABRICATED METALWORK AND CASTINGS MKMMM' • 11_ 0 A. Type 316 stainless steel as specified if not permanently embedded in concrete, but located in areas as follows: 1. Outdoors in areas subject to the weather. 2. Chemical handling areas. 3. Equipment rooms subject to drainage, leakage, and washdown. 4. In galleries and trenches. B. ASTM A307 or A36 with ASTM A153 galvanized if not permanently .embedded in concrete, and not used for structural steel or piping, but located indoors where washdown, leakage, and drainage are not likely to occur (e.g., in personnel buildings excluding laboratories, on motor floors, in electrical equipment rooms, and in control rooms). C. For Flanges of Piping, Valves, and Other Similar Connections: As specified in other sections or as shown. 2.9 GALVANIZING A. Fabricated metals used on this project are stainless steel or aluminum and do not require galvanizing. B. The exception is the aircraft mockup and ignitor mounting box assemblies in the burn pit that are fabricated from steel and are not to be painted or galvanized. Do not galvanize or paint aircraft mockup or fabricated steel in the burn pit. 2.10 ALLIMNMgUM HANDRAEL A. Shop -fabricated aluminum pipe component railing for handrail and guardrail systems for exterior work. B. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM B211—Aluminum-Alloy Bars, Rods, and Wire. 2. ASTM B221—Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. 3. ASTM B241—Aluminum-Alloy Steamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube. C. Quality Assurance: 1. Qualification of Fabricator: Fabricator shall have at least five (5) years experience in the manufacture of aluminum railing systems. .t r B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 05500 8 FABRICATED METALWORK AND CASTINGS D. Submittals: 1. Shop fabrication Drawings to include the following: a. Verification that each type of completed rail installation will resist 200 pounds at any point on top rail without damage or permanent set, in compliance with OSHA requirements. b. Elevations of rails showing height and sizes. C. Relationship of rails to adjoining work. d. Type, size, and finish of pipes. e. Each type of connection required to fit all conditions and 200 pounds requirements specified. f. All details required to complete the Work. E. Aluminum Pipe Railing System: 1. Rails and Posts: Provide nominal 1-1/2-inch I.D. Schedule 40 extruded 6063T6 aluminum conforming to ASTM B241. Posts shall be spaced at a maximum of Y-0" O.C. On the Drawings, rail sizes of 1-1/4 inches and 1-1/2 inches are used interchangeably; 1-1/2-inch I.D. pipe rail shall be provided throughout this Project. 2. Pickets: Provide Schedule 40 extruded 6036T6 aluminum conforming to ASTM B241. Diameter of pickets shall not be less than 3/4 inch O.D. or more than 7/8 inch O.D. Pickets shall be spaced at 4-1/2 inches O.C., maximum. 3. Fittings: Elbows, T-shapes, wall brackets, escutcheons; machined aluminum. 4. Splice Connectors: Welding collars, machined aluminum. 5. Exposed Fasteners: Flush countersunk stainless steel screws or bolts; consistent with design of railing. 6. Finish: Anodized. 7. Inserts for Casting in Concrete Slab: Pipes not less than 6 inches deep and 1/2 inch larger than outside diameter of posts for grout. Pipe sleeves shall be complete with plate closures at bottom of sleeves, 1/2 inch larger than outside diameter of sleeves, with continuous welds for complete closure. 8. For Walls: Anchorage shall be of type and size to suit the type of wall construction for compliance with design requirements. 9. For Metal Structure: Anchorage shall be of type to suit the structure for compliance with design requirements. 10. For Removable Type Rails: Where required, use "slip -fit" sockets with plate closures at bottom of sockets which are 1/2 inch larger than sockets, with continuous welds for complete closurer. 11. All fasteners and attachments shall be aluminum or stainless steel. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 05500 9 FABRICATED METALWORK AND CASTINGS F. General Fabrication: 1. Guardrails and handrails shall meet the following load requirements: a. Pipe railing system shall be component fabricated, complete with connectors to structure designed for a concentrated load of 200 pounds applied at any point and in any direction on the handrail and at the top of the guardrail and in compliance with SBC 1991. b. Guardrail system shall be designed and constructed for a load of 50 pounds per lineal foot applied horizontally at the required guardrail height and a simultaneous load of 100 pounds per lineal foot applied vertically downward at the top of the guardrail. C. The guardrail system shall also bedesigned and constructed to resist a 200-pound concentrated horizontal load applied on a one - foot -square area at any point in the system including intermediate rails or other elements serving this purpose. d. Handrails shall also be designed and constructed for a load of 50 pounds per lineal foot applied in any direction. e. Loading conditions stated shall not be applied simultaneously, but each shall be applied to produce maximum stress in each of the respective components or any of the supporting components. f. Fabricate in accordance wit approved Shop Drawings. 2. Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication. 3. Railing system shall be assembled in a shop in largest sizes for delivery to site and for installation. 4. Close open ends of railings. 5. Where pipes intersect, cope the butting ends to closely fit contour of pipe joined, and weld. 6. Make exposed joints tight, flush, and hairline. 7. Splice Connections: With concealed spigots, flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. 8. Accurately form components required for anchoring railing to each other and to building structure. 9. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints at locations indicated. If not indicated, locate at intervals not to exceed 40 feet. a. Provide slip joint interval sleeve extending beyond joint on each side; secure sleeve to one side. b. Do not locate expansion joints closer than 6 inches from post. 10. For Exterior Installations: Provide weepholes or other means for evacuation of water trapped in pipe rails. 11. Form simple and compound curves by bending pipes in jigs to produce uniform curves: Maintain profile of pipes throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 05500 10 FABRICATED METALWORK AND CASTINGS M 12. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide 4-inch by 1/4-inch-thick extruded aluminum toe boards around openings and at edge of open -sided floors and platforms. 2.11 ALUMINUM GRATINGS A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this Section: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): B221, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. 2. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): a. ANSI MBG 531, Metal Bar Grating Manual. b. ANSI MBG 532, Heavy -Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual. 1. Shop Drawings: a. Grating: Show dimensions, weight, and size, and location of connections to adjacent grating, supports, and other Work. b. Grating Supports: Show dimensions, weight, size, location, and anchorage to supporting structure. C. Catalog information and catalog cuts. C. FOOT TRAFFIC GRATING 1. Design: a. Uniform Service Load: 100 psf minimum, unless otherwise shown. b. Maximum Deflection: 1/4 inch, unless otherwise shown. C. Space bearing bars at 1-3/16-inch center -to -center. d. Banding: 3/16-inch minimum. 2. Material: a. Aluminum Bar Type Grating: Press -locked rectangular design, as manufactured by IKGBorden, Clark, NJ; IKGBorden Type B or Type F, or equal. 3. Stair Treads: a. Material and Type: Same as grating material and grating type as furnished for connecting walkway or work surface. b. Nosings: Integral ribbing and serrated edge on one long axis of tread or nonslip, abrasive on each tread along one long edge. C. Carrier Plate or Angle: Furnish at each end for connection to stair stringers. d. Manufacturers: Same as for grating. s B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 05500 11 FABRICATED METALWORK AND CASTINGS D. Accessories: 1. Anchor Bolts and Nuts: a. Stainless Steel: ASTM A193 and ASTM A194, Type 316. 2. Removable Fastener Clips and Bolts: a. Removable from above grating walkway surface. b. Hat Bracket: Type 304 stainless steel. C. Bolt: Type 316 stainless steel. 3. Partially Removable Anchor: a. Bolt: Threaded stud, Type 316 stainless steel. 1) Manufacturer: Nelson Stud Welding Co., Lorain, OH. b. Hat Bracket: Type 304 stainless steel. 1) Manufacturer: STRUCT-FAST, Wellesley Hills, MA. E. Fabrication: 1. General: a. Exposed Surfaces: Smooth finish and sharp, well-defined lines. b. Furnish necessary rabbets, lugs, and brackets so work can be assembled in a neat, substantial manner. C. Conceal fastenings where practical. d. Drill metalwork and countersink holes as required for attaching hardware or other materials. e. Weld Connections: Not permitted on grating except at banding bars. 2. Design: a. Field measure areas to receive grating, verify dimensions of new fabricated supports, and fabricate to dimension required for specified clearances. b. Section Length: Sufficient to prevent its falling down through clear opening when oriented in the span direction when one end is touching either the concrete or the vertical leg of grating support. C. Furnish stainless steel Type 316 threaded anchor studs, as fasteners for grating attachment to metal supports either not embedded or partially embedded in concrete, as manufactured by Nelson Studs Welding Co., Lorain, OH. 3. Supports: a. Seat angles and beams where shown: Material 304 stainless steel. b. Coordinate dimensions and fabrication with grating to be supported. C. Coordinate dimensions with increased depth due to serrations. d. Welded Frames With Anchors: Continuously welded. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 05500 12 FABRICATED METALWORK AND CASTINGS 4. Aluminum: a. ASTM B221 extruded shapes. b. Fabricate as shown and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Grind smooth sheared edges exposed in the finished work. d. Grating: 1) Install supports such that grating sections have a solid bearing on both ends, and that rock and wobble grating movement does not occur under designed traffic loading. 2) Install plumb or level as applicable. 3) Install welded frames with anchors to straight plane without offsets. 4) Anchor grating securely to supports using minimum of four fastener clips and bolts per grating section. 5) Use stainless steel anchors and accessories with aluminum gratings. 6) Completed installation shall be rigid and neat in appearance. 7) Commercially Manufactured Products: a) Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. b) Secure grating to support members with fasteners. c) Welding is not permitted. d) Fasteners: Field locate and install. e) Permit each grating section or plank style grating assembly to be easily removed and replaced. e. Should coating become marred, prepare and touch up surface in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Exposed Surfaces Finish: Smooth, sharp, well-defined lines. 2. Provide necessary rabbets, lugs, and brackets so Work can be assembled in neat, substantial manner. 3. Conceal fastenings where practical. 4. Drill metalwork and countersink holes as required for attaching hardware or other materials. 5. Fabricate materials as specified. 6. Weld connections, except where bolting is directed. 7. Methods of fabrication not otherwise specified or shown shall be adequate for stresses and as approved. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 05500 13 FABRICATED METALWORK AND CASTINGS 8. Grind exposed edges of welds smooth on walkways, guardrails, handrails, stairways, channel door frames, steel column bases, and where shown. 9. Round sharp edges to 1/8-inch minimum radius. Grind burrs, jagged edges, and surface defects smooth. B. Aluminum: 1. Fabricate as shown, and in accordance with the Aluminum Association Standards and manufacturer's recommendations as approved. 2. Grind smooth sheared edges exposed in finished work. 3.2 - WELDING A. General: 1. Meet codes for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction of the AWS and AISC for techniques of welding employed, appearance, quality of welds made, and the methods of correcting defective work. 2. Welding Surfaces: Free from loose scale, rust, grease, paint, and other foreign material, except mill scale which will withstand vigorous wire brushing may remain. 3. A light film of linseed oil may likewise be disregarded. 4. Do not weld when temperature of base metal is lower than zero degrees F. 5. Finished members shall be true to line and free from twists. 6. Prepare welds and adjacent areas such that there is: a. No undercutting or reverse ridges on the weld bead. b. No weld spatter on or adjacent to the weld or any other area to be painted. C. No sharp peaks or ridges along the weld bead. 7. Grind embedded pieces of electrode or wire flush with adjacent surface of weld bead. B. Welding Operators: As specified in PART 1, Article QUALITY ASSURANCE. C. Aluminum: 1. Weld with Gas Metal Arc (iVIIG) or Gas Tungsten Arc MG) processes in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions as approved, and in accordance with recommendations of the American Welding Society contained in the Welding Handbook, as last revised. 2. Grind smooth all exposed aluminum welds. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 05500 14 FABRICATED METALWORK AND CASTINGS 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METALWORK A. General: 1. Install in accordance with Shop Drawings, the Drawings, and these Specifications. 2. Install fabricated metalwork plumb or level as applicable. 3. Completed installations shall be rigid, substantial, and neat in appearance. 4. Erect structural steel in accordance with applicable portions of AISC Code of Standard Practice, except as modified. 5. Install commercially manufactured products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations as approved. B. Aluminum: 1. Erection: In accordance with the Aluminum Association. 2. Do not remove mill markings from concealed surfaces. 3. Remove inked or painted identification marks on exposed surfaces not otherwise coated after installed material has been inspected and approved. 4. Handrail: a. Install railing system level and plumb, free from distortion or defects. b. Fit field connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. C. Do NOT field -cut or alter railing system without Manufacturer's approval. d. Field assembly shall be of same quality and finish as performed in shop. e. Comply with approved Shop Drawings. f. Set pipe sleeves when concrete is being poured. g. Set railing sections in pipe sleeves ONLY after concrete is properly cured. h. Set railing sections in pipe sleeves and pour non -shrink grout between posts and pipe sleeves. Pipe sleeves must be clean of loose material before setting rails in place. 3.4 ANCHOR BOLTS A. Accurately locate and hold anchor bolts in place with templates at the time concrete is placed. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 05500 15 FABRICATED METALWORK AND CASTINGS 3.5 CONCRETE ANCHORS A. Do not begin installation until concrete or masonry receiving anchors has attained design strength. B. Do not install an anchor closer than six times its diameter to either an edge of concrete or masonry, or to another anchor, unless specifically shown otherwise. C. Install in accordance with manufacturer's specific quality control submittal instructions specified hereinbefore. Use manufacturer's recommended drills and equipment. Hole diameters are critical to installation, use only drills recommended by anchor manufacturer. Follow manufacturer's safe handling instructions. D. Epoxy Anchors: Do not install when temperature of concrete is below 35 degrees F or above 110 degrees F. E. Follow specific manufacturer safe handling practices when handling and/or installing all concrete anchors. 3.6 STAINLESS STEEL FASTENERS LUBRICANT (ANTISEM,1G) A. Apply specified antiseizing lubricant to threads prior to making up connections. 3.7 GALVANIZING AND REPAIR A. Surface Preparation: 1. Thoroughly clean welded areas prior to galvanizing to remove slag or other material that would interfere with adherence of zinc. 2. When necessary to straighten any sections after galvanizing, perform without damage to zinc coating. B. Iron and Steel Hardware, and Nuts and Bolts: 1. Meet ASTM A153. 2. Perform after fabrication. 3. Galvanizing of tapped holes is not required. C. Fabrication includes operations such as shearing, cutting, punching, forming, drilling, milling, bending, welding, and riveting. D. Galvanize components of bolted assemblies separately before assembly. B0I158870.A1.FN JULy 7, 2000 05500 16 FABRICATED METALWORK AND CASTINGS E. Bolt Threads: 1. Minimum pitch diameter of threaded portion of bolts, anchor bars, or studs shall meet ANSI B 1. 1, having a Class 2A tolerance before galvanizing. 2. After galvanizing, pitch diameter of nuts or other internally threaded parts may be tapped over ANSI B 1. 1, Class 2B tolerance, by the following maximum amounts: a. 3/8-inch through 9/16-inch: 0.016-inch oversize. b. 5/8-inch through 1-inch: 0.023-inch oversize. C. 1-1/8-inch and Larger: 0.033-inch oversize. F. Prepare galvanized surfaces to be painted in the field approximately 48 to 72 hours before painting as specified in Section 09900, PAINTING, System No. 10, Galvanized Metal Conditioning. G. Except for inlet grates not otherwise required to be welded, completely seal edges of tightly contacting surfaces, where galvanizing is required, by welding before galvanizing. H. Repairs: 1. Clean galvanized surfaces that are abraded or damaged after application of zinc coating with solvent on the damaged area (Steel Structures Painting Council SP 1) and hand or power tool (Steel Structures Painting Council SP 2 or SP 3) the damaged areas, removing loose and cracked coating. 2. After cleaning, apply paint to cleaned surface as specified in Section PAINTING, System No. 11. 3.8 MOCKUP A. The Drawings show the dimensions and general configuration of the structural steel components fabricated from ASTM A36 steel shapes and plates. The mockup sections shall be fabricated by bolting and welding into rigid sections shown. Rigid sections are supported by saddles, supports, and pins, and are designed to allow for movement from the thermal expansion/contraction. The CONTRACTOR shall fabricate the mockup to the dimensions shown and from the general structural size shown. The CONTRACTOR shall submit Shop Drawings of the mockup showing all steel components and sizes and the welding and bolting assembly of the various rigid sections and the assembly, including welding and bolting, that will be included in the field. The expanded metal grating shown on the Drawings used in the handline training fire structures shall be fabricated from diamond type deck span with serrations, approximately 5/8 inch thick, and shall be grip strut manufactured by BOI158870.A1.FN DULY 7, 2000 05500 17 FABRICATED METALWORK AND CASTINGS McNichols Co., Dallas, Texas, (214) 349-3150; Deck Span manufactured by IKG Industries, Nashville, Tennessee, (615) 782-4710, or approved equal. Layers of the grating shall be welded in an alternating and offset pattern to minimize the see -through area. Layers shall be tack welded together along the perimeter and at center locations to form a single unit. B. The grid steel that is installed in the bottom of the tire pans, fuselage, and engines, is designed to contain the fuel but also drain. The grid steel is to be laid lose where shown, and only tack welded where shown on the plans. The grid steel shall be grid steel manufactured by IFG Industries, Standard Type, without Lance, 3/4 inch bar depth, 14 gage. PART 4 PAYMENT 4.1 LUMP SUM BID A. Payment for Work in this Section will be included as part of the lump sum price for the appropriate item described in Volume 1 of 3, Special Provisions, SP-18 "Mechanical Process and Systems—ARFF Trainer". END OF SECTION B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 05500 18 FABRICATED METALWORK AND CASTINGS 1 SECTION 06000 CARPENTRY PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. A135.4, Basic Hardboard. b. A208.1, Wood Particleboard. 2. American Plywood Association (APA): Grades and Specifications. 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. b. D226, Standard Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 4. American Wood Preservers' Association (AWPA): C2, Lumber, Timbers, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties -Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes. 5. American Wood Preservers Bureau (AWPB): LP-2, Water Borne Preservatives (Above Ground). 6. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI): Quality Standards, Guide Specifications and Quality Certification Program. 7. Product Standards (PS)-U.S. Department of Commerce National Bureau of Standards: a. 1, For Construction and Industrial Plywood. b. 20, American Softwood Lumber Standard. 8. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA): Standard Grading Rules for Western Lumber. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Cabinets, Casework, and Running Trim: a. Show field measurements, construction details, dimensions, materials, and finish. b. Use full-size or 1/4-scale drawings. C. Key Shop Drawings to Contract Document Drawings. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 06000 1 CARPENTRY r 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber Grades and Wood Species: U.S. Product Standard PS 20 and the National Forest Products Association. 1. Wood Members: Requirements above and in "Design Values for Wood Construction", supplement to the National Design Specification for Wood Construction, published by National Forests Products Association. 2. Identify each piece or bundle of lumber or other product with a recognized mark of the authority grading the product. B. Plywood Grades: U.S. Product Standard PS 1. Identify each plywood panel with appropriate grade trademark of American Plywood Association. C. Finish Carpentry: Quality Standards of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AVM unless detailed otherwise. D. Preservative and Pressure Treated Material: American Wood Preservers Association Standards (AWPA) and bear the American Wood Preservers Bureau (AWPB) quality mark designation. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Place materials in dry storage areas immediately upon delivery and maintain relative humidity at 60 percent or less. B. Store materials 6 inches minimum aboveground on framework or blocking; cover with protective waterproof covering and provide adequate air circulation or ventilation. C. Do not store seasoned materials in wet or damp portions of building. D. Do not subject to extreme changes of temperature or humidity. E. Protect fire -retardant materials against high humidity and moisture during storage and erection. F. Protect sheet materials from corner breaks and surface damage while unloading. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 06000 2 CARPENTRY PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER A. Framing Lumber: Dimensions given are nominal; surface four sides (S4S); moisture content not over 19 percent, unless specified otherwise; provide as follows: Usage Minimum Grade General framing, studs, plates, Standard & Better or Stud Grade blocking, furring, braces, & nailers Structural joists, headers, & Douglas fir or Larch No. 2, or planks, 2 to 4 inches thick by Southern Pine No. 2 5 inches & wider Beams, stringers, posts, timbers Douglas fir or Larch No. 1 B. Interior Trim: Douglas fir, C Select Grade, or AWI Custom Grade. 2.2 PLYWOOD A. Roof Sheathing: APA rated sheathing, EXT, 24/0 or greater. B. Softwood Plywood: APA A-B Interior. C. Subfloor: APA rated sheathing EXT. D. Combined. Subfloor Underlayment: APA rated Sturd-I-Floor EXT, tongue - and -groove edge, sanded. 2.3 PRESERVATIVE TREATED WOOD A. Material: Waterborne salt preservatives; AWPA C2 and AWPB LP-2. Furnish sufficient amount for onsite application to sawed or cut surfaces. 2.4 ANCILLARY MATERIALS A. Fasteners: 1. Nails: Steel common nails for framing, sizes as shown; hot -dipped zinc - coated nails where exposed; deformed shank nails for fastening underlayment. 2. Bolts and Screws: ASTM A307, galvanized where exposed. 3. Framing Anchors: Simpson, galvanized 18 gauge steel, complete with nails recommended by manufacturer. 4. Provide fasteners and miscellaneous hardware required for assembling and anchoring finish woodwork. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 06000 3 CARPENTRY PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces to receive carpentry items are prepared. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Do not install finish interior woodwork until the building has been dried for at least 10 days. 3.3 ROUGH CARPENTRY ERECTION A. Preservative Treated Wood: 1. Use for framing, blocking, furring, nailing strips built into exterior masonry walls, wood in contact with concrete and in conjunction with gravel stops, and built-up roofing. 2. Apply two brush coats of same preservative used in original treatment to all sawed or cut surfaces of treated lumber. B. Sill Plates: 1. Set sill plates level and flush with outside face of foundation or as shown. 2. Anchor as shown. C. Stud Framing: 1. Plates and Stud Members: a. Provide single bottom plates and single top plates for nonload- bearing partitions, 2 inches thick by width of studs. b. Provide studs in continuous lengths without splice. C. End nail studs to bottom plate and end nail to lower top plate. Tilt up and anchor into place. d. Face -nail upper top plate to lower top plate. e. Anchor bottom plate to structure as shown on Drawings. f. Triple studs at corners and partition intersections. g. Frame openings with double studs and headers for openings less than 4 feet; triple studs and headers for openings 4 feet and greater. 2. Blocking: Locate blocking to facilitate installation of finishing materials, fixtures, specialty items, hardware, and trim. D. Joist and Beam Framing: 1. Install according to Trus-Joist recommendations. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 06000 4 CARPENTRY l 3.4 FINISH CARPENTRY INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Lay out, cut, fit, and install finish carpentry items. 2. Anchor to ensure rigidity, tight fit, and permanence, and as shown. l 3. Install items accurate to dimension, true to line, level, and square unless otherwise shown. 4. Install running trim in as long a length as practical. a. Miter corners of casings and moldings. b. Anchor securely using finishing nails. C. Counter set nails 1/16-inch maximum for filling. 5. Follow manufacturer's instructions for installation of hardware, vents, framing anchors, and other items. a. Make Work neat and secure, developing full strength of components and providing intended function. END OF SECTION BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 06000 5 CARPENTRY ........ . -1 1 �1-111-� �1111'1111111111 F---" - �-"q PART 1 1.1 SECTION 06190 PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES GENERAL A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): SS502, Stainless Steel Fasteners a Systematic Approach to Their Selection. 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. B 18.2.1, Square and Hex Bolts and Screws Inch Series; Supplement B 18.2.1. b. B 18.6.1, Wood Screws (Inch Series). 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. b. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. C. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. d. A446, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality. e. A525, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. f. A526, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Commercial Quality. g. A527, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Lock -Forming Quality. h. A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. i. A591, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc -Coated, for Light Coating Mass Applications. j. A792, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated by the Hot -Dip Process, General Requirements. 4. American Wood -Preservers' Association (AWPA): C20, Structural Lumber - Fire -Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes. 5. Department of Commerce (DOC): PS 20, American Softwood Lumber. 6. Federal Specifications (FS): FF-N-105, (Rev B; Int Am 4) Nails, Brads, Staples and Spikes: Wire, Cut and Wrought. 7. National Forest Products Association (NFOPA): 01, National Design Specification for Wood Construction. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 06190 1 PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 8. Truss Plate Institute (TPI): a. TPI, Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses. b. QST, Quality Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses Addendum to TPI. C. BWT, Bracing Wood Trusses. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. SPIB: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. B. TPI: Truss Plate Institute. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Shop Drawings showing species and stress grades of lumber, all dimensions, camber, spacing of trusses in building, connector types, detail of connectors, and bracing requirements. Include an elevation view drawings of trusses of sufficient scale to show all details of construction. 2. Product data for lumber, metal connector plates, hardware, fabrication process, and fasteners. 3. Wood treatment data on chemical treatment and finish treatment of material. 4. Design Data: Calculations for stresses in all members and connections. Calculations stamped and signed by a registered professional engineer. B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Certificates: f a. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Connector Plate Manufacturer: Member of TPI and complies with TPI quality control procedures for manufacture of connector plates published in TPI QST. 2. Engineer. Registered professional engineer legally authorized to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and experienced in providing engineering services that has resulted in the installation of wood trusses similar to those of this Project. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 06190 2 PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 3. Fabricator: Firm that is experienced in prefabricating wood trusses similar to those of this Project and participates in a recognized quality assurance program that involves inspection by SPIB and TPI. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle and store trusses with care and comply with manufacturer's instructions and TPI recommendations to avoid damage from bending, overturning, or other causes which trusses are not designed to resist or endure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Prefabricated wood trusses include planar structural units consisting of metal - plate -connected members that are fabricated from dimensional lumber and have been cut and assembled prior to delivery to the Project site. B. Comply with requirements and recommendations of the following TPI publications: 1. TPI (Errata; Supplement). 2. QST. 3. BWT. C. Design trusses to suit conditions shown on Drawings and to meet local building codes. A. Factory mark each piece of lumber with type, grade, mill, and grading agency. B. Use lumber complying with PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. C. Dressed lumber, S4S, manufactured to actual sizes required by PS 20 to comply with the following: 1. Moisture Content: Seasoned, with15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2 inches or less in nominal thickness. 2. Species and grade that complies with the following for species group as defined in NFOPA 01 for extreme fiber stress in bending "Fb" for single and repetitive members, and for modulus of elasticity "E": a. Chord Members: "Fb" of 1,500 psi for single member use and of 1,750 psi for repetitive member use, and "B" of 1,600,000 psi. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 06190 3 PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES b. Web Members: "Fb" of 1,300 psi for single member use and 1,500 psi for repetitive member use, and "E" of 1,600,000 psi. 2.3 CONNECTOR PLATES A. Hot -Dip Galvanized Steel Sheet: Structural (physical) quality steel sheet complying with ASTM A446, Grade A; zinc coated by hot -dip process to comply with ASTM A525, Designation G60; minimum coated metal thickness not less than 0.036-inch. B. Connector Plate Manufacturers: 1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. 2. Bemax of Florida, Inc. 3. Clary Corp. 4. Computrus, Inc. 5. Gang -Nail Systems, Inc. 6. Hydro -Air Engineering, Inc. 7. Inter -Lock Steel Co., Inc. 8. Metal -Lock, Inc. 9. Robbins Manufacturing Co. 10. TEE-Lok Corp. 11. Truss Connectors of America. 12. Truswal Systems Corp. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Where truss members are exposed to weather or to high relative humidities, furnish fasteners with a hot -dip zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A153 or AISI SS502. B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105 (Rev B; Int Am 4). C. Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ANSI B 18.2.1. F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A307, Grade A; with ASTM A563 hex nuts and flat washers. 2.5 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Steel sheet zinc -coated by hot -dip process on continuous lines prior to fabrication to comply with ASTM A525 for Coating Designation G60 and with ASTM A446, Grade A (structural quality). BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 06190 4 PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 2.6 FABRICATION A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close - fitting joints with wood -to -wood bearing in assembled units. B. Fabricate metal connector plates to size, configuration, and thickness required to withstand design loadings. C. Fabricate and assemble truss members to design configuration shown on Drawings with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances specified in TPI QST. D. Connect truss members by means of metal connector plates and securely fasten to each side of wood members. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Erect and brace trusses to comply with TPI BWT. B. Where trusses do not fit, return them to fabricator and replace with trusses of correct size; do not alter configuration of trusses in the field. C. Follow manufacturer's instructions for handling and erection. D. Erect trusses with plane of truss webs vertical, plumb, and parallel to each other. E. Exercise care to keep out -of -plane bending of trusses to minimum. Install temporary horizontal and cross -bracing to hold trusses until permanent bracing is installed. F. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points. G. Install permanent bracing and related components prior to application of loads to trusses. Tighten loose connectors. Restrict construction loads to prevent overstressing of truss members. Do not cut or remove truss members. H. Fasten securely to wall framing and other structural components. Brace, block, and bridge as soon as possible after placement. END OF SECTION BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 0E190 5 PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES �, .... ...._.1 PART 1 1.1 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY GENERAL REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. A135.4, Basic Hardboard. b. A190.1, Structural Glued Laminated Timber. C. A208.1, Mat -Formed Wood Particleboard. 2. American Plywood Association (APA): a. Grades and Specifications. b. 303, Plywood Siding. 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A526, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Commercial Quality. b. D226, Standard Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. C. D2559, Standard Specification for Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood Products for Use Under Exterior (Wet Use) Exposure Conditions. 4. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI): Quality Standards, Guide Specifications and Quality Certification Program. 5. California Redwood Association (CRA): Standard Specification for Grades of California Redwood Lumber. 6. Federal Specifications (FS): M10M-A-130B, Adhesive, Contact. 7. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA): LD 3, High - Pressure Decorative Laminates. 8. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST)-Product Standards Section (PS): 1, For Construction and Industrial Plywood. 9. Western Wood Products Association (VWVPA): a. Western Lumber Grading Rules 81. b. Western Wood Species Book. C. Standard Product Patterns. d. Installation Information. 10. Woodwork Institute of California (WIC): Manual of Millwork, Standards of the Woodwork Industry. B0I155870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 06200 1 FINISH CARPENTRY ...+....�.� .�„�..m...�. ...ro. �«...,..n ... ., ^aaM,, SECTION 07114-01 GEOMEMBRANE LINING HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PARTI GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. This Section covers the Work necessary to furnish and install the HDPE lining, complete. The intent of this Specification is to provide a watertight lining at the completion of the Work. The Drainage Net and Geotextile Specifications are in Sections 07114-02 and 07114-03. The leak detection testing requirements are specified in Sections 07114-04 and 07114-05. B. The Work includes furnishing all labor, supervision, tools, construction equipment, and materials necessary to install the lining described by these Specifications and Drawings. C. The CONTRACTOR has the option of furnishing the HDPE liner material specified that includes the requirement for electrical leak detection testing in Section 07114-04, or furnishing GSE conductive HDPE that would be electrically leak tested in accordance with GSE standard procedures. Electrical leak testing in accordance with Section 07114-04 would not be required. All other requirements of these Specifications shall be applicable. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: The following standards, including documents referenced therein, are referenced within this Section and form part of this Section to the extent designated herein. Unless otherwise specified, the most recent version of the reference standards, at the time of bidding shall apply. B. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM A193, Standard Specification for Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature Service. 2. ASTM A194, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure and High Temperature Service. 3.. ASTM A276, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes. 4. ASTM D413, Test Method for Rubber Property —Adhesion to Flexible Substrate. 5. ASTM D638, Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. 6. ASTM D751, Methods of Testing Coated Fabrics. 7. ASTM D792, Test Methods for Specific Gravity (Relative Density) and Density of Plastics by Displacement. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 07114-01 1 GEOMEMBRANE LINING HIGH - DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) 8. ASTM D882, Test Methods for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting. 9. ASTM D1004, Test Method for Initial Tear Resistance of Plastic Film and Sheeting. 10. ASTM D1693, Test Method for Environmental Stress —Cracking of Ethylene Plastics. 11. ASTM D2240, Test Method for Rubber Property—Durometer Harness. 12. ASTM D3080, Modified Test Method for Direct Shear Tests of Soils Under Consolidated Drained Conditions (for Soil-FML Friction Values). 13. ASTM D4437, Standard Practice for Determining the Integrity of Field Seams Used in Joining Flexible Polymeric Sheet Geomembranes. C. Federal Specification: 1. Federal Specification FF-S-325 for Anchor Bolts. 2. Federal Test Method Standard No. 101C Method 2065 Puncture Resistance. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Watertight: Impermeable to the passage of water in a liquid state and to the solid and liquid waste. B. Membrane: HDPE geomembrane lining material. C. Boot: Watertight collars fabricated from HDPE membrane for sealing to pipes and the structures that penetrate the membrane, as shown on the Drawings and as directed by the ENGINEER. D. Sheet: Each separate piece of membrane sheeting that is seamed to others at the project site. E. Film Tearing Bond: Failure within one of the sheets by tearing, instead of separating at the seam when under tension. F. Manufacturer: The entity that manufactures the lining sheets from HDPE resin. G. Installer: The entity that installs and seams the lining sheets and fabricated lining boots at the project site. H. Quality Assurance: A program establishing policies, procedures, standards, training, guidelines, testing, and systems necessary to provide quality in the Work to meet the project requirements and accepted industry standards. BOI158870.A1.FN 07114-01 DULY 11, 2000 2 GEOMEMBRANE LINING HIGH - DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) 1 PART 1 1.1 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY GENERAL REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. A135.4, Basic Hardboard. b. A190.1, Structural Glued Laminated Timber. C. A208.1, Mat -Formed Wood Particleboard. 2. American Plywood Association (APA): a. Grades and Specifications. b. 303, Plywood Siding. 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A526, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Commercial Quality. b. D226, Standard Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. C. D2559, Standard Specification for Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood Products for Use Under Exterior (Wet Use) Exposure Conditions. 4. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI): Quality Standards, Guide Specifications and Quality Certification Program. 5. California Redwood Association (CRA): Standard Specification for Grades of California Redwood Lumber. 6. Federal Specifications (FS): M1VIM-A-130B, Adhesive, Contact. 7. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA): LD 3, High - Pressure Decorative Laminates. 8. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST)-Product Standards Section (PS): 1, For Construction and Industrial Plywood. 9. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA): a. Western Lumber Grading Rules 81. b. Western Wood Species Book. C. Standard Product Patterns. d. Installation Information. 10. Woodwork Institute of California (WIC): Manual of Millwork, Standards of the Woodwork Industry. BOI155870.A1.FN 06200 JULY 11, 2000 1 FINISH CARPENTRY RNMEMEM : 3lyy a . . A. Shop Drawings: 1. Cabinets, Casework, and Running Trim: a. Show field measurements, construction details, dimensions, materials used, and finish. b. Use full-size or 1/4-scale drawings. _ C. Reference Shop Drawings to Contract Document Drawings. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standards: Quality Standards of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AVM unless detailed otherwise. B. Plywood Grades: U.S. Product Standard PS 1. Identify each plywood panel with appropriate grade trademark of American Plywood Association. C. Grade and Trademark: Identify each piece or bundle of lumber or other product with a recognized mark of the authority grading the product. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING f A. Defer material delivery to site until installation or storage areas are complete { t or protected from wetness. Install materials or store in these areas immediately upon delivery and maintain relative humidity at 60 percent or less. B. Protect fire -retardant materials against high humidity and moisture during storage and erection. C. Protect sheet materials from corner breaks and surface damage while r` unloading.4 D. Protect surfaces of cabinets subject to damage while in transit. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER A. Moisture Content: Kiln -dry lumber to an average moisture content range as follows, unless shown otherwise: 1. Exterior Work: 9 to 12 percent. l 2. Interior Work: 6 to 11 percent. B. Interior Trim: Plain sawn natural red birch, AWI Custom Grade.-- BOI155870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 06200 2 FINISH CARPENTRY _ __ 2.2 PLYWOOD A. Softwood Plywood: APA A-B Interior. B. Overlaid Plywood: EXT APA B-B plywood with medium density overlay (MDO) on both faces, plain surface, no grooves. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Do not install finish interior woodwork until the building has been dry for at least 10 days. B. Verify spaces and preparation of surfaces are ready to receive finish carpentry items. C. Broom clean spaces before beginning installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Lay out, cut, fit, and install finish carpentry items. B. Anchor securely to ensure rigidity, tight fit, and permanence and as noted on Drawings. C. Install items accurate to dimension, true to line, level, and square unless otherwise shown. D. Install running trim in as long a length as practical. 1. Miter corners of casings and moldings. 2. Anchor securely using finishing nails. 3. Counter set nails 1/16-inch for filling. E. Make Work neat and secure, developing full strength of components and providing intended function. END OF SECTION B0I155870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 06200 3 FINISH CARPENTRY I. Quality Control: The specific implementation of the Quality Assurance program, including checking and review of activities. J. CONTRACTOR: As defined in the General Conditions. The CONTRACTOR has responsibility for Work performed by the manufacturer and the installer. K. ENGINEER: As defined in the General Conditions. The ENGINEER is the onsite representative for the OWNER. A. Submittals Required to be Included with the Proposal: 1. Warranties: a. Submit a warranty signed by the lining manufacturer. The warranty shall be against manufacturing defects and workmanship and against deterioration due to ozone, ultraviolet, and other exposure to the elements, for a period of 20 years on a pro rata basis. The warranty shall be limited to replacement of material, and shall not cover installation of a replacement lining. Warranty form is at the end of this Section. b. Submit warranty signed by the lining installer. The installer shall warrant the lining to be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of 2 years following the date of acceptance of the Work under this Contract. During the 23rd month of the warranty period, an inspection will be conducted to identify any necessary repair work covered by the warranty. Repairs shall be made in accordance with these Contract Documents. Warranty form is at the end of this Section. B. Submittals Required Prior to Contract Award: 1. Qualifications: Not later than 2 weeks prior to Contract award, submit documented evidence of the ability and capacity of the membrane manufacturer and the installer, each, to perform this Work. Each shall have previously and successfully manufactured/installed a minimum of 10 million square feet of similar HDPE lining in liquid containment or landfill structures. Submit the name and qualifications of the senior installation supervisor who will be on the Project whenever lining materials are being handled or installed and when overlying soil materials are being placed. Submit the names and qualifications of senior installation personnel on the Project. 2. Material Data: Submit complete manufacturer's specifications, descriptive Drawings, and literature for the membrane, including the product identification and supplier of the polymer resin and BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 07114-01 3 GEOMEMBRANE LINING HIGH- DENSITY POLYETHYI ENE (HDPE) recommended method for handling and storage of all materials prior to installation. 3. Quality Control/Quality Assurance Programs: Submit for the ENGINEER's review a complete description of the membrane manufacturer's and the installer's formal quality control/quality assurance programs for manufacturing, fabricating, handling, installing, testing, repairing, and providing a watertight lining. The description shall include, but not be limited to, polymer resin supplier and product identification, acceptance testing, production testing, installation testing, documentation of changes, alterations, repairs, retests, and acceptance. The document shall include a complete description of seaming and repairing by extrusion welding and/or hot wedge welding. 4. Samples: Submit six samples each of membrane sheeting and membrane seams. Sheeting samples shall be 8 inches by 10 inches. Seam samples shall be 12 inches plus the seam width by 18 inches, and shall be numbered and dated. Seam samples shall be fabricated using the specified materials and the methods described in the Quality Control/Quality Assurance Program. 5. Production Dates: Submit statement of production dates for the resin and the membrane for this Work. C. Submittals Required After Contract Award: 1. Factory Test Results and Material Certification: Submit factory test results of materials demonstrating conformance with the requirements of these Specifications. In addition, submit the manufacturer's certification that the material delivered is similar and of the same formulation as that for which test results are submitted and which by actual usage has been demonstrated to be satisfactory for the intended use. 2. Installation Data: Before commencing the Work specified in this Section, and prior to ordering the membrane material, submit for review the installation Drawings, procedures, and a schedule for carrying out the Work. Installation Drawings shall show sheet layout with proposed size, number, position, and sequence of sheet placement and shall indicate the location of field seams. D. Submittals Required for Project Closeout: 1. Manufacturer's Certification: Submit certification by the lining manufacturer that the membrane was installed in substantial accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and to the manufacturer's satisfaction. Certification shall be made on a duplicate of the form attached at the end of this Section. 2. Record Drawings: Submit reproducible Drawings of record showing changes from the approved installation Drawings. The record Drawings B0I158870.A1.FN DULY 11, 2000 07114-01 4 GEOMEMBRANE LINING HIGH - DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) 1.5 shall include the identity and location of each repair, cap strip, penetration, boot, and sample taken from the installed membrane for testing. 3. Quality Control Records: Submit three copies of a Quality Control Record Document containing copies of all material and seam test results. Each test shall be identified by date of sample, date of test, sample location, name of individual who performed the test, standard test method used, list of departures from standard test methods, and any other pertinent information. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. These requirements are in addition to the quality assurance provided by the required submittals. 1. Manufacturer's Services: Provide onsite technical supervision and assistance by a representative of the lining manufacturer during installation of the lining system, including inspection prior to installation, of the surface on which the membrane shall be placed, and during placement of drainage net and geotextile over the installed lining. 2. Preinstallation Meeting: The ENGINEER will initiate a meeting prior to installation of the lining system. The CONTRACTOR, lining manufacturer's representative, and lining installer's representative shall attend. Topics for review and discussion will include, but not be limited to, project Specifications and Drawings, submittals, and training and qualification procedures for installation personnel, installation crew size, final schedule for beginning and completing the lining installation, and designated quality control manager for the cover installation. The installer shall demonstrate the making of each type of seam and field tests required in this Section. A system for marking on the lining will be arranged and shall be followed exclusively throughout the Work. 3. Lining Protection: Prior to installation of the lining system, the CONTRACTOR shall instruct workers about requirements for protection of the lining such as handling lining material in high winds, handling of equipment, and walking on lining surfaces. Shoes of all personnel walking on the lining shall be smooth bonded sole or be covered with a smooth type of overboot. Smoking, eating or drinking, or placing heated equipment directly on the lining may damage the lining and shall be prohibited. 4. Work Stoppage: The OWNER has the authority to order an immediate stoppage of the Work when improper installation procedures are observed, or for any other reason that may result in a defective lining. B0I158870.Al.FN JULY 11, 2000 07114-01 5 GEOMEM 3RANE LINING HIGH - DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) order and accompanied by evidence of recent calibration. The tensiometer shall be motor driven, and have jaws capable of traveling at a measured rate of 2-inch/minimum. It shall be equipped with a digital readout that shows the force in pounds exerted between the jaws. The tensiometer shall be Force Tech Model 5002 DPR by Columbine International, LTD, Placerville, CA; Utilitest 500 Shear & Peel Tester by Sinclair Equipment Co., Placerville, CA; , unloaded, or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. b such that Punch Press: The CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain throughout the installation and repair work a punch press for the onsite preparation of ►ir storing, specimens for testing. The press shall be capable of cutting specimens in accordance with ASTM D4437. The punch press shall be a Model MP- 1OK Die Punch by Vector Manufacturing, Grass Valley, CA; or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. brk in other . Vacuum Box: The CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain throughout the he !York that installation and repair work a vacuum box for onsite testing of geomembrane rn events seams. The vacuum box shall have a transparent viewing window on top and a ►the Work soft, close -cell neoprene gasket attached to the bottom. The housing shall be rigid and equipped with a bleed valve and vacuum gauge. A separate vacuum lining. source shall be connected to the vacuum box. The equipment shall be capable of inducing and holding a vacuum of 10 inches of mercury (Hg). The vacuum box shall be a Series A100 by American Parts & Service Co., Alhambra, CA; Vacuum Box Test System by Sinclair Equipment Co., Placerville, CA; or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. t and EXECUTION :orily bi ie shall be EPARATION asticizers, 1 Prepare the underlying soil surface as specified in Section 02200, �:pl oximately�t a tistance. i EARTHWORK, and as approved by the membrane installer. 'stabilizers, Prior to start of fabrication, make necessary field measurements to provide Y be added. proper fit of the lining. pith no Maintain soil surfaces in a smooth, uniform, and compacted condition during ee The roll installation of the lining. Repair excessive cracking of the surfaces as directed for the by the ENGINEER. Immediately prior to installation of the lining, correct any erosion or other damage to the soil surface that has occurred since completion of earthwork. Provide and maintain adequate drainage of the subgrade until y' 1c'' nental, Inc., v installation of the lining is complete. Only vehicles and equipment absolutely necessary for lining system installation shall be permitted to travel the completed soil surface. All damage to the subgrade by these vehicles shall be he required repaired, to the ENGINEER's satisfaction, at the CONTRACTOR's expense. _ ,ALFN JULY 11, 2000 ,Y 11, 2000 8 GEOMEM 3RANE LINING HIGH- ; L) ING HIGH - DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) n; NE (HDPE) D. Concrete surfaces against which the lining will bear and/or be sealed shall have a steel -trowel finish and 1/2-inch radius minimum rounded edges, free of projections, rough spots, voids, honeycomb, etc. Surfaces shall be cleaned of dirt, dust, oil, curing compounds, and other coatings by sandblasting or other methods accepted by the ENGINEER. E. Before the installation begins, inspect all lining materials for damage from transit. Materials that cannot be repaired, in the ENGINEER's judgment, shall be rejected and removed from the work area and site. F. During unwrapping of lining materials for use and placement, visually inspect surfaces of sheets. Mark each imperfection for repair. 3.2 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install the lining as shown on the Drawings. No membrane material shall be placed when air temperature is less than 35 degrees F and decreasing, or more than 80 degrees F, when relative humidity is more than 80 percent, when it is raining or snowing, or when there is frost on the ground, unless the CONTRACTOR can demonstrate to the ENGINEER's satisfaction that installation techniques compensate for these conditions. B. Sheets of HDPE lining shall be of such lengths and widths and shall be placed in such a manner as to reduce field seaming to a minimum, except horizontal seams shall not be allowed on slopes, and seams parallel to the toe shall be at least 5 feet from the toe. C. Maneuver sheets of HDPE into place in a manner which prevents wrinkles, folds, or similar distress which can damage the liner or prevent its satisfactory alignment or seaming. Factors such as expansion, contraction, overlap at seams, anchorage requirements, seaming progress, and drainage shall be considered. D. Sandbags shall be used as necessary to temporarily anchor or hold the lining material in position during installation. Sandbag fabric shall be sufficiently close knit to preclude fines from working through the bags. Tires and paper bags, whether or not lined with plastic, shall not be used. Burlap bags, if used, shall be lined with plastic. Bags shall contain not less than 40 nor more than 60 pounds of sand having 100 percent passing a No. 8 screen and shall be securely closed after filling to prevent sand loss. Bags that are split, torn, or otherwise losing their contents shall be immediately removed form the work area and any spills immediately cleaned up. E. Anchor the perimeter of the lining as shown on the Drawings, or as otherwise approved in writing by the ENGINEER. Protect the membrane from BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 07114-01 9 GEOMEMBRANE LINING HIGH - DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) equipment and other hazards and keep it clean and free of all debris during placement. Protect the lining from uplift by wind and other damage prior to seaming, anchoring, or attachment of the edges of the lining. F. Anchor and seal the lining to structures, pipes, and other types of penetrations in accordance with details shown on the Drawings. G. Take extreme care during installation of the lining to be certain no damage is done to any part of the lining. No vehicular traffic shall be allowed on the lining surface. Motor -driven equipment using fuel shall have spark arrestors. No gasoline -driven generators or cans of flammable liquid shall be placed on the lining. Under no circumstances shall the lining surface be used as a work area, for preparing patches, storing tools and supplies, or other uses. If needed, a protective cover shall be spread out as a work surface, to prevent damage to the lining. H. The compensation allowance for temperature induced expansion and contraction of HDPE membrane which will prevent formation of wrinkles, folds, and installation stress on the membrane during the placement of soil materials over the membrane shall be submitted to the ENGINEER. This must be received and reviewed by the ENGINEER before soil cover materials may be placed. 3.3 FIELD SEAMS A. Use lap joints to seal membrane sheets together in the field. Field seams shall be made on a supporting smooth surface. Form the seams by lapping the edges of sheets a minimum of 3 inches. Wipe contact surfaces of the sheets clean to remove dirt, dust, moisture, and other foreign materials and prepare in accordance with the installer's seaming method approved by the ENGINEER. Extend the seams to the ends of the sheets through the anchor trench, boots, and mechanical attachments. Insert copper wire for spark test, prior to welding. The location of the copper wire shall be in the extrudate of the weld and at the edge of the top sheet. B. Seam the sheets together, using the fusion -extrusion and/or hot -wedge welding system, equipment, and techniques. A single or double hot wedge fusion seam welding unit will be allowed. If each seam is not accepted on the first air pressure test, specified in Article 3.5, FIELD QUALITY CONTROL, the unbonded overlapped material shall be removed under the observation of the ENGINEER. Remove the material by tearing along the seam rather than by cutting. C. When capping of a field seam is required, use a cover strip of the same - thickness as the lining (and from the same roll, if available) and of 8-inch B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 07114-01 10 GEOMEMBRANE LINING HIGH- DENSTTY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) minimum width. Position the strip over the center of the field seam and weld to the lining using a fillet weld each side, including a copper wire as described above for spark testing. 3.4 PENETRATIONS A. No penetrations are allowed. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Observe the installation of the HDPE lining, including the making and testing of each lining seam and patch. Conform to the practices listed in ASTM D4437 and this Specification. B. Test Seams: Make test seams to verify that adequate conditions exist for field seaming to proceed. Each seamer shall produce a test seam at the beginning of each shift to determine the peel and tensile strength of the seam. The ENGINEER may require a sample field seam be made at any time during seaming production to verify equipment/operator performance and seam integrity. In addition, if a seaming operation has been suspended for more than 1/2 hour or if a breakdown of the seaming equipment occurs, a test seam shall be produced prior to resuming of seaming operations. C. Nondestructive Samples for Seam Testing: During the field seaming operation, representative samples of field seams shall be made for testing. Make these samples using the same HDPE sheet, fusion weld materials, and the same seaming procedures as for the lining installation. The time lapse between interruption of seaming the installed membrane and beginning the sample seam shall be minimized to complete the test seam under the same conditions as the installed seam.. Each sample shall have a width of 12 inches plus the seam width and length of 30 inches. A minimum of one sample per 500 feet of field seam or a minimum of one sample per crew each morning and afternoon shall be made. D. Destructive Samples for Seam Testing: During the field seaming operation, remove samples from field seams at locations selected by the ENGINEER. Repair the field seams in accordance with repair procedures specified in these Specifications. Each sample shall have a width of 12 inches plus the seam width and length of 30 inches. At least one sample shall be tested for each of the top and bottom liners and as directed by the ENGINEER. E. Sample Testing: Field seams shall have a film tearing bond in peel and shear and the minimum pounds per inch width seam strength in shear when tested as specified in these Specifications. Sample testing will be conducted by an independent testing agency paid for by the CONTRACTOR. The independent B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 07114-01 11 GEOMEMBRANE LINING HIGH - DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) testing agency shall save all test samples, including specimens tested, until notified by the ENGINEER relative to their disposal. Each specimen that fails under test shall be shipped immediately by express delivery to the ENGINEER for determination of corrective measures required. F. Test Failure: All specimens tested by the independent testing agency, of a field weld sample, shall be required to pass. If any specimen fails, the entire sample from which it was taken shall be considered as a failure and the field seam shall be rejected due to nonconformance with the Specifications. Comply with the following corrective measures: 1. For nondestructive sample failure, rerun the field weld test using the same sample. If that test passes, the ENGINEER may assume an error was made in the first test and accept the field seam. If the second test fails, cap each field seam represented by the failed sample and submit a new test sample made during the capping procedure. The decision of the ENGINEER shall be final. 2. For destructive sample failure, rerun the field weld test using a new sample. If that test passes, the ENGINEER may assume an error was made in the first test and accept the field seam. If the second test fails, either cap the field seam between any two previous passed seam test locations that include the failed seam or take another sample on each side of the failed seam location (10-foot minimum), and test both. If both pass, cap the field seam between the two locations. If either fails, repeat the process of taking samples for test. Each field seam shall be bounded by two passed test locations prior to acceptance. The decision of the ENGINEER shall be final. G. In -place Observation and Testing: Visually inspect the HDPE lining sheets, seams, anchors, seals, and repairs for defects as the installation progresses and again on completion. In addition, check all seams and repairs using a metal probe. Depending on seam welding equipment used, test each seam and repair using a vacuum testing device, a spark testing device, and/or air channel pressure for double wedge welded seams. Defective and questionable areas shall be clearly marked and repaired to the ENGINEER's satisfaction. Each area showing injury due to scuffing, penetration by foreign objects, or distress from rough subsurface shall be replaced or covered with an additional layer of membrane material. Testing shall be performed in the presence of the ENGRiMR. Final testing shall be done by hydrostatic testing with clear water. 1. If the fillet weld, extrusion lap weld, or single hot -wedge fusion lap weld is used to weld seams, further test each seam and repair of the HDPE lining using a vacuum box. The vacuum box shall be an American Vacuum Seam Tester Series A100 as manufactured by t i B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 07114-01 12 GEOMEMBRANE LINING HIGH - DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) American Parts and Service Co., Alhambra, CA; or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. Clean the area to be tested of dust, debris, dirt, and other foreign matter. Remove any lap material to fully expose the edge of the welded seam to be tested. Apply a soap solution to the test area and induce a vacuum of 10 inches of mercury (Hg). The vacuum shall be maintained as long as necessary to mark for repair any suspicious areas as evidenced by bubbles in the soap solution. 2. If the fillet weld is used to weld seams, further test all seams and repairs in the HDPE lining by using a high voltage spark detector, similar to Tinker and Rasor Holiday Detector Model AP-W or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. The setting of the detector shall be 20,000 volts. In order to conduct this test, each seam to be tested shall be provided with copper wires properly embedded in the seams as shown on the Drawings and with provisions for electrically grounding to the test equipment. 3. If the double hot -wedge seam is used, test each seam in the HDPE lining by using the air channel pressure test. Insert a needle with gauge in the air space between welds. Pump air into space to 30 psi and hold for 5 minutes. At the end of 5 minutes if the seam maintains at least 27 psi during the test and the pressure drops within 30 second of depressurization, the seam is acceptable. At the end of 5 minutes, depressurize the seam by placing a needle hole in the air space between the welds at the opposite end of the seam and observe the gauge. If the pressure drops below 27 psi during the test period, or does not drop during the 30-second depressurization period, repair needle holes and re- test the seam by the same procedure or perform a vacuum box test along the entire length of the seam. If the second air pressure test fails, perform a vacuum box test the entire length of the seam. If no bubbles appear in the vacuum box, the lower weld will be considered defective and the upper seam is acceptable. If any bubbles appear in the vacuum box, each defective area shall be repaired by extrusion welding and tested again by vacuum box. As an option to the vacuum box, the CONTRACTOR may apply a soap solution to the exposed seam edge while maintaining the required test pressure. If bubbles appear, mark and extrusion weld the defective area. If no bubbles appear and the test pressure cannot be maintained, the leak is judged to be in the bottom or second seam. If the leak is judged to be in the bottom seam, the length of the seam tested may be accepted. Repair the needle holes. 4. Hydrostatic Tests: a. Two hydrostatic tests shall be completed. The first shall be performed after both the primary and secondary liners are installed and prior to the placement of any backfill. At the sole discretion of the ENGINEER, this first hydrostatic test may be waived depending on the results of the vacuum leak detection specified in Section 07114-05. The second hydrostatic test shall be performed B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 07114-01 13 GEOMEMBRANE LINING HIGH - DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) LINING INSTALLER'S CERTIFICATION OF SUBSURFACE ACCEPTABILITY The lining installer, , for the Project, hereby certify that the supporting surfaces are acceptable for installation of the geomembrane lining, the undersigned having personally inspected the condition of the prepared surfaces. This certification is for the areas shown on the Drawings. The condition of the supporting surfaces in the defined area meets or exceeds the minimum requirements for installation of the lining. Signed: (Representative of Lining Installer) (Position) Date: Witness: B0I158870.A1.FN DULY 11, 2000 07114-01 16 GEOMEMBRANE LINING HIGH - DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) L.. GEOMEMBRANE MATERIAL WARRANTY Project: Owner: Location of Installation: Effective Date: The Geomembrane Manufacturer: _. warrants to the OWNER, the geomembrane material manufactured for this Project to be free from manufacturing defects and workmanship, to be able to withstand exposure to ozone, ultraviolet, and other natural elements, and the intended use from the effective date for a period of 20 years, on a pro rata basis. Repairs made to the geomembrane under this warranty shall be made in accordance with these Contract Documents. Repairs -made to the geomembrane under this warranty shall be warranted for a period of 2 years from the date of repair. This warranty does not cover installation of a replacement lining. Geomembrane Manufacturer Authorized Representative's Signature Authorized Representative's Printed Name and Position Date B0I158870.A1.FN 07114-01 JULY 11, 2000 17 GEOMEMBRANE LINING HIGH - DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) �.� , .,.. ,,,..�, ,„��,m„ , „t q -v. ^,� km . .„.,,g '"`"?i »� „�,�� $�2°' ,�,xi -.-,,, <.^,� � mA � ..,,., ti,,. ....,.,w..,.. �«.«�...,aw ._. . .. . a SECTION 07114-02 GEOTEXTILES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. D737-75, Test Method for Air Permeability of Textile Fabrics. 2. D4355-84, Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles from Exposure to Ultraviolet Light and Water (Xenon -Arc Type Apparatus). 3. D4491-89, Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability. of Geotextiles by Permittivity. 4. D4533-85, Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles. 5. D4595-86, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Geotextiles by the Wide -Width Strip Method. 6. D4632, Grab Tensile Strength Test Method. 7. D4716-87, Standard Test Method for Constant Head Hydraulic Transmissivity (In -Plane Flow) of Geotextiles and Geotextile Related Products. 8. D4751-87, Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile. 9. D4833-88, Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geotextiles, Geomembranes, and Related Products. 10. D4884-90, Standard Test Method for Seam Strength of Sewn Geotextiles. 11. D4886-88, Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Geotextiles (Sand Paper/Sliding Block Method). B. Federal Standard: No. 751a, Stitches, Seams, and Stitchings. 1.2 DEFINMONS A. Fabric: Geotextile, a permeable geosynthetic comprised solely of textiles. B. Minimum Average Roll Value (MinARV): Minimum of series of average roll values representative of gotextile furnished. C. Maximum Average Roll Value (MaxARV): Maximum of series of average roll values representative of geotextile furnished. D. Nondestructive Sample: Sample representative of finished Work, prepared for testing without destruction of Work. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 07114-02 1 GEOTEXTILES E. Overlap: Distance measured perpendicular from overlapping edge of one sheet to underlying edge of adjacent sheet. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Manufacturer material specifications and product literature. 2. Installation Drawings showing geotextile sheet layout, location of seams, and direction of overlap. 3. Description of proposed method of geotextile deployment and provisions for holding geotextile temporarily in place until permanently secured. B. Samples: 1. Geotextile: One-piece, minimum 18 inches long, taken across full width of roll of each type and weight of geotextile furnished for Project. Label each with brand name and furnish documentation of lot and roll number from which each Sample was obtained. C. Quality Control Submittals: Certifications from each geotextile manufacturer that furnished products have specified property values. Certified property values shall be either minimum or maximum average roll values, as appropriate, for geotextiles furnished. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver each roll with sufficient information attached to identify it for inventory and quality control. B: Handle products in manner that maintains undamaged condition. C. Do not store products directly on ground. Ship and store geotextile with suitable wrapping for protection against moisture and ultraviolet exposure. Store geotextile in a way that protects it from elements. If stored outdoors, elevate and protect geotextile with waterproof cover. 1.5 SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING A. Where geotextile is to be laid directly upon ground surface, prepare subgrade as specified in Section 02220, FILL AND BACKFILL, first. B. Notify ENGINEER whenever geotextiles are to be placed. Do not place geotextile without ENGINEER's approval of underlying materials. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 07114-02 2 GEOTEXTUM e PRODUCTS NONWOVEN GEOTEXTILE A. Pervious sheet of polyester or polypropylene fabricated into stable network of fibers that retain their relative position with respect to each other. Nonwoven geotextile shall be composed of continuous or discontinuous (staple) fibers held together through needle -punching, spun -bonding, thermal -bonding, or resin -bonding. B. Geotextile Edges: Selvaged or otherwise finished to prevent outer material from pulling away from geotextile. C. Unseamed Sheet Width: Minimum 12 feet. D. Nominal Weight per Square Yard: 10 ounces. E. Physical Properties: Conform to requirements in Table No. 1. PART 3 3.1 Table No.1 Ph sisal Pro a Requirements for Nonwoven Geotextile Geotextile Properties Test Method Value Weight (ort d2) ASTM D 3776 10 Thickness (mil) ASTM D 5199 105 Grab Tensile (lb) ASTM D 4632 260 Puncture Strength (lb) ASTM D 4833 180 AOS (US Sieve) ASTM D 4751 100 Flow Rate ( nVft2) ASTM D 4491 85 UV Resistance (% retained) ASTM D 4355 (after 1 500 hours) 70 EXECUTION PLACING GEOTEXTILE A. Prevent exposure of geotextile to light until needed for construction. Geotextile laying and subsequent covering with the liner or succeeding courses shall proceed in such a manner as to limit exposure to light to a maximum period of 48 hours. B0I158870.A 1.FN 07114-02 3 JULY 11, 2000 GEOTEXTMES B. The surface to receive the geotextile shall be smooth, free from obstructions, depressions, and sharp objects. Notify the ENGINEER prior to placing geotextile so that the ENGINEER may observe the surface to receive the geotextile. Lay geotextile so as to minimize the number of joints and seams. Lay geotextile flat and smooth without creases. Provide at least 2 feet overlap at joints. C. Do not operate machinery directly on the geotextile. When placing material over joints, place in the direction from the overlying geotextile and protect from damage. Repair damage as specified in Article REPAIRING GEOTEXTI E. 3.2 SHEET ORIENTATION ON SLOPES A. In general, orient geotextile with long dimension of each sheet parallel to direction of slope. 3.3 JOINTS A. Unseamed Joints: Provide at least 2 feet overlap at joints. 3.4 SECURING GEOTEXTI E A. Secure geotextile during installation as necessary with sand bags, or other means approved by ENGINEER. 3.5 REPAIRING GEOTEXTILE A. Repair or replace torn, punctured, flawed, deteriorated, or otherwise damaged geotextile. Repair damaged geotextile by placing patch of undamaged geotextile over damaged area and at least 2 feet in all directions beyond damaged area. Remove interfering material as necessary to expose damaged geotextile for repair. Sew patches or secure them with fusion bonding. 3.6 REPLACING CONTAMINATED GEOTEXTILE A. Protect geotextile from contamination that would interfere, in ENGINEER's opinion, with its intended function. Remove and replace contaminated geotextile with clean geotextile. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 07114-02 4 GEOTEXTI ES PART 4 PAYMENT 4.1 GENERAL A. All Work specified in this Section shall be included as part of the applicable price for the appropriate item described in Volume I of 3, Special Provisions, SP-18 "Mechanical Process and Systems—ARFF Trainee'. END OF SECTION B01158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 07114-02 5 GEOTEXTTLES SECTION 07114-03 DRAINAGE NET PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section covers the Work necessary to furnish and install the geonet drainage net (DN) for collection and removal of liquid from the geomembrane system, complete. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Geonet: A net -like polymeric material formed from intersecting ribs integrally joined at the junctions manufactured for use as drainage media with foundation, soil, rock, earth, or any other geotechnical-related material as an integral part of a human -made project, structure, or system. B. Minimum Average Roll Value (MinARV): Minimum of a series of average roll values representative of the product furnished. C. Maximum Average Roll Value (MaxARV): Maximum of a series of average roll values representative of the product furnished. D. Overlap: Distance measured perpendicular from overlapping edge of one sheet to underlying edge of adjacent sheet. f�c��i� �,1� MMIr:`�•� A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with this Section and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. B. In addition, provide the following specific information: 1. Complete material specifications, descriptive Drawings, and literature. 2. Description of method and samples of sewn or heat seamed joints of geotextile and tying or joining DN materials. 3. Listing of all exceptions to the requirements specified herein. 4. Factory test results of materials certified by the manufacturer as being similar, showing conformance with the requirements of these Specifications. In addition, submit the manufacturer's certification stating that the material proposed is similar and of the same formulation as that for which test results are submitted and which by actual usage has been demonstrated to be satisfactory for the intended application. BOI158871.A1.FN 07114-03 1 JULY 11, 2000 DRAINAGE NET 5. Before commencing the Work specified under this Section, submit layout and installation Drawings, procedures, and a schedule for carrying out the Work. 6. A sample of 2 square yards shall be furnished from each shipment on request for verification and testing. 7. Submit reports of testing of the geonet performed and reported in accordance. with ASTM D4716 and Item 5, Transmissivity, in Table 1, Part 2 of this Specification. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS A. Materials delivered to site shall be unloaded, inspected for damage, and stored with minimum handling. Materials shall not be stored directly on the ground. Wrap DN in protective covering during shipment and storage. Protect rolls or panels from equipment, mud, soil, dust, and debris. Store DN in original, unopened packaging, protected from the direct rays of the sun. Handle materials in such a manner as to ensure delivery to the installation site in sound, undamaged condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DRAINAGE NET (DN) A. Drainage Net: 1. Domestic polyethylene resin extruded ribs made to form a porous net of uniform pattern with distinct openings. 2. Add approximately 2 percent carbon black to the resin for ultraviolet light resistance. 3. Table_ 1 lists physical property requirements for the geonet. 4. Geonets reported to meet this Specification are Hypernet as manufactured by GSE, Houston, TX; NS 1605 as manufactured by Tensar Corp., Morrow, GA; Gundnet XLr144 as manufactured by G.S.E., Inc., Houston, TX; and PN4000 as manufactured by Fluid Systems, Inc., Cincinnati, OH; or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. Table 1 Physical Regipudirements for Geonet Physical Properties Test Method Value Transmissivit (m2/sec) ASTM D 4716 1.0 x 10-3* Thickness (mil) ASTM D 5199 200 Density ( cm3) ASTM D 1505 0.94 B0I158871.A1.FN 07114-03 2 JUL.Y 11, 2000 DRAINAGE NET _ 2.2 PART 3.1 Table 1 Physical Require nts for Geonet Physical Properties Test Method Value Tensile Strength (MD) (lb/in) ASTM 45 D 5034/D 5035 Carbon Black Content (%) ASTM D 1603, 2.0 modified *Gradient of 1.0, normal load of 10,000 psf, water at 70 degrees F between stainless steel plates. GENERAL A. Supply DN in rolls, marked or tagged with the following: 1. Manufacturer's name. 2. Product identification. 3. Lot number. 4. Roll number. 5. Roll dimensions. B. Quality Control: Provide manufacturers certification of test results for the properties listed in Tables 1 and 2 at a minimum frequency of one test per 100,000 square feet. C. Damaged Material: 1. DN damaged during transportation, loading, unloading, delivery, and storage shall be documented by the CONTRACTOR. 2. Repair damaged DN to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER. 3. Replace damaged DN rejected by the ENGINEER at no cost to the OWNER. 3 EXECUTION PLACEMENT OF DN A. Place and anchor the DN in the manner recommended by the Liner System Supplier. 1. DN shall be rejected if it has defects, ribs, holes, flaws, deterioration, or damage incurred during manufacture, transportation, or storage. 2. Place DN with the long dimensions downslope, with panel upslope overlying the panel downslope in a shingle fashion, unless otherwise directed by the ENGINEER. B0I158871.A1.FN 07114-03 3 JULY 11, 2000 DRAINAGE NET PART 4 4.1 3. Install DN smooth and free of tensions, stress, folds, wrinkles, or creases. 4. DN panels shall be laid to provide a minimum width of 4 inches of geonet overlap along each joint. 5. DN joints shall be tied at 5-foot intervals using a method approved by the ENGINEER. Plastic cable ties or tying materials shall be of contrasting color to the DN panels for inspection. Metallic connectors shall not be allowed. 6. Secure and leakproof bags of sand shall be used to secure the DN during installation. Securing pins shall not be used. B. Protect DN at all times during construction from contamination by surface runoff. Remove contaminated DN and replace with uncontaminated DN. C. Overlap the excess geotextile at each edge of the geonet panels in a manner that results in a smooth geotextile surface free of wrinkles and openings across the overlapped panels of geonet. Seam the geotextile so that no slack material remains between seams. PAYMENT GENERAL A. All Work specified in this Section shall be included as part of the applicable price for the appropriate item described in Volume 1 of 3, Special Provisions, SP-18 "Mechanical Process and Systems—ARFF Trainer". END OF SECTION B0I158871.A1.FN 07114-03 4 JULY 11, 2000 DRAINAGE -NET 07114-04 ELECTRICAL LEAK DETECTION TESTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The CONTRACTOR shall have an electrical leak location survey performed by Leak Location Services, Inc. 16124 University Oak, San Antonio, Texas 78249 (telephone: 210/408-1241 or fax 210/408-1242); or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. The survey will be conducted on both of the primary and secondary HDPE geomembrane liners. All leaks found shall be marked and repaired. This leak detection test will not be required if GSE conductive liner system is used. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION A. The CONTRACTOR shall place a metal electrode below the secondary liner and in the leak collection zone of the double -liner installation prior to installing the primary liner or as required by the liner testing company. The electrode shall be constructed of approximately 1 square foot of stainless steel sheet or as required by the liner testing company. The corners and edges of the electrode must be rounded to prevent damage to the liner. In addition, the electrode shall be wrapped with geotextile or geonet to further protect the liners. An insulated stranded tin coated copper wire (18 AWG to 12 AWG) must be connected between the electrode and a test terminal located at a convenient accessible location near the basin. The insulated wire is routed up the side -slope. The electrode shall be placed near the lowest point of the collection system. The metal electrode will be supplied by the electrical leak location Contractor. B. The CONTRACTOR shall flood each liner to be tested to the required depths with water. A source of water shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR. C. Prior to flooding, CONTRACTOR shall clean the basin of debris including scraps of liner material, other construction materials, and unneeded sand bags. The CONTRACTOR will be responsible for pumping or otherwise transferring the water into and out of the facility. Water will be disposed to surface drainage. BOI158870.A1.FN 07114-04 JULY 11, 2000 ELECTRICAL LEAK DETECTION TESTING D. Water Flooding Leak Detection Zone Between Secondary and Primary Liners: The CONTRACTOR shall flood the leak detection zone with water prior to testing of the primary geomembrane liner. The CONTRACTOR shall determine a safe method to accomplish this with no damage. In general, the water level in the leak detection zone should be below the level where the primary liner is lifted by the water. Water shall be used to fill the primary liner basin to prevent uplifting. Therefore the downward pressure of the water on the liner should be greater than the pressure from the hydrostatic head of the water in the leak detection zone between the liners. E. Each liner shall be covered with a minimum of 6 inches and a maximum of 30 inches of water for surveys of the bottom liner area. However, side -slope surveys will require the facility to be filled to the working level. F. The survey of the secondary liner must be conducted prior to installation of the primary liner. G. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a source of electrical power of 110-120V AC at 10 amperes for the leak location equipment. A. The leak location instrumentation must be calibrated for each survey site to determine the leak detection sensitivity and leak detection scan width. The calibration consists of determining the distance that a specified simulated leak can be reliably detected. The minimum size simulated leak should be defined in the construction quality control plan for the specific site. B. If the simulated leak size is not specified then the minimum simulated leak size is defined as a 0.031 ±0.002-inch-diameter circular hole. The leak location system sensitivity, simulated leak size, and water resistivity will determine the survey scan width. C. The leak location survey scan width is defined as twice the distance that the leak location instrumentation can detect the specified minimum simulated leak size. For example, if the leak location instrumentation can detect a 0.03 1 -inch- diameter simulated leak from a distance of 2 feet, then the scan width shall be no greater than 4 feet. D. A simulated leak consists of a metal electrode covered with representative liner material and attached to an insulated ground wire. The opposite end of the wire is connected to a ground electrode or to an electrode placed in the leak detection zone. The liner covering the electrode has a hole placed in it having the same cross -sectional area and geometry as the leak of interest. This is normally accomplished by using a heated sewing needle to make a 0.03-inch-diamter hole in the liner material. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 07114-04 2 ELECTRICAL LEAK DETECTION TESTING E. The simulate leak assembly will be placed in the water in the basin and survey sweeps will be made as the operator approaches the simulated leak. The distance from the leak locator probe to the simulated leak assembly when the simulated leak is just detectable by the instrumentation is the leak detection distance. A 25 percent change in the detector probe readout is defined as the detection limit. F. The liner area that is submerged under water shall be systematically inspected using a scan width no greater than the scan width as determined above. In addition, all field welds that are easily located shall be reinspected with the detector probe resting on or near the weld. Those welds that are not easily located do to murky water or other conditions do not require retesting. 3.3 TEST RESULTS A. Retesting of Liner: If more than 5 leaks are found during the test of the liner, then the leaks will be repaired, and the survey repeated until 5 or less leaks are found and repaired. All leaks will be marked with an 8 ounce lead weight to within ±3.0 inches of the leak. It will be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to mark the position of the leaks after the water is removed. B. Liner Repair: The repair of the located leaks is the responsibility of the liner installation Contractor. Standard repair procedures in accordance to the liner manufacturer guidelines and accepted industry practice shall be used. C. Reports: The general results of the electrical leak location survey shall be reported to CONTRACTOR's designated representative during the daily progress of the field work. A letter report documenting the leak location survey work, including a brief summary of the survey procedures, results of the survey, and problems encountered shall be prepared and submitted to the CONTRACTOR within 21 days after completion of the field work. PART 4 PAYMENT 4.1 GENERAL A. Payment for Work in this Section will be included as part of the lump sum price for the appropriate item described in Volume 1 of 3, Special Provisions, SP-18 "Mechanical Process and Systems—ARFF Trainer". END OF SECTION BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 07114-04 3 ELECTRICAL LEAK DETECTION TESTING 07114-05 VACUUM LEAK DETECTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. This Section covers the Work necessary to vacuum test the installed primary and secondary liner system. B. The initial vacuum test will be conducted after the primary liner installation is complete and before the composite drainage net is installed and before the electrical leak detection of the primary liner is performed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 VACUUM GAGE A. Manufacturer: Ashcoft Vacuum Gage Type 1189, 4-1/2-inch, 0 to 17 feet (approximately 0 to 7 psi vacuum) water vacuum range. B. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 VACUUM TESTING A. Procedures: The CONTRACTOR shall use the vacuum gage and valves installed on the blind flange at the liner leak detection monitoring well. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a minimum 5 SCFM vacuum pump rated at 5 psi vacuum. The CONTRACTOR shall pull a vacuum on the leak detection well until a 9-foot (4 psi) vacuum is achieved. The valve to the vacuum pump will be closed and the vacuum gage readings will be observed and recorded for a period of 24 hours. If the vacuum after 24 hours decreases to 7 feet (3 psi), the test will confirm that no leaks are present in the primary and secondary liners. If no leaks are present in the primary and secondary liners, the electrical test of the primary liner may be waived by the sole discretion of the ENGINEER. If the vacuum test indicates a leak then the CONTRACTOR shall inspect, test, and repair the primary liner leaks. If the inspection, testing, and repair of the primary liner fails and the vacuum test indicates leakage, the CONTRACTOR shall perform the electrical test of the primary liner. Inspection testing and repair of the liner will be performed until the ENGINEER determines that the vacuum test data indicates the primary and secondary liners are installed properly. The ENGINEER will record the vacuum test data that will be used for ongoing testing of the liner during subsequent work within the lined basin. The hydrostatic test specified in the B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 07114-05 1 VACUUM LEAK DETECTION geomembrane lining Specification will be conducted after the vacuum test is complete. The hydrostatic test may be waived by the sole discretion of the ENGINEER. 3.2 ONGOING VACUUM TESTING A. Procedures: The CONTRACTOR shall conduct daily vacuum tests from the day testing starts until all construction in the pit is completed. The CONTRACTOR will keep a log of the test results. A decrease in the vacuum holding time will be an indication that Work has damaged the liner. Work shall stop and inspection, testing, and repair of the liner shall be performed until the vacuum test results are acceptable. Ongoing vacuum testing will be conducted until all Work in the burn pit is complete. At the beginning of each work day, the CONTRACTOR shall record the vacuum pressure and then run the vacuum pump until the vacuum is returned to 9 feet of water (4 psi). If the morning vacuum check indicates vacuum loss is more than normal, 2 feet of water (1 psi) or less, then a leak is indicated and the CONTRACTOR shall determine the leak location. If the liner has been covered with material, the CONTRACTOR shall employ an acoustical testing specialist to locate the leak caused by the air leaking into the liner while a vacuum is applied. PART 4 PAYMENT 4.1 GENERAL A. Payment for Work in this Section will be included as part of the lump sum price for the appropriate item described in Volume 1 of 3, Special Provisions, SP-18 "Mechanical Process and Systems—ARFF Trainer". END OF SECTION B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 I 07114-05 2 VACUUM LEAK DETECTION SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. C516, Standard Specification for Vermiculite Loose Fill Thermal Insulation. b. C549, Standard Specification for Perlite Loose Fill Insulation. C. C578, Standard Specification for Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. d. C665, Standard Specification for Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. e. D4397, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications. f. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. On packaging clearly identify manufacturer, contents, brand name, applicable standard, and R-value. B. Store materials off ground and keep them dry at all times. Protect against weather, condensation, and damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BATT INSULATION AND FASTENERS A. Fiberglass or Mineral Wool Batts: 1 2. B0I155870.A1.FN 07210 ASTM C665, Type III, Class B, with 0.5 perm rating, reflective aluminum foil vapor retarder membrane laminated to one side with R-values of 30. Manufacturers: a. Certainteed. b. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. C. Johns Manville. JULY 11, 2000 1 BUILDING INSULATION 2.2 2.3 PART 3 3.1 3.2 B. Fasteners: Galvanized flattened steel staples with 7/16-inch minimum crown and 1/2-inch minimum shank. MASONRY FILL INSULATION A. Perlite Water Repellent Loose Fill: ASTM C549. B. Vermiculite Water Repellent Loose Fill: ASTM C516, Type H. NAIL BASE ROOF INSULATION A. Polyisocyanurate Foam Core: 1. Faced on upper side with 7/16-inch oriented strand board (OSB) and on reverse side with foil or asphalt -coated fiberglass. P g 2. Thickness: As shown. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Atlas Roofing Corp.; AC Foam Nail Base Insulation. b. Celotex; Hy -Therm Nail -Line Roof Insulation. C. RMAX, Inc.; Nailable Base Insulation. EXECUTION BATT INSULATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified below: 1. Install faced batt insulation, in widths required by framing spacing, with vapor retarder facing warm side. 2. Fit tightly to ensure continuous seal. 3. Where electrical outlets, ducts, pipes, vents, or other utility items occur, H place insulation on cold weather side of obstruction. 4. Protect installed insulation from tears and other damage until covered with finish material. 5. Remove and replace damaged material. MASONRY FILL INSULATION A. Before placement, fill weep holes with glass fiber rope or copper screen to prevent leakage. B. Pour from bag into unfilled cells of hollow masonry units, except veneer and cavity walls. C. Pours may be made at convenient interval, but height of pour shall not exceed 20 feet. BOI155870.A1.FN DULY 11, 2000 07210 2 BUILDING INSULATION D. Do not rod or tamp. ' 3.3 NAIL BASE ROOF INSULATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, and as specified below: 1. Place insulation boards, sized as large as practical, with oriented strand board side up, long dimension parallel to eaves, and end joints staggered. 2. Use nails or mechanical fasteners as recommended by insulation manufacturer. 3. Install wood nailing strips equal to thickness of insulation board along eaves and rake edges. END OF SECTION B0I155870.A1.FN DULY 11, 2000 07210 3 BUILDING INSULATION SECTION 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING AND FASCIA PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealted) by the Hot -Dip Process. b. A792/A792M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Aluminum - Zinc Alloy -Coated by the Hot -Dip Process, General Requirements. C. B32, Standard Specification for Solder Metal. d. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. e. D226, Standard Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. f. D2178, Standard Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 2. Federal Specifications (FS): 0-F-506C, Flux, Soldering; Paste and Liquid. 3. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA): Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, 5th Ed.. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Drawings showing thickness and dimensions of all parts, fastening and anchoring methods, details, and locations of all seams, joints, and other provisions for thermal movement. Include Drawings at not less than 1/4-inch to 1-foot scale and details at not less than 3-inch to 1-foot scale. 2. Two copies of manufacturer's printed installation instructions. B. Samples: Three 12-inch square samples of specified metal. Samples will be reviewed for color and texture only. Compliance with other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. BOI155870.A1.FN DULY 11, 2000 07610 1 SHEET METAL ROOFING AND FASCIA r C. Quality Control Submittals: A letter from the roofing manufacturer stating that the roofer is approved by manufacturer to apply the roof. s D. Contract Closeout Submittals: Special guarantee. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator's Qualifications: Approved by the accepted system manufacturer. B. Preroofing Conference: 1. Conduct preroofing conference with ENGINEER, roofing applicator, roofing system materials manufacturer, and subcontractors likely to be on the roof, present. 2. Discussion: To resolve questions regarding acceptability of the deck, roofing system and materials, flashing details, roof insulation, roof - mounted mechanical equipment, and roofing. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Product Delivery: Keep panels dry. B. Product Storage and Handling: 1. Protect against damage and discoloration. 2. Handle panels with nonmarring slings. 3. Do not bend panels. 4. Store panels aboveground, with one end elevated for drainage. 5. Stack panels to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. 6. Protect panels against standing water and condensation between adjacent surfaces. 7. If panels become wet, immediately separate sheets, wipe dry with clean cloth, and separate sheets for air -drying. 8. During storage prevent contact with materials that may cause discoloration or staining. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Apply roofing only in dry weather and when ambient temperature is above 40 degrees F. BOI155870.A1.FN 07610 2 DULY 11, 2000 SHEET METAL ROOFING AND FASCIA 1.6 SPECIAL GUARANTEE A. Product: Provide manufacturer's extended guarantee or warranty, with OWNER named as beneficiary, in writing, as Special Guarantee. Special Guarantee shall provide for correction or, at the option of the OWNER, removal and replacement of roofing panels, flashing, finish, and accessories found defective during a period of 5 years after the date of Substantial Completion. Duties and obligations for correction or removal and replacement of defective Work shall be as specified the General Conditions. B. Conditions: 1. Roofing Panels: No rupture, structural failure, or perforation. 2. Finish: No cracking, blistering, flaking, chipping, checking, chalking, peeling, or fading. 3. Components: Watertight and weathertight with normal usage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOFING PANELS A. Material: Aluminum, ASTM B209, Alloy 3003H-16, 0.032-inch thick, stucco embossed pattern. B. Finish: 1. Polyvinylidene Fluoride: Kynar 500 two coats minimum. 2. Color: As indicated in Exterior Finish Schedule. C. Standing Seam: 1. Flat panels with upturned edges that are either rolled together or covered with a snap -on cover to form the joints or seams, 2. Interlocking panels not acceptable. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. AEP-SPAN; Cap Seam System. b. Berridge; High Seam Tee -Panel. C. Carlisle Engineered Metals; TR Series. d. IlV1ETCO; SS Series. e. Petersen Aluminum Corp.; Snap-On Standing Seam. 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Underlayment: ASTM D226, Type H or ASTM D2178, Type III asphalt roofing felt. B0I155870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 07610 3 SHEET METAL ROOFING AND FASCIA B. Slip Sheet: Rosin -sized building paper, minimum 6 pounds per square or 0.050-inch Manniglas Slipsheet manufactured by Lydall, Inc., Manning Division, Troy, NY. C. Fasteners: 1. Stainless steel or alloy appropriate to the particular metal specified for roofing. 2. Screws: Panhead wood or sheet metal type. 3. Exposed Fasteners: Finished to match roofing. D. Holddown Clips: System manufacturer's ASTM A792/A792M standard shape steel. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Configuration: Form panels for standing seams spaced no less than 12 inches and no more than 20 inches on center. B. Edges: Turned up 7/8-inch high minimum. C. Panel Length: As long as practical, preferably from eave to ridge. D. Fabricate flashings and trim from same metal as roof panels. E. Form and fabricate sheets, battens, strips, cleats, valleys, ridges, edge treatments, integral flashings, gutters, downspouts, and other components of specified metal roofing panels to profiles, patterns, and drainage arrangement shown, and as required for permanent leakproof construction. F. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction of Work. PAkT 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SHEET METAL ROOFING SYSTEM A. Install metal roofing and fascia system consisting of nonstructural sheet metal panels held to substrate with concealed fasteners. B. Provide ridges, hips, valleys, eaves, rakes, fascia, coping, gutters, downspouts, and other exposed trim and flashings for a weathertight roofing and fascia system. BOI155870.A1.FN 07610 4 JULY 11, 2000 SHEET METAL ROOFING AND FASCIA 3.2 PREPARATION A. Deck: Firm, dry, free of foreign materials, and smooth. Report immediately to the ENGINEER all cracks, breaks, holes, or other unusual irregularities in the surface. B. Layout Pattern: 1. Lay out to place seams equidistant from corners and aligned with seams on other side of hip or ridge. 2. Coordinate Work of this section with flashing, trim, and other construction to provide a permanently leakproof, secure, and noncorroding installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with recommendations and instructions of metal roofing panel producer and SMACNA Sheet Metal Manual. 2. Conceal fasteners and expansion joint provisions wherever possible in exposed Work; locate so as to minimize the possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation. 3. Separate dissimilar metals from each other where electrolysis might occur. Separation is satisfactorily accomplished by coating the metal(s) with a 15-mil bituminous coating. Comply with various metals producers' recommendations for other forms of protection against contamination from corrosive materials or agents. B. Underlayment and Slip Sheet: 1. Apply underlayment single -ply lapped shingle fashion, 3 inches at head and 6 inches at sides. 2. Cover with loose -laid slip sheet similarly lapped and with joints staggered. 3. Install no more than can be covered by metal roofing, or other approved protection, in same day. C. Roofing Panels: 1. Begin at eaves. 2. Locate holddown clips in joints within 6 inches of panel ends and at 18 inches on center, maximum. 3. At eaves cut upturned edges and bend panel down to form fascia. BOI155870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 07610 5 SHEET METAL ROOFING AND FASCIA PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Examine surfaces and structures to receive the work of this section. B. Take measurements at site and fabricate work to suit. No changes will be made in structure to accommodate this work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install roof specialties and accessories as detailed and in conformance with manufacturer's instruction, recommendations, and standards. B. Factory Finished Units: Place color variations in pieces so no extremes are next to each other. C. Make Work weathertight and free of expansion and contraction noise. D. Maintain separation between aluminum surfaces and concrete or dissimilar metals with isolation tape. E. Use appropriate pipe curb assembly, pipe seal, or vent pipe flashing where pipe, conduit, or cable, etc., penetrate roofing membrane. END OF SECTION B0I155870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 07700 2 ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALANTS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. C661, Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric Type Sealants by Means of a Durometer. b. C834, Standard Specification for Latex Sealants. C. C920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. d. C1193, Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Surface preparation and installation instructions. Indicate where each product is proposed to be used. B. Samples: Material proposed for use showing color selected. C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Applicator Qualification: Documentation showing minimum of 5 years' experience installing sealants in projects of similar scope. 2. Certificates of Compliance: Proposed materials meet Specification requirements. D. Contract Closeout Submittals: Special guarantee. 1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Ambient Temperature: Between 40 and 80 degrees F (4 and 27 degrees C) when sealant is applied. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. 1.4 SPECIAL GUARANTEE A. Product: Furnish manufacturer's extended guarantee or warranty, with OWNER named as beneficiary, in writing, as special guarantee. Special guarantee shall provide for correction or, at the option of the OWNER, removal and replacement of Work specified in this section found defective during a period of 5 years after the date of Substantial Completion. Duties and BOI155870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 07900 1 JOINT SEALANTS 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces next to the sealed joints of smears or other soiling resultant of sealing application. B. Replace damaged surfaces resulting from joint sealing or cleaning activities. 3.5 JOINT SEALANT SCHEDULE A. This schedule lists the sealant types acceptable for each joint location. Use as few different sealant types as possible to meet the requirements of Project. Joint Locations Sealant T , e(s) Expansion/Contraction & Control Joints At: Concrete Walls (except water -holding & below de portions of structures) 1,5,6 Concrete Floor Slabs (except for water -holding Structures) 2,5 Slabs Subject to Vehicle and Pedestrian Traffic 2,5 Masonry Walls 1, 5,6 Ceramic Tile Floors 1,2,5,10 Ceramic Tile Walls 1,5,10 Material Joints At: Metal Door, Window, & Louver Frames (Exterior) 1,5,6 Metal Door, Window, & Louver Frames (Interior) 1,5,6 Wall Penetrations (Exterior) 1,5,6 Wall Penetrations (Interior) 1,5,6 Floor Penetrations 5,6 Ceiling Penetrations 1,5,6 Roof Penetrations 5 Sheet Metal Flashin s 5 Sheet Metal Roofing & Siding 5 B0I155870.A1.FN 07900 6 JULY 11, 2000 JOINT SEALANTS Joint Locations Other Joints: Sealant Type(s) Threshold Sealant Bed 5 Between Counter Tops & Backs lashes 10 Around Plumbing Fixtures 10 Openings Around Pipes, Conduits, & Ducts Throu h Fire -Rated Construction 11 Concrete Form Snap -Tie Holes 1,5 END OF SECTION BOI155870.A1.FN JLTLY 11, 2000 07900 7 JOINT SEALANTS r SECTION 08001 DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal requirements are specified in appropriate product sections. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Products and materials referred to in this section are specified in the appropriate product sections. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Requirements for incorporation of scheduled products into the Work are specified in the appropriate product sections. 3.2 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplements listed below, following "END OF SECTION," are a part of this Specification. 1. Door and Hardware Schedule: A tabulation of door, frame, and finish hardware characteristics for each opening numbered on Drawings. .. Provide items as scheduled. 2. Door Types. 3. Frame Types. END OF SECTION B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 08001 1 DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE ABBREVIATIONS: AL Aluminum AS As Selected CLSR Closer COL Color CONSTR Construction FCTY Factory FNSH Finish FRP Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic HC Hollow Core HM Hollow Metal KEY Key Group K-PT. Kick Plate MATL MET MS P-P RFS SC SEA SST TSHD VIN W-S WW DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE NOTES: Material No. 1 See end of this Specification section for door and frame types. Metal No. 2 For door details, see Drawing No. Manufacturers Standard No. 3 Letter -number codes in hardware columns refer to items of hardware in Specification Section 08710 Push -Pull No. 4 Numbers in Fnsh column refer to paint systems in Specification Section 09900. Roll -Up Fire Shutter No. 5 Codes in COL column refer to color list in Specification Section 09000. Solid Core Wood No. 6 For glass types, see Specification Section 08800. Similar Stainless Steel Threshold Vinyl Weatherstripping Window Wall BOI158870.A1.FN 08001 SUPPLEMENT 1 JULY 11, 2000 DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE SECTION 08002 WINDOW AND RELIGHT SCHEDULE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal requirements are specified in appropriate material sections. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Products and materials referred to in this section are specified in appropriate product sections. PART 3 EXECUTION 3 3.1 GENERAL A. Requirements for incorporation of scheduled products into the Work are f specified in appropriate product sections. 3.2 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplements listed below, following "END OF SECTION," are a part of this Specification. relight, Window and Relight Schedule: A tabulation of window 1. g �, glazing, and treatment characteristics for each opening numbered on Drawings. K Provide items as scheduled. 2. Window and Relight Types. END OF SECTION B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 08002 1 WINDOW AND RELIGHT SCHEDULE WINDOW AND RELIGHT SCHEDULE WINDOW TYPE ABBREVIATIONS: OTHER ABBREVIATIONS: A Awning TH Top Hinged AL Aluminum HM Hollow Metal C Casement VP Vertical Pivoted AS As Selected STL Steel DH Double Hung GH Greenhouse BNZ Bronze VNL Vinyl VS Vertical Slide JA JAL -Awning CLR Clear WD Wood F Fixed J Jalousie FCTY Factory WHT White HS Horizontal Sliding DA Dual Action FRP Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic P Projected TWP Translucent Panel System GRY Gray NOTES: No.4 For frame types, see following page. No. 2 For frame details, see Drawing No. No. 3 For glass types, see Specification Section 08800. No. 4 Codes in COL column refer to color list in Specification Section 09000. No. 5 Numbers in Fnsh column refer to paint systems in Specification Section 09000. Size Window Frame Details Blinds I Other Requirements No. Width Hei tType Glass Col Mad Fnsh Col Head Jamb Sill Y/N Col Wl 4'-0 4'-8 F SG AL FCTY/BNZ 9 10 11 N W2 6'-8 51-4 F SG AL FCTY/BNZ 4/ 10 i 1 N W3 20'-0 5'4 F/HS SG AL FCTY/BNZ 4/ 10 11 N W4 6'-8 5'-4 HS SG AL FCTY/BNZ 4/ 10 11 N W5 4'-0 4'-8 HS SG AL FCPYlBNZ 9 10 11 N JULY 11, 2000 BOI158870.Al.FN 1 WINDOW AND RELIGHT 08002 SUPPLEMENT SCHEDULE No Text SECTION 08100 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. The Aluminum Association, Incorporated (AA): Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): A115, Frames, a Collection. 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. b. A366/A366M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold -Rolled, Commercial Quality. C. A480/A480M, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat -Rolled Stainless and Heat -Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. d. A525/A525M, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by Hot -Dip Process. e. B209B209M, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. f. E90, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 80, Standard for Fire Doors and Windows. 5. Steel Door Institute (SDI): a. 100, Recommended Specifications, Standard Steel Doors and Frames. b. 105, Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. C. 107, Hardware on Steel Doors. 1.2 SUB=ALS A. Shop Drawings: Applicable information for each type of door and frame, including: 1. Frame conditions and complete anchorage details, supplemented by suitable schedules covering doors and frames. 2. Glass and louver opening sizes and locations in doors. 3. Connections of door frames to structural steel framing concealed in frames. B01158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 08100 1 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 4. Location and field splice joints for frames too large to ship in one piece; indicate complete instructions for making field splices. 5. Joints required to accommodate expansion joint movement. 6. Relate to door numbers used in Contract Drawings. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Properly identify each item with number used in Contract Drawings. B. Store doors upright, in protected dry area, at least 1 inch off ground or floor and at least 1/4 inch between individual pieces. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 HOLLOW METAL UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Curries Manufacturing. 2. The Ceco Corp. 3. Fenestra Division, Marmon Group. 4. Mesker Industries, Inc. 5. Monarch Steelcraft, Ltd. 6. Overly Manufacturing Co. 7. Pioneer Industries. 8. Precision Metals, Inc. 9. Republic Steel Corp. 10. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co. 11. Trussbilt, Inc. 12. Williamsburg Steel Products Co. 13. Stiles Custom Metal, Inc. B. Basic Metal Material: ASTM A366; sheet steel, cold -rolled, stretcher level. C. Hollow Metal Frames: I. Products of hollow metal door manufacturer. 2. SDI 100, except as modified herein. 3. Frames for Doors and Windows: 16-gauge for interior and 14-gauge, with thermal break, for exterior, welded type, of cross-section shown. 4. Prepare floor and wall anchors, reinforcement, and cutouts for hardware to meet requirements of SDI 107. 5. Finished size, shape, and profile of frame members as shown. 6. Concealed fasteners or welding are preferred to through -the -face fasteners. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY I L, 2000 08100 2 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 7. Identification: Stamp opening number, as shown on Drawings, on center hinge reinforcement of each frame. D. Hollow Metal Doors: SDI 100, except as modified herein. SDI 107 and ANSI A115 to receive hardware specified in Door and Hardware Schedule. 1. Interior: 18-gauge, Grade II, Model 3, with honeycomb or polyurethane core. 2. Exterior: a. Flush Panel Doors: 18-gauge, Grade III, Model 3, with honeycomb or polyurethane core. b. Double Doors: Overlapping astragals for active leaf, except as noted or detailed otherwise. C. Flush end closure at top of doors. E. Door Louvers: Provide louvers in doors as specified in Section 10200, LOUVERS. F. Glazing: 1. Doors: Furnish with formed flush -type glazing strips with butt corner joints to permit selection of secure side in field. 2. Glazing Arrangements: Accommodate glass of type and thickness indicated and as specified in Section 08800, GLAZING. 2.2 FACTORY FINISHING REQUIREMENTS A. Hollow Metal Door and Frame Finish: 1. Galvanized with A60 or G60 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A525 (Wipe Coat galvanized coating is not acceptable). 2. Phosphate treated for paint adhesion. 3. One shop coat of baked -on rust -inhibiting prime coating compatible with finish coating as shown and as specified in Section 09900, PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Frames: 1. Installation: a. Maintain scheduled dimensions, hold head level, and maintain jambs plumb and square. b. Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction. B0I158870.ALFN JULY 11, 2000 08100 3 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES C. Wherever possible, leave frame spreader bars intact until frames are set perfectly square and plumb and anchors are securely attached. 2. Hollow Metal Frames: SDI 105. B. Doors: 1. Hollow Metal Doors: SDI 100. 2. Hardware: In accordance with manufacturer's templates and instructions. a. Adjust operable parts for correct function. b. Remove hardware, with exception of prime coated items, tag, box, and reinstall after finish paint work is completed. 3. Labeled Doors: NFPA Pamphlet No. 80. C. Provide manufacturer's standard core filler, anchors, fasteners, and other ancillary items. 3.2 FIELD PAINTING A. Where prime coat has been damaged, sand smooth and touch up with same primer as applied at shop. 1. Remove nest before painting. 2. Touch Up: Not obvious. 3. Perform immediately after door and frame installation. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect installed doors and frames against damage from other construction work. 3.4 SCHEDULES A. For tabulation of door and frame characteristics, such as size, type, detail, and finish hardware requirements, see Section 08001, DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE. END OF SECTION BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 08100 4 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND WINDOW WALLS PART GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. The Aluminum Association, Incorporated (AA): Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. 2. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 800, Voluntary Specification and Test Method for Sealants. 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. C509, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material. b. D1187, Standard Specification for Asphalt -Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal. C. E283, Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors under Specified Pressure DifferenceS Across the Specimen. d. E330, Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. e. E331, Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Provide a thermally isolated aluminum framing system that utilizes straight -in glazing without projecting stops. Position glass near exterior of frame and provide in -swinging operable vents where shown. 2. System shall have interior flashing to provide continuous flashing to exterior through pressure relieved horizontal weep holes. 3. Face Clip Design: a. Engaged by pushing straight into the clip. b. Easily removed for deglazing. C. Reusable for reglazing. B. Performance Requirements: Meet requirements of Article, PERFORMANCE TESTS. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 08410 1 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND WINDOW WALLS 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Details of framing and anchorage to structure. 2. Manufacturer's brochures or catalogs, specifications, recommendations, and standard details illustrating and specifying products proposed for use on this Project. 3. Show field measurements. B. Samples: At least 3-inch long samples of anodized extruded aluminum, showing probable range of variation in color. C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Evidence of installer's qualifications. 2. Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance tests. 3. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance: In accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Entity specializing in the installation of aluminum glazing systems, with a minimum of 3 years experience and approved by the system manufacturer. B. Pre -Installation Meeting: Conduct to discuss and verify project requirements, substrate conditions, and manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. B. Store materials as recommended by manufacturer, in inside designated areas, free of dust and corrosive fumes, as close as possible to point of installation. C. Prevent contaminants from contacting aluminum. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Framing systems shall be the products of a single manufacturer BOI158870.A1.FN DULY 11, 2000 08410 2 ALU ENUM ENTRANCES AND WINDOW WALLS B. Materials and products specified in this Section shall be products of: 1. Kawneer Co. 2. United States Aluminum Corp. 3. Tublite, Inc. C' 2.2 BASIC MATERIALS A. Basic Aluminum Extrusions: 6063-T5 aluminum not less than 0.094-inch _. thick. - B. Framing Members: 4-1/2 inches in depth with thermal break and face width of 2 inches or less. Sizes and profiles as shown. C. Glazing Gaskets: Framing manufacturer's standard elastomeric extrusion, conforming to ASTM C509. - ` D. Glass and Glazing: As specified in Section 08800, GLAZING. E. Concealed Fastening Devices, Reinforcements, and Other Internal Components: Of aluminum alloy, stainless steel, or corrosion -resistant plated... F. Screws: Stainless steel, factory finished color to match aluminum finish. G. Sealants: } -= 1. AAMA 800, to seal metal to metal, nonworking joints. 2. Color to be compatible with adjacent materials. H. Isolation Tape: 1. Manufacturers and Products: - a. Tremco; 440. b. 3M; EC1202. r C. Presstite; 579.6. 2.3 FINISH A. Exposed Framing Members: Free of scratches and other serious surface blemishes. �- B. Treatment and Color: 1. Caustic etch and anodic oxide. 2. Meet requirements of AA-M12C22A41, clear. 3. Color: Dark bronze. B01158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 08410 ' - 3 ALUNEgUM ENTRANCES 2.4 FABRICATION A. Methods of Fabrication and Assembly: Manufacturer's discretion, unless otherwise specified. B. Reinforcement for Surface Hardware: Manufacturer's standard. C. Wind Load: Reinforce mullions as necessary to limit deflection to 1/175 of span when wind load on wall is 30 psf in addition to dead loads. D. Assembly: As far as practicable, do fitting and assembly work in shop. _ PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Substrate Conditions: Verify acceptability for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Field Measurements: Verify actual opening sizes prior to fabrication. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. In accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Set items straight, level, square, plumb, and at proper elevations and in i alignment with other work. A C. Securely anchor units to surrounding structure to resist wind loads and to withstand the normal loads imposed by the operation of the doors. D. Fasten framing members in place using screws and backing, anchor plugs, or straps. 1. Accurately cut and fit framing and moldings to result in tightly closed 1 flush, hairline weathertight joints. 2. No visible unfinished aluminum. 3. Provide concealed attachments and fasteners. E. Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete, cement plaster, or stucco - with isolation paint, sealant, or isolation tape cut to neat line. F. Seal all joints. i G. Glazing: As specified in Section 08800, GLAZING. B01158870.AI.FN JULY 11, 2000 08410" 4 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND WINDOW WALLS 3.3 PERFORMANCE TESTS A. Air Leakage Through Assembly: Maximum 0.06 cfm per minute per square foot of wall area at 6.24 psf, as measured in accordance with ASTM E283. B. Resistance to Water Infiltration: No leaks in the complete system when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at test pressure of 8 psf. C. Performance Under Uniform Loading: 1. Test in accordance with ASTM E330 for a wind load of 30 psf. 2. Maximum Deflection: Not to exceed 1/175 of member span. 3. When Load is Removed: No permanent deformation or damage. 3.4 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Provide manufacturer's representative at site in accordance with Section 01640, MANUFACTURERS' SERVICES, for preinstallation meeting, installation assistance, inspection and certification of proper installation, and performance testing of specified equipment. 3.5 CLEANING A. After erection, protect exposed portions from damage by machines, plaster, lime, paint, acid, cement, or other harmful compounds. B. Remove protective materials and clean with plain water, water with soap, or household detergent. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent areas and finish surfaces from damage during product installation. 3.7 SCHEDULES A. For tabulation of frame characteristics, such as size, type, detail, and finish hardware requirements, see Section 08002, WINDOW AND RELIGHT SCHEDULE. B0I158870.A 1.FN 08410 END OF SECTION DULY 11, 2000 5 ALUNMgUM ENTRANCES AND WINDOW WAILS � � �w a�.. �� i 4 M m u,�. � ...I .. PART 1 1.1 SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE GENERAL REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. Al 15.1, Preparation of Mortice Locks in 1-3/8-inch and 1-3/4-inch Standard Steel Doors and Frames. b. Al17.1, Buildings and Facilities -Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped People. C. A156.1, Butts and Hinges (BHMA 101). d. A156.2, Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches (BHMA 601). e. A156.3, Exit Devices (BHMA 701) and Directory of Certified Exit Devices. f. A156.4, Door Controls - Closers (BHMA 301). g. A156.13, Mortise Locks and Latches (BHMA 621). h. A156.16, Auxiliary Hardware (BHMA 1201). i. A156.18, Materials and Finishes (BHMA 1301). 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Fire Protection Equipment List. 1.2 SUBNMALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's literature for each item of finish hardware required herein, clearly marked. 2. Finish Hardware Schedule: Furnish complete and detailed schedule, show product items, numbers, and finishes for hardware for each separate opening. 3. Special Tools: Provide listing and description of usage. B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Operations and Maintenance Manuals. 2. Manufacturer's Field Service Report. 3. Certification of Hardware Consultant. 4. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 08710 1 DOOR HARDWARE 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Supplier: Recognized supplier of architectural finish hardware, with warehousing facilities, who has been furnishing hardware in vicinity of Project for not less than 5 years, and who is, or who employs, architectural hardware consultant. B. Qualifications of Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC): Certified by Door and Hardware Institute. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Before delivery, clearly identify and tag each item of hardware with respect to specified description and location of installation. B. Provide secure storage for finish hardware until installation is made. 1.5 SPECIAL TOOLS A. Two sets of special tools for installation and maintenance of hardware. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS r A. Provide end products of one manufacturer for each product in order to achieve standardization for appearance, maintenance, and replacement. B. Finishes: ANSI A156.18. C. Some products listed below may not be used on this Project. 2.2 FASTENERS A. Stainless steel. ¢ 2.3 BUTT HINGES A. ANSI A156.1. B. Quantity per Door Leaf (Minimum): _. Door Height Hinges Up to 5'-0" 1 pair 5'411 to 7'--7" 1-1l2 pair B0I158870.A1.FN 08710 O JULY 11; 2000 t DOOR HARDWARE Door Height Hinges 7' 7 to 10'-011 2 pairs 10=1" to 12 -6" 2-1/2 pairs C. Hinge Height (Minimum): Door Width Hinge Height i Up to 3'-0" 4-1/2" 3'4" to 4'-0" 5" Over 4'-0" 6" D. Width: Minimum for clearance of trim and 180-degree swing. E. Exterior Hinges: Nonremoveable pin. F. Joint Tolerance: 0.012-inch maximum, gauged in CLOSED position. G. Finish: Satin stainless steel No. 630. H. Types and Manufacturers: No. on Stanley Mc- L4wrence ANSU BWAA HI Regular weight, two ball - ram, full mortise, F88191-32D TB2314 BB4101-32D A5112 stainless steel H4 Extra heavy -weight, four ball raoes, full mortise, FBB199-32D T4113386 BB5151-A A5111 stainless steel 2.4 LOCKS AND LATCH SETS A. Cylindrical or Bored Locks: ANSI A156.2, highest grade. 1. Trim: Wrought or cold -forged metal knobs and roses. .Y 2. Core Cylinders: Interchangeable, removable; minimum of six pins. 3. Strikes: Lip dimensions to fit configuration of trim. 4. Bolt Throw: 3/4-inch minimum, on latchbolts for pair of doors. 5. Knob Backset: 3-3/4 inches. 6. Manufacturers and Products: a. Sargent; AC. b. Schlage; Plymouth. C. Best; 4C Washington. BOI15887O.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 08710 3 DOOR HARDWARE W B. Mortise Locks: ANSI Al56.13, Series 1000, Grade 1 and A115.1. 1. Materials: Brass or stainless steel. 2. Trim: Wrought or forged lever handles and roses. 3. Core Cylinders: Interchangeable, removable; minimum of six pins. 4. Bolt Throw: 5/8-inch minimum. 5. Lever Backset: 2-3/4 inches. 6. Manufacturers and Products: a. Sargent; LNH. b. Schlage; 03. C. Best; 3H Fairbanks. C. Tactile Warning: Knurl knob backs and lever handles for touch identification; ANSI Al17.1, Section 4.29.3. D. Finish: Satin stainless steel No. 630. E. Types and Manufacturers: ANSI No. lyescri tion Best Sargent Schlage BHMA Ll Mortise entrance lock with lever 35H7F3H 8245-LNH L9456P-03 F12, F13 handle L5 Mortise utility room lock with 35H7EW3H 8204-LNH L9080-03 F07 lever handle L8 Mortice privacy lock with lever 35H7LF3H 8265-LNH L9040-03 F19, F22 handle F. Keying: 1. Lock Cylinders: Operate by grand master key system that allows for future expansion. 2. Keylocks: As directed by OWNER. 3. Keys: Two per lock; tag with schedule information. 4. Master Keys: Four, send by registered mail to OWNER. 5. Furnish lock manufacturer's removable core maximum security keying system. CONSTRUCTION KEY SYSTEM A A. Removable construction core system for locks. B0I158870.A1.FN DULY 11, 2000 08710 4 DOOR HARDWARE B. See Article MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES under Part 3, EXECUTION. 2.6 CONSTRUCTION KEY SYSTEM A. Assemble permanent cylinders with construction inserts and ship with all lock sets. B. Change Keys: Pack in separately identified envelopes and ship. C. Construction Keys: Pack in cartons marked "packing list" and ship. D. Construction Insert Extractor Keys, Master Keys, and Grand Master Keys: Ship by registered mail to OWNER. -' E. On completion of job, deliver construction keys to OWNER. 2.7 CLOSERS A. ANSI A156.4. B. Size closers in accordance with manufacturer's standards. Mount regular arm closers on pull side of doors. Mount parallel arm closers on push side of doors. On pair of doors provide closer on active leaf only, unless noted -J otherwise. C. Finish: Painted finish to match exterior of building. 1--J D. Types and Manufacturers: Type I/ :BjHMA No. Descri tion LCN Sar ent C2 Parallel arm 4110 Series 350-P Series CO2021 C5 Parallel arm with 411011 Series 350-PH Series CO2061 hold -open 2.8 STOPS AND HOLDERS A. ANSI A156.16. B. Machine Screws: In threaded anchors at concrete or masonry. C. Self -Tapping Screws: At stud partitions, wood, or metal mountings. D. Metal Risers: For mounting at carpet floors. BO1158870.A1.FN 08710 5 10,16,101 1 00 VIA 114 111,111F.61 . 2.9 2.10 2.11 E. Finish: Satin chromium -plated No. 626. F. Types and Manufacturers for Each Leaf - No. T e Descri tion BBW or GJ Baldwin ANSI/ BHMA S2 Wall bumper WC9X 4031 L02241 BOLTS A. ANSI A156.16. B. Finish: Bright nickel No. 645. C. Types and Manufacturers: ANSI/ No. T e Description SL-Wey Lawrence BHMA Bl Top and bottom flush 393-1/2 280 L04201 bolts KICKPLATES A. Solid metal, not plated. Bevel four edges. B. Width of door leaf less 1-1/2 inches at single leaf and less 1 inch at pairs. C. Finish: Satin stainless steel No. 630. D. Types and Manufacturers: Builders Brass Works, Baldwin, or Cipco as follows: 1. K1 10-inches high by 0.05-inch thick. THRESHOLDS A. Thresholds: One-piece full width of opening; extend beyond jamb where indicated. 'Al B. Provide with stainless steel machine screws in threaded expansion anchors at concrete. C. Finish: Mill finish aluminum, unless indicated otherwise. B0I158870.A1.FN 08710 6 JULY 11, 2000 r DOOR HARDWARE - D. Types and Manufacturers: 2.12 WEATHERSTRIP A. Finish: Clear anodized aluminum, unless indicated otherwise. B. Seal Types and Manufacturers: No. Description Pemko Reese W 1 Rubber or vinyl bulb at jambs S88D 797B and head, and at meeting stiles of pairs Door shoe 222AV DB596AF Rain!jrig 346C R201C W2 Rubber or vinyl bulb at jambs S88D 797B and head, and at meeting stiles of pairs Door shoe 222AV DB596AF 2.13 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS A. Provide as indicated in Door and Hardware Schedule: Mi Nameplate as specified in Section 10400, IDENTIFYING DEVICES, in text noted in Door and Hardware Schedule M3 Barrier -free pictorial symbol, 6 inch by 6 inch, as specified in Section 10400, IDENTIFYING DEVICES 2.14 SR ENCERS A. Ives, Glynn -Johnson. B. At metal frame of each hinged door that does not have seals scheduled. C. Three at single leaves and two at pairs. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY Ili 2000 08710 7 DOOR HARDWARE 2.15 TEMPLATES A. Fabricate to template hardware applied to metal doors and frames. B. Ensure that required templates are furnished to various manufacturers for -$ fabrication purposes. C. Templates: Make available not more than 10 days after receipt of approved Hardware Schedule. 2.16 EXIT AND FIRE DOORS A. Exit Doors: Always openable from inside by simple turn of lever handle or push on panic bar without use of key or any special knowledge or effort, to _ include each leaf of door pairs. B. Hardware for Fire Doors: Underwriters Laboratories Inc., Fire Protection 'A Equipment List. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. In accordance with manufacturers written instructions. B. Make Work neat and secure, develop full strength of components, and provide proper function. C. Prevent marring, scratching, or otherwise damaging adjacent finishes during hardware installation. D. Latchbolts: 1. Install to engage in strikes automatically, whether activated by closers or manually. 2. In no case shall additional manual pressure be required to engage J' latchbolt in strike. } E. Stops and Holders: Set to allow doors to open as far as possible. F. Wall Mounted Hardware: Install over solid structural backing or solid i blocking in hollow walls. G. Thresholds: 1. Cope ends neatly to profile of jamb. 2. Set in sealant and seal ends to jambs. , �_. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 i 08710 8 DOOR HARDWARE LA H. Key Control System Cabinet: Install where shown. I. Hardware: Adjust for easy, noise -free operation. J. Replace damaged hardware items. 3.2 MOUNTING DIMENSIONS A. Standard Door Hardware Locations: As recommended and published by Door and Hardware Institute, except as noted or detailed otherwise. -- B. Door Silencers: Install 3 inches from top and bottom of jamb and 1 inch above strike at single doors, and 3 inches from edges of doors in head for pairs of doors. C. Nameplates: Attach to doors 5 feet 6 inches above floor using self -sticking permanent adhesive. L_ 3.3 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Deliver permanent lock cores to site. B. Remove temporary construction cores and insert permanent cores. C. Inspect each lock set to ensure permanent cores are operating satisfactorily. D. Deliver to OWNER change and control keys for permanent system. E. Return temporary construction cores to manufacturer. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Cover and protect exposed surfaces of hardware during installation and until Substantial Completion. B. Fit, dismantle, and reinstall finish hardware as required for finish painting work. C. Protect and prevent staining of hardware during construction in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Remove protective measures and permanent lock cylinders installed prior to final cleaning. B0I15887O.Al.FN DULY ,11, 2000 08710 9 DOOR HARDWARE 3.5 DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Door and Hardware Schedule in Section 08001, DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE, is guide to functional requirements of each opening. B. Provide finish hardware as scheduled. Sizes omitted shall be as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION BOI158870.A1.FN II JULY Ill 2000 08710 10 DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): a. 800, Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants. b. 804.1, Specification for Ductile Back -Bedding Glazing Tapes. 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Z97.1, Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings —Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test. 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. C542, Standard Specification for Lock -Strip Gaskets. b. C920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. C. C 1036, Standard Specification for Flat Glass. d. C 1048, Standard Specification for Heat -Treated Flat Glass -Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. e. C1172, Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass. f. E774, Standard Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units. 4. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR): 16 CFR 1201, Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials. 5. Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA): a. Glazing Manual. b. Glazing Sealing Systems Manual. 6. Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturer's Association (SIGMA): Standards and Specifications, Number 65-7-2. 7. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL). [�� ej 9 _5I10ICA A. Shop Drawings: 1. Complete schedule of glass and glazing material to be used for each purpose. 2. Details of methods of glazing for each type of glazing condition. 3. Catalog cuts of glazing materials with inclusion of glass edge cutting procedures. B0I158870.ALFN 08800 JULY 1=1, 2000 GLAZING B. Samples: 1. Two of each different type of glass at least 4 inches by 8 inches properly labeled. 2. Two of each different type of glazing materials. C. Quality Control Submittals: Documentation of glazer's previous experience and manufacturer's approval. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Glazier. I. Have previous experience in installation of equal size and .requirements which can be inspected by the OWNER. 2. Have approval of glass and framing manufacturer(s). B. Factory Label Glass: Nonlabeled glass will be rejected. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage: 1. Support cases on both sides when stored vertically. 2. After unpacking, place interleaving protection between lites. 3. Keep glass and interleaving dry by storing inside where temperatures are above dewpoint, or if outside storage is necessary, cover the glass interleaving with opaque tarpaulins or plastic and inspect periodically. Wet interleaving can stain glass. 4. Avoid exposing stored glass to direct sunlight. B. Handling: 1. Stack individual lites on edge and lean them against sturdy uprights at a slope of 5 to 7 degrees from vertical. 2. Cushion the bottom edges with soft, firm pads free of dirt, grit, glass chips, or other foreign material. 3. Do not rotate or cartwheel insulating glass units over their corners. Use a turning device such as a rolling block if units must be rotated. 1.5 SPECIAL GUARANTEE A. Provide manufacturer's extended guarantee or warranty, with OWNER named as beneficiary, in writing, as Special Guarantee. Special Guarantee shall provide for correction, or at the option of the OWNER, removal and replacement of Work specified in this Specification section found defective BOI158870.A1.FN DULY 11, 2000 08800 2 GLAZING during a period of 5 years after the date of Substantial Completion. Duties and obligations for correction or removal and replacement of defective Work shall be as specified in the General Conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS t_ 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products of the following manufacturers, that meet these Specifications, may be used on this Project: 1. ASG Industries, Inc. 2. Libbey-Owens-Ford Glass Co. 3. PPG Industries, Inc. 4. Guardian Industries, Corp. 5. Monsanto Co. 6. Panlam Industries. 7. Viracon,Inc. A. Laminated Safety Glass (S.G.): ASTM C1172, 7-mm minimum total thickness, consisting of two lights of float glass, bonded to minimum 0.030-inch high -resistant plastic interlayer, meeting 16 CFR 1201, CI or CH, as applicable, and ANSI Z97.1. 2.3 ANCILLARY MATERIALS A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene or EPDM, 70 Shore A durometer hardness, chemically compatible with sealant used. B. Glazing Tape: Polyisobutylene, meeting AAMA 804.1, color as selected. C. Glazing Channels: Resilient EPDM or vinyl gaskets as provided with aluminum frames to be glazed. D. Metal Sash Glazing Compounds: AAMA 800, nonskinning type butyl. E. Glazing Sealant: One -component nonsag silicone elastomeric sealant ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use G, or AAMA 800. F. Gaskets: Preformed Lock -Strip or "zipper" type glazing gaskets meeting ASTM C542, as manufactured by: 1. F. H. Maloney Co.; Lock -Strip. 2. Standard Products Co.; Stanlok. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 08800 3 GLAZING PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Do not perform glazing work in damp, foggy, or rainy weather, or when temperatures are not within range recommended by FGMA "Glazing Manual." B. Surfaces: Smooth, even, sound, dry, and clean. C. Priming: Complete and cured. D. Measure size of frames to receive glass and compute actual glass size allowing for edge clearances. E. Use wire glass in all glazed openings in labeled fire doors and tempered glass in all other doors, transoms, and sidelights. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF GLAZING A. General: Follow recommendations of glass manufacturer and FGMA "Glazing Sealing Systems Manual" and the following: 1. Cutting: a. Make concealed edges clean, straight cut, and free from chips and fissures. b. Shop cut all glass. Nipping glass on job not allowed. C. Allow for maximum grip on all edges. 2. Positioning Glass: a. Set glass with equal bearing on entire width of pane. b. Position sheets of glass with setting blocks. C. Set tong marks of tempered glass at bottom of installed sheet. d. Orient pattern and draw of glass pieces in same direction. e. Place glass waves parallel to floor. f. Set smooth side to exterior. 3. Glazing: In accordance with FGMA "Glazing Manual" and window or frame and glass manufacturers' printed instructions. 4. Glass shall not move or rattle. 3.3 NOSE TEST A. Use 3/4-inch minimum hose without nozzle. With full stream, flood glazing from bottom to top. B. Correct any leaks disclosed by hose test by reglazing and retesting until eliminated. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 08800 4 GLAZING 3.4 CLEANING A. Leave glass and glazing in undamaged condition and ready for final cleaning. B. Remove excess glazing compound from installed glass. C. Remove labels from glass surface at time of final cleaning. - D. Wash and polish both faces of glass. 3.5 PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORK A. Protection: 1. Keep glass free from contamination by materials capable of staining glass. 2. Install tape across lights secured to frames or structure. 3. No tape or marking allowed on glass. B. Replacements and Repairs: Prior to Substantial Completion, replace broken, --' defective, or scratched glass and repair damaged compounds. END OF SECTION e B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 08800 5 GLAZING PART 2 2.1 PART 3 3.1 3.2 SECTION 09000 FINISH SCHEDULES GENERAL SUBNMALS A. Submittal requirements are specified in appropriate product sections. PRODUCTS GENERAL A. Products and materials referred to in this section are specified in product sections. EXECUTION INSTALLATION A. Requirements for incorporation of scheduled products into the Work are specified in appropriate product sections. SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplements listed below, following "END OF SECTION," are a part of this Specification. 1. Interior Finish Schedule: A tabulation of surface materials, finishes, and colors for each interior space numbered on the Drawings. 2. Exterior Finish Schedule: A tabulation of materials, finishes, and colors for each exterior space shown on the Drawings. 3. Color List. B0I158870.A1.FN 09000 END OF SECTION 1 JULY 11, 2000 FINISH SCHEDULES No Text ABBREVIATIONS: AC Acoustical Ceiling ACFL Access Flooring ACMU Acoustical CMU ACT Acoustical Tile AL Aluminum AS As Selected BRK Brick CLR Clear CMU Concrete Masonry Units COL Colo CONC Concrete CNIR Counter CPT Carpet CRC Chernieal-Resistant Coatings Cr Ceramic Tile EIFS Exterior insulation and Finish System EXP Exposed Structure FCi"Y Factory FRP Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic FWC Fabric Wall Covering FNSH Finish GMU Glass Masonry Unit GCMU Glazed Concrete Masonry GWB Gypsum Board GSB Gypsum Soffit Board GLZ Glazing HGT Height HDNR Hardener MATL Material MDO Medium Density Overlay MET Metal PLAM Plastic Laminate PLAS Plaster PAVT Paver Tile PLWD Plywood PNL Paneling PTN Partition INTERIOR FINISH SCHEDULE QT Quarry Tile RESIL Resilient RRUB Radial Rubber Flooring RUB Rubber Sheet Flooring SLR Sealer SI LS Seamless Epoxy SOI Spray -On Insulation SVIN Sheet Vinyl TCTG Traffic Coating VCT Vinyl Composition Tile VINT Vinyl Tile VWC Vinyl Wall Covering WD Wood WRB Water Resistant GWB W W Window Wail X Open NOTES: No. I Numbers in FNSH column refer to paint systems in Specification Section 09900. No. 2 Codes in COL column refer to color list in this section. No. 3 Finish closets and alcoves the same as the space into which they open. No. 4 Wall surfaces behind casework and other built-in items need not be painted or covered with wallcovering. No. S For exterior finishes and colors, see Specifications and elevation drawings. No. 6 For door and frame finishes, see Door and Hardware Schedule in Specification Section 08001. No. 9 Refer to Specification Section 03300 for schedule of concrete finishes. No. 8 For window and trim finishes, see schedule in Specification Section 08002. fit i B0I15$$70.Al.FN JULY 11, 2000 09000 SUPPLEMENT 1 FINISH SCHEDULES M � m EXTERIOR FINISH SCHEDULE Item/Material Finish Color Metal Roofing & Fascia KYNAR To be selected by OWNER Metal Soffit KYNAR To be selected by OWNER CMU PS-109 To be selected by OWNER Doors & Frames Paint System as indicated on schedules To be selected by OWNER Water Recycle Tank PS-113 To be selected by OWNER B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 09000 SUPPLEMENT 1 FINISH SCHEDULES SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. C36, Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard. b. C475, Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. C. C514, Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsumboard. d. C840, Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. e. C931, Standard Specification for Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board. f. C 1002, Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases. g. C1047, Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base. 2. Gypsum Association (GA): a. 214, Levels of Gypsum Board Finishes. b. 216, Recommended Specifications for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Temperature: Maintain between 55 and70 degrees F for 24 hours before, during, and after application and finishing. B. Ventilation: Provide ventilation, but protect from drafts during hot, dry weather. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Fire -Rated Board (GWBX): ASTM C36, Type X, 5/8-inch thick with tapered edges- B. Water -Resistant Board (WRB): ASTM C630, Type X, 5/8-inch thick with tapered edges. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 09250 ' 1 GYPSUM BOARD C. Fasteners: 1. Nails: ASTM C514, smooth shank, 1-1/2 inches. 2. Screws: ASTM C1002, Type W or S, 1-1/4 inches. D. Joint Treatment: 1. Tape: ASTM C475, perforated; 2-inch wide 10 by 10 glass mesh tape for soffit board. 2. Compound: ASTM C475, all-purpose, ready -mixed. E. Metal Accessories: 1. ASTM C1047, galvanized metal. 2. Comer Bead: ASTM C840, Figure 1, CBI14XI 14. 3. Edge Trim: ASTM C840, Figure 1, L12 or L-58. 2.2 SPRAY TEXTURE A. Interior Ceilings: , 1. United States Gypsum; Imperial QT texture finish with perlite aggregate. 2. Gold Bond; Perfect Spray. B. Interior Walls: 1. United States Gypsum; Texture I sand finish. 2. Gold Bond; Wall Spray texture finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION OF GYPSUM BOARD A. Inspection 1. Verify that framing is aligned, spaced correctly, and does not exceed - maximum allowable for gypsum board used. 2. Correct deficiencies before proceeding. B. Application: 1. Meet requirements of ASTM C840 and GA-216. 2. Use gypsum board of maximum lengths to minimize end joints. Stagger end joints when they occur. 3. Use edge trim wherever gypsum board abuts another material. 4. Apply gypsum board to ceiling before walls. B0I158870.A1.FN JLTLY 1 1i 2000 1 09250 2 GYPSUM BOARD t 5. Fasten gypsum board securely to framing using double nailing, screw, or adhesive method. 6. On intermediate and end supports, space fasteners 6 to 8 inches apart on walls and 5 to 7 inches apart on ceilings. 7. Keep fasteners 3/8-inch from ends and edges of panels. 8. Drive fasteners to just below surface of gypsum board without breaking the surface paper. 9. Begin fastening in center of panel and work toward edges. iC ► I I�Z� A. General: Meet requirements of ASTM C840; leave a flat, uniformly smooth surface ready for painting. B. Taping and Finishing: 1. Apply tape properly for bond to gypsum board. When compound is dry, apply second and finishing coats in sufficient widths to form a smooth, even plane. After dry, lightly sand final coat. Do no raise nap of the paper when sanding. 2. Finish: Conform to GAi214, Level 3. 3. Leave gypsum board ready for painting or wall covering. C. Fasteners: Cover fasteners, heads, and dents and gouges with three successive coats of finishing compound, each applied in a different direction. D. Corner and Edge Trim: Finish with successive coats of finishing compound so as to make the bead flush with the board surface. 3.3 SPRAY TEXTURE A. Application: 1. Apply on gypsum board wall and ceiling surfaces, except behind ceramic tile and wall covering, following manufacturer's printed directions for a medium texture. 2. Before texture application, finish gypsum board as specified for Level 3. 3. When surfaces are prepared and dry, apply sealer and allow to dry. Mix texture finish material as directed by manufacturer. 4. Use spray equipment of a size and type to assure acceptable results. 5. Apply by spray only at a coverage rate not to exceed 8 square feet per pound and in accordance with directions printed on container. Apply material to blend uniformly and cover fully without starved spots or other evidence of thin application. Provide uniform texture without application patterns. B0I158870.A1.FN 09250 3 JULY 11, 2000 GYPSUM BOARD [a After spray application, knock down and flatten high spots with trowel to produce a Brocade or Travertine marble texture. END OF SECTION B01158870.A1.FN 09250 4 P Ll �-i LJ1 L-11 LJ -L A JULY 11, 2000 GYPSUM BOARD SECTION 09300 TILE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. A108.1A, Glazed Wall Tile, Ceramic Mosaic Tile, Quarry Paver Tile and Glazed Paver Tile installed with Portland Cement Mortar. b. A108.4, Ceramic Tile installed with Water -Resistant Organic Adhesives. C. A118.1, Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar. d. A118.3, Chemical Resistant, Water -Cleanable Tile Setting and Grouting Epoxy, and Epoxy Adhesive. e. A118.4, Latex -Portland Cement Mortar. f. Al18.6, Ceramic Tile Grouts. g. Al36.1, Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile. h. A137.1, Ceramic Tile. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A497, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. b. C144, Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. C. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. d. C206, Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime. e. C207, Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. f. C267, Standard Test Method for Chemical Resistance of Mortars, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings. g. C395, Standard Specification for Chemical -Resistant Resin Mortars. h. C847, Standard Specification for Metal Lath. i. C920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. j. D226, Standard Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 3. Tile Council of America (TCA): a. Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. b. Handbook for Limitations. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 09300 1 TILE No Text SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING PARTI GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. D412, Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension. b. D570 El, Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics. C. F1066, Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile. d. F1303, Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing. e. F1344, Standard Specification for Rubber Floor Tile. 2. Federal Specifications (FS): a. L-17475A, Floor Covering, Vinyl Surface (Tile and Roll), with Backing (Int. Amend. 2). b. T T 7 F 1238A, Floor Covering, Linoleum. C. SS-W-40A, Wall Base: Rubber and Vinyl Plastic (Int. Amend. 1, Notice 1). d. 2 Z-T-001237, Tread, Stair, Flexible and Semi -Rigid Type Rubber and Vinyl. e. SS T-312B, Tile, Floor: Asphalt, Rubber, Vinyl, Vinyl Composition (Int. Amend. 1). 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Bulletin No. 56. 4. Rubber Manufacturers Association: Specification for Rubber Flooring. 1.2 SUBh=ALS A. Samples: 1. Two full-size tiles for each type and color or pattern of resilient flooring. 2. Two 2-1/2-inch wide strips of base material and stair coverings proposed for use. 3. Two 6-inch long strips of trim materials. B. Quality Control Submittals: Manufacturer's certificate of compliance. C. Contract Closeout Submittals: List of recommended maintenance products, methods, and procedures. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 09650 1 RESILIENT FLOORING 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials in original containers at not less than 70 degrees F ambient temperature for not less than 24 hours immediately before installation. 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient temperature in space to receive flooring between 70 and 90 degrees F for not less than 24 hours before and 48 hours after installation. B. Maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees F after flooring is installed, except as specified above. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish additional floor covering materials from same production run as installed material at the rate of 45 square feet for each 1,000 square feet. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Do not install floor coverings until concrete slab has cured for 60 days or until primer material in test patches cannot be scraped or peeled from the slab after drying 24 hours. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Flooring products of the following manufacturers, meeting these Specifications, may be used on this Project: 1. Afco Rubber Corp. 2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 3. Azrock Floor Products. 4. Burke Flooring Products. 5. Congoleutn Corp. 6. Endura, Division of the Biltrite Corp. 7. Flintkote Co. 8. Johnsonite, Division of Duramax, Inc. 9. Kentile Floors, Inc. 10. Mercer Plastics Co., Inc. 11. Nannington Commercial. 12. National Floor Products Co. 13. Nora Flooring, Division of Robus Products Corp. 14. RCA Rubber Co. 15. R. C. Musson Rubber Co. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 09650 2 RESII.IEN`T FLOORING SECTION 09300 TILE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. A108.LA, Glazed Wall Tile, Ceramic Mosaic Tile, Quarry Paver Tile and Glazed Paver Tile installed with Portland Cement Mortar. b. A108.4, Ceramic Tile installed with Water -Resistant Organic Adhesives. C. A118.1, Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar. d. A118.3, Chemical Resistant, Water -Cleanable Tile Setting and Grouting Epoxy, and Epoxy Adhesive. e. A 118.4, Latex -Portland Cement Mortar. f. Al18.6, Ceramic Tile Grouts. g. A136.1, Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile. h. A137.1, Ceramic Tile. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A497, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. b. C 144, Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. C. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. d. C206, Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime. e. C207, Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. f. C267, Standard Test Method for Chemical Resistance of Mortars, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings. g. C395, Standard Specification for Chemical -Resistant Resin Mortars. h. C847, Standard Specification for Metal Lath. i. C920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. j. D226, Standard Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 3. Tile Council of America (TCA): a. Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. b. Handbook for Limitations. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 09300 1 T L,E 2. Organic Adhesive Method: a. Maximum Variation in Subfloor Surface: 1/16 inch in 3 feet. b. Maximum Height of Abrupt Irregularities: 1/32 inch. C. Maximum Variation in Vertical and Ceiling Surfaces: 1/8 inch in 8 feet. 1-J D. Grounds, anchors, plugs, hangers, bucks, electrical and mechanical work, in or Vi behind tile, to be installed prior to proceeding with tilework. E. Protection: Protect adjoining work surfaces before tilework begins. F. Make substrate firm, dry, clean, and free of oily or waxy films. 3.2 INSTALLATION, A. Prepare surfaces, fit, set, or bond tile, grout and clean file in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI Standards for setting method specified, except as otherwise noted. B. Trim: Provide bases, caps, stops, returns, trimmers, and other shapes to finish installation. C. Setting Floor Tile (Thin -Set Application): 1. On Concrete: Meet TCA Method F113 with latex-portland cement grout. D. Edge Strips: 1. At openings without thresholds and similar discontinuous edges of thin - set file floors. 2. Where ceramic tile floors are adjacent to other flooring material at same level. 3. Where ceramic file cove base is combined with other types of flooring. 3.3 CLEANING AND SEALING A. Clean tile surfaces thoroughly on completion of grouting. B. Remove grout haze, observing tile manufacturer's recommendations as to use of acid and chemical cleaners. C. Rinse tilework thoroughly with clean water before and after using chemical cleaners. D. Polish surface of glazed tilework with soft cloth. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 09300 4 TILE E. After grout has cured for 10 days, clean and seal nonglazed tiles following sealer manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 3.4 PROTECTION A. From Construction Dirt: 1. Apply protective coat of neutral cleaner solution, 1 part cleaner to 1 part water, to clean completed tile walls and floors. 2. Cover tile floors with heavy-duty, nonstaining construction paper, masked in -place. 3. Just before substantial completion, remove paper and rinse protective coat of neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. B. From Traffic: 1. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from using newly tiled floors for at least 7 days. 2. Place large, flat boards in walkways and wheelways for 7 days where use of newly tiled floor with cement type grout is unavoidable. END OF SECTION B0I158870.A1.FN 09300 5 JULY 11, 2000 TILE rr Lam..,._..,.. ,�� . � � :�. ._� • ...,.,, ...d- '. ........�..� ,..:� , ,:' .. ,' .....a , ... 16. U.S. National Rubber Co., Inc. 17. Vinyl Plastics, Inc. 2.2 FLOOR COVERING MATERIALS A. General: Furnish materials uniform in thickness and size with edges cut accurately and square; uniform color with variations in variegated patterns kept to a minimum. B. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT): 1. ASTM F1066, Composition 1, Class 2, through pattern tile. 2. Size: 12- by 12-inch by 1/84nch thick. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Armstrong; Premium Excelon Stonetex. b. Azrock; Thru-Quartz. A. General: Uniform in 0.125-inch thickness and in as long lengths as practicable to suit conditions of installation. 1. Factory premolded internal and external corners to match base when available. 2. Flat style for carpet. 3. 4 inches high. B. Rubber Base: Federal Specification SS-W40, Type I. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Trim: Furnish in lengths as long as practical to suit conditions of installation. B. Reducers: 1. Standard rubber or vinyl floor reducer in thickness to suit abutting floor covering by 1-inch wide, tapered or beveled -edge strip. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. Johnsonite; Reducer Series RRS. b. Mercer, 633 Tile Reducer. C. Metal Trim: Type recommended by sheet vinyl manufacturer for installation at top of integral base. D. Adhesive: Type and brands of adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of floor covering material for conditions of installation. BOI158870.A1.FN I JULY 11, 2000 09650 3 RESHJENT FLOORING E. Primer and Crack Filler: Type and brand recommended by floor covering manufacturer. F. Floor Filler: Asphalt mastic as manufactured by: 1. Armstrong, Lancaster, PA. 2. National Floor Products Co., Florence, AL. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate for excessive moisture content and unevenness preventing execution and quality of resilient flooring as specified. B. Correct defects before installation of resilient flooring. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove dirt, oil, grease, or other foreign matter from surfaces to receive floor covering materials. B. Fill cracks less than 1/16-inch wide and depression less than 1/8-inch deep with floor filler. C. Prime sanded wood surfaces with one brush coat of primer. D. Prime surfaces other than wood if recommended by floor covering manufacturer. 3.3 APPLICATION OF ADHESIVES ' f A. Mix and apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.: B. Provide safety precautions during mixing and applications as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. i. C. Apply uniformly over surfaces: 1. Cover only amount of area that can be covered by flooring material within recommended working time of adhesive. 2. Remove any adhesive that dries or films over. t� 3. Do not soil walls, bases, or adjacent areas with adhesives. 4. Promptly remove any spillage. i_ D. Apply adhesives with notched trowel or other suitable tool. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY,11, 2000 09650 4 RESILIENT FLOORING E. Clean trowel and rework notches as necessary to ensure proper application of adhesive. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF TILE MATERIALS A. Start tile at center of room or space; work toward perimeter. B. Do not lay tile less than half the width of a field tile except where accepted by ENGINEER for irregularly shaped rooms or spaces. C. Cut border file neatly and accurately to fit within 1/64 inch of abutting surfaces. D. Use reducer edge strip at exposed file edges. E. Fit flooring material neatly and tightly into breaks and recesses, against bases, around pipes and penetrations, under saddles or thresholds, and around permanent cabinets and equipment. F. Lay tile parallel to room axis in straight courses with cross joints parallel. Lay tile with grain or pattern running in opposite direction between adjacent tile. G. Roll flooring with 75- to 100-pound roller in both directions. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF BASE A. General: Remove defects in wall and floor that would prevent level and true installation of base material. 1. Install base around perimeter of room or space, where shown, and at toe spaces of casework and cabinets. 2. Unroll base material and cut into accurate lengths as desired or as required for minimum number of joints. 3. Match edges at seams or double cut adjoining lengths to give continuous appearance. 4. Install with tight butt joints with no joint widths greater than 1/64 inch. B. Top -Set Base: 1. Apply adhesive and firmly adhere to wall surfaces. 2. Press down so bottom cove edge follows floor profile. 3. Ensure top and bottom edges of base are in firm contact with walls and floors. 4. Form internal and external corners by using premolded corners. Other methods, acceptable to ENGINEER, may be used if premolded corners are not available. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 09650 5 RESHJENT FLOORING 5. Scribe base accurately to abutting materials. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF TRIM MATERIALS A. Provide reducers where floor covering terminates exposing edge of covering. B. Center reducer under door, where floor covering terminates at a door opening. Fit end edges to door frames and abutting surfaces and other edges to adjoining materials. C. Apply adhesives and bond securely to substrates in straight true lines. Meet visible and related features of building construction with a maximum deviation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Upon completion of the installation of floor covering and adjacent work, and after materials have set, clean surfaces with a neutral cleaner as recommended by manufacturer for type of floor covering material installed. B. Repair adjacent surfaces damaged by flooring installation. C. Wax Finishing: 1. Provide wax, cleaner, or other finishing material as recommended by floor covering manufacturer for the particular type of flooring material. 2. Apply one coat of nonslip wax or other finish as recommended by floor covering manufacturer; buff to a sheen. 3. Do not wax radial rubber tile. D. Protect completed work from traffic and damage until Substantial Completion by covering with plastic sheet, kraft paper, or plywood panels. 3.8 INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Areas to receive resilient flooring pattern are indicated in Section 09000, FINISH SCHEDULES. END OF SECTION B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 09650 6 RESILIENT FLOORING SECTION 09680 CARPET PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. b. E648, Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor - Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Installation drawings showing details of carpet installation, seam locations, pattern, color, carpet to be used, and other pertinent details as may be required. 2. Complete list of other materials proposed. 3. Complete carpet and pad specifications indicating conformance with requirements herein. B. Samples: 1. Two 12-inch by 12-inch Samples of each color, type, and pattern of carpet to be used. 2. A 12-inch by 12-inch Sample of pad.to be used. C. Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Statement of Qualification that the carpeting installer is approved by manufacturer to install the carpeting materials. 2. Certificates: Test certificates for flammability that show that the carpet and adhesives have the flame spread rating specified. 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 4. Two copies of a list of recommended maintenance products and recommended maintenance methods and procedures. S. Three copies of manufacturer's maintenance manual for specified carpet. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 09680 1 CARPET 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not begin carpet installation until work of other trades, including painting, has been completed. B. Do not install floor covering until concrete slab has cured for 60 days or until primer material in test patches cannot be scraped or peeled from the slab after drying for 24 hours. C. Maintain ambient temperature, in space to receive carpet, of 70 degrees F for not less than 24 hours before and 48 hours after installation. 1.4 EXTRA MATERIAL A. Furnish additional carpeting materials from same production run as materials installed for future maintenance at the rate of 45 square feet for each 500 square feet up to a maximum of 100 square feet. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer. Experienced in the installation of carpet floor covering, approved by manufacturer, employing only experienced personnel, and familiar with manufacturer's recommendations for installation of materials, and acceptable to the ENGINEER. B. Dimensions shown on Drawings are approximate. Verify measurements and other conditions of the job. C. Order ample yardage as no substitutions will be permitted to make up for shortage of material. D. Carpet of the same type in contiguous areas shall be of the same dye lot. E. Conform to applicable A.D.A. requirements. 1.6 SPECIAL GUARANTEE A. Manufacturer's extended guarantee or warranty, with OWNER named as beneficiary, in writing, as special guarantee. Special guarantee shall provide for correction, or at the option of the OWNER, removal and replacement of Work specified in this Specification section found defective during a period of 5 years after the date of Substantial Completion. Duties and obligations for correction or removal and replacement of defective Work as specified in the General Conditions. I r B0I158870.A1.FN DULY 11, 2000 09680 2 CARPET { •-- 1 B. Conditions: 1. Delamination: Not occur to the backing. 2. Wear: No more than 10 percent face fiber loss. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET MANUFACTURERS A. Bentley Mills, Inc., City of Industry, CA. B. Bigelow -Sanford, Inc., Greenville, SC. C. Lees Carpets, Div. Burlington Industries, King of Prussia, PA. D. Stratton Industries, Cartersville, GA. 2.2 CARPET TILE (F-4) A. Type: Textured loop. B. Face Yarn: Dupont Antron Lumena, solution -dyed, continuous filament nylon. C. Gauge:1J10-inch. D. Pile Height: 0.218-inch. E. Yarn Weight: 32 ounces per square yard. F. Total Weight: 70 ounces per square yard. G. Primary Backing: Polypropylene. H. Secondary Backing: Woven polypropylene. I. Size: 18 inches by 18 inches. J. Reinforcement: Fiberglass. K. Flame Resistance: Passes Methenamine Pill Test (DOC-FFl-70). L. Flooring Radiant Panel (ASTM E648): Passes Class 1, Critical Radiant Flux greater than 0.45 watts per square centimeter, direct glue. 2.3 ANCILLARY MATERIALS A. Seaming Tape: As recommended by carpet manufacturer. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 09680 3 CARPET Trim: 1. 2. Vinyl, color to match base material. Manufacturers and Products: a. Johnsonite; Edge Guard, EG-XX-H. b. Mercer Products Co., Inc.; Vinyl No. 8 (800) Imperial Reducer. C. Adhesive: 1. Synthetic rubber, resin blend, as recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Bentley Healthguard No. B55 Top Bond Adhesive for rollgoods. D. Tackless Strip: Commercial strip as recommended by the carpet manufacturer. E. Floor Filler: 1. Asphalt mastic. j 2. Manufacturers: a. Armstrong, Lancaster, PA. b. National Floor Products Co., Florence, AL. F. Concrete Underlayment, Manufacturer and Product: 1. Ardex Inc., Coraopolis, PA; Ardex K-55. 2. Thoro Systems Products; Thoro Underlayment. PART 3 EXECUTION : 3.1 INSPECTION OF SURFACES A. Examine substrate for excessive moisture content or unevenness. B. Do not proceed with installation of materials until defects have been corrected. C. Carefully check dimensions and other conditions in the field and properly fit carpet in areas indicated. 3.2 PREPARATION ki A. Level floors having depressions, cracks, or expansion joints, with floor filler or concrete underlayment. B. Remove foreign matter, grease, paint, oil, and plaster droppings. $ C. Clean floors thoroughly, leaving them dry and structurally firm. B0I158870.A1.FN 09680 4 JULY 11,.2000 { CARPET 3.3 SEAMING A. Double cut carpet at seams, straight and true. B. Seal cut edges. C. Set iron on medium heat and move at a speed that will produce a complete melt of the tape adhesive. D. Follow seaming tape manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. E. Lay out carpet with the fewest possible seams. Run seams parallel with the main source of traffic. No parallel seams will be allowed in front of doorways. APPLICATION OF ADHESIVES A. Mix and apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. B. Apply uniformly over surfaces: 1. Cover only that amount of area that can be covered by carpet within the recommended working time of the adhesive. 2. Remove adhesive that dries or films over. 3. Do not soil walls, bases, or adjacent areas with adhesives. 4. Promptly remove spillage. C. Apply adhesives with notched trowel or other suitable tool. D. Clean trowel and rework notches as necessary to ensure proper application of adhesive. INSTALLATION OF GLUED DOWN CARPETING A. Install carpet in strict conformance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Do not damage walls or other adjacent work. B. Run carpeting lengthwise with the long dimension of spaces. Stretch, as required, to a true and even surface and secure to the subfloor with adhesive. Minimize seams in accordance with installer's Seaming Diagram and make as invisible as reasonably possible. INSTALLATION OF TRIM MATERIALS A. Provide where carpet terminates, exposing edge. 11158870.A1.FN i80 E JULY 11, 2000 CARPET 3.7 Mi B. Center reducer under door, where carpeting terminates at a door opening. Fit end edges to door frames and abutting surfaces and other edges to adjoining materials. C. Apply adhesives and bond trim securely to substrates in straight true lines. Meet visible and related features of building construction with a maximum deviation of 1/8-inch in 10 feet. CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after completion of the floor, remove spots or smears of adhesive and seam cement from floor surface and other finished Work with cleaner or solvent recommended by carpeting materials manufacturer. B. Repair adjacent surfaces damaged by carpet installation. C. Thoroughly vacuum clean carpet after installation is complete. D. Protect completed Work from traffic and damage until Substantial Completion by covering with plastic sheeting, kraft paper, and plywood panels. INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Areas to receive carpeting and carpet pattern are indicated in Section 09000, FINISH SCHEDULES END OF SECTION B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 09680 6 CARPET PART 1 1.1 SECTION 09900 PAINTING GENERAL REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 3. CI 5. 6. 7. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. Standard Colors for Color Identification and Coding. b. Al3.1, Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C203, Coal -Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines -Enamel and Tape -Hot -Applied. b. C210, Liquid Epoxy Coating System for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines. C. C214, Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines. NSF International (NSF): 61 Drinking Water System Components -Health Effects. National Association of Corrosion Engineers (MACE): Manual for Painter Safety. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): a. QP1, Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Painting Contractors. b. QP2, Standard Procedure for Evaluating the Qualifications of Painting Contractors to Remove Hazardous Paint. C. SP 1, Surface Preparation Specification No. 1, Solvent Cleaning. d. SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning. e. SP 3, Power Tool Cleaning. f. SP 5, White Metal Blast Cleaning. g. SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning. h. SP 7, Brush -Off Blast Cleaning. i. SP 8, Pickling. j. SP 10, Near -White Blast Cleaning. k. SP 11, Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal. 1. SP 12, High Pressure Water Jetting. m. SP 13, Surface Preparation of Concrete. n. Guide No. 3, PA, Guide to Safety in Paint Applications. Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association (DIPRA): Surface Preparation Specifications. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 09900 1 PAINTING 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Terms used in this section: 1. Coverage: Total minimum dry film thickness in mils, or square feet per gallon. 2. FRP: Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic. 3. HCL Hydrochloric Acid. 4. MDFT: Minimum Dry Film Thickness, mils. 5. MDFTPC: Minimum Dry Film Thickness Per Coat, mils. 6. Mil: Thousandth of an inch. 7. Military Specification -Paint. 8. PSDS: Paint System Data Sheet. 9. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride. 10. SFPG: Square Feet Per Gallon. 11. SFPGPC: Square Feet Per Gallon Per Coat. 12. SP: Surface Preparation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Data Sheets: a. For each paint system, furnish a Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS), Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), the manufacturer's Technical Data Sheets, and paint colors available (where applicable) for each product used in the paint system. The PSDS form is appended to the end of this section. b. Coating manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01640, MANUFACTURERS' SERVICES. C. Submit required information on a system -by -system basis. d. Furnish copies of paint system submittals to the coating applicator. e. Indiscriminate submittal of manufacturer's literature only is not acceptable. 2. Detailed chemical and gradation analysis for each proposed abrasive material. B. Samples: 1. Proposed Abrasive Materials: Five -pound minimum sample for each proposed 2. Reference Panel: a. Prior to start of surface preparation, furnish a 4-inch by 4-inch steel panel for each grade of sandblast specified herein, prepared to specified requirements. Z 5 BOI158870.A1.FN r 09900 JMY 11, 2000 2 PA►IlVTING [ b. Provide panel representative of the steel used; prevent deterioration of surface quality. C. Upon approval by ENGINEER, panel to be reference source for inspection. d. Unless otherwise specified, before painting work is started, prepare minimum 8- by 10-inch samples with type of paint and application specified on similar substrate to which paint is to be applied. e. Furnish additional samples as required until colors, finishes, and textures are approved. f. Approved samples to be the quality standard for final finishes. C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Applicator's Qualification: List of references substantiating experience. 2. Factory Applied Coatings: Manufacturer's certification stating factory applied coating system meets or exceeds requirements specified. 3. If the manufacturer of finish coating differs from that of shop primer, provide both manufacturers' written confirmation that materials are compatible. 4. Manufacturer's written instructions and special details for applying each type of paint. D. Contract Closeout Submittals: Special guarantee. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Applicator. Minimum 5 years' experience in application of specified products. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Meet federal, state, and local requirements limiting the emission of volatile organic compounds. 2. Perform surface preparation and- painting in accordance with recommendations of the following: a. Paint manufacturer's instructions. b. SSPC-PA Guide No. 3, Guide to Safety in Paint Applications. C. Federal, state, and local agencies having jurisdiction. C. Mockup: 1. Before proceeding with Work under this section, finish one complete space or item of each color scheme required showing selected colors, finish texture, materials, quality of work, and special details. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 119 2000 09900 3 PAINTING 2. After approval, sample spaces or items shall serve as a standard for similar work throughout the Project. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in a protected area that is heated or cooled to maintain temperatures within the range recommended by paint manufacturer. B. Shipping: 1. Where precoated items are to be shipped to the site, protect coating from damage. Batten coated items to prevent abrasion. 2. Use nonmetallic or padded slings and straps in handling. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply paint in temperatures outside of manufacturer's recommended maximum or minimum allowable, or in dust, smoke -laden atmosphere, damp or humid weather. B. Do not perform abrasive blast cleaning whenever relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or whenever surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above dew point of ambient air. 1.7 SPECIAL GUARANTEE A. Provide coating applicator's and coating manufacturer's extended guarantee or warranty, with OWNER named as beneficiary, in writing, as special guarantee. Special guarantee shall provide for correction, or at the option of the OWNER, removal and replacement of Work specified in this Specification section found defective during a period of 5 years after the date of Substantial Completion. Duties and obligations for correction or removal and replacement of defective Work shall be as specified in the General Conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Coatings Manufacturers Code A (Able to supply most heavy-duty industrial coatings and architectural paints): 1. Ameron Protective Coatings, Brea, CA. 2. Benjamin Moore Paints, New York, NY. 3. Carboline Coatings Co., St. Louis, MO. 4. DuPont Chemical Co., Wilmington, DE. 5. Hempel/Reliance Paints, Houston, TX. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 09900 4 PAINTING I j 6. Keeler and Long, Inc., Watertown, CT. 7. Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH. 8. Pittsburgh Paints, Pittsburgh, PA. 9. Plas-Chem Coatings, St. Louis, MO. 10. International Protective Coatings, Houston, TX. 11. Sherwin Williams, Cleveland, OH. 12. Sigma Coatings, Inc., Harvey, LA. 13. Tnemec Coatings, Kansas City, MO. 14. ICI Devoe Coatings, Louisville, KY. 15. Plasite Protective Coatings, Green Bay, WI. B. Paint Manufacturers Code B (Able to supply most architectural and institutional paints): 1. Ameritone, Long Beach, CA. 2. Detroit Graphite Co., Rockford, IL. 3. Fuller/OBrien Paint Co., San Francisco, CA. 4. Pratt and Lambert, Inc., Buffalo, NY. 5. Rust-Oleum Corp., Evanston, II.. 6. Samuel Cabot, Inc., Boston, MA. 7. Textured Coatings of America, Los Angeles, CA. 8. Thoro Systems, Miami, R- C. Specialty Manufacturers Code C: 1. Darworth Co., Avon, CT. 2. Jasco Chemical Co., Mountain View, CA. 3. McCloskey Varnish Co., Philadelphia, PA. 4. Olympic Stain & Varnish, Seattle, WA. D. Elastomeric Coating Manufacturers Code D: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Futura Coatings, Hazelwood, MO. Gaco Western, Seattle, WA. 3M Co., St. Paul, MN. Plas-Chem Coatings, St. Louis, MO. Polibrid Coatings, Brownsville, TX. Polymer Development Laboratories, Inc., Orange, CA. Technical Urethanes, Inc., Clearbrook, VA. Thane -Coat, Houston, TX. United Coatings Co., Spokane, WA. B0I158870.A1.FN 1 09900 5 JULY 11,=2000 PAINTING 2.2 2.3 ABRASIVE MATERIALS A. Select abrasive type and size to produce a surface profile that meets coating manufacturer's recommendations for specific primer and coating system to be applied. PAINT MATERIALS A. General: s' 1. Material Quality: Manufacturer's highest quality products and suitable for intended service. 2. Materials Including Primer and Finish Coats: Produced by same manufacturer. 3. Thinners, Cleaners, Driers, and Other Additives: As recommended by manufacturer of the particular coating. B. Products are listed below according to their approximate order of appearance in the systems. The letter designating the manufacturer code refers to Article MANUFACTURERS. Manufacturer Product [Organic Definition Code Zinc Converted epoxy, epoxy/phenolic or A Rich Primer urethane type, minimum 10 pounds metallic zinc content per gallon Rust -Inhibitive Single -package steel primers with A,B Primer anticorrosive pigment loading Alkyd Enamel Optimum quality, gloss finish, medium long A,B oil Wash Primer -Vinyl butyral acid A Epoxy Nonskid Polyamide or amine converted epoxies A aggregated; aggregate may be packaged separately Inorganic Zinc Solvent or water based, having 85% A Primer metallic zinc content in the dry film; follow manufacturer's recommendation for topcoating Block Filler Primer -sealer designed for rough masonry A,B surfaces, 100 rcent ac lic emulsion B0I158870.Al.FN JLTLY 11, 2000 09900 6 PAINTING Manufacturer Product Definition Code Alkyd Semigloss alkyd A,B (Semigloss) Acrylic Latex Flat latex A,B (Flat) Water Base A two -component, polyamide epoxy A Epoxy emulsion Sanding Sealer Co-polyrner oil, clear, dull luster A,B,C Ac lic Sealer Clear a h B 2.4 MIXING 0 ra PART 3 Multiple -Component Coatings: 1. Prepare using the contents of the container for each component as packaged by paint manufacturer. 2. No partial batches will be permitted. 3. Do not use multiple -component coatings that have been mixed beyond their pot life. 4. Furnish small quantity kits for touchup painting and for painting other small areas. 5. Mix only components specified and furnished by paint manufacturer. 6. Do not intermix additional components for reasons of color or otherwise, even within the same generic type of coating. Colors: Formulate paints with colorants free of lead, lead compounds, or other materials that might be affected by presence of hydrogen sulfide or other gas likely to be present at the site. EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Surface Preparation Verifications: 1. Inspect and provide substrate surfaces prepared in accordance with these Specifications and the printed directions and recommendations of paint manufacturer whose product is to be applied. The more stringent requirements shall apply. 2. Provide ENGINEER minimum 7 days' advance notice to start of shop or field surface preparation work and coating application work. BOI158870.A1.FNJUi•zl1y 2000 09900 7 PAINTING 3.2 3.3 B. Shop Blast Cleaning: Structural steel, metal doors and frames, metal louvers, and similar items, as reviewed by ENGINEER, may be shop prepared and primed. Centrifugal wheel blast cleaning is an acceptable alternate to shop blast cleaning. C. Field Abrasive Blasting: Perform blasting for items and equipment where specified and as required to restore damaged surfaces previously shop or field blasted and primed. PROTECTION OF 1TEMS NOT TO BE PAINTED A. Remove, mask, or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switchplates, aluminum surfaces, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates on machinery, and other surfaces not specified elsewhere to be painted. B. Provide drop cloths to prevent paint materials from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces. C. Protect working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from damage during surface preparation and painting process. D. Mask openings in motors to prevent paint and other materials from entering the motors. E. Protect all surfaces adjacent to, or downwind of Work area from overspray. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any damage resulting from overspray. SURFACE PREPARATION A. Metal Surfaces: 1. Where indicated, meet requirements of the following SSPC Specifications: a. Solvent Cleaning: SP 1. b. Hand Tool Cleaning: SP 2. C. Power Tool Cleaning: SP 3. d. White Metal Blast Cleaning: SP 5. e. Commercial Blast Cleaning: SP 6. f. Brush -Off Blast Cleaning: SP 7. g. Pickling: SP 8. h. Near -White Blast Cleaning: SP 10. i. Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal: SP 11. j. High Pressure Water Jetting: SP12. 2. The words "solvent cleaning", "hand tool cleaning", "wire brushing", and "blast cleaning", or similar words of equal intent in these Specifications B0I158870.A1.FN JULY `11'2000 09900 8 PAINTING �:- or in paint manufacturer's specifications refer to the applicable SSPC Specifications. 3. Where OSHA or EPA regulations preclude standard abrasive blast cleaning, wet or vacu-blast methods may be required. Coating manufacturers'recommendations for wet blast additives and first coat application shall apply. B. Galvanized Surfaces: 1. Remove soil, cement spatter, and other surface dirt with appropriate hand or power tools. 2. Remove oil and grease by wiping or scrubbing the surface with a suitable solvent, rags and brushes. Use clean solvent and clean rags for the final wiping to avoid contaminating the surface. 3. Obtain coating manufacturer's recommendations for additional preparation that may be required. C. Concrete Surfaces: 1. Do not begin until 30 days after concrete has been placed. 2. Remove grease, oil, dirt, salts or other chemicals, loose materials, or other foreign matter by solvent, detergent, or other suitable cleaning methods. 3. Upon approval by ENGINEER, surface may be cleaned by acid etching method. Approval subject to producing desired profile. Acid etching of vertical or overhead surfaces shall not be allowed. 4. Unless otherwise required for proper adhesion, ensure surfaces are dry prior to painting. D. Masonry Surfaces: 1. Complete and cure masonry construction for 14 days or more before starting surface preparation work. 2. Remove oil, grease, dirt, salts or other chemicals, loose materials, or other foreign matter by solvent, detergent washing, or other suitable cleaning methods. 3. Clean masonry surfaces of mortar and grout spillage and other surface deposits using one of the following: A. Nonmetallic fiber brushes and commercial muriatic acid followed by rinsing with clean water. b. Brush-off blasting. C. Water blasting: 4. Do not damage masonry mortar joints or adjacent surfaces. 5. Leave surfaces clean and, unless otherwise required for proper adhesion, dry prior to painting. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 09900 9 PAINTING 3.4 6. Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Uniform texture and free of surface imperfections that would impair the intended finished appearance. 7. Clear Coated Masonry Surfaces: Free of discolorations and uniform in texture after cleaning. E. Wood Surfaces: 1. Replace damaged wood surfaces or repair in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER prior to start of surface preparation. 2. Solvent clean (mineral spirits) knots and other resinous areas and coat with shellac or other knot sealer, prior to painting. Remove pitch by scraping and wipe clean with mineral spirits or turpentine prior to applying knot sealer. 3. Round sharp edges by light sanding prior to priming. 4. Filler: a. Synthetic -based wood putty approved by paint manufacturer for the paint system. b. For natural finishes, color of wood putty shall match color of finished wood. C. Fill holes, cracks, and other surface irregularities flush with surrounding surface and sand smooth. d. Apply putty before or after the prime coat, depending on compatibility and putty manufacturer's recommendations. e. Use cellulose type putty for stained wood surfaces. 5. Ensure surfaces are clean and dry prior to painting. F. Gypsum Board: Normally, new gypsum wallboard surfaces need no special preparation before painting. 1. Surface Finish: Dry, free of dust, dirt, powdery residue, grease, oil, or any other contaminants. SURFACE CLEANING A. Brush-off Blast Cleaning: 1. Equipment, procedure, and degree of cleaning shall meet requirements of SSPC-SP 7, Brush-off Blast Cleaning. 2. Abrasive: Either wet or dry blasting sand, grit, or nut shell. 3. Select various surface preparation parameters such as size and hardness of abrasive, nozzle size, air pressure, and nozzle distance from surface such that surface is cleaned without pitting, chipping, or other damage. 4. Verify parameter selection by blast cleaning a trial area that will not be exposed to view. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11=, 2000 09900 10 PAINTING 3.5 5. ENGINEER will approve acceptable trial blast cleaned area and will use area as a representative sample of surface preparation. 6. Repair or replace surfaces damaged by blast cleaning. B. Acid Etching: 1. After precleaning, spread the following solution by brush or plastic sprinkling can: 1 part commercial muriatic acid reduced by 2 parts water by volume. Adding acid to water in these proportions gives an approximate 10 percent solution of HCI. 2. Application: a. Application Rate: Approximately 2 gallons per 100 square feet. b. Work acid solution into surface by hard -bristled brushes or brooms until complete wetting and coverage is obtained. C. Acid will react vigorously for a few minutes, during which time brushing is continued. d. After bubbling subsides (10 minutes), hose down the remaining slurry with high pressure clean water. e. Rinse immediately to avoid formation on the surface of salts that are difficult to remove. f. Thoroughly rinse to remove any residual acid surface condition which can impair adhesion. 3. Ensure surface is completely dry before application of coating. 4. Apply acid etching to obtain a "grit sandpaper" surface profile. If not, repeat treatment. C. Solvent Cleaning: 1. Consists of removal of foreign matter such as oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting compounds, and any other surface contaminants by using I olvents, emulsions, cleaning compounds, steam cleaning, or similar materials and methods which involve a solvent or cleaning action. 2. Meets requirements of SSPC-SP 1. APPLICATION A. General: 1. The intention of these Specifications is for new, interior and exterior wood, masonry, concrete, and metal surfaces to be painted, whether specifically mentioned or not, except as specified otherwise. Prime coat structural steel surfaces. 04 Apply coatings in accordance with these Specifications and the paint manufacturers' printed recommendations and special details. The more B0I158870.A1.FN JULy rl, 2000 09900 11 PAINTING stringent requirements shall apply. Allow sufficient time between coats to assure thorough drying of previously applied paint. 3. Sand wood and metal lightly between coats to achieve required finish. 4. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. Use tack cloth just prior to applying next coat. 5. Fusion Bonded Coatings Method Application: Electrostatic, fluidized bed, or flocking. 6. Coat units or surfaces to be bolted together or joined closely to structures or to one another prior to assembly or installation. 7. Water -Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: Use only solvent type paints and -coatings. 8. Keep paint materials sealed when not in use. 9. Where more than one coat of a material is applied within a. given system, alternate color to provide a visual reference that the required number of coats have been applied. B. Shop Primed and Factory Finished Surfaces: 1. Schedule inspection with ENGINEER before shop priming or topcoating factory finished items delivered to site. 2. Prepare surfaces and spot prime using specified primer. 3. Apply mist coat of primer, 1-mil dry. film thickness. 4. After welding, prepare and prime holdback areas as required for paint system. Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Manufacturer Applied Paint Systems: 1. Repair abraded areas on factory finished items as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Carefully blend repaired areas into original finish. 3. Fusion Bonded Coatings: Provide appropriate liquid repair kits for field _ use. D. Film Thickness: 1. Number of Coats: Minimum required without regard to coating thickness. Additional coats may be required to obtain minimum required paint thickness, depending on method of application, differences in manufacturers' products, and atmospheric conditions. t= 2. Maximum film build per coat shall not exceed coating manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Film Thickness Measurements and Electrical Inspection of Coated Surfaces: a. Perform with properly calibrated instruments. B0I158870.A1.FN TUI,y ia, 2000 ' 09900 12 PAINTING 4 b. Recoat and repair as necessary for compliance with the Specifications. C. All coats are subject to inspection by ENGINEER and coating manufacturer's representative. Visually inspect concrete, nonferrous metal, plastic, and wood surfaces to ensure proper and complete coverage has been attained. Measure wet film thickness, using a wet film thickness gauge, to ensure proper coating thickness during application. 5. Give particular attention to edges, angles, flanges, and other similar areas, where insufficient film thicknesses are likely to be present, and ensure proper millage in these areas. 6. Apply additional coats as required to achieve complete hiding of underlying coats. The hiding shall be so complete that the addition of additional coats would not increase the hiding. 7. Thickness Testing: a. Measure coating thickness specified in mils with a magnetic type dry film thickness gauge. b. Test finish coat, except zinc primer, galvanizing, and elastomeric coatings in excess of 25 mils dry, for holidays and discontinuities with an electrical holiday detector. C. Holiday detect coatings in excess of 25 mils dry with high voltage units recommended by the coating manufacturer. d. ` Check each coat for correct millage. Do not make measurement before a minimum of 8 hours after application of coating. E. Porous Surfaces, Such As Concrete, Masonry: 1. Filler/Surfacer. Use coating manufacturer's recommended product to fill air holes, bug holes, and other surface voids or defects. 2. Prime Coat: May be thinned to provide maximum penetration and adhesion. a. Type and Amount of Thinning: Determined by paint manufacturer and dependent on surface density and type of coating. 3. Surfaces Specified to Receive Water Base Coating: Damp, but free of running water, just prior to application of coating. F. Damaged Coatings, Pinholes, and Holidays: 1. Feather edges and repair in accordance with recommendations of paint manufacturer. 2. Hand or power sand visible areas of chipped, peeled, or abraded paint, and feather the edges. Follow with primer and finish coat. Depending on extent of repair and appearance, a finish sanding and topcoat may be required. B01158870.A1.FN JULY 1,19 2000 09900 13 PAWTING 3.6 3.8 3. Apply finish coats, including touchup and damage -repair coats in a manner which will present a uniform texture and color -matched appearance. G. Unsatisfactory Application: I. If item has an improper finish color, or insufficient film thickness, clean surface and topcoat with specified paint material to obtain specified color and coverage. Obtain specific surface preparation information from coating manufacturer. 2. Evidence of runs, bridges, shiners, laps, or other imperfections is cause for rejection. 3. Repair defects in accordance with written recommendations of coating manufacturer. 4. Leave staging and lighting up until ENGINEER has inspected surface or coating. Replace staging removed prior to approval by ENGINEER. Provide additional staging and lighting as requested by ENGINEER. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Gauges: 1. Provide a magnetic type dry film thickness gauge to test coating thickness specified in mils, as manufactured by Nordson Corp., Anaheim, CA, Mikrotest. 2. Provide an electrical holiday detector, low voltage, wet sponge type to test finish coat, except zinc primer, high -build elastomeric coatings, and galvanizing, for holidays and discontinuities as manufactured by Tinker and Rasor, San Gabriel, CA, Model M-1. 3. Provide a high voltage holiday detector for elastomeric coatings in excess of 25 mils dry film thickness. Unit to be as recommended by the coating manufacturer. CLEANUP A. Place cloths and waste that might constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers or destroy at the end of each day. B. Upon completion of the Work, remove staging, scaffolding, and containers from the site or destroy in a legal manner. C. Remove paint spots, oil, or stains upon adjacent surfaces and floors and leave entire job clean. ARCHITECTURAL PAINT SYSTEMS B0I158870.A1.FN JUIY 11, 2000 x 09900 14 PAaVTING = -` A. System No. 102 Wood, Semigloss (Interior or Exterior): Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats Cover Wood Al k d Wood Primer 1 coat, 400 SFPG Alkyd (Semigloss) I 1 coat, 400 SFPG B. System No. 106 Galvanized Metal: Surface Pre . Paint Material Min. Coats Cover Solvent Clean (SP 1) Manufacturer's 1 coat, as recommended Followed By Hand Recommended by Manufacturer Tool (SP 2) or Power High -Build Primer Tool (SP 3 Alkyd Enamel 2 coats, 4 MDFT (Semigloss) C. System No. 107 Metal Trim and Structural Steel: Surface Pre . Paint Material Min. Coa Cover Abrasive Blast, or Rust -Inhibitive Primer 1 coat, 2 MDFT Centrifugal Wheel Blast (SP 6) -OR- Pickle (SP 8) Alkyd Enamel 2 coats, 4 MDFT (Semi loss) D. System No. 109 Concrete Masonry, Semigloss: Surface Pre . Paint Material Min. Coats Cover MasonryBlock Filler 1 coat, 75 SFPG Acrylic Latex (Semigloss) 2 coats, 240 SFPGPC BO1158870.A1.FN 09900 15 JULY 11, 2000 PAINTING E. System No. 110 Masonry Sealer: [Surface Prep Paint Material Min. Coats Cover Maso2gAcrylic Sealer 2 coats, 100 SFPGPC F. System No. 113 Concrete, Semigloss: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats Cover Concrete Acrylic Latex (Semigloss) 2 coats, 240 SFPGPC G. System No. 115 Gypsum Board and Plaster, Semigloss: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats Cover Remove all Oil, Latex Primer/Sealer 1 coat, 350 SFPG Grease, & Loose Particles Acrylic Latex 2 coats, 400 SFPGPC (Semigloss) or Alkyd (Semi oss) H. System No. 121 Concrete, Skid -Resistant: LI Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats Cover Concrete Epoxy Nonskid 1 coat, 160 SFPG (Aggregated) 3.9 APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. As shown in Section 09000, FINISH SCHEDULES. B. Surfaces Not Requiring Painting: Unless otherwise stated or shown, the following areas or items will not require painting or coating. 1. Reinforcing steel. Y 2. Nonferrous and corrosion -resistant ferrous alloys such as copper, bronze, Monel, aluminum, chromium plate, atmospherically exposed weathering steel, and stainless steel, except where: _ a. Required for electrical insulation between dissimilar metals. b. Aluminum and stainless steel are embedded in concrete or masonry, or aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry.- B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 f 09900 16 PAWTING C. Color coding of equipment and piping is required. 3. Nonmetallic materials such as glass, wood, and porcelain, except as required for architectural painting or color coding. 4. Prefinished electrical and architectural items such as motor control centers, switchboards, switchgear, panelboards, transformers, disconnect switches (if prefinished in OSHA yellow), acoustical tile, cabinets, elevators, building louvers, and wall panels; color coding of equipment is required. 5. Cathodic protection anodes. 6. Items specified to be galvanized after fabrication, unless specified elsewhere or subject to immersion. 7. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) surfaces with an integral ultra -violet resistant colored gel coat do not require painting, provided..the color is as selected. 3.10 COLORS A. Colors: Provide as selected by OWNER or ENGINEER. B. Proprietary identification of colors is for identification only. Selected manufacturer may supply matches. 3.11 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplements listed below, following "END OF SECTION," are a part of this Specification: 1. Data Sheet: Example Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS) END OF SECTION BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 09900 17 PAINTING �...........«W - �� a . �, r^^,.�...-.� ��y � a ....... .. 9..�,,.p�i Mr, >..i ...v�, PAINT SYSTEM DATA SHEET Complete and attach manufacturer's Technical Data Sheet to this PSDS for each coating system. Paint System Number (from Spec.): Paint System Title (from Spec.): Coating Supplier: Representative: Surface Preparation: Paint Material (Generic) Product Name/Number (Pro rieta ) Min. Coats Coverage Provide manufacturer's recommendations for the following parameters at temperature (F)/relative humidity: Tem erature/RH 50/50 70/30 90/25 Induction Time Pot Life Shelf Life Drying Time Curing Time Min. Recoat Time Max. Recoat Time BOI158870.A1.FN RJLY 12, 2000 09900 ATTACHMENT 1 PAINTING Provide manufacturer's recommendations for the following: Mixing Ratio: Maximum Permissable Thinning: Ambient Temperature Limitations: min.: max.: Surface Temperature Limitations: min.: max.: Surface Profile Requirements: min.: max.: B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 09900 ATTACBA ENT 2 PAINTING SECTION 10150 COMPARTMENTS AND CUBICLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. A117.1, Buildings and Facilities -Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped People. b. Z124.2, Plastic Shower Receptors and Shower Stalls; Addenda Z124.2A. 2. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A167, Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 1.2 SUBN=ALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Drawings showing detail layout of Work. 2. Manufacturer's literature indicating fabrication, erection, anchoring, jointing, reinforcing, metal thickness, panel construction, color chart, and color samples. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 TOILET PARTMONS AND URINAL SCREENS A. Construction: 1. Toilet Partitions: Overhead braced, floor supported toilet enclosures with pilasters extending from floor to headrails. Style: Flush partitions and doors. 2. Urinal Screens: Wall -hung, bracket supported, flush type. B. Components: 1. Metal Panels: Fabricate of two sheets of galvanized-bonderized stretcher leveled steel, assembled over and cemented under pressure to a core of sound -deadening insulation and edged with a continuous locking strip. a. Doors: 1-inch thick; 22-gauge. B0I158870.A1.FN 10150 JULY 11, 2000 1 COMPARTMENTS AND CUBICLES b. Partitions and Screens: 1-inch thick; 20-gauge. C. Pilasters: 1-1/4-inch thick; 20-gauge. d. Reinforcement: For tapping, 14-gauge. For anchoring, 12-gauge. C. Finish and Color: 1. Baked Enamel: Colors to be selected from the manufacturer's standard color chart. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 TOILET PARTITIONS AND URINAL SCREENS A. Installation: 1. Erect compartments and related items in a rigid substantial manner, straight and plumb, and with all horizontal lines level. 2. Clearances At the Wall: 1 inch for panels and 1 inch for pilasters. 3. Clearance At Vertical Edges of Doors: Uniform from top to bottom not exceeding 3/16 inch. 4. Door: Free of warp and wind. 5. Conceal all drilling, cutting, and fitting to room finish in the finish Work. B. Adjusting: Adjust hardware, leave in perfect working order. 3.2 PATCHING A. Field touchup of scratches or defaced enamel or acrylic finish permitted only if accepted by the ENGINEER. 3.3 CLEANING A. Remove protective maskings and clean surfaces, leaving them free from soil and imperfections. END OF SECTION B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 10150 2 COMPARTMENTS AND CUBICLES Y &J SECTION 10200 LOWERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA): Standard 500. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. D1187, Asphalt -Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal, Spec. for. b. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Large scale details of louvers, anchorage, and relationship to adjoining construction. 1. Manufacturer's Literature: a. Descriptive and performance data of louvers, including standard drawings and louver -free area. b. Parts list, if applicable. C. Installation instructions. d. Maintenance procedures. B. Samples: Manufacturer's standard finishes and colors. C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Factory test data. 2. Certificates of AMCA ratings. D. Contract Closeout Submittals: Special Guarantee. 1.3 SPECIAL GUARANTEE A. Manufacturer's extended guarantee or warranty, with OWNER named as beneficiary, in writing, as Special Guarantee. Special Guarantee shall provide for correction, or at the option of the OWNER, removal and replacement of special fluorocarbon or baked -on finish found defective during a period of 2 years after the date of Substantial Completion. Duties and obligations for B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 10200 1 LOUVERS correction or removal and replacement of defective Work as specified in the General Conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Water Penetration Rate: No greater than 0.02 ounces per square foot. B. Louvers: Rated and tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500. 2.2 .. ADJUSTABLE DOOR LOUVER (TYPE DR) A. Material: Steel, 18-gauge minimum thickness, with clamp -in frame and Standard "N" blades. B. Screen: Furnish on exterior doors. C. Finish: Baked enamel or thermosetting acrylic coating. D. Manufacturer and Product: Airolite Co.; Model Type 543-A-5, for exterior doors. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Anchors and Fasteners for All Louvers: Stainless steel. B. Flashings: Match louver frame. C. Isolation Tape: Tremco 440, 3M EC1202, or Presstite 579.6. D. Isolation Paint: ASTM D 1187, bituminous coating. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Performance Tests: 1. Airflow versus pressure loss. 2. Rain penetration data. 3. Air infiltration leakage through closed operating louvers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Check openings to assure that dimensions conform to Drawings. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 10200 2 LOUVERS B. Assure that openings are free of irregularities that would interfere with installation. C. Do not install louvers until defects have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install louvers as shown on reviewed Shop Drawings. Coordinate with heating or ventilation ductwork to be connected and Section 08100, METAL DOORS AND FRAMES. B. Follow procedures in manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. C. Separate aluminum from other metals with isolation tape or paint. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Set adjustable louver blades for uniform alignment in OPEN and CLOSED positions. B. Adjust louvers so moving parts operate smoothly. 3.4 SCHEDULE A. The Louver and Vent Schedule at the end of this section is a tabulation of louver characteristics for each louver marked on the Drawings. Provide louvers as scheduled. END OF SECTION BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 10200 3 LOUVERS L-- L- _.. __ .. a WALL LOUVER AND VENT SCHEDULE LOUVER TYPES: ABBREVIATIONS: NOTES: AC Acoustical LD Combination Louver/Damper AL Aluminum No. 1 For details see Drawing No. AJ Adjustable MO Manually Operable AS As Selected No. 2 Numbers in "Fnsh" column refer to paint systems in Specification Section 09900 BV Block Vent PH Penthouse FCTY Factory No. 3 Codes in "Col." column refer to color list in Specification Section 09000 DB Drainable SP Stormproof GALV Galvanized No. 4 For roof vents see Mechanical Drawings DR Door RV T11 Roof Vent T__ STL Steel Im"M mmm= 'MMMM mmmm� B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 10200 ATTACBNENT 1 LOUVERS No Text SECTION 10400 IDENTIFYING DEVICES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. A13.1, Schemes for the Identification of Piping Systems. b. A117.1, Buildings and Facilities -Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped People. C. D6.1, Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated Welded and Seamless. 3. The Chlorine Institute, Inc.: WC-1, Wall Chart: Handling Chlorine Cylinders and Ton Containers. 4. Federal Specifications (FS):1,P-387A(1), Plastic Sheet, Laminated, Thermosetting (for Designation Plates). 5. International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO): Uniform Fire Code (UFC). 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 49, Hazardous Chemicals Data. ' b. 704, Standard System for the Identification of the Fire Hazards of Materials. 7. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). A. Shop Drawings: 1. Drawings showing layouts, actual letter sizes and styles, and project -specific mounting details. 2. Manufacturer's literature showing letter sizes and styles, sign materials, and standard mounting details. B. Samples: One full size for each type of nameplate, sign, and label specified. C. Quality Control Submittals: Manufacturer's installation instructions. B01155870.AI.FN JULY 11,2000 10400 1 IDENTIFYING DEVICES PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BUILDING NAME PLAQUE A. Material: Cast bronze. B. Size: 18 inches by 27 inches and minimum 1/4-inch thick. C. Lettering and Trim: Raised 1/8 inch minimum. D. Finish: 1. Border Face and Edge, and Lettering Face: Fine satin hand finish. 2. Background: Dark statuary bronze, finely pebbled surface. E. Lettering and Border Outlines: Hand -tool, clean, and sharp. F. Lettering Style: Condensed block. G. Tablet Inscription Text: To be furnished by ENGINEER. H. Fasteners: Concealed. I. Manufacturer's name is allowed on back side. 2.2 DOOR NAMEPLATES A. Material: Plastic with rounded corners. B. Thickness: 1/8 inch. C. Height: 2 inches. D. Finish: Nondirectional matte. E. Background: Black. F. Letters: Engraved. 1. Size: 1-inch high. 2. Color. White. 3. Style: Helvetica medium upper case. 4. Message Text: As shown on Door Schedule. G. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Best Manufacturing Co., Kansas City, MO; System A-101. 2. Andco Industries Corp., Greensboro, NC; 1400 series. B0I155870.A1.FN I -- JULY 11, 2000 10400 2 IDENTIFYING DEVICES 2.3 PICTORIAL SYMBOLS A. Material: Plastic with square corners, match door nameplates. B. Manufacture: ANSI A117.1, Section 4.30. C. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Best Manufacturing Co., Kansas City, MO; System A-101. 2. Andco Industries Corp., Greensboro, NC; 1400 series. 2.4 ANCILLARY MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Stainless steel screws or bolts of appropriate sizes. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Mount securely, plumb, and level. 3.2 DOOR NAMEPLATES AND PICTORIAL SYMBOLS A. Attach to doors or walls adjacent to doors with self -sticking permanent adhesive. See Door Schedule for locations and messages. B. Mount with bottom of nameplate at 5 feet 6 inches above floor. END OF SECTION B0I155870.ALFN JULY 11, 2000 10400 3 IDENTIFYING DEVICES r. ..... ..... Z�� ZZ4 L L L SIGN SCHEDULE Si Lettering Other Requirements Marks Tyve2 Formae Size Color Mounting Width I Height Location Method Height to Top Height S le Color Message Faces X-1 C 10405 10" 7" Red Wall Screws - e Block White OUT 1 Mount directly above door C201 'Numbers refer to a particular sign type with a particular message. =Letters refer to sign types specified in this section. Numbers refer to Standard Details that show sign layout. 4Verify requirements for this sign with Laws and Regulations in state where project is located. sAlternative wordin : Entrance allowed o21 ?I following established edures. BOI155870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 10400 SUPPLEMENT 1 IDENTIFYING DEVICES ,o. PART 1.1 PARZ - 2.1 2.2 SECTION 10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES GENERAL SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Manufacturer's literature clearly indicating: a. ENGINEER's identification mark, size, and description of components. b. Base material with surface finish inside and out. C. Hardware and locks and attachment devices. d. Description of rough -in framing. e. Details of blocking and anchorage required. 2. Distributor's List: List of local distributors for all supplies required for the accessories installed. 3. Cleaning instructions. PRODUCTS hLANUFACTURERS A. Materials and products specified in this section shall be products of: 1. Accessory Specialties, Inc. 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 3. Bradley Corp. 4. Watrous, Inc. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES A. Furnish accessory items listed, where indicated by mark or note on Drawings. Item Mark Bobrick Bradle Surf. Mounted Roll Toilet Paper TPD No. B-2740 No. 5241-50 Dispenser Wall Mounted Liquid Soap SD-2 No. B-4112 No. 6542 Dispenser Mirror, Size on Dw s MIR No. B-290 No. 780 Surf. Mounted Paper Towel PTD/R No. B-3949 No. 235-11 Dispenser and Receptacle Surf. Mounted Napkin Dispenser, NV-2 No. B-2800 No. 405-1145 25 Cents B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 10800 1 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES Item Mark Bobrick Bradle Napkin Disposal ND No. B-270 No. 4781-15 Surf. Mounted Seat Cover dispenser SCD-2 No. B-221 No. 5831 Mop and Broom Holder (24") M&BH No. B-223 x 24 No. 9953 Robe Hook RH No. B-6727 No. 9124 Grab Bars (toilet, corner ) GB-1 No. B-5837 No. 832-059 Grab Bars (shower, corner type) GB-2 No. B-5861 No. 832-036/037 Shower Curtain Rod SCR No. B-207 No. 9538 Shower Curtain w/Hooks SC No. B-204-2 No. 9537 Fold -Up Dressing Area Seat (rectangular shaped) DRS No. B-5191 No. 9558 Towel Pin TP No. B-6777 No. 9314 B. Finish: 1. Satin stainless steel. 2. Manufacturer's or brand name on face of units is not acceptable. C. Anchors: Furnish anchors, fasteners, or other devices necessary for a complete, secure installation. I. Fasteners: Tamper -proof screws or bolts. D. Supplies: Furnish fill supplies, such as paper goods, soap, and napkins, as recommended by accessory manufacturer. w PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate support framing and backing as necessary for the proper installation of all accessories. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Locate where mark is shown on Drawings at height indicated. B. Follow manufacturer's instruction and recommendations. C. Install and securely anchor all accessories in their proper locations, plumb and level and without distortion. D. Remove all protective maskings and clean surfaces, leaving them free of soil and imperfections. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 10800 2 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES E. Fill all units with necessary supplies within 10 days before Substantial Completion. F. Deliver to OWNER all keys and devices required to fill and service units. END OF SECTION B01158870.A1.FN 10800 JULY 11, 2000 3 TOUXT AND BATH ACCESSORIES E SECTION 10999 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: I. Park tables. 2. Conference table. 3. Adjustable chairs. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: I. American Standards for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A591, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc -Coated, for Light Coating Mass Applications. b. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): Fire Protection Equipment List. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Manufacturers' descriptions, installation data, color charts, and cleaning and service instructions for all items proposed for use. Clearly identify each item. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PARK TABLE A. Material: Perforated steel top and bench with thermo-plastic coating, metal pipe frame base, final set-up shall be in one piece. B. Finish and Color: Durable thermo-plastic coating on table top and bench seat and baked on finish from frame in colors selected from manufacturer's standard chart. C. Size: Approximately 72 inches by 64 inches overall. D. Manufactuerers: L Metal -Form, Wausau, WI, 715-539-3121. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 10999 1 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES SECTION 11307 PUMPS —GENERAL PART1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. This Section covers the Work necessary to furnish and install, complete, the pumps specified herein, and as further specified in the Detail Pump Specifications hereinafter. 1.2 GENERAL A. See CONDMONS OF THE CONTRACT and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this Project. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions used herein and in the Detail Pump Specifications following this Section are as defined in the current edition of the Hydraulic Institute Standards. 1.4 MANUFACTURERS' SERVICES A. If stated in the Detail Pump Specification, a manufacturer's representative for the equipment specified shall be present at the jobsite for inspection and certification of the installation, equipment testing, and startup assistance. 1.5 SUBNMALS A. Submittals shall be made as required in Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. In addition to specific submittals listed in the Detailed Pump Specifications, the following specific information shall be provided for all pumps: BOI158870.A I.FN 11307 Shop Drawings: Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower demand, and pump efficiency over the entire operating range of the pump, from shutoff to maximum capacity. The equipment manufacturer shall indicate separately the head, capacity, horsepower demand, overall efficiency, at the design conditions specified. Provide detailed list and description of motor nameplate data, couplings, and spare parts. Performance requirements shall be as defined in the Hydraulic Institute Standards. Provide manufacturers paint system and products. JULY 11, 2000 PUMPS --GENERAL 2. Motor: Manufacturer's descriptive information, nameplate data, and test reports. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The use of a manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the performance and operating conditions, standard of quality, and general configuration required. Equal products of other manufacturers will be considered in accordance with the General Conditions. A. See Detail Pump Specifications at the end of this Section. 2.3 PUMP ACCESSORIES A. Pump Identification Plate: A 16-gauge stainless steel identification plate shall be securely mounted on each pump in a readily visible location. The plate shall bear the 1/4-inch die -stamped equipment identification number that is assigned each pump in the Detail Specification and shown on the Drawings. B. Lifting Lugs: Equipment weighing over 100 pounds shall be provided with lifting lugs. C. Spare Parts and Special Tools: See Detail Pump Specification for spare parts and special tools required for each pump or set of pumps. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PUMP AND DRIVER INSTALLATION A. Pumps and drivers shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as shown on the Drawings. B. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Mount pumps and drivers on concrete bases as shown on the Drawings. The size of the concrete bases shall be determined by the dimensions of the pump and driver and shall be at least 3 inches wider and longer than the pump and driver base and in accordance with the details shown. Anchor bolt material shall be as shown in the plans. Bolts shall be accurately placed with templates. Coat bolt thread projections with lubricant to facilitate future nut removal. C. Level base by means of washer nut and lock nut on the anchor bolt. Adjust [A nuts to provide a level bearing surface for the pump and driver base. Tighten each pair of nuts in their final positions after leveling is complete. Accomplish B0I158870.A1.F'N JULY 11, 2000 { 11307 2 PUMPS —GENERAL leveling so that there is no change of level or springing of the baseplate when the anchor bolts are tightened. D. Adjust pump assemblies such that the driving units are properly aligned, plumb, and level with the driven units and all interconnecting shafts and couplings. Flexible couplings shall not be considered to compensate for misalignment. E. After the pump and driver have been set in position, aligned, and leveled to the proper elevation, grout the space between the bottom of the baseplate and the concrete foundation with a poured, nonshrinking grout of the proper category, as specified in Section 03300, CONCRETE. F. All strain from attached piping shall be eliminated from the pumps, and any evidence of pump or driver misalignment, noisy operation, or other signs of improper setting shall be corrected by the CONTRACTOR. 3.2 PAINTING A. Shop and field painting shall be as specified in the Detailed Pump Specifications. 3.3 FACTORY TESTS A. Balance of Vibration: The rotating parts of each pump and its driving unit shall be dynamically balanced before final assembly. The driving unit alone shall operate without vibration in excess of the limits stated in the latest revision of NEMA MG 1. 3.4 FIELD TESTS A. Functional Test: Prior to plant startup, all equipment described in the Detail Specifications following shall be inspected for proper alignment, quiet operation, proper connection, and satisfactory performance by means of a functional test. B. Vibration Test: The complete assembly, consisting of the driving unit and k pump, connected and in normal operation, shall not develop amplitudes of vibration exceeding limits recommended by the current edition of Hydraulic Institute Standards. C. Performance Test: Prior to acceptance of the installed pumps, demonstrate proper operation of the pumps. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 11307 3 PUMPS —GENERAL PART 4 PAYMENT 4.1 GENERAL A. Payment for the Work in this general section will be included as part of the lump sum price for the appropriate item described in Volume 1 of 3, Special Provisions, SP-18 "Mechanical Process and Systems—ARFF Trainer". END OF SECTION B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 11307 4 PUMPS —GENERAL SECTION 11307-01 DETAIL PUMP SPECIFICATION FOR DIESEL FUEL PUMPS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. See Section 11307, PUMPS —GENERAL, for additional requirements. B. Fuel Pumps: P-D-4 and P-D-5. PART 2 PUMP MANUFACTURER 2.1 DIESEL FUEL PUMPS A. Manufacturer: Roper Pump Co., P.O. Box 269-T, Commerce, GA 30529. Telephone: (706) 335-5551. B. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. PART 3 MODELS 3.1 DIESEL FUEL PUMPS A. P-D-4, 1 each, Roper Model No. HBFRV with Viton seal, carbon bearings, relief valve, steel base plate, coupling, coupling guard, gear reducer ratio 4.45 to 1. Motor shall be 15 Hp at 1,800 rpm, 3-phase, 460V, Class I, Div. 1, Group D, 4-inch NPT flanged fittings. B. P-D-5, 1 each, Roper Series A, Model No. 26AM16 with Viton seal, carbon bearings, relief valve, steel base plate, coupling, coupling guard. Motor shall be 3 Hp at 1,800 rpm, 3-phase, 460V, Class I, Div. 1, Group D, 1-1/4-inch NPT tapped fittings. C. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. PART 4 SERVICE CONDITIONS 4.1 DIESEL FUEL PUMPS A. Liquid Pumped: Diesel fuel. B. Temperature: 20 degrees F to 120 degrees F. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 11307-01 1 DPS—DIESEL FUEL PUMPS A. All equipment shall be suitable for installation in a Class I, Division 1, Group D area. PART 5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 5.1 DIESEL FUEL PUMPS A. Guaranteed Performance, P-D-4: 1. Rated Capacity: Minimum 200 gpm at 70 psi discharge pressure. B. Guaranteed Performance, P-D-5: 1. Rated Capacity: Minimum 25 gpm at 75 psi discharge pressure. PART 6 PUMP CONSTRUCTION DETAILS 6.1 PUMP TYPE A. Frame -mounted, direct -drive with a speed reducer where specified. 6.2 MATERIALS A. Manufacturer's standard, suitable for diesel fuel service. B. ASTM, AISI, etc. numbers, types, and grades specified are typical of material composition and quality. Equivalent materials will be considered. 6.3 MECHANICAL SEAL(S) A. Manufacturer's standard single mechanical seal(s) with carbon and ceramic seal ring(s) suitable for diesel fuel service. 6.4 INTERNAL RELIEF A. Factory set internal pressure relief at 100 psi. 6.5 O-RINGS A. Viton 0-rings. 6.6 SEAL LUBRICATION A. The pumped liquid shall lubricate seal faces. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 11307-01 2 DPS—DIESEL FUEL PUMPS 6.7 SHAFT SLEEVE(S) A. Sleeves shall be securely locked against reverse rotation and shall extend beyond gland. Bearings shall be carbon construction. 6.8 BASEPLATE A. Cast iron or fabricated steel, with grout holes. Factory mount pump and driver. 6.9 SPARE PARTS FOR EACH PUMP A. Complete set gaskets and O-ring seals, complete set keys, dowels, pins, etc. Touch up paint to match factory paint. 6.10 PAINTING A. Pump, motor, base plate, and other metal surfaces shall be factory painted with manufacturers high quality fuel resistant paint system. Paint color shall be light gray. 6.11 FACTORY TEST A. Required, submit manufacturer's test certificate. PART 7 DRIVE MOTOR(S) 7.1 GENERAL A. Motors shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with NEMA MGl. Motor's shall be a squirrel -cage, induction, single -winding, single -speed, TEFC explosion -proof type, rated for continuous duty with a 1.15 service factor. The motor shall be suitable for rated horsepower and full service factor operation at sea level. B. Speed: To match driven equipment. C. Voltage: 460 volts, 3-phase, 60 Hz. D. Starting Method: Full voltage. E. Provide short commercial tests with certified test reports. PART 8 FIELD TESTING AND MANUFACTURERS' SERVICES 8.1 GENERAL A. Provide the services of a qualified manufacturer's representative at the jobsite to assist the CONTRACTOR with startup and testing. B0I158870.A1.FN 11307-01 JULY 11, 2000 3 DPS—DIESEL FUEL PUMPS PART 6 PUMP CONSTRUCTION DETAILS 6.1 PUMP TYPE A. Submersible, 3-inch NPT discharge connection. 6.2 MATERIALS A. All wetted parts Type 316 stainless steel. 6.3 MECHANICAL SEAL(S) A. Manufacturer's standard double mechanical seal. 6.4 ELASTOMERS A. Viton O-rings. 6.5 FACTORY TEST A. Provide submittal certificate of manufacturer's test. PART 7 DRIVE MOTOR(S) 7.1 GENERAL A. Motors shall be manufacturer's standard 2 Hp. B. Speed: To match driven equipment. C. Voltage: 460 volts, 3-phase, 60 Hz. D. Starting Method: Full voltage. E. Integral winding termal protection: thermostat type, one each winding, open on high temperature, automatic reset. PART 8 FIELD TESTING 8.1 GENERAL A. The CONTRACTOR, assisted by the pump manufacturer's representative if required, shall conduct field tests on all pumps in accordance with the General Pump Specification. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 11307-02 2 DETAIL PUMP SPECIFICATION FOR SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS PART PAYMENT 9.1 GENERAL A. Payment for the Work in this Section will be included as part of the lump sum price for the appropriate item described in Volume I of 3, Special Provisions, SP- 18 "Mechanical Process and Systems—ARFF Trainee'. END OF SECTION B01158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 11307-02 3 DETAIL PUMP SPECIFICATION FOR SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS PART 6 PUMP CONSTRUCTION DETAILS 6.1 PUMP TYPE A. Horizontal, frame mounted, direct drive with coupling. 6.2 MATERIALS A. Manufacturer's standard cast iron, suitable for wastewater service. B. Shaft sealing shall be double mechanical seal with carbon/ceramic faces, buna N bellows, and stainless steel metal parts. 6.3 BASEPL.ATE A. Cast iron or fabricated steel, with grout holes. Factory mount pump and driver. 6.4 SPARE PARTS FOR EACH PUMP A. One set each pump bearings, wear rings, shaft sleeve, gaskets and O-ring seals, complete set keys, dowels, pins, etc. 6.5 FACTORY TEST A. Submittal of manufacturer's factory test data. PART 7 DRIVE MOTOR(S) 7.1 GENERAL A. Motors shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with NEMA MG1. Motor's shall be a squirrel -cage, induction, single -winding, single -speed, TEFL, rated for continuous duty with a 1.15 service factor. The motor shall be suitable for rated horsepower and full service factor operation at sea level. B. Speed: 1,750 rpm. C. Voltage: 460 volts, 3-phase, 60 Hz. D. Starting Method: Full voltage. E. Provide short commercial tests with certified test reports. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 11307-03 2 DETAIL PUMP SPECIFICATION FOR EDUCTOR PUMP 6.7 SHAFT SLEEVE(S) A. Sleeves shall be securely locked against reverse rotation and shall extend beyond gland. Bearings shall be carbon construction. 6.8 BASEPLATE A. Cast iron or fabricated steel, with grout holes. Factory mount pump and driver. 6.9 SPARE PARTS FOR EACH PUMP A. Complete set gaskets and O-ring seals, complete set keys, dowels, pins, etc. Touch up paint to match factory paint. 6.10 PAINTING A. Pump, motor, base plate, and other metal surfaces shall be factory painted with manufacturers high quality fuel resistant paint system. Paint color shall be light gray. 6.11 FACTORY TEST A. Required, submit manufacturer's test certificate. PART 7 DRIVE MOTOR(S) 7.1 GENERAL A. Motors shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with NEMA MG1. Motor's shall be a squirrel -cage, induction, single -winding, single -speed, TEFC explosion -proof type, rated for continuous duty with a 1.15 service factor. The motor shall be suitable for rated horsepower and full service factor operation at sea level. B. Speed: To match driven equipment. C. Voltage: 460 volts, 3-phase, 60 Hz. D. Starting Method: Full voltage. E. Provide short commercial tests with certified test reports. PART 8 FIELD TESTING AND MANUFACTURERS' SERVICES 8.1 GENERAL A. Provide the services of a qualified manufacturer's representative at the jobsite to assist the CONTRACTOR with startup and testing. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 11307-01 3 DPS—DIESEL FUEL PUMPS PART 9 PAYMENT 9.1 GENERAL A. Payment for the Work in this Section will be included as part of the lump sum price for the appropriate item described in Volume 1 of 3, Special Provisions, SP-18 "Mechanical Process and Systems—ARFF Trainer". END OF SECTION B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 11307-01 4 DPS—DIESEL FUEL PUMPS SECTION 11307-02 DETAIL PUMP SPECIFICATION FOR SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. See Section 11307, PUMPS —GENERAL, for additional requirements. B. Submersible Pumps: P-A-4, P-B-2, and P-B-7. PART 2 PUMP MANUFACTURERS 2.1 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS A. BJM Corporation, 123 Spencer Plains Road, P.O. Box 1138, Old Saybrook, CT 06475. Telephone: (860) 399-5937. B. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. PART 3 MODELS 3.1 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS A. P-A-4, P-B-2, AND P-B-7: Model JX15SS, stainless steel submersible pumps, 2 Hp, 3-phase, 460V motor. B. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. PART 4 SERVICE CONDITIONS 4.1 DIESEL FUEL PUMPS A. Liquid Pumped: Wastewater with trace of diesel fuel. PART 5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 5.1 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS A. Guaranteed Performance, P-A-4, P-B-2, and P-B-7: 1. Rated Capacity: 150 gpm at 21 feet discharge head, 50 gpm at 47 feed discharge head. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 11307-02 1 DETAIL PUMP SPECIFICATION FOR SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS PART 6 PUMP CONSTRUCTION DETAILS 6.1 PUMP TYPE A. Submersible, 3-inch NPT discharge connection. 6.2 MATERIALS A. All wetted arts Type 316 stainless steel. P 6.3 MECHANICAL SEAL(S) A. Manufacturer's standard double mechanical seal. 6.4 ELASTOMERS A. Viton O-rings. 6.5 FACTORY TEST A. Provide submittal certificate of manufacturer's test. PART 7 DRIVE MOTOR(S) T 7.1 GENERAL A. Motors shall be manufacturer's standard 2 Hp. ` B. Speed: To match driven equipment. - C. Voltage: 460 volts, 3-phase, 60 Hz. D. Starting Method: Full voltage. t E. Integral winding termal protection: thermostat type, one each winding, open on high temperature, automatic reset. PART 8 FIELD TESTING 8.1 GENERAL i A. The CONTRACTOR, assisted by the pump manufacturer's representative if required, shall conduct field tests on all pumps in accordance with the General Pump Specification. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 11307-02 2 DETAIL PUMP SPECIFICATION f 1 FOR SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS PART 8 FIELD TESTING AND MANUFACTURERS' SERVICES 8.1 GENERAL A. Provide the services of a qualified manufacturer's representative at the jobsite to assist the CONTRACTOR with startup and testing. B. Field tests shall be as specified in Section 11307, PUMPS —GENERAL. PART 9 PAYMENT 9.1 GENERAL A. Payment for the Work in this Section will be included as part of the lump sum price for the appropriate item described in Volume 1 of 3, Special Provisions, SP-18 "Mechanical Process and Systems—ARFF Trainer". END OF SECTION BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 11307-03 3 DETAIL PUMP SPECIFICATION FOR EDUCTOR PUMP SECTION 13119 FUEL/WATER SEPARATOR PART1 GENERAL A. This Section covers the Work necessary to furnish and install one fuel/water separator system with controls, complete. A. Like items of equipment specified herein shall be supplied by one manufacturer. B. See CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this Project. 1.3 MANUFACTURERS SERVICES A. A manufacturer's representative for the equipment specified herein shall be present at the jobsite for a minimum of 1 person -day, travel time excluded, for installation assistance, inspection, and certification of the installation. B. See Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. In addition, the following specific information shall be provided: 1. Shop Drawings: Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower demand, and pump efficiency over the entire operating range of the pumps, from shutoff to maximum capacity. The equipment manufacturer shall indicate separately the head, capacity, horsepower demand, overall efficiency, and minimum NPSH required at the guarantee point. Performance requirements shall be as defined in the Hydraulic Institute Standards. Motor nameplate data and features. Tank size, fittings, dimensions. B0I158870.AI.FN JULY 11, 2000 13119 1 FUEIIWATER SEPARATOR PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The use of a manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired only. B. The entire assembly and all components shall be explosion -proof and shall meet the NEC requirements for Class I, Division 1 or 2 service, as required. 2.2 QUANTITY A. One. A. The fuel/water separator shall be designed for intermittent and variable flows of fuel, water, and fuel/water mixtures. Design shall be in accordance with all applicable standards of the API Manual on Disposal of Refinery Wastes, latest edition. B. The separator shall accommodate uncontrolled surges of flow ranging from zero flow up to one hundred percent of maximum hydraulic capacity and maintain a water effluent containing less than 15 mg/L hydrocarbon for at least five minutes. Excess flow bypass, flow control valve or mechanical adjustments are not acceptable. C. The separator vessel shall have internal compartments to include a coalescer separation chamber, fuel sump, and effluent water sump. The separator must be capable of retaining a fuel spill equal to 50 percent of the total separator volume. I?. Fuel decanting shall be performed automatically with a fixed baffle. Water flow into the water sump shall be based on the elevation differential U-tube principle. E. The separator shall be single wall construction, suitable for above ground installation. the separator shall be cylindrical and constructed of minimum 1/4-inch mild steel. F. The separator shall have 150-pound ANSI flanged inlet, outlet, and vent -- connections as shown on the Drawings and shall be constructed for transport and immediate installation at the job site. In addition, provisions for entirely draining the separator shall be provided. Drain connection shall be 2-inch-i diameter flanged fittings and shall be provided for each of the three tank r compartments (influent, oil storage, and effluent). BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 13119 2 FUEL/WATER SEPARATOR F :_x.3 G. Provide lifting lugs as necessary to facilitate installation. H. Separator shall include saddle assembly, with a height of 6 inches measured from the bottom of the tank to the bottom of the saddle baseplate, height as specified in the Drawings. Provide saddle anchor bolt template to locate concrete pad and anchor bolt locations. I. Separator shall have a total volume of 2,000 gallons, minimum, with a minimum fuel sump volume of 350 gallons. Hydraulic capacity shall be 200 gpm. J. Separator shall be Highland Tank HT, single wall above ground, 2,000-gallon capacity Oil/Water Separator: 1. Manufacturers: a. Highland Tank, 99 West Elizabethtown Road, Manheim, PA 17545, telephone: (717) 664-0600. b. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. K. Provide factory -installed grounding lug. L. Coatings: Surface preparation shall be SP-6 blast all exterior surfaces and SP-10 blast all interior surfaces. Interior coating shall be 15 mils of Corrocote H PW manufactured by Madison Chemical Industries, Inc. Exterior coating shall be light gray, 5 mils DFT, prime coat Glidden Glid-Guard corrosion Resistant HS Epoxy No. 5465 Series, and Glidden high solids urethane coating No. NE53/NE55 finish coat. M. Tank shall be 5 feet, 4 inches in diameter and 16 feet long. Tank shall include a 6-inch flanged fitting, with the flange face 6 inches above the tank top, centered in the tank so that tank internals are located no closer than 12 inches from the center line from the flanged fitting, necessary to install the specified ultrasonic level instrumentation. Tank inlet and outlet connections shall be 6 inches flanged. Each of the three tank compartments shall include 24-inch manways. 2.4 WATER RETURN A. Effluent from the fuel/water separator shall be returned to the burn pit by gravity as shown on the Drawings. A. Fuel pump shall be a vertical industrial pump, Crane Deming vertical sump pump, Figure 4511, size 1-1/2 m, or equal. Fuel pump shall be rated at 100 gpm at 38 feet T.D.H. with a 3 Hp, 460 volt, 3-phase, 60 Hz explosion - proof motor. Pump shall mount directly to product chamber manway flange on BOI158870.A1.FN DULY 11, 2000 13119 3 FUEL/WATER SEPARATOR fuel/water separator. Provide motor.short commercial test with certified reports. B. Service Conditions: 1. Liquid Pumped: Diesel fuel. 2. Pumping Temperature (PT): 33-90 degrees F. 3. Specific Gravity at PT: 0.86 - diesel fuel. 2.6 CONTROLS A. Controls are specified in the Electrical and Instrumentation and Controls specification sections. This pump will be controlled from the OCP-1 control panel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The separator shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and in strict conformance to the manufacturer's installation instructions for exposed or above ground installations. 3.2 FOLD TESTS A. Functional Test: Prior to startup, all equipment described herein shall be inspected for proper alignment, quiet operation, proper connection, and satisfactory performance by means of a functional test. B. Pump Performance Test: Prior to acceptance of the installed assembly, the CONTRACTOR will demonstrate proper operation of the pump. 3.3 .. MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE(S) A. Provide manufacturer's certificates that the oil water separator was installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. PART 4 PAYMENT 4.1 GENERAL A. Payment for the Work in this Section will be included in the lump sum price for the appropriate item described in Volume 1 of 3, Special Provisions, SP-18, "Mechanical Process and Systems—ARFF Trainer". END OF SECTION B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 13119 4 FUEL/WATER SEPARATOR SECTION 13202 FUEL TANK AND EQUIPMENT PART1 GENERAL A. This Section covers the Work necessary to furnish and install, complete with all necessary appurtenances, the diesel fuel tank and equipment. All materials shall be compatible with diesel fuel. 1.2 GENERAL A. Standardization: 1. Like items of materials provided hereunder shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, maintenance, and replacement. 2. See CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this Project. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals During Construction: Submittals during construction shall be made in accordance with Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. In addition, the following specific information shall be provided: 1. Complete Specifications, descriptive Drawings, catalog cuts, and descriptive literature which shall include make, model, dimensions, and weight of tank and all tank equipment and appurtenances. 2. All exceptions to the applicable requirements and Specifications provided in these Contract Documents. 3. Detailed information on structural, mechanical, electrical, or other changes or modifications necessary to adapt equipment and materials to be supplied to the arrangement or details shown. 4. Recommended procedure for the protection and handling of equipment and materials prior to installation. 5. List of recommended spare parts for equipment specified herein. 6. Operating and maintenance manuals and maintenance summary forms shall be submitted in accordance with Section SUBMITTALS for the tank and fuel system equipment specified herein. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 13202 1 FUEL TANK AND EQUIPMENT 1.4 PERMITS, CODES, AND INSPECTIONS A. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain all permits and arrange all inspections required by codes applicable to this Section and shall submit written evidence to the ENGINEER that required permits, inspections, and code requirements have been secured. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FUEL TANK A. The diesel fuel tank shall be 5,000 gallon nominal capacity 1/4-inch wall welded 304 stainless steel tank built in accordance with UL 142 Standard for Steel Above Ground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids. Tanks shall have gussetted saddle supports for supporting the tank 6 inches off concrete equipment pads. Supports shall have baseplates with holes for anchor bolts. Tanks shall be 8-foot-diameter by 14-foot-long and shall have the openings arranged and sized as shown on the Drawings. Fill, relief valve, manhole, and outlet connections shall be 150-pound ANSI raised face flanges; ultrasonic element flanged connection shall be ANSI 6-inch, 6 inches above the tank top, 125-pound flange; manhole shall be minimum 18-inch-diameter Varec 220 series aluminum construction with gasket. All gaskets shall be Buna-N gasket type, and tank sight gage fittings shall be threaded connections. Tank exterior shall be industrial grade finish. Tank shall have a 2-inch flanged bottom drain fitting. 2.2 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer shall be Highland Tank, 99 W. Elizabethtown Rd., Manheim, PA 17545, telephone (717) 664-0600, or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. 2.3 FLAME ARRESTOR FOR VENT A. Flame arrestors shall be the vertical type 2-inch Varec Series 5000 standard aluminum construction; or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. 2.4 TANK LEVEL INDICATOR A. Tubular -type level gage, shielded, stainless steel construction and valves, standard clear glass tube, Model 819 manufactured by John C. Ernst Co., Inc., Houston, Texas, telephone: (713) 896-1400; or approved equal. Gage valve fittings will match tank connection fittings. Gage length shall be approximately 8 feet in length to match tank height. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 13202 2 FUEL TANK AND EQUIPMENT 2.5 EMERGENCY VENT A. Provide tank manufacturer's standard supplied emergency vent in accordance with NFPA. Construction shall be aluminum or stainless steel. 2.6 HOSE CONNECTOR A. Hose connector size and types shall be as required by the local diesel supplier to the Lubbock International Airport. Hose connector shall be bronze OPW KAM[LOK Quick Coupling Model No. 633-A adapter with bronze dust cap Model No. 634-B; (or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER); or as required by diesel supplier. 2.7 GROUNDING LUG A. Provide factory -installed grounding lug on tanks. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All material and equipment shall be installed as shown and described herein and as may be required by the applicable codes of the state and city. Drawings do not attempt to show exact details of all piping and no extra payment will be allowed for obstruction by work of other trades or local obstructions to the Work under this Contract which require offsets. Where diagrams have been made to show piping connections, the CONTRACTOR is cautioned that these diagrams must not be used for obtaining material quantities. Changes in location of equipment, or piping, advisable in the opinion of the CONTRACTOR, shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval before proceeding with the Work. All measurements and dimensions shall be verified at the site. All equipment shall be adjusted and left in a condition satisfactory to the ENGINEER. B. Any preparation of the structural components of the Project for the equipment and material installed under this Section shall be done by the particular affected trade to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER. Work not conforming to the Contract Documents shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER. Work shall be done in a neat and orderly fashion, and when requested by the ENGINEER, all surplus material shall be removed and disposed of by the CONTRACTOR. 3.2 PAINT A. Equipment items not fabricated from stainless steel, aluminum, bronze, or other corrosion -resistant material shall be painted with manufacturer's premium paint system for fuel service; color shall be light gray. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 13202 3 FUEL TANK AND EQUIPMENT 3.3 HANDLING A. Handle materials as recommended by the manufacturer, with approved equipment, in a manner that will prevent damage. 3.4 GROUNDING A. Ground tanks as shown on Drawings. PART 4 PAYMENT 4.1 GENERAL A. Payment for the Work in this Section will be included as part of the lump sum price for the appropriate item described in Volume 1 of 3, Special Provisions, SP-18 "Mechanical Process and Systems—ARFF Trainer". END OF SECTION B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 13202 4 FUEL TANK AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 13401 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this Section: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A182, Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy -Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High - Temperature Service. b. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes. C. A312, Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes. d. B32, Standard Specification for Solder Metal. e. B88, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 2. Instrument Society of America (ISA): a. S5.1, Instrumentation Symbols and Identification (NRC ADOPTED). b. PR12.6, Installation of Intrinsically Safe Systems for Hazardous (Classified) Locations C. S5.4, Standard Instrument Loop Diagrams. d. S20, Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary Elements and Control Valves. e. S50.1, Compatibility of Analog Signals for Electronic Industrial Process Instruments. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). b. ICS 1, General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Work Includes: 1. Engineering, furnishing, installing, calibrating, adjusting, testing, documenting, starting up, and OWNER training for a complete Process Instrumentation and Control System for facility. 2. Major parts are: a. Primary elements, transmitters, and control devices. B0I158870.A1.FN DULY 12, 2000 13401 1 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) c b. One control console. C. One freestanding control panel. B. Detailed Design: PICS as shown and specified includes functional and performance requirements and component specifications. Complete detailed PICS design. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Abbreviations: 1. LCP: Local Control Panel. 2. MCC: Motor Control Center. 3. PAT: Performance Acceptance Test. B. Rising/Falling: Terms used to define actions of discrete devices about their set points. 1. Rising: Contacts close when an increasing process variable rises through set point. 2. Falling: Contacts close when a decreasing process variable falls through set point. C. Signal Types: 1. Analog Signals, Current Type: a. 4 to 20 mA do signals conforming to ISA S50.1. b. Unless otherwise indicated for specific PICS Subsystem components, use the following ISA 50.1 options: 1) Transmitter Type: Number 2, two -wire. 2) Transmitter Load Resistance Capacity: Class L. 3) Fully isolated transmitters and receivers. 2. Analog Signals, Voltage Type: 1 to 5 volts do within panels where a common high precision dropping resistor is used. 3. Discrete signals, two -state logic signals using do or 120V ac sources as indicated. 4. Special Signals: Other types of signals used to transmit analog and digital information between field elements, transmitters, receivers, controllers, and digital devices. D. Instrument Tag Numbers: 1. A shorthand tag number notation is used in the Loop Specifications. For example: AI-1-2(2)(3)[pIl] B0I158870.A 1.FN JULY 12, 2000 13401 2 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) l 1.4 Notation Explanation Al ISA designator for Analysis Indicator. A Unit process letter. 2 Loop number. (2) First unit number; number of same component types in a given loop; -1 and -2 in this example. (3) Second unit number; number of same component types with same first unit number in a given loop; -1, -2, and -3 in this example. [pH] Same notation shown at 2 o'clock position on ISA circle symbol on P&ID. 2. In this example, AI-A-12(2)(3)[pH] is shorthand for: AI-A-12-1-1[pH], AI-A-12-1-2[pH], AI-A-12-1-3[pI1] AI-A-12-2-1 [pH], AI-A-12-2-2[pH], AI-A-12-2-3 [pH] 6109,16311y• A. General: Reference Section 01300, SUBMITTALS. B. Administrative Submittals: OWNER training plan. Reference Section 01640, MANUFACTURERS' SERVICES. C. Shop Drawings: 1. General: a. Shop Drawings, full -scaled details, wiring diagrams, catalog cuts, and descriptive literature. b. Identify proposed items and options. Identify installed spares and other provisions for future Work (e.g., reserved panel space; unused components, wiring, and terminals). C. Legends and Abbreviation Lists: Complete definition of symbols and abbreviations used on this Project (e.g., engineering units, flow streams, instruments, structures, and other process items used in nameplates, legends, and data sheets). 2. Bill of Materials: List of required equipment. a. Group equipment items by enclosure and field, and within an enclosure, as follows: 1) I&C Components: By component identification code. 2) Other Equipment: By equipment type. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 13401 3 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) b. Data Included: 1) Equipment tag number. 2) Description. 3) Manufacturer, complete model number, and all options not defined by model number. 4) Quantity supplied. 5) Component identification code where applicable. 3. Catalog Cuts: I&C Components, Electrical Devices, and Mechanical Devices: a. Catalog information, mark to identify proposed items and options. - b. Descriptive literature. C. External power and signal connections. - d. Scaled Drawings showing exterior dimensions and locations of electrical and mechanical interfaces. =� 4. Component Data Sheets: Data sheets for I&C components. a. Format and Level of Detail: In accordance with ISA-S20. b. Include component type identification code and tag number on data sheet. C. Specific features and configuration data for each component: 1) Location or service. 2) Manufacturer and complete model number. 3) Size and scale range. 4) Set points. 5) Materials of construction. 6) Options included. d. Name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer's local office, representative, distributor, or service facility. 5. Sizing and Selection Calculations: a. Primary Elements: Complete calculations plus process data used. Example, for flow elements, minimum and maximum values, permanent head loss, and assumptions made. b. Controlling, Computing and Function Generating Modules: Actual scaling factors with units and how they were computed. -� 6. Panel Construction Drawings: Y a. Scale Drawings: Show dimensions and location of panel mounted devices, doors, louvers, and subpanels, internal and external. b. Panel Legend: List front of panel devices by tag numbers, nameplate inscriptions, service legends, and annunciator inscriptions. C. Bill of Materials: List devices mounted within panel that are not listed in panel legend. Include tag number, description, manufacturer, and model number. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 " 13401 4 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) 7. 91 6 BOI158870.A1.FN 13401 d. Construction Details: NEMA rating, materials, material thickness, structural stiffeners and brackets, lifting lugs, mounting brackets and tabs, door hinges and latches, and welding and other connection callouts and details. e. Construction Notes: Finishes, wire color schemes, wire ratings, wire and terminal block, numbering and labeling scheme. Panel Control Diagrams: For discrete control and power circuits. a. Diagram Type: Ladder diagrams in format same as shown on Drawings. Include devices, related to discrete functions, that are mounted in or on the panel and that require electrical connections. Show unique rung numbers on left side of each rung. b. Item Identification: Identify each item with attributes listed. 1) Wires: Wire number and color. Cable number if part of multiconductor cable. 2) Terminals: Location (enclosure number, terminal junction box number, or MCC number), terminal strip number, and terminal block number. 3) Discrete Components: a) Tag number, terminal numbers, and location ("FIELD", enclosure number, or MCC number). b) Switching action (open or close on rising or falling process variable), set point value and units, and process variable description (e.g. Sump Level High). 4) Relay Coils: a) Tag number and its function. b) On right side of run where coil is located, list contact location by ladder number and sheet number. Underline normally closed contacts. 5) Relay Contacts: Coil tag number, function, and coil location (ladder rung number and sheet number). C. Show each circuit individually. No "typical' diagrams or "typical' wire lists will be permitted. d. Ground wires, surge protectors, and connections. Panel Wiring Diagrams: Show point-to-point and terminal -to -terminal wiring within panel. Loop Diagrams: Individual wiring diagram for each analog or pulse frequency loop. a. Conform to the minimum requirements of ISA S5.4. b. Under paragraph 5.3 of ISA S5.4, include the information listed under subparagraphs 2 and 6. C. Drawing Size: Individual 11-inch by 17-inch sheet for each loop. d. Divide each loop diagram into areas for panel face, back -of -panel, and field. JULY 12, 2000 5 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) e. Show: 1) Terminal numbers, location of do power supply, and location of common dropping resistors. 2) Switching contacts in analog loops and output contacts of analog devices. Reference specific control diagrams where functions of these contacts are shown. 3) Tabular summary on each diagram: a) Transmitting Instruments: Output capability. b) Receiving Instruments: Input impedance. c) Loop Wiring Impedance: Estimate based on wire sizes and lengths shown. d) Total loop impedance. e) Reserve output capacity. 10. Interconnecting Wiring Diagrams: a. Diagrams, device designations, and symbols in accordance with NEMA ICS 1. b. Diagrams shall bear electrical Subcontractor's signature attesting diagrams have been coordinated with Division 16, ELECTRICAL. C. Show: 1) Electrical connections between equipment, consoles, panels, terminal junction boxes, and field mounted components. 2) Component and panel terminal board identification numbers, and external wire and cable numbers. 3) Circuit names matching Circuit and Raceway Schedule. 4) Intermediate terminations between field elements and panels for, e.g., to terminal junction boxes and pull boxes. 5) Pull boxes. 11. Installation Details: Include modifications or further details required to adequately define installation of I&C components. 12. List of spares, expendables, test equipment and tools. 13. Additional Equipment Recommended: List of, and descriptive literature for, additional spares, expendables, test equipment and tools recommended. Include unit prices and total costs as specified in Section 01025, MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT. D. Quality Control Submittals: For PICS equipment, provide Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation and readiness for operation. 1. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals: In accordance with = r Section 01430, OPERATIONS AND NLkH,1 ENANCE DATA, unless otherwise specified in this Section. a. Content and Format: 1) Complete sets O&M manuals. f B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 �'- 13401 6 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) 2. BOI158870.A 1.FN 13401 2) Sufficient detail to allow operation, removal, installation, adjustment, calibration, maintenance and purchasing replacements for each PICS component. 3) Final versions of Legend and Abbreviation Lists. 4) Manual format in accordance with Section 01430, OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA. b. Include: 1) Process and Instrumentation Diagrams: One reproducible copy of revised P&ID to reflect as -built PICS design. 2) Refer to paragraph Shop Drawings for the following items: a) Bill of Materials. b) Catalog Cuts. c) Component Data Sheets. d) Panel Control Diagrams. e) Panel Wiring Diagrams, one reproducible copy. f) Panel Plumbing Diagrams, one reproducible copy. g) Loop Diagrams, one reproducible copy. h) Interconnecting Wiring Diagrams, one reproducible copy. i) Application Software Documentation. 3) Device O&M manuals for components, electrical devices, and mechanical devices include: a) Operations procedures. b) Installation requirements and procedures. c) Maintenance requirements and procedures. d) Troubleshooting procedures. e) Calibration procedures. f) Internal schematic and wiring diagrams. g) Component Calibration Sheets from field quality control calibrations. 4) List of spares, expendables, test equipment and tools provided. 5) List of additional spares, expendables, test equipment and tools recommended. Performance Acceptance Tests (PAT) Submittals: a. Preliminary Test Procedures: Outlines of proposed tests, forms, and checklists. b. Final Test Procedures: Proposed test procedures, forms, and checklists. C. Test Documentation: Copy of signed off test procedures when tests are completed. JULY 12, 2000 7 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Calibration Instruments: Each instrument used for calibrating PICS equipment shall bear the seal of a reputable laboratory certifying that instrument has been calibrated within the previous 12 months to a standard endorsed by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide site and warehouse storage facilities for PICS equipment. B. Prior to shipment, include corrosive -inhibitive vapor capsules in shipping containers, and related equipment as recommended by the capsule manufacturer. C. Prior to installation, store items in dry indoor locations. Provide heating in storage areas for items subject to corrosion under damp conditions. D. Cover panels and other elements that are exposed to dusty construction environments. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Standard Environmental Requirements: Unless otherwise noted, design equipment for continuous operation in these environments: 1. Freestanding Panel and Consoles: a. Inside, Air Conditioned: NEMA 1. b. Inside: NEMA 12. 2. Smaller Panels and Assemblies (that are not Freestanding): a. Inside, Air Conditioned: NEMA 12. b. All Other Locations: NEMA 4X. 3. Field Elements: Outside. B. Special Environmental Requirements: Provide instruments and devices suitable for the environment in which it is installed. C. Environmental Design Requirements: Following defines the types of environments referred to in the above. 1. Inside, Air Conditioned: a. Temperature: 1) Normal: 60 to 80 degrees F. 2) With Up to 4-Hour HVAC System Interruptions: 40 to 105 degrees F. BOI158870.A1.FN DULY 12, 2000 13401 8 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) b. Relative Humidity: 1) Normal: 10 percent (winter) to 70 percent (summer). 2) With Up to 4-Hour HVAC System Interruption: 10 to 100 percent. C. NEC Classification: Nonhazardous. 2. Inside: a. Temperature: 20 to 104 degrees F. b. Relative Humidity: 10 to 100 percent. C. NEC Classification: Nonhazardous. 3. Outside: a. Temperature: Minus_ 20 to 104 degrees F. b. Relative Humidity: 10 to 100 percent, rain, snow, freezing rain. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Activity Completion: The following is a list of key activities and their completion criteria: 1. Shop Drawings: Reviewed and approved. 2. Quality Control Submittals: Reviewed and accepted. 3. Hardware Delivery: Hardware delivered to site and inventoried by OWNER. 4. PAT: Completed and required test documentation accepted. B. PICS Substantial Completion: When ENGINEER issues Certificate of Substantial Completion. 1. Prerequisites: a. All PICS Submittals have been completed. b. PICS has successfully completed PAT. C. OWNER training plan is on schedule. d. All spares, expendables, and test equipment have been delivered to OWNER. C. PICS Acceptance: When ENGINEER issues a written notice of Final Payment and Acceptance. 1. Prerequisites: a. Certificate of Substantial Completion issued for PICS. b. Punch -list items completed. C. Final revisions to O&M manuals accepted. d. Maintenance service agreements for PICS accepted by OWNER. BOI158870.A1.FN DULY 12, 2000 13401 9 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. PICS functions as shown on Drawings and as required for each loop. Furnish equipment items as required. Furnish all materials, equipment, and software, necessary to effect required system and loop performance. B. First Named Manufacturer: PICS design is based on first named manufacturers of equipment and materials. 1. If an item is proposed from other than first named manufacturer, obtain approval from ENGINEER for such changes in accordance with Article SUBMITTALS. 2. If proposed item requires, i.e., different installation, wiring, raceway, enclosures, intrinsically safe barriers, and accessories, furnish equipment and Work. C. Like Equipment Items: 1. Use products of one manufacturer and of the same series or family of models to achieve standardization for appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturer's services. 2. Implement all same or similar functions in same or similar manner. For example, control logic, sequence controls, and display layouts. 2.2 LOOP SPECIFICATIONS A. Location: Article 3.8, SUPPLEMENTS. B. Organization: By unit process and loop number. C. Functional Requirements for Control Loops: 1. Shown on Drawings, in Panel Control Diagrams, and Process and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&ID). P&ID format and symbols are in accordance with ISA S5.1, except as specified or shown on Drawings. 2. Supplemented by Loop Specifications. D. Subheadings for Each Loop: 1. Functions: Clarifies functional performance of loop, including abstract of interlocks. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 13401 10 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) 2.3 I&C COMPONENTS A. Components for Each Loop: Major components for each loop are listed in Instrument List referenced in Article 3.8, SUPPLEMENTS. Furnish all equipment that is necessary to achieve required loop performance. B. Component Specifications: Generalized specifications for each type of component are located in Article 3.8, SUPPLEMENTS. 2.4 NAMEPLATES AND TAGS A. Panel Nameplates: Enclosure identification located on the enclosure face. 1. Location and Inscription: As shown. 2. Materials: Laminated plastic attached to panel with stainless steel screws. . 3. Letters: 1/2-inch white on black background, unless otherwise noted. B. Component Nameplates —Panel Face: Component identification located on panel face under or near component. 1. Location and Inscription: As shown. 2. Materials: Laminated plastic attached to panel with stainless steel screws. . 3. Letters: 3/16-inch white on black background, unless otherwise noted. C. Component Nameplates —Back of Panel: Component identification located on or near component inside of enclosure. 1. Inscription: Component tag number. 2. Materials: Adhesive backed, laminated plastic. 3. Letters: 3/16-inch white on black background, unless otherwise noted. D. Legend Plates for Panel Mounted Pushbuttons, Lights, and Switches. 1. Inscription: Refer to: a. Table under paragraph Standard Pushbutton Colors and Inscriptions. b. Table under paragraph Standard Light Colors and Inscriptions. C. P&IDs in Drawings. 2. Materials: Stainless steel, keyed legend plates. Secured to panel by mounting nut for pushbutton, light, or switch. 3. Letters: Black on gray or white background. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 13401 11 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) E. Service Legends: Component identification nameplate located on face of component. 1. Inscription: As shown. 2. Materials: Adhesive backed, laminated plastic. 3. Letters: 3/16-inch white on black background, unless otherwise noted. F. Nametags: Component identification for field devices. 1. Inscription: Component tag number. 2. Materials: 16-gauge, Type 304 stainless steel. 3. Letters: 3/16-inch imposed. 4. Mounting: Affix to component with 16- or 18-gauge stainless steel wire or stainless steel screws. 2.5 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. In accordance with Division 16, ELECTRICAL. B. I&C and electrical components, terminals, wires, and enclosures: UL recognized or UL listed. C. Wires within Enclosures: 1. ac Circuits: a. Type: 600-volt, Type MTW stranded copper. b. Size: For current to be carried, but not less than No. 18-AWG. 2. Analog Signal Circuits: a. Type: 600-volt stranded copper, twisted shielded pairs. b. Size: No. 18-AWG, minimum. 3. Other do Circuits. a. Type: 600-volt, Type MTW stranded copper. b. Size: For current carried, but not less than No. 18-AWG. 4. Special Signal Circuits: Use manufacturer's standard cables. 5. Wire Identification: Numbered and tagged at each termination. a. Wire Tags: Snap -on or slip-on PVC wire markers with legible machine printed markings and numbers. Adhesive or taped -on tags are not acceptable. D. Wires entering or leaving enclosures, terminate and identify as follows: 1. Analog and discrete signal, terminate at numbered terminal blocks. 2. Special signals, terminated using manufacturer's standard connectors BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 J 13401 12 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION . AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) _L_ E. Terminal Blocks for Enclosures: 1. Quantity: a. Accommodate present and spare indicated needs. b. One wire per terminal for field wires entering enclosures. C. Maximum of 2 wires per terminal for 18-WG wire for internal enclosure wiring. d. Spare Terminals: 20 percent of all connected terminals, but not less than 5 per terminal block. 2. General: a. Connection Type: Screw compression clamp. b. Compression Clamp: 1) Complies with DIN-VDE 0611. 2) Hardened steel clamp with transversal groves that penetrate wire strands providing a vibration -proof connection. 3) Guides strands of wire into terminal. C. Screws: Hardened steel, captive and self-locking. d. Current Bar: Copper or treated brass. e. Insulation: 1) Thermoplastic rated for minus 55 to plus 110 degree C. 2) Two funnelled shaped inputs to facilitate wire entry. f. Mounting: 1) Standard DIN rail. 2) Terminal block can be extracted from an assembly without displacing adjacent blocks. 3) End Stops: Minimum of one at each end of rail. g. Wire preparation: Stripping only permitted. h. Jumpers: Allow jumper installation without loss of space on terminal or rail. i. Marking System: 1) Terminal number shown on both sides of terminal block 2) Allow use of preprinted and field marked tags. 3) Terminal strip numbers shown on end stops. 4) Mark terminal block and terminal strip numbers as shown on Panel Control Diagrams and Loop Diagrams. 5) Fuse Marking for Fused Terminal Blocks: Fuse voltage and amperage rating shown on top of terminal block. 3. Terminal Block, General -Purpose: a. Rated Voltage: 600V ac. b. Rated Current: 30 amp. C. Wire Size: 22- to 10-AWG. d. Rated Wire Size: 10-AWG. e. Color: Grey body. f. Spacing: 0.25 inch, maximum. BOI158870.A1.FN 13401 JULY 12, 2000 13 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) g. Test Sockets: One screw test socket 0.079-inch diameter. h. Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type M4/6.T or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. 4. Terminal Block, Ground: a. Wire Size: 22- to 12-AWG. b. Rated Wire Size: 12-AWG. C. Color: Green and yellow body. d. Spacing: 0.25 inch, maximum. e. Grounding: Ground ternunal blocks electrically grounded to the mounting rail. f. Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type M4/6.P or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. 5. Terminal Block, Blade Disconnect Switch: a. Rated Voltage: 600V ac. b. Rated Current: 10-amp. C. Wire Size: 22- to 12-AWG. d. Rated Wire Size: 12-AWG. e. Color: Grey body, orange switch. f. Spacing: 0.25 inch, maximum. g. Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type M4/6.SN.T or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. 6. Terminal Block, Fused, 24V dc: a. Rated Voltage: 600V de. b. Rated Current: 16-amp. C. Wire Size: 22- to 10-AWG. d. Rated Wire Size: 10-AWG. e. Color: Grey body. f. Fuse: 0.25 inch by 1.25 inch. g. Indication: LED diode 24V dc. h. Spacing: 0.512 inch, maximum. i. Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type M10/13T.SFL or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. 7. Terminal Block, Fused, 120V ac: a. Rated Voltage: 600V ac. b. Rated Current: 16-amp. C. Wire Size: 22- to 10-AWG. d. Rated Wire Size: 10-AWG. e. Color: Grey body. f. Fuse: 0.25 inch by 1.25 inch. g. Indication: Neon Lamp 110V ac. h. Leakage Current: 1.8 mA, maximum. i. Spacing: 0.512 inch, maximum BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000' 13401 14 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION , AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) j. Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type M10/13T.SFL or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. 8. Terminal Block, Fused, 120V ac, High Current: a. Rated Voltage: 600V ac. b. Rated Current: 35 amps. C. Wire Size: 18- to 8-AWG. d. Rated Wire Size: 8-AWG. e. Color: Grey. f. Fuse: 13/32 inch by 1.5 inch. g. Spacing: 0.95 inch, maximum. h. Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type MB 10/24.SF or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. F. Grounding of Enclosures: 1. Ground bus grounded at a common signal ground point in accordance with National Electrical Code requirements. 2. Single Point Ground for Each Analog Loop: a. Locate at do power supply for loop. b. Use to ground wire shields for loop. 3. Ground terminal block rails to ground bus. G. Analog Signal Isolators: Furnish signal isolation for analog signals that are sent from one enclosure to another. Do not wire in series instruments on different panels, cabinets, or enclosures. H. Power Distribution within Panels: 1. 2. U BOI158870.A1.FN 13401 Feeder Circuits: a. One or more 120V ac, 60-Hz feeder circuits as shown on Drawings. b. Make provisions for feeder circuit conduit entry. C. Furnish terminal board for termination of wires. Power Panel: Furnish main circuit breaker and a circuit breaker on each individual branch circuit distributed from power panel. a. Locate to provide clear view of and access to breakers when door is open. b. Breaker sizes: Coordinate such that fault in branch circuit will blow only branch breaker but not trip the main breaker. 1) Branch Circuit Breaker: 15 amps at 250V ac. C. Breaker Manufacturers and Products: Refer to Division 16, ELECTRICAL. DULY 12, 2000 15 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) 3. Circuit Wiring: P&IDs and Control Diagrams on Drawings show function only. Use following rules for actual circuit wiring: a. Devices on Single Circuit: 20, maximum. b. Multiple Units Performing Parallel Operations: To prevent failure of any single branch circuit from shutting down entire operation, do not group all units on same branch circuit. C. Branch Circuit Loading: 12 amperes continuous, maximum. d. Panel Lighting and Service Outlets: Put on separate 15-amp, 120V ac branch circuit. e. Provide 120-volt ac plugmold for panel components with line cords. I. Signal Distribution: 1. Within Panels: 4 to 20 mA do signals may be distributed as 1 to 5V dc. 2. Outside Panels: Isolated 4 to 20 mA do only. 3. All signal wiring twisted in shielded pairs. J. Signal Switching: 1. Use dry circuit type relays or switches. 2. No interruption of 4 to 20 mA loops during switching. 3. Switching Transients in Associated Signal Circuit: a. 4 to 20 mA do Signals: 0.2 mA, maximum. b. 1 to 5V do Signals: 0.05V, maximum. K. Relays: 1. General: a. Relay Mounting: Plug-in type socket. b. Relay Enclosure: Furnish dust cover. C. Socket Type: Screw terminal interface with wiring. d. Socket Mounting: Rail. e. Provide holddown clips. 2. Signal Switching Relay: ` a. Type: Dry circuit. b. Contact Arrangement: 2 Form C contacts. C. Contact Rating: 0 to 5 amps at 28V do or 120V ac. d. Contact Material: Gold or silver. e. Coil Voltage: As noted or shown.* f. Coil Power. 0.9 watts (dc), 1.2VA (ac). g. Expected Mechanical Life: 10,000,000 operations. h. Expected Electrical Life at Rated Load: 100,000 operations. r i. Indication Type: Neon or LED indicator lamp. F{ BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 13401 16 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION tj AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) I_ j. Seal Type: Hermetically sealed case. k. Manufacturer and Product: Potter and Brumfield; Series KH/KHA or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. 3. Control Circuit Switching Relay, Nonlatching: a. Type: Compact general-purpose plug-in. b. Contact Arrangement: 3 Form C contacts. C. Contact Rating: 10A at 28V do or 240V ac. d. Contact Material: Silver cadmium oxide alloy. e. Coil Voltage: As noted or shown. f. Coil Power: 1.8 watts (dc), 2.7VA (ac). g. Expected Mechanical Life: 10,000,000 operations. h. Expected Electrical Life at Rated Load: 100,000 operations. i. Indication Type: Neon or LED indicator lamp. j. Push to test button. k. Manufacturer and Product: Potter and Brumfield; Series KUP or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. 4. Control Circuit Switching Relay, Latching: a. Type: Dual coil mechanical latching relay: b. Contact Arrangement: 2 Form C contacts. C. Contact Rating: 10A at 28V do or 120V ac. d. Contact Material: Silver cadmium oxide alloy. e. Coil Voltage: As noted or shown. f. Coil Power: 2.7 watts (dc), 5.3VA (ac). g. Expected Mechanical Life: 500,000 operations. h. Expected Electrical Life at Rated Load: 50,000 operations. i. Manufacturer and Product: Potter and Brumfield; Series KB/KBP or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. 5. Control Circuit Switching Relay, Time Delay: a. Type: Adjustable time delay relay. b. Contact Arrangement: 2 Form C contacts. C. Contact Rating: 1OA at 240V ac. 1) Contact Material: Silver cadmium oxide alloy. d. Coil Voltage: As noted or shown. e. Operating Temperature: Minus 10 to 55 degrees C. f. Repeatability: Plus or minus 2 percent. g. Delay Time Range: Select range such that time delay set point fall between 20 to 80 percent of range. h. Time Delay Set Point: As noted or shown. i. Mode of Operation: As noted or shown. j. Adjustment Type: Integral potentiometer with knob external to dust cover. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 13401 17 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) k. Manufacturer and Products: Potter and Brumfield or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER: 1) Series CB for 0.1 second to 100 minute delay time ranges. 2) Series CK for 0.1 to 120 second delay time ranges. L. Power Supplies: 1. Furnish to power instruments requiring external do power, including two -wire transmitters and do relays. 2. Convert 120V ac, 60-Hz power to do power of appropriate voltage(s) with sufficient voltage regulation and ripple control to assure that instruments being supplied can operate within their required tolerances. 3. Provide output over voltage and over current protective devices to: a. Protect instruments from damage due to power supply failure. b. Protect power supply from damage due to external failure. 4. Enclosures: NEMA 1 in accordance with NEMA 250. 5. Mount such that dissipated heat does not adversely affect other components. 6. Fuses: For each do supply line to each individual two -wire transmitter. a. Type: Indicating. b. Mount so fuses can be easily seen and replaced. M. Internal Panel Lights for Freestanding Panels: 1. Type: Switched 100-watt incandescent back -of -panel lights. 2. Quantity: One light for every 4 feet of panel width. 3. Mounting: Inside and in the top of back -of -panel area. 4. Protective metal shield for lights. N. Service Outlets for Freestanding Panels: 1. Type: Three -wire, 120-volt, 15-ampere, duplex receptacles. 2. Quantity: a. For panels 4 feet wide and smaller: One. b. For panels wider than 4 feet: One for every 4 feet of panel width, two minimum per panel. 3. Mounting: Evenly spaced along back -of -panel area. O. Internal Panel Lights and Service Outlets for Smaller Panels: 1. Internal Panel Light: Switched 100-watt incandescent light. 2. Service Outlet: Breaker protected 120-volt, 15-amp, duplex receptacle: 3. Required for following panels: LCP-1. 3 �4 BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 13401 18 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS)_ P. Standard Pushbutton Colors and Inscriptions: Use following color code and inscriptions for pushbuttons, unless otherwise noted in Instrument List, Article 3.8, SUPPLEMENTS. Tag Function Inscription(s) Color 00 ON Red OFF Green OC OPEN Red CLOSE Green OCA OPEN Red CLOSE Green AUTO White OOA ON Red OFF Green AUTO White MA MANUAL Yellow AUTO White SS START Red STOP Green RESET RESET Red EMERGENCY STOP EMERGENCY STOP Red 1. Unused or Noninscribed Buttons: Black. 2. Lettering Color: a. Black on white and yellow buttons. b. White on black, red and green buttons. Q. Standard Light Colors and Inscriptions: Use following color code and inscriptions for service legends and lens colors for indicating lights, unless otherwise noted in Instrument List, Article 3.8, SUPPLEMENTS. Tag Function Inscription(s) Color ON ON Red OFF OFF Green OPEN OPEN Red CLOSED CLOSED Green LOW LOW Green FAIL FAIL Amber B0I158870.A1.FN 13401 19 JULY 12, 2000 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) Tag Function Inscription(s) Color HIGH HIGH Red AUTO AUTO White MANUAL MANUAL Yellow LOCAL LOCAL White REMOTE REMOTE Yellow 1. Lettering Color: a. Black on white and amber lenses. b. White on red and green lenses. 2.6 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS A. Pressure Gauge: For other than process variable measurement. 1. Dial Size: Nominal 2-inch dial size. 2. Accuracy: 2 percent of span. 3. Scale Range: Such that normal operating pressure lies between 50 and 80 percent of scale range. 4. Connection: 1/4-inch NPT through bottom, unless otherwise noted. 5. Manufacturers and Products: a. Ashcroft Utility; Gauge Series 1000. b. Marsh; Standard Gauge Series. C. Ametek U.S.; Gauge Series P500. d. Acculite; Series 2000. e. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. B. ON/OFF Valves: 1. Type: Ball valve. 2. Materials: Brass. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Whitey; Series 41 through Series 43. b. Hoke; Flomite 7100 Series. C. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. C. Test Tap: 1. Manufacturers and Products: a. Imperial -Eastman; quick -disconnect couplings No. 292-P and caps No. 259-P. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 13401 20 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) 2.7 b. Crawford Fitting Co.; Swagelok quick -connects Series QC4 and caps QC4-DC. C. Parker; CPI Series precision quick couplings. d. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. D. Copper Tubing and Fittings: 1. Type K hard copper, ASTM B88, with commercially pure wrought copper solder joint fittings. Make joints with 95-5 wire solder, ASTM B32, Grade 95 TA. Do not use cored solder. 2. Alternatively, Type K, soft temper copper tubing, ASTM B88, with brass compression type fittings may be used where shown on the Drawings. 3. Manufacturers: a. Parker -Hannifin. b. Swagelok tube fittings. C. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. E. Purge Set: 1. Parts: Purge rotameter flow element, pressure regulator, pressure gauge, test tap, shutoff valve, spool valve, and interconnecting tubing as shown on Drawings and as specified. 2. Pressure Gauge Scale Range: 150 percent of the process variable. 3. Mounting: Within consoles, panels, or a separate enclosure as shown. For separate enclosure mounted purge sets, refer to paragraphs Nonfreestanding Panel Construction and Factory Finishing for enclosure requirements. ELECTRICAL TRANSIENT PROTECTION A. General: 1. Function: Protect elements of PICS against damage due to electrical transients induced in interconnecting lines by lightning and nearby electrical systems. 2. Implementation: Provide, install, coordinate, and inspect grounding of surge suppressors at: a. Connection of ac power to PICS equipment including panels, consoles assembles, and field mounted analog transmitters and receivers. b. At the field and panel, console, or assembly connection of signal circuits that have portions of the circuit extending outside of a protective building. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 13401 21 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) 3. Construction: First -stage high energy metal oxide varistor and second - stage bipolar silicon avalanche device separated by series impedance. Includes grounding wire, stud, or terminal. 4. Response: 5 nanoseconds maximum. 5. Recovery: Automatic. 6. Temperature Range: Minus 20 degrees C to plus 85 degrees C. B. Suppressors on 120V ac Power Supply Connections: 1. Occurrences: Tested and rated for a minimum of 50 occurrences of IEEE 587 Category B test waveform. 2. First -Stage Clamping Voltage: 350 volts or less. 3. Second -Stage Clamping Voltage: 210 volts or less. 4. Continuous Operation: Power supplies for one four -wire transmitter or receiver: 5 amps minimum at 130V ac. All other applications: 30 amps minimum at 130V ac. C. Suppressors on Analog Signal Lines: 1. Test Waveform: Linear 8 microsecond rise in current form 0 amps to a peak current value followed by an exponential decay of current reaching one half the peak value in 20 microseconds. 2. Surge Rating: Tested and rated for 50 occurrences of 2,000-amp peak test waveform. a. do Clamping Voltage: 20 to 40 percent above operating voltage for circuit. b. do Clamping Voltage Tolerance: Less than plus or minus 10 percent. C. Maximum Loop Resistance: 18 ohms per conductor. D. Physical Characteristics: 1. Mounted in Enclosures: Encapsulated inflame retardant epoxy. 2. For Analog Signals Lines: EDCO PC-642 or SRA-64 series. 3. For 120V ac Lines: EDCO HSP-121. 4. Field Mounted at Two -Wire Instruments: Encapsulated in stainless steel pipe nipples. EDCO SS64 series. 5. Field Mounted at Four -Wire Instruments: With 120V ac outlet, ac circuit breaker, and 10-ohm resistors on signal lines, all in enclosure. a. Enclosure: NEMA 4X fiberglass or Type 316 stainless steel with door. 1) Maximum Size: 12 inches by 12 inches by 8 inches deep. b. Manufacturer and Product: EDCO; SLAC series or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. BOI158870.A 1.FN 13401 DULY 12, 2000 22 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) „_ tx: E. Installation and Grounding of Suppressors: As shown. See Surge Suppressor Installation Details. Grounding equipment, installation of grounding equipment, and terminations for field mounted devices are provided under Division 16, ELECTRICAL. TEST EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS Item Qty. Options and Model Digital 1 Fluke Model 87 YEL with carrying case Model C20 multimeter Digital 1 Portable, two -channel, with rechargeable batteries calibrator and carrying case: Transmation Model 1045 Pressure 1 Transmation Model 1091-21 with ac charger and calibrator protective case; Ranges: Appropriate for all pressure devices provided Pressure pump Transmation Model 1098P; Range: negative 2 to 200 psi Large tool kit 1 Kit of instrument maintenance tools in high density 1 eth lene case; Jensen Tools Model JTK-17LST Or the CONTRACTOR may submit an equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. 2.9 SPARE PARTS Description Percent of Each Type and Size Used No Less Than do power supplies 20 2 Fuses 20 5 Indicating light bulb 20 10 Relays 20 3 Terminal Blocks 10 5 Hand Switches 10 5 B0I158870.A1.FN 13401 JULY 12, 2000 23 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) 2.10 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Panels with external dimensions and instruments arrangement as shown on Drawings. 2. Panel Construction and Interior Wiring: In accordance with the National Electrical Code, state and local codes, NEMA, ANSI, UL, and ICECA. 3. Fabricate panels, install instruments, wire, and plumb, at the PICS factory. 4. Electrical Work: In accordance with Division 16, ELECTRICAL. B. Factory Assembly: Assemble panels at the manufacturer's factory. No fabrication other than correction of minor defects or minor transit damage shall be done on panels at site. C. UL Label for Enclosures: UL label stating "Listed Enclosed Industrial Control Panel." D. Wiring Within PICS Panels: 1. Restrain by plastic ties or ducts or metal raceways. 2. Hinge Wiring: Secure at each end so that bending or twisting will be around longitudinal axis of wire. Protect bend area with sleeve. 3. Arrange wiring neatly, cut to proper length, and remove surplus wire. 4. Abrasion protection for wire bundles which pass through holes or across edges of sheet metal. 5. Connections to Screw Type Terminals: a. Locking -fork -tongue or ring -tongue lugs. b. Use manufacturer's recommended tool with required sized anvil to make crimp lug terminations. C. Wires terminated in a crimp lug, maximum of one. d. Lugs installed on a screw terminal, maximum of two. 6. Connections to Compression Clamp Type Terminals: a. Strip, prepare, and install wires in accordance with terminal manufacturer's recommendations. b. Wires installed in a compression screw and clamp, maximum of one for field wires entering enclosure, otherwise maximum of two. 7. Splicing and tapping of wires, allowed only at device terminals or terminal blocks. 8. Terminate 24V do and analog signal circuits on separate terminal block from ac circuit terminal blocks. BOI158870.A 1.FN 13401 JULY 12, 2000 24 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION; AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) 9. Separate analog and do circuits by at least 6 inches from ac power and control wiring, except at unavoidable crossover points and at device terminations. 10. Arrange wiring to allow access for testing, removal, and maintenance of circuits and components. 11. Plastic wire ducts fill: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommendation. E. Temperature Control: 1. Freestanding Panels: a. Nonventilated Panels: Size to adequately dissipate heat from equipment mounted inside panel or on panel. 2. Space Heaters: a. Thermostatically controlled to maintain internal panel temperatures above dew point. b. Required for following panels: LCP-1. F. Freestanding Panel Construction: 1. Materials: a. Sheet steel, unless otherwise shown on Drawings with minimum thickness of 10-gauge, unless otherwise noted. b. Control panel DCP-1 manufacturer shall be Cushing Manufacturing Co., Richmond, VA (804) 231-1161, or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. 2. Panel Fronts: a. Fabricated from a single piece of sheet steel, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. b. No seams or bolt heads visible when viewed from front. C. Panel Cutouts: Smoothly finished with rounded edges. d. Stiffeners: Steel angle or plate stiffeners or both on back of panel face to prevent panel deflection under instrument loading or operation. 3. Internal FrameWork: a. Structural steel for instrument support and panel bracing. b. Permit panel lifting without racking or distortion. 4. Lifting rings to allow simple, safe rigging and lifting of panel during installation. 5. Adjacent Panels: Securely bolted together so front faces are parallel. 6. Doors: Full height, fully gasketed access doors where shown on Drawings. a. Latches: Three-point, Southco Type 44. b. Handles: "D" ring, foldable type. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 13401 25 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) C. Hinges: Full length, continuous, piano type, steel hinges with stainless steel pins. d. Rear Access Doors: Extend no further than 24 inches beyond panel when opened to 90-degree position. e. Front and Side Access Doors: As shown on Drawings. G. Nonfreestanding Panel Construction: 1. Based on environmental design requirements required and referenced in Article 1.7, ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS, provide the following: a. For panels listed as inside, air conditioned: 1) Enclosure Type: NEMA 12 in accordance with NEMA 250. 2) Materials: Steel. b. For all other panels: 1) Enclosure Type: NEMA 4X in accordance with NEMA 250. 2) Materials: Type 316 stainless steel. 2. Metal Thickness: 14-gauge, minimum. 3. Doors: a. Rubber-gasketed with continuous hinge. b. Stainless steel lockable quick -release clamps. 4. Manufacturers: a. Hoffman Engineering Co. b. H. F. Cox. C. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. H. Factory Finishing: 1. Enclosures: a. Stainless Steel and Aluminum: Not painted. b. Nonmetallic Panels: Not painted. C. Steel Panels: 1) Sand panel and remove mill scale, rust, grease, and oil. 2) Fill imperfections and sand smooth. 3) Paint panel interior and exterior with one coat of epoxy coating metal primer, two finish coats of two -component type epoxy enamel. 4) Sand surfaces lightly between coats. 5) Dry Film Thickness: 3 mils, minimum. 6) Color: Manufacturer's standard color. 2. Manufacturer's standard finish color, except where specific color is indicated. If manufacturer has no standard color, finish equipment with light gray color. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 13401 26 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) 2.11 CORROSION PROTECTION A. Corrosion -Inhibiting Vapor Capsule Manufacturers: 1. Northern Instruments; Model Zerust VC. 2. Hoffmann Engineering Co; Model A-HCI. 3. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. 2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Scope: Inspect and test entire PICS to ensure it is ready for shipment, installation, and operation. i B. Location: Manufacturer's factory or ENGINEER approved staging site. C. Test: Exercise and test all functions. ,,. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. For equipment not provided by PICS, but that directly interfaces with the PICS, verify the following conditions: 1. Proper installation. 2. Calibration and adjustment of positioners and UP transducers. 3. Correct control action. 4. Switch settings and dead bands. 5. Opening and closing speeds and travel stops. - 6. Input and output signals. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Material and Equipment Installation: Retain a copy of manufacturers' instructions at site, available for review at all times. B. Electrical Wiring: As specified in Division 16, ELECTRICAL C. Mechanical Systems: 1. Drawings for PICS Mechanical Systems are diagrammatic and not intended to specifically define element locations or piping and tubing run lengths. Base materials and installations on field measurements. 2. Copper and Stainless Steel Tubing Support: Continuously supported by an aluminum tubing raceway system. BOI158870.A1.FN 13401 JULY 12, 2000 27 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) _r 2. Too Few Blowers On: Two blowers are on and the inlet guide vane position ZT-14-2(3) is less than 22 percent form more than 5 seconds. t r i_ BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 13401 36 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) ..Vrrn a i rrrr r TNCTV T nL41 Vrr V A T .TRR A TMN I.QYM.F.T Rev.06.05.92 VAA"AYl LLLs/L/ COMPONENT --'— MANUFACTURER PROJECT Coder Name: Number: Name: Model: Name: Serial #: FUNCTIONS RANGE VALUE UNITS COMPUTING FUNCTIONS? Y / N CONTROL? Y / N Action? direct / reverse Modes? P / I / D Indicate? Y / N Record? Y / N Chart: Describe: Scale: SWITCH? Y / N Unit Range: Differential: fixed/adjustable Reset? automatic / manual Transmit/ Convert? Y / N Input: I Ou ut: ANALOG CALIBRATIONS DISCRETE CALIBRATIONS Note REQUIRED AS CALIBRATED RE UIRED AS CALIBRATED No. Input Indicated Output Increasing Input Decreasing In ut Number Trip Point Reset Pt. Trip Point Reset Pt. Indicated Output Indicated Output note risingor falling) note rising or falling) I. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. CONTROL MODE SETTINGS: P: I: D: 7. # NOTES: Component Calibrated and Ready for Startup B: Date: Tag No. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 13401 37 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) CH2M HILL PERFORMANCE ACCEPTANCE TEST SHEET Rev.06.05.92 EXAMPLE Project Name: SFO SEWPCP Plant Expansion Project No.: SF012345.C1 Demonstration Test(s): For each functional requirement of the loop: (a) List and number the requirement. (b) Briefly describe the demonstration test. (c) Cite the results that will vE the r wired performance. (d) Provides ace for si noff. 1. MEASURE EFFLUENT FLOW I a With no ow, water level over weir should be zero and FIT indicator should read zero. Jun-20-92 BDG 2. FLOW INDICATION AND TRANSMISSION TO LP & CCS With flow, water level and FIT indicator should be related by expression Q(MGD) = 429*H**(2/3) (H = height in inches of water over weir). Vary H and observe that ollowin . 2.a Reading of FIT indicator. Jun-6-92 BDG 2.b Readin is transmitted to FI on LP-521-1. Jun-6-92 BDG 2.c Reading is transmitted and dis la ed to CCS. Jun-6-92 BDG H(measured) 0 5 10 15 Q(computed) 0 47.96 135.7 251.7 Q(FIT indicator) 0 4& 1 137 253 Q(LI on LP-521-1) 0 48.2 138 254 Q(dis la b CCS) 0 48.1 136.2 252.4 Forms/Sheets Verified By Date Loop Accepted By OWNER —Loop Status Report J.D. Sewell Ma -18-92 By: J.D. Smith Instrument Calibration Sheet J.D. Sewell Ma -18-92 Date: Jun-6-92 I&C Valve Calibration Sheet N.A. Performance Acceptance Test By Date Performed J. Blow MPSDC Co. Jun-6-92 IL -Witnessed B.deGlanville Jun-6-92 Loop No.:30-12 BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 13401 42 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS A. F4 Flow Element and Transmitter, Electromagnetic: 1. General: a. Function: Measure, indicate, and transmit the flow of a process liquid in a full pipe. b. Type: Electromagnetic flowmeter, with operation based on Faraday's Law, utilizing the pulsed do type coil excitation principle with high impedance electrodes. C. Parts: Flow element, transmitter, interconnecting cables, mounting hardware, and calibrator. 2. Service: a. Stream Fluid: As noted b. Flow Stream Descriptions: Water with slight alkalinity (7.5 to 8 pH) and up to 2.0 mg/1 suspended solids, carbon fines, miscellaneous dilute chemicals, some oils. 3. Performance: a. Flow Range: As noted. b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 percent of rate for all flows resulting from pipe velocities of 1 to 33 feet per second. C. Turndown Ratio: Minimum of 10 to 1 when flow velocity at minimum flow is at least 1 foot per second. 4. Features: a. Zero stability feature to eliminate the need to stop flow to check zero alignment. b. No obstructions to flow. C. Very low pressure loss. -' 5. Process Connection: a. Meter Size: As noted. b. Connection Type: 150-pound ANSI raised -face flanges or wafer style depending on meter size. C. Flange Material: Carbon steel. 6. Signal Interface: a. 4 to 20 mA do for load impedance 0 to 800 ohms minimum for 24V do supply. 7. Power: 120V ac, 60-Hz, unless otherwise noted. 8. Element: a. Meter Tube Material: 304 stainless steel. b. Liner Material: TefZel. C. Liner Protectors: Covers on each end to protect liner during shipment. d. Electrode Type: Flush or bullet nose as recommended by the manufacturer for the noted stream fluid. -' B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 13401 SUPPLEMENT 1 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS e. Electrode Material: 316 stainless steel. f. Enclosure: NEMA 4, unless otherwise noted. g. Grounding Ring Material: 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise noted. 9. Transmitter: a. Display: Indicating and totalizing. b. Mounting: Pipe stand, wall, panel, or integral as noted. C. Enclosure: NEMA 4X. d. Zero and Span: Field adjustable. e. Indicator: Digital 16-character display, with scale range as noted. f. Totalizer: Digital 16-character display, with totalizer unit digit value in gallons. 10. Cables: a. Types: As recommended by manufacturer. b. Lengths: As required to accommodate device locations. 11. Calibration System: a. Features: 1) Field programmable electronics. 2) Self -diagnostics with troubleshooting codes. 3) Ability to program electronics with full scale flow, engineering units, meter size, zero flow cutoff, desired signal damping, totalizer unit digit value, etc. 4) Initial flow tube calibration and subsequent calibration checks. b. Equipment: 1) Built-in electronics with each unit provided. 2) Alternatively, one portable calibrator of each type required for the various electromagnetic flowmeters provided on the Project. 12. Manufacturers: Brooks Instruments; Model 5000 or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. B. F31 Flow Element Transmitter and Totalizer, Positive Displacement: 1. Unit shall be the positive displacement, oval gear type flowmeter with integral electronic register used for flowrate indication and totalization suitable for metering fluids of varying viscosity. 2. Unit shall have a pair of oval gears which trap precise quantities of fluid as they rotate to produce a rotational speed of the gears proportional to flow. The gears shall transmit a constant driving torque to an output shaft by means of a magnetic coupling. The output shaft shall be totally isolated from the process. 3. Meter size and flow range shall be as noted. End connections shall be 150-pound RF flanges unless otherwise noted. Meter housing shall be BOI158870.A1.FN 13401 SUPPLEMENT JULY 12, 2000 2 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND , CONTROL SYSTEMS t cast steel, gears shall be 316 stainless steel with carbon bearing and a stainless steel shaft, and packing material shall be Viton, unless otherwise noted. Meters shall be provided with a mesh strainer. 4. Electronic register unit shall consist of a TRI-10, microprocessor -based flow -rate or totalization indicator and analog signal transmitter. Transmitter shall be capable of driving a 4 to 20 mA flow -rate signal through a maximum load of 500-ohms at 20 Vdc. Unit shall be 115 Vac powered. Indicator shall be an 8-digit, reflective LCD display with 1/2-inch charactors. 5. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 0.5 percent of total flow regardless of flow rate over a flow range of 8:1. An accuracy adjuster shall be provided to compensate for meter wear. 6. Meter shall be Brooks Model 9800 Power Pulse Oval-Flowmeter or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. C. L5 Level Element and Transmitter, Ultrasonic: 1. General: a. Function: Continuous, noncontacting level measurement.. b. Type: Ultrasonic. C. Parts: Element, transmitter, and interconnecting cable between element and transmitter. 2. Service: a. Vapor Space Pressure: Atmospheric, unless otherwise noted. b. Operating Temperature Range: 1) Element: Minus 40 to plus 200 degrees F. 2) Transmitter: Minus 5 to 140 degrees F. 3. Performance: a. Range: As noted. b. Zero Reference: As noted. C. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.25 percent. d. Resolution: 2 mm or 0.1 percent of range, whichever is greater. e. Blanking Distance: As short as 1-foot. 4. Element: a. Waterproof/weatherproof. b. Housing and Face: Kynar, unless otherwise noted. C. Process Connection: 1-inch NPT, unless otherwise noted. d. Rating: Factory Mutual (FM) approval for use in the following hazardous environments without the use of intrinsically safe relays: Class I, Division I, Groups A, B, C, D, and Class II, Division I, Groups E, F, and G. e. Beam Angle: 12 degrees or less. f. Integral temperature compensation. BOI158870.A1.FN DULY 12, 2000 13401 SUPPLEMENT 3 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS 5. Transmitter: a. Microprocessor based with removable keyboard operator interface. b. Enclosure: NEMA 4 polycarbonate, unless otherwise noted. C. Power Supply: 115-volt, 50/60 Hz, unless otherwise noted. d. Isolated Analog Output: 1) Milliamp current loop for load impedance of 0 to 750 ohms. 2) Milliamp current loop programmable as 4-20, 0-20, 2-4, Or 20-0 mA. e. Discrete Outputs: Five SPDT contacts, rated at 10 amps, continuous, at 115VAC. f. Display: 1) Four digit LCD. 2) High contrast 18 mm (0.7-inches). 3) In standard engineering units (feet, inches, or centimeters); volumetric conversion. 4) Alarm Messages: Loss of echo and cable circuit open or shorted. g. Filters, Electronic: 1) For agitator blade echoes. 2) To remove small variations from surface waves. 6. Interconnecting Cable: Weatherproof, length as required. 7. Manufacturer/Model: Milltronics, Multiranger Plus or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. D. L8 Level Switch, Float: 1. General: a. Function: Actuate contact at preset liquid level. b. Type: Direct -acting float with an enclosed mercury switch and - integral cable. { 2. Service: Liquid; water, wastewater, unless otherwise noted. Y 3. Performance: a. Set Point: As noted. b. Differential: 1-inch maximum. C. Temperature: 0 to 180 degrees F. 4. Features: j a. Entire Assembly: Watertight and impact -resistant. b. Float Material and Size: Polyethylene/foam filled; 4.5-inch diameter tear drop. C. Cable: 1) Combination support and signal. 2) Length as noted or as necessary per mounting requirements. - 3) Type SO nitrile PVC jacket, AWG No. 18/2 or No. 18/4. jz BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 13401 SUPPLEMENT 4 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS d. Mounting: 1) Pipe: a) Cable -to -pipe clamp, corrosion -proof cable for 1-inch Pipe. b) Pipe -to -wall bracket for 1-inch pipe. 2) Suspended Type: As noted. 5. Signal Interface: a. Switch Type: Mercury tilt. b. Switch Contacts: 1) Isolated, rated 4.5A continuous at 120V ac. 2) As required (for example 1NO, 1NO+1NC) to meet functional requirements, or as shown. 6. Manufacturers and Products: a. Consolidated Electric Co.; Model LS. b. Anchor Scientific; Roto-Float, Type P/Type S. C. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. E. M5 Hand Switch and Light, Oiltight, Square: 1. General: a. Function: Select, initiate, and display discrete control functions. b. Type: Heavy-duty, oiltight, industrial. 2. General Features: a. Dimensions: Approximately 1-1/2 inches square. b. Mounting: 30.5 mm single round hole. Panel thickness 1/16 inch to 1/4 inch. C. Configuration: Light, pushbutton, or switch arrangement as noted or shown. 3. Light Features: a. Lights: 6V ac lamps and integral transformer for operation from 120V ac, unless otherwise noted. b. Lens Color: Color as specified under PANEL, STANDARD LIGHT COLOR AND INSCRIPTIONS, or as noted. 4. Pushbutton and Switch Features: a. Operator: Pushbutton as noted. Black nonilluminated lever on switch, unless otherwise noted. b. Boot: None, unless otherwise noted. 5. Signal Interface: a. Contact Block: 1) Type: Silver -coated butting, unless otherwise noted. 2) Rating: 10 amps continuous at 120V ac or as noted. 3) Sequence: Break -before -make, unless otherwise shown. 4) Arrangement: Normally open or normally closed as shown, or perform functions noted. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 13401 SUPPLEMENT 5 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS 3. Features: a. Type: Gauge pressure, unless otherwise noted. b. Damping: Fluid or electronic type with adjustment. C. Indicator: 4-digit LCD meter with scale range is noted. d. Materials: Wetted parts including process flanges and drain/vent valves, 316 stainless steel. e. Housing: Modular with separate compartments for electronics and field connections. f. Fill Fluid: Silicone. 4. Process Connections: a. Line Size: 1/2 inch or 1/4 inch, selectable. b. Connection Type: NPT. 5. Signal Interface: 4 to 20 mA do output for load impedance of 0 to 600 ohms minimum without load adjustment with 24V do supply. 6. Enclosure: a. Type: NEMA 4X. b. Mounting: Pipe or wall as noted. Provide brackets with stainless steel bolts. 7. Manufacturer: a. Gauge Pressure Units: Fischer and Porter; Series 50GP4300A. b. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. I. S6 Controller, Microprocessor: 1. General: - a. Function: Control process variable. b. Type: Small -case, microprocessor -based; remote setpoint (SP), as defined below. C. Parts: Controller and enclosure. 2. Features: a. Type: Remote setpoint, controller disable remote input (HOLD). b. Memory: Nonvolatile to retain configuration and parameters during power outage. C. Indicators on Front Panel: 1) Digital: 4 decades minimum; one selectable for PV or SP, and the second display for the output signal, or auxiliary variables in engineering units. 2) Output: Bargraph or analog; 0 to 100 percent. 3. Controller Features Common to all Types: a. Bumpless Transfer. Bumpless and procedureless transfer between various switchable modes, including LOCAL, REMOTE, MANUAL, AUTO, and COMPUTER. Bumpless means that the output of the controller does not change instantaneously when the BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 13401 SUPPLEMENT 8 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS operating mode is changed; procedureless means that balancing is not required by the operator to achieve bumpless transfer. b. Control Action: P, PI, or PID as noted. 1) Proportional: 3 to 500 percent proportional band. 2) Integral: 0.02 to 50 repeats per minute. 3) Anti -Windup reset. 4) Derivative: 0 to 8 minutes and off. 5) Action: Switch selectable direct or reverse control. C. Self -Tuning: Except when noted. d. Extended Function Set: When noted or required to accomplish noted functions. e. Controller Output: 1) MANUAL: Adjusted by INCREASE/DECREASE pushbuttons or knurled knob., 2) AUTO: Internally derived from the process variable and the set point according to control action noted. 4. Controller Features Unique for Different Controller Types: a. Remote Set Point Type: 1) Modes: Switchable MANUAL -AUTO. 2) Set Point: Switchable LOCAL -REMOTE when noted; adjusted by front panel INCREASE -DECREASE pushbuttons or knurled knob in LOCAL. 5. Signal Interface: a. Interfaces Common to All Controller Types: 1) Controller Output: 4 to 20 mA do for output impedance 0 to 640 ohms minimum for 24V do supply without load adjustments. 2) PV Input: 4 to 20 mA dc; external resistors. 3) -Discrete Inputs: When noted; as noted. 4) Discrete Outputs: When noted; as noted; solid state. 5) Digital Communications: When noted; type as noted. 6. Enclosure: a. Mounting: Case; slide -out single or multiple -instrument panel mount. b. Size: Small -case, 3.8-inch by 3.8-inch face by 6-inch deep nominal. C. Chassis: Metallic. 7. Power: 24V do unless otherwise noted. 8. Manufacturers: All small -case instruments including controllers, ratio stations, manual loading stations, and indicators, by same manufacturer unless otherwise noted. a. Commander 200. b. A BB. C. Or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. B0I158870.A1.FN 13401 SUPPLEMENT JULY 12, 2000 9 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS J. S28 Indicator/Totalizer, Digital Panel: 1. General: a. Function: Provides a digital display of rate or totalized count from an analog signal. b. Type: 8-segment digital, horizontal edgewise. 2. Performance: a. Range: As noted, engineering units as noted. b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.1 percent full scale. C. Temperature, Operating: 32 to 120 degrees F. 3. Features: a. Digits: 3-1/2; 0.43-inch high minimum; 8-segment LED, gas plasma, or vacuum fluorescent. b. Decimal Point: Field selectable. C. Input Impedance: 100 ohms maximum. d. Service Legend: Permanent, display of engineering units. e. Response Time: 1 second maximum to 0.1 percent accuracy. f. Total Reset: Integral push button for reset of total. g. Configuration Disable: Provide means to disable configuration of device from front of panel. 4. Signal Interface: 4 to 20 mA dc. 5. Enclosure: a. Type: NEMA 1. b. Mounting: Panel; approximately 2.30-inch high, 4.25-inch wide, 5-inch deep. 6. Power: 120V ac, 50/60-Hz unless otherwise noted. 7. Manufacturer: CE; Model PAXD or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 13401 SUPPLEMENT 10 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS 158870.BOI LOOP SPECIFICATIONS LOOP A-1: FIRE ZONE FUEL CONTROL IPS Functions: Generate OPEN command for fuel control valves, CV-A-1-1 (13) from LCP-1/OCP-1.Open command generated from toggling momentary pushbutton switch at OCP-1. Indicate OPEN command output at OCP-1. LOOP A-2: FIRE ZONE GAS CONTROL IPS Functions: Generate OPEN command for natural gas control valves, CV-A-2-1(13) from LCP-1/OCP-1. Open command generated from toggling momentary pushbutton switch at OCP-1. Indicate OPEN command output at OCP-1. LOOP A-3: FIRE ZONE IGNITOR CONTROL IPS Functions: Generate IGNITOR ON command for ignition exciter control, IG-A-3-1(13) from LCP-1/OCP- 1. IGNITOR ON command generated from toggling momentary pushbutton switch at OCP-1. Indicate IGNITOR ON command output at OCP-1. LOOP A4: BURN PIT SUMP MONITORING AND CONTROL IPS Functions: Measure and transmit Burn Pit Sump HIGH and LOW discrete level signals to MCC-1. Provide HAND/OFF/AUTO control from OCP-l. When in AUTO mode, operate Burn Pit Sump Pump based on discrete HIGH and LOW level signals. Indicate pump ON status at OCP-1. LOOP B-1: RECYCLING TANK IN Functions: None. LOOP B-2: WASTE WATER PUMP MONITORING AND CONTROL IPS Functions: Provide HAND/OFF/AUTO control from OCP-l. When in AUTO mode, operate Burn Pit Sump Pump based on discrete HIGH and LOW level signals from LOOP B-3. Indicate pump ON status at OCP-1. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 13401 SUPPLEMENT 1 LOOP SPECIFICATIONS LOOP B-3: RECYCLING TANK — STORAGE CHAMBER LEVEL MONITORING IPS Functions: Measure, locally indicate and transmit analog signal of water storage chamber volume to LCP- 1/OCP-1. Generate discrete HIGH and LOW level signals based on volume signal and transmit to MCC-1. Indicate water storage chamber volume at OCP-1. LOOP B-4: WASTE WATER FLOW MONITORING IPS Functions: Measure, locally indicate and transmit analog signal of waste flow rate to LCP-1/OCP-1. Indicate waste flow rate from flow meter FE/FTT-B-4 at OCP-1. Generate and indicate Totaled flow from flow meter FEIFTT-B-4 at OCP-1. Generate discrete RESET signal of totalized value at OCP-1. LOOP B-5: WASTE WATER PRESSURE MONITORING IPS Functions: Measure and locally indicate waste pump discharge pressure. LOOP B-6: EDUCTOR PUMP MONITORING AND CONTROL IPS Functions: Generate ON command for eductor pump control, P-B-6 from LCP-1/OCP-1.ON command generated from toggling momentary pushbutton switch at OCP-1. Indicate pump ON status at OCP-1. Measure and locally indicate eductor pump discharge pressure. LOOP B-7: EDUCTOR SUMP MONITORING AND CONTROL HIS Functions: LEI Measure and transmit eductor sump HIGH and LOW discrete level signals to MCC-1. Provide HAND/OFF/AUTO control from OCP-1. When in AUTO mode, operate eductor sump pump based on discrete HIGH and LOW level signals. Indicate pump ON status at OCP-1. LOOP B-8: BURN PIT FEED WATER FLOW MONITORING AND CONTROL IPS Functions: Measure, locally indicate and transmit analog signal of feed water flow rate to LCP-1/OCP-1. Indicate feed water flow rate from flow meter FE/FIT-B-8 at OCP-1. Provide OPEN/STOP/CLOSE selector switch at OCP-1 for manual control of control valve CV-B-8. Provide MANUAIJCLOSEIAITTO selector switch at OCP-1 for control modes of control valve B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 13401 SUPPLEMENT 2 LOOP SPECIFICATIONS __ CV-B-8. When in MANUAL position, the OPEN/STOP/CLOSE selector switch control shall be enabled. When in the CLOSE position, generate a signal to close control valve CV-13-8. When in the AUTO position, provide PID flow rate control of control valve CV-13-8. LOOP B-9: EDUCTOR MONITORING IPS Functions: None. LOOP B-10: RECYCLE WATER STRAINER IPS Functions: None. LOOP B-11: EDUCTOR PUMP PRESSURE MONITORING IPS Functions: Measure, locally indicate and transmit analog signal of eductor pump discharge pressure to LCP-1/OCP-1. Indicate eductor pump discharge pressure from pressure transmitter PTT-B-11 at OCP-1. LOOP C-1: FUEL/WATER SEPARATOR IPS Functions: None. LOOP C-2: FUEL SUMP LEVEL MONITORING IPS Functions: Measure, locally indicate and transmit analog signal of fuel sump chamber volume to LCP- 1/OCP-1. Generate discrete HIGH and LOW level signals based on volume signal and transmit to MCC-1. Generate discrete fuel sump HIGH -level alarm signal based on volume signal and transmit to OCP-1. Indicate HIGH level alarm at OCP-1. Indicate fuel sump chamber volume at OCP-1. LOOP C-3: RECYCLED FUEL TRANSFER PUMP MONITORING AND CONTROL IPS Functions: Provide HAND/OFF/AUTO control of fuel transfer pump from OCP-1. When in AUTO mode, operate fuel transfer pump based on discrete HIGH and LOW level signals from LOOP C-2. Indicate pump ON status at OCP-1. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 13401 SUPPLEMENT 3 LOOP SPECIFICATIONS LOOP C-4: RECYCLED FUEL STRAINER MONITORING IPS Functions: Measure, locally indicate and transmit analog signal of upstream and downstream pressure across fuel transfer strainer, ST-C-4 to LCP-1/OCP-1. Indicate upstream and downstream pv strainer pressure from pressure transmitters PIT-C-4-1 and PTT-C-4-2 at OCP-1. LOOP C-5: RECYCLED FUEL FLOW MONITORING x IPS Functions: Measure, locally indicate and transmit analog signal of fuel transfer flow rate to LCP-1/OCP-1. Indicate fuel transfer flow rate from flow meter FE/FTT-C-5 at OCP-1. Generate and indicate Totaled flow from flow meter FE/FTT-C-5 at OCP-1. Generate discrete RESET signal of totalized value at OCP-l. LOOP D-1: FUEL STROAGE TANK IPS Functions: None. LOOP D-2: FUEL STORAGE TANK LEVEL MONITORING IPS Functions: Measure, locally indicate and transmit analog signal of fuel storage tank volume to LCP-1/OCP-1. Indicate fuel storage tank volume at OCP-1. LOOP D-3: FUEL STORAGE TANK LEVEL SIGHT GLASS IPS Functions: None. LOOP D4: ZONE FIRE FUEL PUMP MONITORING AND CONTROL IPS Functions: Generate ON command for zone fuel pump control, P-D-4 from LCP-1/OCP-1.ON command generated from toggling momentary pushbutton switch at OCP-1. Indicate pump ON status at OCP-1. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 13401 SUPPLEMENT 4 LOOP SPECIFICATIONS LOOP D-5: SPOT FIRE FUEL PUMP MONITORING AND CONTROL IPS Functions: Generate ON command for spot fuel pump control, P-D-5 from LCP-1/OCP-1.ON command generated from toggling momentary pushbutton switch at OCP-1. Indicate pump ON status at OCP-1. LOOP D-6: ZONE FIRE FUEL STRAINER MONITORING IPS Functions: Measure, locally indicate and transmit analog signal of upstream and downstream pressure across zone fuel strainer, ST-D-6 to LCP-1/OCP-1. Indicate upstream and downstream strainer pressure from pressure transmitters PIT-D-6-1 and PIT-D-6-2 at OCP-1. LOOP D-7: SPOT FIRE FUEL STRAINER MONITORING IPS Functions: Measure, locally indicate and transmit analog signal of upstream and downstream pressure across spot fuel strainer, ST-D-7 to LCP-1/OCP-l. Indicate upstream and downstream strainer pressure from pressure transmitters PIT-D-7-1 and PIT-D-7-2 at OCP-1. LOOP D-8: ZONE FIRE FUEL FLOW MONITORING IPS Functions: Measure, locally indicate and transmit analog signal of zone fuel flow rate to LCP-1/OCP-1. Indicate fuel transfer flow rate from flow meter FE/FIT-D-8 at OCP-1. Generate and indicate Totaled flow from flow meter FE/FIT-D-8 at OCP-1 on two displays. Generate discrete RESET signals of each totalized value at OCP-1. LOOP D-9: SPOT FIRE FUEL FLOW MONITORING IPS Functions: Measure, locally indicate and transmit analog signal of spot fuel flow rate to LCP-1/OCP-1. Indicate fuel transfer flow rate from flow meter FE/FIT-D-9 at OCP-1. Generate and indicate Totaled flow from flow meter FE/FIT-D-9 at OCP-1 on two displays. Generate discrete RESET signals of each totalized value at OCP-1. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 13401 SUPPLEMENT 5 LOOP SPECIFICATIONS COMP PROCESS ,INSTALL INSTALL DESCRIPTION CODE AREA I OPTIONS HS-A-4 HAND SWITCH AND LIGHT, OILTIGHT, M5 OCp_l CONFIGURATION: 3 POSITION SELECTOR SWITCH SQUARE NONE BOOT: 1 EACH QUANTITY: HAND/OFF/AUTO INSCRIPTION: ILLUMINATED RED, OPTIONS: 2-N.O. MAINTAINED CONTACTS EACH POS. QL-A-4 HAND SWITCH AND LIGHT, OILTIGHT, M12 OCP_l CONFIGURATION: INDICATION LIGHT ROUND BOOT: NONE QUANTITY: 1EACH INSCRIPTION: ON LSL-A-4 LEVEL SWITCH, FLOAT L8 COOLING 14-P65 OPTIONS: SET POINT: RED LENS 1.5 FEET ABOVE BOTTOM PUMP PIT LSH-A-4 LEVEL SWITCH, FLOAT L8 COOLING 14-P65 SET POINT: 3 FEET ABOVE BOTTOM PUMP PIT HAND SWITCH AND LIGHT, OILTIGHT, M12 OCp_l CONFIGURATION: PUSH BUTTON ROUND BOOT: NONE QUANTITY: 1EACH INSCRIPTION: EMERGENCY STOP OPTIONS: COLOR: RED CONTACTS: 2-N.O. MOMENTARY CONTACTS B01158870.A1.FN 7/24/00 YNJq Tnommatit T.iqt COMP PROCESS INSTALL DESCRIPTION CODE AREA DETAIL OPTIONS HS-B-2 HAND SWITCH AND LIGHT, OILTIGHT, M5 OCP-1 CONFIGURATION: 3 POSITION SELECTOR SWITCH SQUARE NONE BOOT: 1EACH QUANTITY: HAND/OFF/AUTO INSCRIPTION: ILLUMINATED RED, OPTIONS: 2-N.O. MAINTAINED CONTACTS EACH POS. QL-B-2 HAND SWITCH AND LIGHT, OILTIGHT, M12 OCP-1 CONFIGURATION: INDICATION LIGHT ROUND BOOT: NONE QUANTITY: 1EACH INSCRIPTION: ON OPTIONS: RED LENS LI-B-3 INDICATOR/TOTALIZER, DIGITAL PANEL S28 OCP-1 PANEL FUNCTION: INDICATOR RANGE: VOLUMNE OF TANK ENGINEERING UNITS: GALLONS LE/Lrr-B-3 LEVEL ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER, L5 LCP-1 4-P64 RANGE: 9.5 FEET ULTRASONIC 10-P65 ELEMENT- PER COMPONENT SPEC. OPTIONS: LSL SET?OINT: 5,000 GAL LSH SETPOINT: 10,000 GAL OUTPUT- CALCULATE VOLUME IN TANK BASED ON FUEL LEVEL. 4-20 MA OUTPUT PROPORTIONAL TO TANK VOLUME . . -1 7/?A/f)O Instrument List COMP PROCESS INSTALL DESCRIPTION I CODE AREA DETAIL OPTIONS HS-B-4 HAND SWITCH AND LIGHT, OILTIGHT, M12 OCP-1 CONFIGURATION: PUSH BUTTON ROUND BOOT: NONE QUANTITY: 1EACH INSCRIPTION: RESET OPTIONS: COLOR: RED CONTACTS: 2-N.O. MOMENTARY CONTACTS FQI-B-4 INDICATOR/TOTALIZER, DIGITAL PANEL S28 OCP-1 PANEL FUNCTION: TOTALIZER RANGE: N/A ENGINEERING UNITS: GALLONS FI-B-4 INDICATOR/TOTALIZER, DIGITAL PANEL S28 OCP-1 PANEL FUNCTION: INDICATOR RANGE: 0-200 ENGINEERING UNITS: GPM FE/Frr-B-4 FLOW ELEMENT & TRANSMITTER, F4 FIELD 16-P44 RANGE: 0-200 GPM ELECTROMAGNETIC 10-P65 PIPE SIZE: 21NCH OUTPUT.. 4 TO 20 MA STREAM FLUID: FLANGE MATERIAL: CARBON STEEL LINER MATERIAL: POLYURETHANE ELECTRODE MAT: 316 SST PI-B-5 PRESSURE GAUGE P4 FIELD 17-P65 SCALE RANGE: 0 - 100 PSIG HS-B-6 HAND SWITCH AND LIGHT, OILTIGHT, M5 OcP-1 CONFIGURATION: 2 POSITION SELECTOR SWITCH SQUARE NONE BOOT. 1EACH QUANTITY: ON/OFF INSCRIPTION: ILLUMINATED RED, OPTIONS: 2-N.O. MAINTAINED CONTACTS EACH POS. B01158870.AIYN 7/24100 ........... . ............. INS NT LOOP D-5: SPOT FIRE FUEL PUMP MONITORING AND CONTROL IPS Functions: Generate ON command for spot fuel pump control, P-D-5 from LCP-1/OCP-1.ON command generated from toggling momentary pushbutton switch at OCP-1. Indicate pump ON status at OCP-1. LOOP D-6: ZONE FIRE FUEL STRAINER MONITORING IPS Functions: Measure, locally indicate and transmit analog signal of upstream and downstream pressure across zone fuel strainer, ST-D-6 to LCP-1/OCP-1. Indicate upstream and downstream strainer pressure from pressure transmitters PIT-D-6-1 and PIT-D-6-2 at OCP-1. LOOP D-7: SPOT FIRE FUEL STRAINER MONITORING UPS Functions: Measure, locally indicate and transmit analog signal of upstream and downstream pressure across spot fuel strainer, ST-D-7 to LCP-1/OCP-I. Indicate upstream and downstream strainer pressure from pressure transmitters PIT-D-7-1 and PIT-D-7-2 at OCP-I. LOOP D-8: ZONE FIRE FUEL FLOW MONITORING IPS Functions: Measure, locally indicate and transmit analog signal of zone fuel flow rate to LCP-1/OCP-1. Indicate fuel transfer flow rate from flow meter FE/ITT-D-8 at OCP-l. Generate and indicate Totaled flow from flow meter FE/FIT-D-8 at OCP-1 on two displays. Generate discrete RESET signals of each totalized value at OCP-1. LOOP D-9: SPOT FIRE FUEL FLOW MONITORING IPS Functions: Measure, locally indicate and transmit analog signal of spot fuel flow rate to LCP-1/OCP-1. Indicate fuel transfer flow rate from flow meter FE/F1T-D-9 at OCP-l. Generate and indicate Totaled flow from flow meter FE/FIT-D-9 at OCP-1 on two displays. Generate discrete RESET signals of each totalized value at OCP-1. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 12, 2000 13401 SUPPLEMENT 5 LOOP SPECIFICATIONS r Tnctniment T.ict COMP PROCESS INSTALL DESCRIPTION CODE AREA DETAIL I OPTIONS QL/HS-A-1-1(13) HAND SWITCH AND LIGHT, OILTIGHT, M5 OCP-1 CONFIGURATION: INDICATOR LIGHT PUSHBUTTON SQUARE SWITCH COMBO 1 EACH BOOT: 1 EACH QUANTITY: LIGHT "FUEL ON' SWITCH "FUEL INSCRIPTION: ON OFF" RED LIGHT AND SWITCH, OPTIONS: 2-N.O. MOMENTARY CONTACTS ON SWITCH QL/HS-A-2-1(13) HAND SWITCH AND LIGHT, OILTIGHT, M5 OCP-1 CONFIGURATION: INDICATOR LIGHT PUSHBUTTON SQUARE SWITCH COMBO LEACH BOOT: 1 EACH QUANTITY: LIGHT "NAT. GAS ON' SWITCH INSCRIPTION: "NAT GAS ON OFF" YELLOW LIGHT AND SWITCH, 2-N.O. MOMENTARY CONTACTS OPTIONS: ON SWITCH QL/HS-A-3-1(13) HAND SWITCH AND LIGHT, OILTIGHT, M5 OCP-1 CONFIGURATION: INDICATOR LIGHT PUSHBUTTON SQUARE SWITCH COMBO 1 EACH BOOT. 1 EACH QUANTITY: LIGHT "IGNITOR ON" SWITCH INSCRIPTION: "IGNITOR ON OFF" WHITE LIGHT AND SWITCH, OPTIONS: 2-N.O. MOMENTARY CONTACTS ON SWITCH Tnstrtiment I-iqt COMP PROCESS INSTALL DESCRIPTION CODE AREA DETAIL I OPTIONS HS-A-4 HAND SWITCH AND LIGHT, OILTIGHT, M5 OCP-1 CONFIGURATION: 3 POSITION SELECTOR SWITCH SQUARE NONE BOOT: 1EACH QUANTITY: HAND/OFF/AUTO INSCRIPTION: ILLUMINATED RED, OPTIONS: 2-N.O. MAINTAINED CONTACTS EACH POS. QL-A-4 HAND SWITCH AND LIGHT, OILTTGHT, M12 OCp-1 CONFIGURATION: INDICATION LIGHT ROUND BOOT: NONE QUANTITY: 1EACH INSCRIPTION: ON OPTIONS: RED LENS LSL-A-4 LEVEL SWITCH, FLOAT L8 COOLING 14-P65 SET POINT: 1.5 FEET ABOVE BOTTOM PUMP PIT LSH-A-4 LEVEL SWITCH, FLOAT L8 COOLING 14-P65 SET POINT: 3 FEET ABOVE BOTTOM PUMP PIT HS-E-1 HAND SWITCH AND LIGHT, OILTIGHT, M12 OCP-1 CONFIGURATION: PUSH BUTTON ROUND BOOT: NONE QUANTITY: 1EACH INSCRIPTION: EMERGENCY STOP OPTIONS: COLOR: RED CONTACTS: 2-N.O. MOMENTARY CONTACTS B01158870.Al.FN 7/24/00 I Fm Ff TnMniment List COMP PROCESS INSTALL DESCRIPTION CODE AREA DETAIL I OPTIONS QL-B-6 HAND SWITCH AND LIGHT, OILTIGHT, M12 OCP-1 CONFIGURATION: INDICATION LIGHT ROUND BOOT: NONE QUANTITY: 1 EACH INSCRIPTION: ON OPTIONS: RED LENS PI-B-6 PRESSURE GAUGE P4 OCP-1 17-P65 SCALE RANGE: 0 -100 PSIG HS-B-7 HAND SWITCH AND LIGHT, OILTIGHT, M5 OCP-1 CONFIGURATION: 3 POSITION SELECTOR SWITCH SQUARE NONE BOOT: 1EACH QUANTITY: HAND/OFF/AUTO INSCRIPTION: ILLUMINATED RED, OPTIONS: 2-N.O. MAINTAINED CONTACTS EACH POS. QL-B-7 HAND SWITCH AND LIGHT, OILTIGHT, M12 OCP-1 CONFIGURATION: INDICATION LIGHT ROUND BOOT: NONE QUANTITY: 1 EACH INSCRIPTION: ON OPTIONS: RED LENS LSL-B-7 LEVEL SWITCH, FLOAT L8 EDUCTOR 14-P65 SET POINT: 1.0 FEET ABOVE BOTTOM SUMP LSH-B-7 LEVEL SWITCH, FLOAT L8 EDUCTOR 14-P65 SET POINT: 2.0 FEET ABOVE BOTTOM SUMP FI-B-8 INDICATOR/TOTALIZER, DIGITAL PANEL S28 OCP-1 PANEL FUNCTION: INDICATOR RANGE: 0-2,000 ENGINEERING UNITS: GPM 9n. mA Instrument List COMP PROCESS INSTALL DESCRIPTION ICODE AREA DETAIL I OPTIONS FE/Frr-B-8 FLOW ELEMENT & TRANSMITTER, F4 FIELD 16-P65 RANGE: 0-2,000 GPM ELECTROMAGNETIC 10-P65 PIPE SIZE: 14 INCH OUTPUT: 4TO20MA STREAM FLUID: FLANGE MATERIAL: CARBON STEEL LINER MATERIAL: POLYURETHANE ELECTRODE MAT: 316 SST FIC-B-8 CONTROLLER, MICROPROCESSOR S6 LCP-1 SET POINT: 1,400 GPM SELF -TUNING: YES DISCRETE INPUTS: HOLD ENABLE HS-B-8-1 HAND SWITCH AND LIGHT, OILTIGHT, M5 OCP-1 CONFIGURATION: 3 POSITION SELECTOR SWITCH SQUARE NONE BOOT: 1EACH QUANTITY: MANUAL/CLOSE/AUTO INSCRIPTION: ILLUMINATED RED, OPTIONS: 2-N.O. MAINTAINED CONTACTS EACH POS. HS-B-8-2 HAND SWITCH AND LIGHT, OILTIGHT, M5 OCP-1 CONFIGURATION: 3 POSITION SELECTOR SWITCH SQUARE NONE BOOT: 1EACH QUANTITY: CLOSE/STOP/OPEN INSCRIPTION: ILLUMINATED RED, OPTIONS: 2-N.O. MAINTAINED CONTACTS EACH POS. PI-B-11 INDICATOR/TOTALIZER, DIGITAL PANEL S28 OCP-1 PANEL FUNCTION: INDICATOR RANGE: 0-100 L ENGINEERING UNITS: PSIG B01158870.A1.FN 7/24/00 I n Irm Tnomment T.ist COMP PROCESS INSTALL DESCRIPTION CODE AREA DETAIL OPTIONS PIT-B-11 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER, ELECTRONIC P9 FIELD 12-P65 UNIT RANGE: 0-150 PSIG RANGE: 0 -100 PSIG INDICATOR RANGE: 0 -100 % MOUNTING: VERTICAL PIPE OUTPUT: 4 TO 20 MA LI-C-2 INDICATOR/TOTALIZER, DIGITAL PANEL S28 OCP-1 PANEL FUNCTION: INDICATOR RANGE: 0-350 ENGINEERING UNITS: GALLONS LAHH-C-2 HAND SWITCH AND LIGHT, OILTIGHT, M12 OCP-1 CONFIGURATION: INDICATION LIGHT ROUND BOOT: NONE QUANTITY: 1 EACH INSCRIPTION: HIGH LEVEL ALARM OPTIONS: ORANGE LENS LE/LIT-C-2 LEVEL ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER, L5 LCP-1 13-P65 RANGE: 4 FEET ULTRASONIC 15-P65 ELEMENT: PER COMPONENT SPEC. OPTIONS: LSL SETPOINT:1.0 FEET LSH SETPOINT: 2.0 FEET LSHH SETPOINT: 3.5 FEET CALCULATE VOLUME IN TANK BASED ON FUEL LEVEL. 4-20 MA OUTPUT PROPORTIONAL TO FUEL VOLUME HS-C-3 HAND SWITCH AND LIGHT, OILTIGHT, M5 OCP-1 CONFIGURATION: 3 POSITION SELECTOR SWITCH SQUARE NONE BOOT: 1 EACH QUANTITY: HANDS/OFF/AUTO INSCRIPTION: ILLUMINATED RED, OPTIONS: 2-N.O. MAINTAINED CONTACTS EACH POS. Instrument List COMP PROCESS INSTALL DESCRIPTION CODE AREA DETAIL I OPTIONS QL-C-3 HAND SWITCH AND LIGHT, OILTIGHT, M12 OCP-1 CONFIGURATION: INDICATION LIGHT ROUND BOOT: NONE QUANTITY: 1EACH INSCRIPTION: ON OPTIONS: RED LENS PI-C-4-1(2) INDICATOR/TOTALIZER, DIGITAL PANEL S28 OCP-1 PANEL FUNCTION: INDICATOR RANGE: 0-30 ENGINEERING UNITS: PSIG PIT-C-4-1(2) PRESSURE TRANSMITTER, ELECTRONIC P9 FIELD 12-P65 UNIT RANGE: 0-50 PSIG RANGE: 0 - 30 PSIG INDICATOR RANGE: 0-100% MOUNTING: VERTICAL PIPE OUTPUT: 4 TO 20 MA HS-C-5 HAND SWITCH AND LIGHT, OILTIGHT, M12 OCP-1 CONFIGURATION: PUSH BUTTON ROUND BOOT: NONE QUANTITY: 1EACH INSCRIPTION: RESET OPTIONS: COLOR: RED CONTACTS: 2-N.O. MOMENTARY CONTACTS FQI-C-5 INDICATOR/TOTALIZER, DIGITAL PANEL S28 OCP-1 PANEL FUNCTION: TOTALIZER RANGE: N/A ENGINEERING UNITS: GALLONS FI-C-5 INDICATOR/TOTALIZER, DIGITAL PANEL S28 ocP-1 PANEL FUNCTION: INDICATOR RANGE: ' 0-75 ENGINEERING UNITS: GPM FE/FIT-C-5 FLOW ELEMENT, TRANSMITTER & F31 FIELD FLANGED RANGE MIN: 25 GPM TOTALIZER, POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT RANGE MAX: 75 GPM PIPE SIZE: 2 INCH OUTPUT. 4TO20MA TOTALIZER UNITS: GALLONS FLUID METERED: DIESEL FUEL B01158870.A1.FN 7/24/00 Instrument List COMP PROCESS INSTALL DESCRIPTION CODE AREA DETAIL OPTIONS LI-D-2 INDICATOR/TOTALIZER, DIGITAL PANEL S28 OCP-1 PANEL FUNCTION: INDICATOR RANGE: 0-5,000 ENGINEERING UNITS: GALLONS LE/LIT-D-2 LEVEL ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER, L5 LCP-1 15-P65 RANGE: 0-7.0 FEET ULTRASONIC 10-P65 ELEMENT: PER COMPONENT SPEC. OPTIONS: CALCULATE VOLUME IN TANK BASED ON FUEL LEVEL. 4-20 MA OUTPUT PROPORTIONAL TO FUEL VOLUME. QL/HS-D-4 HAND SWITCH AND LIGHT, OILTIGHT, M5 OCP-1 CONFIGURATION: INDICATOR LIGHT PUSHBUTTO? SQUARE SWITCH COMBO 1 EACH BOOT: 1 EACH QUANTITY: LIGHT "FUEL PUMP ON SWITCH INSCRIPTION: "FUEL PUMP ON OFF" RED LIGHT AND SWITCH, 2-N.O. MOMENTARY CONTACTS ON OPTIONS: SWITCH QL/HS-D-5 HAND SWITCH AND LIGHT, OILTIGHT, M5 OCP-1 CONFIGURATION: INDICATOR LIGHT PUSHBUTTON SQUARE SWITCH COMBO 1 EACH BOOT: 1 EACH QUANTITY: LIGHT "FUEL PUMP ON' SWITCH INSCRIPTION: "FUEL PUMP ON OFF" RED LIGHT AND DWITCH, 2-N.O. MOMENTARY CONTACTS ON OPTIONS: SWITCH PI-D-6-1(2) INDICATOR/TOTALIZER, DIGITAL PANEL S28 OCP-1 PANEL FUNCTION: INDICATOR RANGE: 0-60 ENGINEERING UNITS: PSIG Instrument List COMP PROCESS INSTALL DESCRIPTION CODE AREA DETAIL OPTIONS PIT-D-6-1(2) PRESSURE TRANSMITTER, ELECTRONIC P9 FIELD 12-P65 UNIT RANGE: 0-100 PSIG RANGE: 0 - 75 PSIG INDICATOR RANGE: 0 -100 % MOUNTING: VERTICAL PIPE OUTPUT: 4 TO 20 MA PI-D-7-1(2) INDICATOR/TOTALIZER, DIGITAL PANEL S28 OCP-1 PANEL FUNCTION: INDICATOR RANGE: 0-100 ENGINEERING UNITS: PSIG PIT-D-7-1(2) PRESSURE TRANSMITTER, ELECTRONIC P9 FIELD 12-P65 UNIT RANGE: 0-100 PSIG RANGE: 0 - 75 PSIG INDICATOR RANGE: 0 -100 % MOUNTING: VERTICAL PIPE OUTPUT: 4 TO 20 MA HS-D-8-1 HAND SWITCH AND LIGHT, OILTIGHT, M12 OCP-1 CONFIGURATION: PUSH BUTTON ROUND BOOT: NONE QUANTITY: 1 EACH INSCRIPTION: RESET OPTIONS: COLOR: RED CONTACTS: 2-N.O. MOMENTARY CONTACTS HS-D-8-2 HAND SWITCH AND LIGHT, OILTIGHT, M12 OCP-1 CONFIGURATION: 2 POSITION KEY SWITCH, SPRING ROUND RETURN TO OFF BOOT: NONE QUANTITY: 1 EACH INSCRIPTION: RESET OPTIONS: CONTACTS: 2-N.O. MOMENTARY CONTACTS B0I158870 A1.FN 7/24/00 "'SdM �'..' a •. Y ia. -.>: y.,, 77 ,`.1 p.•,. ;,..., r x y _, . ,n :�^FMF Tnctnimnnt T .ict COMP PROCESS INSTALL DESCRIPTION CODE AREA DETAIL I OPTIONS FE/FIT-D-8 FLOW ELEMENT, TRANSMITTER & F31 OCP-1 FLANGED RANGE MIN: 175 GPM TOTALIZER, POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT RANGE MAX: 250 GPM PIPE SIZE: 3 INCH OUTPUT: 4 TO 20 MA TOTALIZER UNITS: GALLONS FLUID METERED: DIESEL FUEL FQI-D-8-1(2) INDICATOR/TOTALIZER, DIGITAL PANEL S28 OCP-1 PANEL FUNCTION: TOTALIZER RANGE: N/A ENGINEERING UNITS: GALLONS FI-D-8 INDICATOR/TOTALIZER, DIGITAL PANEL S28 OCP-1 PANEL FUNCTION: INDICATOR RANGE: 0-250 ENGINEERING UNITS: GPM HS-D-9-1 HAND SWITCH AND LIGHT, OILTIGHT, M12 OCP-1 CONFIGURATION: PUSH BUTTON ROUND BOOT: NONE QUANTITY: 1 EACH INSCRIPTION: RESET OPTIONS: COLOR: RED CONTACTS: 2-N.O. MOMENTARY CONTACTS HS-D-9-2 HAND SWITCH AND LIGHT, OILTIGHT, M12 OCP-1 CONFIGURATION: 2 POSITION KEY SWITCH, SPRING ROUND RETURN TO OFF BOOT: NONE QUANTITY: 1 EACH INSCRIPTION: RESET OPTIONS: CONTACTS: 2-N.O. MOMENTARY CONTACTS FE/FIT-D-9 FLOW ELEMENT, TRANSMITTER & F31 OCP-1 FLANGED RANGE MIN: 1.0 GPM TOTALIZER, POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT RANGE MAX: 25 GPM PIPE SIZE: 1.5 INCH OUTPUT: 4 TO 20 MA TOTALIZER UNITS: GALLONS FLUID METERED: DIESEL FUEL '7 N7 A MA Instrument List COMP PROCESS INSTALL DESCRIPTION I CODE AREA DETAIL OPTIONS FQI-D-9-1(2) INDICATOR/TOTALIZER, DIGITAL PANEL S28 OCP-1 PANEL FUNCTION: TOTALIZER RANGE: N/A ENGINEERING UNITS: GALLONS FI-D-9 INDICATOR/TOTALIZER, DIGITAL PANEL S28 OCP-1 PANEL FUNCTION: INDICATOR RANGE: 0-25 ENGINEERING UNITS: GPM IPI-E-1 1PRESSURE GAUGE P4 FIELD 17-P65 SCALE RANGE: 0 - 60 PSIG JPI-E-3 IPRESSURE GAUGE I P4 I FIELD I 17-P65 SCALE RANGE: 10 - 30 PSIG B01158870.A1.FN 7/24/00 IM =,NT - PART 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 PART 2 2.1 SECTION 15060 PLANT PIPING —GENERAL GENERAL WORK INCLUDED A. This Section covers the Work necessary to furnish and install, complete, the plant piping specified herein, and as further specified in the Detail Piping Specifications hereinafter. GENERAL A. Like items of material provided hereunder shall be the end products of one manufacturer. B. See CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this Project. SUBMITTALS DURING CONSTRUCTION A. In accordance with the requirements of SUBMITTALS DURING CONSTRUCTION, Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. PRODUCTS GENERAL A. The general materials to be used for the piping systems shown on the Drawings are listed by service in the following schedule. Specific material requirements are contained in the Detail Piping Specifications. Refer to Section 15420 for Building Services Piping. Detail Pipe Service Legend Size Range Specification Location Drain D 4" -05 PVC All Diesel Fuel F 3/4"-6" -01 Dual Wall As shown on the Drawings -03 SST Potable Water W -04 PVC Refer to other -06 CU Specification sections Natural Gas NG 3/411- -03 SST As shown on the Plans 1-1/2" -Plastic BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 15060 1 PLANT PIPING --GENERAL Kin -Line, or equal stainless steel system. No pipe shall be supported from the pipe above it. 2. Piping floor supports shall be B-Line Systems, Inc. Figure B3090 pipe support with u-bolt type 304 stainless steel, hangers shall be Clevis type 304 stainless steel, and other hangers, rods, clamps, protective shields, metal framing support components, and hanger accessories required to provide a completed system shall be stainless steel. 3. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, horizontal pipe support or hanger spacing and hanger rod sizing for pipe shall be as follows: 4. 5. 6. 7. Pipe Size Maximum Support and Hanger Span Minimum Rod Size Single Rod Han ers 1" & Smaller 6' 1/4" 1-1/4" thru 2-1/2" 8' 1/4" 3" & 4" 10, 3/8" 6" 12' 3/8" 8" 12' 1/2" 10" & 12" 14' 5/8" The load rating for universal concrete inserts shall not be less than that of the hanger rods they support. When supporting pipe, locate hanger rods near all joints and at each change of direction. Hanger rod sizing for copper pipe shall be same as for steel pipe. For copper pipe, hanger spacing shall be 2 feet less per size than for steel pipe, with 1-inch and smaller supported every 5 feet. All piping shall be supported in a manner which will prevent undue strain on any valve, fitting, or piece of equipment. In addition, pipe supports shall be provided at changes in direction or elevation, adjacent to flexible couplings, at all piping appurtenances that weigh more than the pipe, such as check valves and strainers, and where otherwise shown. Pipe supports and hangers shall not be installed in equipment access areas. Brace all piping 2-1/2-inch inside diameter and larger for seismic zone 1 forces in accordance with Chapter 23 of the Uniform Building Code as published by ICBO, current edition. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000i 15060 4 PLANT PIPING —GENERAL i_ 2.5 2.6 2.7 SERVICE SADDLES FOR STAINLESS STEEL METAL PIPING A. Pipe service saddles for stainless steel piping shall be welded SST. Service saddles shall be capable of withstanding 150 psi internal pressure without leakage or overstressing. SERVICE SADDLES FOR PLASTIC PIPE A. Service saddles for PVC, HDPE, and CPVC pipe shall have solid polypropylene bodies with Buna-N seals and stainless steel worm drive clamps, or polypropylene threaded inserts with vinyl coated steel saddle bodies and Type 304 stainless steel bolts. Saddles shall be Rockwell, Style 315 or 317; Dresser, Style 194; or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. SLAB, FLOOR, WALL, AND ROOF PENETRATIONS AND CLOSURES A. Stainless Steel Wall Pipes: 1. Provide stainless steel wall pipes where piping passes through concrete walls. Wall pipe end connections shall be as shown on the Drawings and as specified in the applicable Detail Piping Specification. Wall pipes shall be of a thickness to or greater than the remainder of the piping in the line and shall comply with the requirements for fittings in the applicable Detail Piping Specification. 2. All wall pipes shall be provided with seep rings as detailed on the Drawings. B. Pipe Sleeves: 1. Piping passing through concrete or masonry shall be installed through Schedule 10 stainless steel pipe sleeves where shown on the Drawings. 2. All sleeves in exterior or water -bearing walls shall have a center flange for water stoppage. The annular space between pipes and sleeves in exterior walls shall be watertight. The joint shall be caulked with rubber sealant, or sealed by a modular mechanical unit consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and wall sleeve. The interconnected rubber links shall be assembled with zinc phosphate -plated steel bolts and nuts and steel pressure plates under each bolt head and nut to prevent the nut from turning when the bolt is tightened. Tightening of the bolts shall cause the rubber sealing links to expand, resulting in a watertight seal between the pipe and wall sleeve opening. The installed closure shall provide electrical isolation of the pipe from the wall sleeve. Closures shall be sized according to manufacturer's instructions for the size of pipes shown on the Drawings. Annular mechanical seals shall be B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 15060 5 PLANT PIPING —GENERAL Link Seal by Thunderline Corporation, Pipeseal by Flexicraft, or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. •1' t � '1' • •' C 1 � '1.1 A. Conform to Section 02200, EARTHWORK. 2.9 TRENCH BACKFILL A. Conform to Section 02200, EARTHWORK. 2.10 SITE WORK TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS A. See site work technical specifications for water supply, sewer piping, and other site work technical specifications. PART 3 EXECUTION A. Each pipe and fitting shall be carefully inspected before the exposed pipe or fitting is installed or the buried pipe or fitting is lowered into the trench. The interior and exterior protective coating shall be inspected, and all damaged areas patched in the field with material similar to the original, except damaged glass -lined pipe. Clean ends of pipe thoroughly. Remove foreign matter and dirt from inside of pipe and keep clean during and after laying. B. Use proper implements, tools, and facilities for the safe and proper protection of the pipe. Carefully handle pipe in such a manner as to avoid any physical damage to the pipe. Do not drop or dump pipe into trenches under any circumstances. 3.2 _._. INSTALLATION OF BURIED PIPING A. Preparation of Trench: Trench Excavation and Backfill shall be in accordance with Section 02200, EARTHWORK. 1. Pipe Base: a. Provide imported pipe base material for supporting the pipe for the full width of the trench. Minimum depth of pipe base below the pipe barrel shall be 4 inches. Depth of pipe base under the pipe bell shall not be less than 3 inches. b. Hand -grade pipe base to proper grade ahead of pipe laying operation. Pipe base shall provide a firm, unyielding support along the entire pipe length. C. If the trench has been excavated below the required depth for pipe base placement without direction from the ENGINEER, fill the r= BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 i 15060 6 PLANT PIPING --GENERAL PART 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 PART 2 2.1 SECTION 15060 PLANT PIPING —GENERAL GENERAL WORK INCLUDED A. This Section covers the Work necessary to furnish and install, complete, the plant piping specified herein, and as further specified in the Detail Piping Specifications hereinafter. GENERAL A. Like items of material provided hereunder shall be the end products of one manufacturer. B. See CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this Project. SUBMITTALS DURING CONSTRUCTION A. In accordance with the requirements of SUBMITTALS DURING CONSTRUCTION, Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. PRODUCTS GENERAL A. The general materials to be used for the piping systems shown on the Drawings are listed by service in the following schedule. Specific material requirements are contained in the Detail Piping Specifications. Refer to Section 15420 for Building Services Piping. Detail Pipe Service Legend Size Range Specification Location Drain D 4" -05 PVC All Diesel Fuel F 3/4'-6' -01 Dual Wall As shown on the Drawings -03 SST Potable Water W -04 PVC Refer to other -06 CU Specification sections Natural Gas NG 3/419- -03 SST As shown on the Plans 1-11T' -Plastic B0I158870.A1.FN 15060 JULY 6, 2000 1 PLANT PIPING --GENERAL 2.2 2.3 Detail Pipe Service Legend Size Range Specification Location Wastewater WW 1/2"-12" -03 SST As shown on the Plans -04 PVC FLANGED BOLTUPS A. Flanged bolt and gasket site shall be 304 stainless steel bolts and nuts, and gaskets shall be vitons or another premium fuel -resistant gasket material approved by the ENGINEER. Provide submittal. BUILDING AND EQUIPMENT PIPING EXPANSION PROVISIONS A. Pipe anchors shall be placed where shown on the Drawings. Flexible couplings or expansion joints shall be provided for piping systems and at connections to equipment where shown. The CONTRACTOR may install additional pipe anchors and flexible couplings to facilitate piping installation, provided that he submits complete details describing location, pipe supports, and hydraulic thrust protection. Acceptable types of flexible couplings and expansion joints shall be as follows: 1. Metallic and Plastic Piping Systems: a. General: Flexible couplings, transition couplings, and flanged coupling adapters shall be provided where required, including those shown on the Drawings. Poured in place concrete thrust protection shall be adequate to sustain the force developed by 1-1/2 times the operating pressures specified. b. Flexible Couplings: Flexible couplings for use with stainless steel pipe shall be Dresser, Style 38, 304 stainless steel, with viton gaskets. C. Flanged Coupling Adapters: Flanged coupling adapters shall be Dresser Style 128, 304 stainless steel with viton gaskets for stainless steel and stainless steel to plastic pipe transitions, as manufactured by Dresser Industries, Inc.; or equal. d. Stainless Steel Metallic Braided Flexible Hose: Provide 304 stainless steel braided flexible metal hose manufactured by Omegaflex, Inc., 451 Creamery Way, Exton, PA, telephone: (610) 524-7272. Minimum length of flexible hose assembly, including end fittings, shall be 9 inches. Hose end fittings shall be flanged, except the hose assemblies that connect to the dual wall fuel piping located in the piping header sump. 3/4-inch flexible hose assemblies for connections to the 3/4-inch dual wall fuel piping and natural gas plastic piping shall have one flanged end (connection to the stainless steel piping) and one female union connection to connect to the dual wall 3/4-inch male NPT end BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 15060 2 PLANT PIPING —GENERAL 2.4 fitting. The 3-inch flexible hose assemblies for connection to the 3-inch dual wall fuel pipe shall have one flanged connection and one male NPT threaded male union for connection to the 3-inch female NPT swivel pipe coupling end fitting on the dual wall pipe. The CONTRACTOR shall verify and determine the size, number, and end fitting type of all flexible hose assemblies. PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. General: 1. Piping shall be supported, in general, as described hereinafter and as shown by the pipe support details on the Detail Mechanical Drawings. Manufacturers' catalog figure numbers are typical of the types and quality of standard pipe supports and hangers to be employed. Special support and hanger details are shown to cover typical locations where standard catalog supports are inapplicable. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall select and design all piping support systems within the specified spans and component requirements. Structural design and selection of support system components shall withstand the dead loads imposed by the weight of the pipes filled with water, plus any insulation. Commercial pipe supports and hangers shall have a minimum safety factor of 5. 3. No attempt has been made to show all required pipe supports in all locations, either on the Drawings or in the details. The absence of pipe supports and details on any Drawings shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of the responsibility for providing them throughout the plant. 4. All piping supports, guides, and fasteners shall be stainless steel. Concrete anchors and anchor bolts shall be SST. 5. All support anchoring devices, including anchor bolts, inserts, and other devices used to anchor the support shall be of the proper size, strength, and spacing to withstand the shear and pullout loads imposed by loading and spacing on each particular support. 6. Where piping connects to equipment it shall be supported by a pipe support and not by the equipment. A pipe support or hanger shall be installed adjacent to each pipe fitting or in -line device such as a valve or meter for all piping larger than 4-inch and as shown on the Plans. 7. Piping shall be supported with stainless steel unistrut system, including stainless steel unistrut, fastener, and hangers. B. Exposed Piping: 1. Piping shall be supported by a stainless steel metal framing system attached to concrete with framing system pedestals as shown, Unistrut, B0I158870.A1.FN 15060 3 i DULY 6, 2000 PLANT PIPING —GENERAL Kin -Line, or equal stainless steel system. No pipe shall be supported from the pipe above it. 2. Piping floor supports shall be B-Line Systems, Inc. Figure B3090 pipe support with u-bolt type 304 stainless steel, hangers shall be Clevis type 304 stainless steel, and other hangers, rods, clamps, protective shields, metal framing support components, and hanger accessories required to provide a completed system shall be stainless steel. 3. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, horizontal pipe support or hanger spacing and hanger rod sizing for pipe shall be as follows: Pipe Size Maximum Support and Hanger Span Minimum Rod Size Single Rod Hangers 1" & Smaller 6' 1/4" 1-1/4" thru 2-1/2" 8' 1/4" 3" & 4" 10, 3/8" 6" 12' 3/8" 18" 12' 1/2" 10" & 12" 14' 5/8" 4. The load rating for universal concrete inserts shall not be less than that of the hanger rods they support. 5. When supporting pipe, locate hanger rods near all joints and at each change of direction. 6. Hanger rod sizing for copper pipe shall be same as for steel pipe. For copper pipe, hanger spacing shall be 2 feet less per size than for steel pipe, with 1-inch and smaller supported every 5 feet. 7. All piping shall be supported in a manner which will prevent undue strain on any valve, fitting, or piece of equipment. In addition, pipe supports shall be provided at changes in direction or elevation, adjacent to flexible couplings, at all piping appurtenances that weigh more than the pipe, such as check valves and strainers, and where otherwise shown. Pipe supports and hangers shall not be installed in equipment access areas. 8. Brace all piping 2-1/2-inch inside diameter and larger for seismic zone 1 forces in accordance with Chapter 23 of the Uniform Building Code as published by ICBO, current edition. BOI158870.A1.FN 15060 DULY 6, 2000 4 PLANT PIPING —GENERAL excess depth, at the CONTRACTOR's own expense, with the pipe base specified herein or foundation stabilization material as specified in Section EARTHWORK to the proper subgrade. Place the pipe base or foundation stabilization material for the full width of the trench in layers not exceeding 6 inches deep and compact each layer, until the material does not yield or move, to the grade established for the pipe bedding. B. Laying Buried Pipe: General: a. All buried pipe shall be prepared as hereinbefore specified and shall be laid on the prepared granular base and bedded to ensure uniform bearing. No pipe shall be laid in water or when, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, trench conditions are unsuitable. Joints shall be made as herein specified for the respective types. Take all precautions necessary to prevent uplift and floating of the pipe prior to backfilling. b. Do not deviate more than 1-inch from line or 1/4-inch from grade. Measure for grade at the pipe invert, not at the top of the pipe, because of permissible variation in pipe wall thickness. C. Grade the bottom of the trench by hand to the line and grade to which the pipe is to be laid, with proper allowance for pipe thickness and for pipe base when specified or indicated. Remove hard spots that would prevent a uniform bearing. Before laying each section of the pipe, check the grade with a straightedge and correct any irregularities found. The trench bottom shall form a continuous and uniform bearing and support for the pipe at every point between bell holes, except that the grade may be disturbed for the removal of lifting tackle. d. At the location of each joint, dig bell (joint) holes of ample dimensions in the bottom of the trench and at the sides where necessary to permit easy visual inspection of the entire joint. e. Provide and maintain ample means and devices at all times to remove and dispose of all water entering the trench during the process of pipe laying. The trench shall be kept dry until the pipe laying and jointing are completed. f. Where the pipe is connected to concrete structures, the connection shall be made as shown. If the connection is not shown, make connection such that a standard pipe joint is located no more than 24 inches from the structure. 2. Laying Ductile Iron, Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and High Density Polyethylene Pipe: a. Join ductile iron and polyvinyl chloride pipe or polyethylene pipe in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Provide all special tools and devices, such as special jacks, BOI158870.A1.FN 15060 JULY 6, 2000 7 PLANT PIPING --GENERAL b. Operate all valves, hydrants, and other appurtenances during disinfection to assure that the disinfecting mixture is dispersed into all parts of the line, including dead ends, new services, and similar areas that otherwise may not receive the disinfecting solution. C. Do not place concentrated quantities of commercial disinfectants in the line before it is filled with water. d. After chlorination, flush the water from the permanent source of supply until the water through the line is chemically and bacteriologically to the permanent source of supply. 5. Disposal of Disinfecting Water: Dispose of disinfecting water in an acceptable manner that will protect the public and publicly used receiving waters from harmful or toxic concentrations of chlorine. Do not allow disinfecting water to flow into a waterway without adequate dilution or other satisfactory method of reducing chlorine concentrations to a safe level. PART 4 PAYMENT 4.1 GENERAL A. Payment for the Work in this general section will be included as part of the price for the appropriate item described in Volume 1 of 3, Special Provisions, SP-18 "Mechanical Process and Systems—ARFF Trainer". END OF SECTION BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 , 15060 12 PLANT PIPING --GENERAL SECTION 15060-01 DETAIL PIPING SPECIFICATION DUAL WALL PIPE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work necessary to furnish and install the dual wall fuel pipe, complete, and as specified further in Section 15060, PLANT PIPING —GENERAL. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Complete description of piping and fittings. B. Installer's certification from the manufacturer that the installer is certified to install the pipe. 1.3 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICE A. Manufacturer's representative will be onsite daily to inspect the installation of the dual wall pipe. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GEO FLEX PIPING SYSTEM A. Manufactured by Environ Products, Inc., 252 Welsh Pool Road, Lionville, PA 19341, telephone (610) 594-0297. B. Or equal. 2.2 PIPE A. Pipe shall be multi -layer, reinforced composite construction, with all layers integrally bonded, UIJULC listed, direct burial, with continuous internal space monitoring. On the 3/4-inch lines, no joints in the dual wall pipe will be allowed. In the 3-inch lines, a maximum of one joint for each line will be allowed. Fittings shall be supplied by the pipe manufacturer. Swivel pipe couplings shall be used for pipe connections and for end connections to the stainless steel pipe. 3/4-inch swivel connections are male NPT and corresponding stainless steel pipe end connection shall be a female NPT union fitting. The 3-inch dual wall swivel connections shall be female NPT and the corresponding stainless steel pipe end fitting shall be a male NPT union. B0I158870.A1.FN DULY 11, 2000 15060-01 1 DETAIL PIPING SPECIFICATION DUAL WALL PIPE PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The dual wall pipe and fittings shall be installed by a manufacturer-certifiec installer, and the manufacturer's representative shall observe the installatior daily. PART 4 PAYMENT 4.1 GENERAL A. Payment for Work in this Section will be included as part of the lump sum price for the appropriate item described in Volume 1 of 3, Special Provisior SP-18 "Mechanical Process and Systems—ARFF Trainer". END OF SECTION BOI158870.A 1.FN 15060-01 JULY 11, 2000 2 DETAIL PIPING SPECIFICATION DUAL WALL PIPE SECTION 15060-02 DETAIL PIPING SPECIFICATION NATURAL GAS PLASTIC PIPE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. This Section covers the Work necessary to furnish and install, complete, the natural gas plastic pipe and fittings specified herein, and as specified further in Section 15060, PLANT PIPING —GENERAL. B. This Section covers the following plastic pipe materials and Project uses: Natural gas (NG). 1.2 GENERAL A. See Section 15060, PLANT PIPING —GENERAL, for additional requirements. All piping system section components shall be the products of one manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR NG (SECTION 15060-02) A. NG, 3/4-inch and 1-1/2-inch, Plexco Yellowpipe PE 2406 pipe and fittings for natural gas services; or equal. Metal fittings shall be stainless steel. B. Manufacturer: Plexco (Chevron) R.R. 6 Industrial Pk., Bloomfield, IA 52537-0157, telephone (515) 664-1286; or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All natural gas PE pipe shall be cut, made up, and installed in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations using the manufacturer's supplied fusion equipment to join the pipe and fittings. Plastic pipe shall be laid by snaking the pipe from one side of the trench to the other. Offset shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the maximum temperature variation between time of welding and during operation. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 15060-02 1 DETAIL PIPING SPECIFICATION NATURAL GAS PLASTIC PIPE O.BOI B. Floor drains shall be supplied by the pipe manufacturer and shall be PVC model Hi Strength heavy duty, size 4 inches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All PVC pipe shall be cut, made up, and installed in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Plastic pipe shall be laid by snaking the pipe from one side of the trench to the other. Offset shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the maximum temperature variation between time of solvent welding and during operation. 3.2 PREPARATION OF TRENCH J A. Pipe Base Material: 1. Provide pipe base material under all gravity sewer and pressure pipe for full width of trench. 2. Hand -grade base to proper grade ahead of pipe laying. Base shall provide a firm, unyielding support along entire pipe length. B. Bell Holes: Excavate bell holes at each joint to permit proper assembly and i inspection of entire joint. C. Dewatering: Provide and maintain ample means and devices to remove and dispose of water entering the trench during the laying operation to the extent required to properly grade the bottom of the trench and allow for proper compaction of the backfill in the pipe zone. Pipe shall not be laid in water. 3.3 PIPE DISTRIBUTION t j A. Distribute material on the job no faster than it can be used to good advantage. Unload pipe which cannot be physically lifted by workers from the trucks, by ; a forklift, or other approved means. Do not drop pipe of any size from the bed of the truck to the ground. i 3.4 PIPE PREPARATION AND HANDLING A. Inspect all pipe and fittings prior to lowering into trench to ensure no cracked, broken, or otherwise defective materials are being used. Clean ends of pipe thoroughly. Remove foreign matter and dirt from inside of pipe and keep clean during and after laying. B. Use proper implements, tools, and facilities for the safe and proper protection of the work. Lower pipe into the trench in such a manner as to avoid any B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 15060-04 AND 05 2 DETAIL PIPING SPECIFICATION PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS LJ 158870.130I physical damage to the pipe. Remove all damaged pipe from the jobsite. Do not drop or dump pipe into trenches under any circumstances. 3.5 LINE AND GRADE A. Do not deviate from line or grade more than 1/2-inch for line and 1/4-inch for grade, provided that such variation does not result in a level or reverse sloping invert. B. Measure for grade at the pipe invert, not at the top of the pipe, because of permissible variation in pipe wall thickness. C. Establish line and grade for pipe by the use of lasers or by transferring the cut from offset stakes to batter boards set in the trench at maximum -intervals of 25 feet. Maintain a minimum of three sets of batter boards with string line ahead of the pipe laying at all times. If batter boards in the trench prove impractical because of trench conditions, submit other methods of grade and alignment control to the ENGINEER for approval. 3.6 BACKFILL AT THE PIPE ZONE A. The pipe zone shall be considered to include the full width of the excavated trench from the bottom of the pipe to a point 8 inches above the top outside surface of the barrel of the pipe. B. Particular attention must be given to the area of the pipe zone from the flow line to the centerline of the pipe to ensure that firm support is obtained to prevent any lateral movement of the pipe during the final backfilling of the pipe zone. C. Pipe zone material shall be used for the full depth of the pipe zone. This material shall be placed, in a manner approved by the ENGINEER, simultaneously on both sides of pipe in lifts not to exceed 6 inches. D. Each lift shall be "walked in" and supplemented by slicing with a shovel to ensure that all voids around the pipe have been completely filled. E. Backfill at the pipe zone for PVC sewer pipe must receive particular attention and care to prevent damage to the pipe. After placing material as specified herein to a point 10 inches above the top outside surface of the barrel of the pipe, the material so placed shall be compacted by at least three passes of a vibratory compactor over the area generally above the sides of the pipe. Impact compactors will not be used for compaction of backfill at the pipe zone. 1.31 BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 - 15060-04 AND 05 3 DETAIL PIPING SPECIFICATION PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS 158870.130I 3.7 FINAL CLEANING A. Prior to final acceptance inspection of the system by the ENGINEER, flush and clean all parts of the system. Remove all accumulated construction debris, rocks, gravel, sand, silt, and other foreign material from the system. B. Upon the ENGINEER's final inspection of the system, if any foreign matter is still present in the system, reflush and clean the sections and portions of the lines as required. PART 4 PAYMENT 4.1 GENERAL A. Payment for the Work in this Section will be included as part of the lump sum price for the appropriate item described in Volume 1 of 3, Special Provisions, SP-18 "Mechanical Process and Systems—ARFF Trainer". END OF SECTION B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 15060-04 AND 05 4 DETAIL PIPING SPECIFICATION PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS 158870.BOI SECTION 15101 VALVES AND MISCELLANEOUS PIPING COMPONENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. This Section covers the Work necessary for furnishing and installing the various valves in the plant piping systems. 1.2 GENERAL A. Like items of equipment specified herein shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for operation, maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturer's service. B. See CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made as required in Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. In addition, the following specific information shall be provided: 1. Product Data: For all valves. 2. Quality Control Submittals: a. Certificate of Compliance for: Electric operators. b. Open/close and throttle actuators sizing calculations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All valves shall be complete with all necessary operators, actuators, handwheels, chain wheels, extension stems, floor stands, worm and gear operators, operating nuts, chains, wrenches, and other accessories or appurtenances which are required for the proper completion of the Work. Operators, actuators, and other accessories shall be sized and furnished by the valve supplier and factory mounted. B. Valves shall be suitable for the intended service. Renewable parts including discs, packing, and seats shall be of types recommended by valve B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 15101 1 VALVES AND MISCELLANEOUS PIPING COMPONENTS 158870.130I 2.6 VALVES A. Sluice Gate Valves: SG-1: Each 6-inch gate (2 valves required) shall be furnished complete with wall thimble or anchor bolts/studs, operating stem, gate lift operator, and other appurtenances as specified to make a complete and operable installation. Gates shall meet the requirements of AWWA Specifications C-501 (latest revisions). The plans show the invert elevation of the 6-inch valve, wall thickness is 1 foot, 2 inches. The valve stem HT shall be designed to match the dimensions shown on the plans. They shall be Waterman P-32-FF-RS-Y Sluice Gate; or equal. Gates, frame, and rails shall be cast iron, 6 inches, 125 pounds ANSI flanges, rising stem of 304 stainless steel, manually operated lift, and stem guides. Stem guides shall be stainless steel, adjustable in two directions, spaced for recommendations of manufacturer (shall not exceed l/r of 200), such as Waterman Stem Guide IC-2; or equal. Operator shall be of cast iron body, offset type, pedestal mount such as Waterman Type 2 cast iron offset pedestal; or equal. Seating and unseating heads are 12 feet of water. Sluice gate assembly of cast iron and/or galvanized steel shall be painted with manufacturer's ST polyamide epoxy light gray paint. Lift and stem assembly shall be painted with manufacturer's standard polyamide epoxy base coat and polyurethane enamel top coat light gray paint system. B. Ball Valves: Ball valves 2 inches and smaller, 304 stainless steel, Series S 8200 unibody by Watts Regulator Company; Dixon Valve and Coupling Co. Type SSLBV valves; or equal. C. Plug Valves: Plug valves shall be Durco G-4 sleeve lined valves; or equal. Body shall be cast 304 stainless steel, CF-855 body and plugs, PTFE sleeves, flanged and fittings, 150 pounds rated. Plug valves 4 inches and smaller shall have lever handle operators. Plug valves 6 inches and larger shall have handwheel operators. D. 12-Inch Butterfly Valves: Butterfly valves shall be 12 inches, stainless steel body, disc, and shaft (Type 316), packing, bearing fabric, and seat seal of PTFE. Valves shall be Durco BHP style, Dezuriki Class 150; or equal. One valve shall have enclosed gear operator. One valve shall be electric operator with 4-20 mA control, 115 Vac, NEMA 4 enclosure, modulating, brake, and manual override in accordance with the instrumentation and control specifications. BOI158870.A1.FN 15101 JULY 6, 2000 4 VALVES AND MISCELLANEOUS MulzCtZ�7� ul' • ►1 ►il a;� 158870.BOI E. 12-Inch Check Valves: 1. CKV: Check valve shall be of the flanged, flexible disc, full body check valve type with no internal moving parts except closure disc. Valves shall be rated to 285 CWP. Body will be ductile iron ASTM A-536 Grade 65-14-12, finished with factory epoxy gray paint, seat to be constructed on 45-degree angle, interior fully coated with two part thermosetting epoxy, disc shall be integral molded Viton O-Ring, flexible hinge shall be warranted for 25 years. Valve size is 12 inches. Valves shall be Series 850, Figure 851; Flex Check by Millikon Valve Company, 3864 Courtney Street, Suite 100, Bethlehem, PA 18017, telephone: (610) 861-8803; or equal. F. Self -Contained Automatic Valves: 1. PRV-E-2: Pressure -reducing valves shall be direct diaphragm, spring controlled, with internal relief designed for natural gas service. Valves shall have steel body and aluminum spring case and diaphragm case, aluminum seat ring, disc holder with valve disc of aluminum with nitrile, nitrile diaphragm, O-rings, and NPT connections. Valves shall be Fisher Type 627R; or equal. Size and rating of pressure -reducing valve shall be as follows: a. 1-inch, minimum of 2,000 scfh, 20 psig inlet, 5 to 20 psig outlet range with initial setting of 10 psig outlet. 2. Pressure relief valves for diesel fuel service shall be angle pattern, spring controlled, and designed for working pressures up to 100 psi. Pressure relief valves shall have flanged stainless steel body and trim. Valves shall be Type 5 backpressure regulators manufactured by Kaye & McDonald, Inc., 11-15 Central Avenue, West Orange, NJ, telephone: (973) 674-8060; or equal. Sizes and ratings of pressure relief valves shall be as follows: a. PRV-D-2: Size 2-inch, set point of 40 psig at 200 gpm, normal operating range 70 to 80 psi. b. PRV-D-1: Size 1-inch, set point of 60 psig at 25 gpm, normal operating range 30 to 90 psi. 3. AVR-1: Air vacuum valve shall allow air to re-enter during the draining or when a vacuum occurs. Valves sized 1 inch. Valves shall be APCO, Valve and Primer Corp. Model 1501 T; or equal. 2.7 NATURAL GAS AND FUEL CONTROL VALVES A. Coaxial Valves: 1. All valves shall have teflon seals, Vitron seats, flanged connections, normally closed -fail closed operator, 120 Vac, 40-60 Hz, pressure range B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 15101 5 VALVES AND MISCELLANEOUS PIPING COMPONENTS 158870.130I 0-16 bar minimum, complete pressure balancing so differential pressure has no affect on metal terminal box with cable gland valve, 3-second maximum switching time. Valves shall be Springor Co-Ax; or equal. a. Manufacturer: Springor Co-Ax, P.O. Box 7204, Penndel, PA 19047-7204, telephone: (800) 757-3725. 2. CV-A-1-1 to CV-A-1-4: Model FK80, 3-inch, 3.15-inch orifice, aluminum body, flanged end fittings. 3. CV -A- 1-5 to CV-A-1-I I and CV-A-2-1 to CV-A-2-11: 0.79-inch orifice, model FK20, 3/4 inch, nickel plated steel body, flanged end fittings. 4. Rated for installation on natural gas and diesel service. Diesel service working pressure is 100 prig and natural gas working pressure is 25 psig. Temperature range of media is 20 degrees F to 100 degrees F. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING COMPONENTS A. Natural Gas Burner: 1. Natural gas burner shall be Maxon Ventite Inspirator with primary air shutter and Sticktite nozzle, nozzle size 1-inch, rated at 69 scfh natural gas at 10 psig for atmospheric discharge, materials shall be standard cast iron construction: a. Manufacturer: Maxon Corp., Muncie, Indiana, (715) 284-3304. b. Or equal. B. Inspirator Pilot Ignition: 1. Pilot igniter inspirator shall be Eclipso High Pressure (10 psig gas supply) Atmospheric Pilot Mixer, catalog number TR-3HA, size 3/4-inch, without valve or gage: a. Manufacturer: Eclipse Combustion, Inc., Rockford, Illinois, (815) 877-3031. b. Or equal. C. Spray Nozzles: 1. Spray nozzles will be made from stainless steel from Spraying Systems Co., P.O. Box 7900, Wheaton, IL, phone (630) 665-5000; or equal, and are as follows: BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 15101 6 VALVES AND MISCELLANEOUS' PIPING COMPONENTS 158870.130I Ordering Information Installation Information Size Quantity Description Installation 1/4-N-SS-26 4 Fine Wheel -Bottom - atomizing, Installed hollow cover 1/4-N-SS-8 4 Fine Wheel -Bottom - atomizing, Spares hollow cover 1/4-K-SS-5 10 Wide angle Wheel-Top- 8 Installed, 2 Spares 1/4-K-SS-10 10 Wide angle Wheel -Top - Spares 1/4-K-SS-20 8 Wide angle Wheel -Top - Spares 1/4-K-SS-10 2 Wide angle Add hndline mockup cabin (each side) - Installed 1/2-HH-SQ-SS-29SQ 6 Square spray Handline mockup cockpit and galley fires - Installed 1/4-H-SQ-SS-IOSQ 6 Square spray Handline mockup cockpit and galley -Spares 1/4-GG-SS-1530 2 15 degrees, Handline mockup narrow angle cockpit, center spray for center console -Installed, Spare 1-HH-SS-30100 7 Narrow angle, Engines- 30 degrees 5 Installed, 2 Spares 3/4-GG-SS-3050 7 Narrow angle, Engines -Spares 30 degrees 1/2-GG-SS-1590 5 Narrow angle, Engines -Spares 15 degrees BOI158870.A I.FN JULY 6, 2000 15101 7 VALVES AND MISCELLANEOUS PIPING COMPONENTS __ _. J � "1 �i M .. .�¢. ., SECTION 15119 FIRE HYDRANT PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work necessary for furnishing and installing the fire hydrants, complete. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section contains specifications for the following primary products: 1. Low pressure fire hydrants. 2. Hydrant base blocks. 3. Drainage gravel. 4. Thrust blocking. 5. Stem extension and handwheel operator. 1.3 SUBM=ALS A. Fire Hydrants. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LOW PRESSURE HYDRANTS A. Hydrant: 1. Fire hydrant shall meet or exceed AWWA C502, latest revision and shall comply with Factory Mutual Research Corporation and Underwriters' Laboratories UL 246 standard rated water working pressure shall be 200 psi, test pressure shall be 400 psi, and hydrants shall include the following specific design criteria. 2. The main valve closure shall be of the compression type, opening against the pressure and closing with the pressure. The main valve opening shall not be less than 5-1/4 inches and be designed so that removal of seat, drain valve mechanism, internal rod, and all working parts can be removed through top of hydrant. 3. The draining system of the hydrant shall be bronze and activated by the main stem without use of auxiliary rod, toggles, pins, etc. The drain mechanism shall be completely closed after no more than three turns of the operating nut in the opening direction. There shall be a minimum of two inside ports and four drain port outlets to the exterior of the hydrant. Drain shutoff to be direct compression closure. SLIDING DRAIN SEALS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. The operating nut, main stem, B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 15119 1 FIRE HYDRANT coupling, and main valve assembly shall be capable of withstanding input torque of 200 ft-lbs. in opening or closing directions. There shall be an internal top housing with triple O-rings to seal operating threads from the waterway. A ball bearing in the housing shall reduce the opening torque to maximum of 62 ft-ibs. against full rated pressure. 4. Hydrant bonnet assembly shall be provided with a grease reservoir and lubrication system that automatically circulates lubricant to operating stem threads and bearing surfaces each time the hydrant is operated. Downward stem travel shall be limited by a travel stop located in the upper housing of the hydrant. 5. Nozzle section of hydrant shall be designed to permit field replacement of damaged threads without special tools, excavation, or disturbing the ground line joint. Nozzle section shall be capable of 360-degree rotation in any increment with respect to the lower barrel. Bronze nozzles are to be locked into hydrant barrel with locking lugs and have two exterior stainless steel square head set screws for double retention. A heavy duty O-ring shall seal nozzles against barrel socket. 6. The hydrant for the water recycling tank fill line shall have a 4-inch monitor spool elbow for connection to the fill pipe. 7. The general purpose fire hydrants shall be the traffic model type and shall have a 5-1/4-inch valve opening, two 2-1/2-inch hose nozzles and one 4-inch steamer nozzle, with four threads per inch and a crest to crest dimensions of 4.995 inches. The hydrants shall be for 6-inch mains and shall have a M.J. Connection, and shall be for 4-1/2-foot bury, unless otherwise shown on plans. The hydrants shall be Clow Medallion, American Darling, Model B-84-B; Dresser, Style 129-09; or Mueller Centurion. Operating nuts shall be 1-1/2-inch pentagons measured to a point. The hydrants shall be painted orange. B. Main Valve: 1. Depth of Bury: 4 feet (over top of connected pipe). 2. Equip with O-ring seals. 3. Valve opens on counterclockwise rotation. 2.2 BASE BLOCK A. Precast concrete pier block having nominal dimensions of 8-inch thickness by 16-inch square base. 1. Concrete Strength: 3,000 psi at 28 days. 2.3 GRAVEL FOR DRAINAGE A. Washed 3/4-inch drainage gravel. Free of organic matter, sand, loam, clay, and other small particles that will tend to restrict waterflow through the gravel. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 15119 2 FIRE HYDRANT-- Ordering Information Installation Information Size Quantity Description Installation 1/4-N-SS-26 4 Fine Wheel -Bottom - atomizing, Installed hollow cover 1/4-N-SS-8 4 Fine Wheel -Bottom - atomizing, Spares hollow cover 1/4-K-SS-5 10 Wide angle Wheel-Top- 8 Installed, 2 Spares 1/4-K-SS-10 10 Wide angle Wheel -Top - Spares 1/4-K-SS-20 8 Wide angle Wheel. -Top - Spares 1/4-K-SS-10 2 Wide angle Add handline mockup cabin (each side) - Installed 1/2-HH-SQ-SS-29SQ 6 Square spray Handline mockup cockpit and galley fires - Installed 1/4-H-SQ-SS-IOSQ 6 Square spray Handline mockup cockpit and galley -Spares 1/4-GG-SS-1530 2 15 degrees, Handline mockup narrow angle cockpit, center spray for center console -Installed, Spare 1-HH-SS-30100 7 Narrow angle, Engines- 30 degrees 5 Installed, 2 Spares 3/4-GG-SS-3050 7 Narrow angle, Engines -Spares 30 degrees 1/2-GG-SS-1590 5 Narrow angle, Engines -Spares 15 degrees BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 15101 7 VALVES AND MISCELLANEOUS PIPING COMPONENTS 158870.130I Ordering Information Installation Information Size Quantity Description Installation 3/8-GG-SS-1550 5 Narrow angle, Engines -Spares 15 degrees 2-H-SQ-SS-480SQ 2 Square spray Nose Cooling Water -Installed 1/2-HH-SS-40W 2 Standard type Snozzle nose - wide angle 1 Installed, 1 Spare 1-HH-SS-11W 4 Standard type Handline trainer wide angle cooling water- 3 Installed, 1 Spare 3/4-H15-SS-15150 6 Narrow angle Spares, Snozzel 15 degrees nose, Engines H-1/4-VV-SS-9508 12 Flat spray Snozzel nose 95 degrees plus interior fuselage- 8 Installed, 4 Spares 1/4-GG-SS-1530 2 Narrow angle Snozzel nose 15 degrees plus interior fuselage- 1 Installed, 1 S are D. Eductor shall be Model LL, Size 8 fabricated from 316 stainless steel, as manufactured by Penberthy, Inc., Prophetstown, IL (815) 537-2311. E. Hose reel shall be Hannay Reels, Series 1500 manual rewind, ball bearing swivel joint by Hannay Reels, Inc., telephone (518) 797-3791; or equal and supplied with 100 feet of 1-inch hose and brass hand -operated spray nozzle. F. Strainers shall be basket type, made from stainless steel, by Fabrotech Industries, 2089 Ninth Avenue, Ronkonkoma, NY 11779, telephone (516) 467-2040; or equal. The 12-inch strainer shall be fabricated type quick opening cover; basket screen opening shall be 1/4 inch. The 4-inch and 6-inch strainers shall be 125F-SS flanged end basket strainer with 60 mesh basket lining. Gaskets shall be Viton or Buna-N for diesel fuel service. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 15101 8 VALVES AND MISCELLANEOUS PIPING COMPONENTS G. Eyewash/Showers: Shower shall be Model SE260 and eyewash shall be Model SE440 as manufactured by Speakman Company, Wilmington, DE, (800) 537-2107. Eyewash and shower components shall be stainless steel; each shall include manufacturer's standard frostproof hydrant valve with standard 3-foot, 6-inch bury depth for connection to water supply. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Boltholes of flanged valves shall straddle the vertical centerline of the pipe run. Prior to installing flanged valves, the flange faces shall be thoroughly cleaned. After cleaning, insert gasket and bolts, and tighten the nuts progressively and uniformly. If flanges leak under pressure, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts, reseat or replace the gasket, retighten and/or reinstall the nuts and bolts, and retest the joints. Joints shall be watertight at test pressures before acceptance. C. Thoroughly clean threads of screwed joints by wire brushing, swabbing, or other approved methods. Apply approved joint compound to threads prior to making joints. Joints shall be watertight at test pressures before acceptance. Kam.' 1_1091 A. Valves and piping equipment items shall be field tested at the same time that the adjacent pipeline is tested. Joints shall show no visible leakage under test. Repair joints that show signs of leakage prior to final acceptance. If there are any special parts of control systems or operators that might be damaged by the pipeline test, they shall be properly protected. The CONTRACTOR will be held responsible for any damage caused by the testing. PART 4 PAYMENT 4.1 GENERAL A. Payment for the Work in this Section will be included as part of the lump sum price for the appropriate item described in Volume 1 of 3, Special Provisions, SP-18 "Mechanical Process and Systems—ARFF Trainer". END OF SECTION BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 15101 9 VALVES AND MISCELLANEOUS PIPING COMPONENTS 2.4 CONCRETE FOR THRUST BLOCKING A. Ready -mix meeting ASTM C94, Alternative 2. B. Compressive Strength: 3,000 psi at 28 days. C. Aggregate Size: 1-1/2-inch minus. D. Slump: 2 to 4 inches. 2.5 STEM EXTENSION AND HANDWHEEL OPERATOR A. Stem extension and handwheel operator shall be 1-inch SST stem and 24-inch cast iron handwheel as manufactured by acceptable manufacturer to the City of Norfolk and ENGINEER. Fabricate end nut to match hydrant stem. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install hydrants in conformance with Sections 3.7 and 3.8 of AWWA C600, except as modified by these Specifications. 3.2 LOCATION A. Locate the hydrants as shown. 1. Set hydrants so safety flange is a minimum of 2 inches above finished ground. 2. Position pumper nozzle away from tank wall. 3. Hydrant shall be plumb in all respects. 4. Position monitor elbow parallel to tank wall per Drawing. 3.3 BASE BLOCK A. Place on firm, level subgrade to ensure uniform support. B. Conform to Standard Fire Hydrant Setting Detail on the Drawings. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF HYDRANTS A. Place hydrant on base block carefully to prevent the base block from breaking. 1. Jointing Procedures: Conform to Section 3.4 of AWWA C600. 2. Maintain the hydrant in a plumb position during subsequent work. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 15119 3 FIRE HYDRANT 3.5 GRAVEL FOR DRAINAGE A. Place gravel around base block and hydrant bottom as specified in Section 3.7 of AWWA C600. 3.6 CONCRETE THRUST BLOCKING A. Place blocking after hydrant is set in its final position and joined to pipe. B. Concrete thrust block shall have a minimum of 4 square feet of bearing area against undisturbed earth. 3.7 TESTING AND DISINFECTION A. Perform hydrostatic tests and disinfect hydrants and piping concurrently with adjacent sections of piping. B. Joints shall be watertight at test pressure before acceptance. PART 4 PAYMENT 4.1 GENERAL A. Payment for Work in this Section will be included as part of the lump sum price for the appropriate item described in Volume 1 of 3, Special Provisions, SP-18 "Mechanical Process and Systems—ARFF Trainer". END OF SECTION B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 11, 2000 15119 4 FIRE HYDRANT SECTION 15420 BUILDING SERVICES PIPING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. B 1.2, Gages and Gaging for Unified Inch Screw Threads. b. B2.1.001, Standard Welding Procedure Specification for Shielded Metal Arc Welding of Carbon Steel. C. B16.1, Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. d. B 16.3, Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. e. B 16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. f. B 16.9, Factory -Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings. g. B 16.12, Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings. h. B 16.22, Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A47, Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. b. A53/A53M, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless. C. A74, Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. d. A105/A105M, Standard Specification for Forgings, Carbon Steel, for Piping Components. e. A126, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. f. A181/A181M, Standard Specification for Forgings, Carbon Steel, for General -Purpose Piping. g. A197/A197M, Standard Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron. h. A234/A234M, Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures. i. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. j. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. k. A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 1. B32, Standard Specification for Solder Metal. in. B61, Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings. n. B62, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. o. B75, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 15420 1 BUILDING SERVICES PIPING p. B88, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. q. B98/B98M, Standard Specification for Copper -Silicon Alloy Rod, a Bar, and Shapes. r. B 127, Standard Specification for Nickel -Copper Alloy (UNS N04400) Plate, Sheet, and Strip. _ S. B139, Standard Specification for Phosphor Bronze Rod, Bar, and Shapes. t. B164, Standard Specification for Nickel -Copper Alloy Rod, Bar, and Wire. U. B 194, Standard Specification for Copper -Beryllium Alloy Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Rolled Bar. V. B306, Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube. W. C14, Standard Specification for Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe. X. C444, Standard Specification for Perforated Concrete Pipe. y. C564, Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron T! Soil Pipe and Fittings. Z. D1784, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. aa. D1785, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. bb. D2000, Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. cc. D2466, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) _TA Plastic Pipe Fittings. dd. E438, Standard Specification for Glasses in Laboratory Apparatus. ELI ee. F1412, Standard Specification for Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings for Corrosive Waste Drainage Systems. 3. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C104/A21.4, Cement -Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. b. C110/A21.10, Ductile -Iron and Gray -Iron Fittings, 3-In. Through 48-In. for Water and Other Liquids. C. C111/A21.11, Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe r and Fittings. d. CI15/A21.15, Flanged Ductile -Iron Pipe with Ductile -Iron or Gray -Iron Threaded Flanges. F. e. C151/A21.51, Ductile -Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water. j f. C203, Coal -Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel and Tape - Hot Applied. g. C207, Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 In. Through 144 In. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 I 15420 2 BUILDING SERVICES PIPING' h. C606, Grooved and Shouldered Joints. i. C651, Disinfecting Water Mains. 4. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI): 301, Specification for Cast Iron No -Hub Pipe. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Drawings showing changes in location of fixtures or equipment that are advisable in the opinion of CONTRACTOR. 2. Isometric riser diagrams. B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Changes in location of equipment or piping, that affect connecting or adjacent work, before proceeding with the work. 2. Complete list of products proposed for installation. 3. Test records produced during testing. C. Contract Closeout Submittals: Special Guarantee. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: 1. Hub and Spigot: ASTM A74, service weight, single hub and spigot. 2. Hubless: CISPI 301, service weight, no -hub ends. 3. Joints: a. Rubber Gaskets: ASTM C564. b. Compression: Neoprene sealing sleeve with 24-gauge Type 304 stainless steel shield and clamp assembly. 4. Bituminous -coat cast iron soil pipe and fittings inside and out, and mark with manufacturer's name or trademark and the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute symbol. B. Copper Pipe and Fittings: 1. Pipe: Copper, seamless, ASTM B88, Type L or Type K, hard drawn, and Type K, soft drawn. 2. Fittings: Commercially pure wrought copper, socket, joint, ASTM B75, dimensions conforming to ANSI B 16.22. 3. Solder: 95-5 wire solder, ASTM B32, Grade TA. Do not use cored solder. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 15420 3 BUILDING SERVICES PIPING 4. Drainage Pipe: ASTM B306, DWV wrought copper. 5. Drainage Pipe Fittings: ASTM B306, DWV wrought copper, solder joint ends. C. Galvanized Piping Systems: 1. Pipe: Carbon steel, galvanized, furnace butt welded, ASTM A53, Grade F, Schedule 40. 2. Fittings: a. Cast iron, galvanized, screwed drainage fittings, ASTM A 126, Class B dimensions conforming to ANSI B 16.12. b. Malleable iron, ductile iron, or galvanized steel grooved end galvanized drainage fittings, materials conforming to ASTM A47, ASTM A536, and ASTM A53, Grade B, respectively, permitted in aboveground roof drainage systems only. 3. Joints: a. Screwed threads conforming to ASTM A47 made with teflon tape or joint compound that is insoluble in water. b. Grooved end joints are permitted in aboveground roof drainage systems. 2.2 HOSE VALVES AND HYDRANTS A. Post Hydrant: 1. Bronze casing, 3/4-inch inlet and outlet, for 3-foot of bury. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. J. R. Smith; Figure 5910. b. Wade; 8610 Series. B. Wall Hydrant: 1. Nonfreeze exposed with chrome -plated face, integral vacuum breaker, bronze casing, T-handle key, and 3/4-inch inlet and hose connection. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. J. R. Smith; Figure 5609. b. Josam; 71050 Series. C. Hose Valve: 1. Cast bronze globe valve, 3/4- to 2-inch size, with NPT screwed ends, union bonnet, rising stem, teflon disc, hand wheel, and NPT x NST hose thread adapter outlet connection. 2. Rated 150-pound service water pressure, 300-pound WOG. BOI158870.A1.FN JUL,Y 6, 2000 } 15420 4 BUILDING SERVICES PIPING 2.3 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Stockham; Figure B-22T. b. Crane Co.; Catalog No. 7TF. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Horizontal Piping: 1. Adjustable swivel -ring, split -ring, or clevis type hangers. a. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Grinnell; Figure 260. 2) B-Line; Figure B3100. 2. Furnish galvanized protection shield and oversized hangers under insulated piping. a. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Grinnell; Figure 167. 2) B-Line; Figure B3151. B. Pipe Hangers for Uninsulated Copper and Plastic Piping: 1. Coat with plastic or neoprene protective cover. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. Grinnell; Figure 97C. b. B-Line; Figure B3170 NFC. C. Vertical Piping Passing Through Floors: 1. Riser clamps. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. For Ferrous Piping: 1) Grinnell; Figure 261. 2) B-Line; Figure B3373. b. For Nonferrous Piping: 1) Grinnell; Figure 261C. 2) B-Line; Figure B3373C. D. Galvanize hangers, rods, clamps, protective shields, and hanger accessories. E. Trapeze Hangers: 1. Assembly consisting of structure attachments with rod size dependent upon total weight supported, and spacing of assemblies determined by minimum pipe size included in group supported. 2. Trapeze Horizontal: Structural angle or channel section of sufficient size to prevent measurable sag between rods. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 15420 5 BUU DING SERVICES PIPING 2.4 2.5 3. Manufacturers: a. Unistrut. b. Super Strut. INSULATION A. Indoor Piping Systems, all hot and cold interior water lines: 1. Piping: Pre -molded closed cell foam, 1/2 inch wall thickness. VALVES A. General: 1. Furnish complete with necessary operating hand wheels, chain wheels, extension stems, floor stands, worm and gear operators, operating nuts, chains, and wrenches. 2. Renewable Parts Including Discs, Packing, and Seats: Types as recommended by valve manufacturer for intended service. 3. Units shall have name of manufacturer and size of valve cast on the body or bonnet or shown on a permanently attached plate in raised letters. B. Design Features: 1. Brass and bronze components, including appurtenances in contact with water. 2. Alloys containing less than 16 percent zinc and 2 percent aluminum. 3. Alloys are of the following ASTM designations: a. B61, B62, B98 (Alloy A, B, or D), B 139 (Alloy A), B 164, B 194, and B 127. b. Stainless steel Alloy 18-8 may be substituted for bronze as an option with approval of ENGINEER. 4. Gland Bolts On Iron Body Valves: Bronze, fitted with brass nuts. C. Valve Operators: 1. Open by turning counterclockwise. 2. Worm and Gear Operators On Manually Operated Valves: Totally - enclosed design, so proportioned as to permit operation of valve under full operating head with maximum pull of 40 pounds on hand wheel or crank. 3. Self-locking type to prevent the disc or plug from creeping. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 15420 6 BUILDING SERVICES PIPING 4. Self -Locking Worm Gears: a. One-piece design of gear bronze material, accurately machine cut. b. Worm: Hardened alloy steel, with thread ground and polished. C. Reduction gearing shall run in a proper lubricant. 5. Galvanize hand wheels. D. Gate Valves: 1. 3 Inches and Smaller for Water Services: a. All -bronze with screwed bonnet, single solid wedge gate with nonrising stem, and hand wheel operator. b. Rated 125-pound SWP, 200-pound WOG. C. Manufacturers for Threaded Ends: 1) Crane; No. 438. 2) Stockham; B-103. d. Manufacturers for Soldered Ends: 1) Crane; No. 1324. 2) Stockham; B-104. E. Ball Valves: 1. 2 Inches and Smaller for Water Services: a. All -bronze, top entry body type and straight -through flow passage, with Buna-N seats and O-ring seals with hand lever operator. b. Rated 200-pound CWP, 150-pound WOG. C. Manufacturers for Threaded Ends: 1) Crane; Catalog No. 2330TF. 2) Lunkenheimer; Figure 700SB. d. Manufacturers for Soldered Ends: 1) Crane; Gem No. 2182. 2) Nibco; Figure S-580. F. Trap Primer Valves: 1. Precision Plumbing Products, Portland, OR, (503) 256-4010; Model P-1, 5-ounch delivery on 15-second pressure drop, with floor drain trap prime distribution unit, installed in mechanical room. 2. Or equal. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventer: 1. Size as shown on the plans, with NRS gate valves and properly located test cocks, furnished and installed in accordance with local code. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 15420 7 BUILDING SERVICES PIPING z 2. Total Head Loss Through Complete Backflow Assembly: Maximum 5 psi at rated flow as required by local code. Provide heated enclosure. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Cla-Val Co., Newport Beach, CA; Clayton. b. Hersey Products, Inc.; Beeco Model FRP-II. B. Floor Drain: 1. Cast iron body, flashing collar, 6-inch diameter chrome -plated adjustable strainer, removable sediment bucket, cast iron P-trap, trap primer connection. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. J.R. Smith; Figure 2010-A. b. Josam; 30000-A Series. C. Hub Drain: l . Coated cast iron reducing hub adapter with standard cast iron hub. 2. Hub: Two pipe sizes larger than outlet. D. Floor Cleanout: 1. Cast iron body and frame, and square, adjustable, scoriated, nickel - bronze top. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. J.R. Smith; Figure 4023. b. Josam; 56010-22 Series. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All materials furnished and installed shall be in accordance with local code. B. Field Obstructions: 1. Drawings do not attempt to show exact details of piping. Provide offsets around obstructions. 2. Do not modify structural components unless approved by ENGINEER. C. Sleeves: 1. Pipe sizes shown are nominal sizes, unless shown or specified otherwise. 2. Provide piping passing through walls, floors, or ceilings with standard - weight pipe sleeves. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 15420 8 BUILDING SERVICES PIPING 3. Provide pipes passing through finished walls with chrome -plated canopy flanges. 4. Pipe sleeves installed in water -holding basins shall have a 1/4-inch steel seep ring, 4 inches larger in diameter than OD of sleeve. Continuously weld ring to sleeve. 5. Make joint between pipe and sleeve watertight with poured and caulked lead. 6. Dry pack sleeves in existing work in place and provide a finished appearance. 7. Pack holes left by removal of existing piping with grout and finish to match adjacent surface. D. Provide unions in piping systems at connections to equipment. E. Provide insulating dielectric unions and flanges between ferrous and nonferrous piping and where otherwise required for electrically insulated connection, as shown. F. Pipe air release valves, water -lubricated bearings, and other appurtenances having water effluent to nearest drain with copper tubing. G. Trench Excavation and Backfill: As specified in Section 02200, EARTHWORK. K �IUlVIA0 /.v0fi)ZI A. Copper Tubing: 1. Cut tubing square and remove burrs. 2. Clean both inside of fittings and outside of tubing with steel wool and hydrochloric acid before soldering. 3. Prevent annealing of fittings and hard -drawn tubing when making connections. 4. Do not use mitered joints for elbows or notching of straight runs of pipe for tees. B. Backflow Preventer: 1. Install with test cocks and nameplate accessible at front for inspection and testing. 2. Provide 6-inch air gap and funnel assembly in pipe test and bleed discharge line in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Pipe discharge line to hub drain. C. Water System Balancing: Provide a qualified registered engineer or firm specializing in testing and balancing to adjust domestic water system. Balance BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 15420 9 BUILDING SERVICES PIPING system for required water flows at each plumbing fixture, terminal device, and recirculating hot water loop. D. Drain P-Trap Priming: 1. Pipe: Type K, soft Pe YID copper. 2. Trap and prime floor drains and hub drains, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. No attempt has been made to show trap primer valve locations or trap primer pipe routing. 3. Field route trap primer piping during installation of floor drains and hub drains, and install trap primer valves in mechanical rooms, janitor rooms, or other locations acceptable to ENGINEER. 4. Priming System: Complete with connection to serving cold water system. E. Valves: Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. F. Miscellaneous Piping Specialties: Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. G. Metering and Measuring Devices: Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3 SANITARY AND WASTE DRAINS AND VENTS PIPING A. Installation: 1. Set piping occurring above floor slab true and plumb. r - 2. Set exposed risers as close to walls as possible. 3. Where vent stacks pass through roof slab, fit with flashing sleeve secured to roof. 4. Extend vents minimum 1 foot above roof. 5. Provide cleanouts where shown and where required by code. B. Inside Buildings, Above Floor: 1. 6 Inches and Smaller: a. Pipe and Fittings: Galvanized steel. C. Underslab or Buried Up to 5 Feet Outside Building Line: r 1. 2 Inches and Larger: a. Pipe and Fittings: Cast iron soil pipe with hub -and -spigot ends and rubber gaskets. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 15420 10 BUILDING SERVICES PIPING 3.4 WATER PIPING A. Water piping includes potable hot water and cold systems. B. Piping, 3-Inches and Smaller: Copper pipe, Type L or K, hard drawn. C. Piping, 4 Inches and Larger: PVC AWWA C900. D. Flush water piping systems clean of internal debris, clean faucet aerators, and adjust plumbing fixture valves for manufacturer's recommended flow. E. Do not run water piping through electrical rooms or immediately over or within a 3-foot horizontal clearance of electrical panels, motor starters, or environmental control panels. F. Provide exterior water piping with minimum 3 feet of cover or install below frost line, whichever is greater. G. Hose Valves and Hydrants: Attach handle with setscrew and provide manufacturer's recommended gravel fill around drain hole of post hydrants. H. Provide valve operators with position indicators, where indicated, to show position of valve disc or plug. I. Provide bypass with globe valve for emergency throttling around each reducing valve. J. Provide manual air vents at high points in domestic hot water system. 3.5 INSULATION A. Indoor Piping: Insulate hot and cold water with 1/2-inch insulation of pre - molded closed cell foam insulation. B. Finish: 1. Finished Appearance of Insulation: Smooth and continuous. 3.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Install pre-engineered support equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 15420 11 BUILDING SERVICES PIPING B. Hanger Rod Sizing and Spacing for: 1. Steel Pipe: C. l" Pipe Size Max. Hanger Spacing Min. Rod Size 1 inch & smaller 6 feet 1/4-inch 1-1/4 through 2-1/2 inches 8 feet 1/4-inch 3 & 4 inches 10 feet 3/8-inch 6 inches 12 feet 3/8-inch IL 8 inches 12 feet 1/2-inch 2. Copper Pipe: a. Same as for steel pipe. b. Spacing: 2 feet less per size than for steel pipe, with pipes 1 inch and smaller supported every 6 feet. 3. Plastic Pipe: a. Same as for steel pipe. b. Spacing: As recommended by manufacturer for flow temperature in pipe. 4. No metal portion of hanger shall contact pipe directly. Attach Support Rods For Horizontal Piping: 1. To steel beams with I -clamps. 2. To concrete with inserts, or with flanges fastened with flush shells. 3. To wood 2-1/2 inches or more thick, with bolts or angle clips. Trapeze Hangers: 1. Trapeze hangers may be used in lieu of individual hangers where horizontal piping is arranged with two or more parallel lines. 2. Attach lines to horizontal with U-bolts or one -hole clamps. Vertical Piping: 1. Support by channels and pipe clamps on 10-foot maximum centers, as manufactured by: a. Unistrut. b. Super Strut. BOI158870.A I.FN 15420 12 JULY 6, 2000 BUILDING SERVICES PIPING } 2. Copper, and Plastic Piping: Isolate from channels and pipe clamps with pipe isolators, as manufactured by: i a. Super Strut. b. Pipe Shields, Inc. 3.7 TESTING A. General: 1. Conduct pressure and leakage tests on newly installed pipelines. 2. Provide necessary equipment and material and make taps in pipe, as required. 3. ENGINEER will monitor the tests. Provide advance notice of start of testing. 4. Test Pressures: As specified. 5. Test Records: Make records of each piping system installation during the test to document the following: a. Date of test. b. Description and identification of piping tested. C. Test fluid. d. Test pressure. e. Remarks, including: 1) Leaks (type, location). 2) Repairs made on leaks. f. Certification by CONTRACTOR and signed acknowledgment by ENGINEER that tests have been satisfactorily completed. B. Testing New Pipe Connected to Existing Pipe: Isolate new pipe with grooved end pipe caps, spectacle blinds, or blind flanges. C. Preparation and Execution: 1. Buried Pressure Piping: a. Conduct final hydrostatic acceptance tests after trench has been completely backfilled. b. An initial service leak test may be conducted with a partially backfilled trench and the joints left open for inspection, if field conditions permit, as determined by the ENGINEER. C. Expose joints for the acceptance test on buried pressure piping to be pneumatically tested or subjected to an initial service leak test. 2. Exposed Piping: Conduct tests after piping has been completely installed including supports, hangers, and anchors, but prior to insulation. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 15420 13 BUILDING SERVICES PIPING D. Hydrostatic Leak Tests: 1. Equipment: Provide the following: Amount I Description 2 Graduated containers 2 Pressure gauges 1 Hydraulic force pump Suitable hose and suction pipe as required 2. Procedure: a. Use water as the hydrostatic test fluid. b. Provide clean test water of such quality as to minimize corrosion of the materials in the piping system. C. Open vents at high points of the piping system to purge air pockets while the piping system is filling. d. Venting during the filling of the system may also be provided by loosening flanges with a minimum of four bolts or by the use of equipment vents. e. Test piping systems at the test pressure specified in the Piping Schedule. f. Maintain hydrostatic test pressure continuously for 30 minutes minimum and for such additional time as necessary to conduct examinations for leakage. g. Examine joints and connections for leakage. h. The piping system, exclusive of possible localized instances at pump or valve packing, shall show no visual evidence of weeping or leaking. i. Correct visible leakage and retest to satisfaction of ENGINEER. 3. Buried Water Lines: a. A limited amount of leakage is permissible according to the formula specified. b. Conduct hydrostatic testing as follows: 1) Pipe With Concrete Thrust Blocking: Do not make the pressure test until a minimum of 5 days after the thrust blocking is installed. 2) If high -early strength cement is used for thrust blocking, the time may be reduced to 2 days. C. Cement -Mortar Lined Piping: Slowly fill test section with water and allow to stand for 24 hours under slight pressure to allow cement -mortar lining to absorb water. d. Expel air from piping system prior to testing. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000-; 15420 14 BUILDING SERVICES PIPING e. Apply and maintain specified test pressure with hydraulic force pump. f. Valve off the piping system when test pressure is reached. g. Conduct pressure test for 2 hours, reopening isolation valve only as necessary to restore test pressure. h. Accurately measure amount of water required to maintain test pressure by placing pump suction in a barrel or similar device, or by metering. i. The measurement represents leakage, defined as the quantity of water necessary to maintain the specified test pressure for the duration of the test period. j. Determine maximum allowable leakage in gallons per hour from the following formula: L _ iqD(P)vz 7400 where: L = Allowable leakage, in gallons per hour N = Number of joints in the length of pipe tested D = Nominal diameter of pipe, in inches P = Test pressure during the leakage test, in pounds per square inch k. Correct leakage greater than the allowable determined under this formula, and retest to satisfaction of ENGINEER. 4. Test Pressure For Water: 1-1/2 times system pressure. 5. Gravity Sewers and Drains: a. Test by water or air exfiltration tests as prescribed by local or state plumbing codes and visually examine for leaks. b. Repair leaks and retest system until no further leakage is evident. 3.8 CLEANING AND DISINFECTION A. Following assembly and testing and prior to final acceptance, flush pipelines with water, except for plant process air lines and instrument air lines, and --1 remove accumulated construction debris and other foreign matter. B. Minimum Flushing Velocity: 2.5 feet per second. C. Insert cone strainers in the connections to attached equipment and leave until cleaning has been accomplished. BOI158870.A1.FN JULy (, 2000 15420 15 BUILDING SERVICES PIPING [s D. Remove accumulated debris through drains 2 inches and larger or by dropping spools and valves. E. Immediately following drainage of flushed lines, dry piping with compressed air. F. Plant process air and instrument air piping shall be blown clean of loose debris with compressed air. G. Disinfect pipelines intended to carry potable water before placing in service. H. Meet the requirements of AWWA C651, unless otherwise specified. I. Flushing: 1. Before disinfecting, flush foreign matter from the pipeline. 2. Provide hoses, temporary pipes, and ditches, as required to dispose of flushing water without damage to adjacent properties. 3. Minimum Flushing Velocity: 2.5 feet per second. 4. For large diameter pipe where it is impractical or impossible to flush the pipe at 2.5 fps velocity, clean the pipeline in place from the inside by brushing and sweeping, then flush the line at a lower velocity. J. Disinfecting Mixture: 1. A chlorine -water solution having a free chlorine residual of 40 to 50 ppm. 2. Prepare by injecting one of the following: a. A liquid chlorine gas -water mixture. b. Dry chlorine gas. C. A calcium or sodium hypochlorite and water mixture. 3. Inject mixture into pipeline at a measured rate while fresh water is allowed to flow through the pipeline at a measured rate so the combined mixture of fresh water and chlorine solution or gas is of the specified strength. 4. Apply liquid chlorine gas -water mixture by means of a chlorinating device. 5. Feed dry chlorine gas through proper devices for regulating the rate of flow and providing effective diffusion of the gas into the water within the pipe being treated. 6. Chlorinating devices for feeding solutions of the chlorine gas or the gas itself must prevent backflow of water into the chlorine cylinder. 7. Calcium Hypochlorite: If this procedure is used, first mix the dry powder with water to make a thick paste, then thin to approximately a 1 percent solution (10,000 ppm chlorine). BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 15420 16 BUH.DING SERVICES PIPING 8. Sodium Hypochlorite: If this proceuure is useu, uiiwe the liquid with water to obtain a 1 percent solution. 9. The following proportions of hypochlorite to water will be required: Product Quantity Water Calcium Hypochlorite 1 1 lb. 7.5 gal. (65 - 70 percent C 1) Sodium Hypochlorite 2 1 gal. 4.25 gal. (5.25 percent C 1) 1. Comparable to commercial products known as HTH, Perchloron, and Pittchlor. 2. Known as liquid laundry bleach, Clorox, and Purex. K. Point of Application: 1. Inject chlorine mixture into pipeline to be treated at the beginning of the line through a corporation stop or suitable tap in the top of pipeline. 2. Control clean water from the existing system or another source so it flows slowly into newly installed piping during chlorine application. 3. Manipulate valves so the strong chlorine solution in the line being treated will not flow back into the line supplying the water. Use check valves if necessary. L. Retention Period: 1. Retain treated water in pipeline for a minimum of 24 hours or long enough to destroy nonspore-forming bacteria. 2. At the end of the retention period, the disinfecting mixture shall have a strength of at least 10 ppm of chlorine. 3. Operate valves, hydrants, and other appurtenances during disinfection to assure disinfecting mixture is dispersed into all parts of the pipeline including dead ends, new services, and similar areas that otherwise may not receive the disinfecting solution. 4. Do not place concentrated quantities of commercial disinfectants in pipeline before filling with water. 5. After chlorination, flush the water from the permanent source of supply until water through pipeline is equal chemically and bacteriologically to the permanent source of supply. BOI158870.A1.FN 15420 JULY 6, 2000 17 BUII.DING SERVICES PIPING M. Disposal of Disinfecting Water: 1. Dispose of disinfecting water in an acceptable manner that will protect the public and receiving waters from harmful or toxic concentrations of chlorine. 2. Do not allow disinfecting water to flow into a waterway without adequate dilution or other satisfactory method of reducing chlorine concentrations to a safe level. 3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protective Covers: 1. Provide over floor and shower drains during construction, to prevent damage to drain strainers and keep foreign material from entering drainage system. 2. Cover roof drains and emergency overflow drains during roofing process so roofing material and gravel do not enter drain piping. 3. Remove at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 15420 18 BUILDING SERVICES PIPING j PART 1 1.1 1.2 PART 2 2.1 2.2 SECTION 15445 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT GENERAL REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air -Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): 90A, Energy Conservation in New Building Design. 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): Section IV PT HLW. 3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory. SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Drawings showing changes in locations of fixtures or equipment that are advisable in the opinion of CONTRACTOR. 2. Manufacturers' product data for fixtures and equipment. B. Contract Closeout Submittals: Special guarantee. PRODUCTS GENERAL A. Furnish plumbing fixtures with chrome -plated flexible water supplies, angle stops, and canopy flanges at wall. B. Furnish lavatories, sinks, and drinking fountains with chrome -plated cast brass P-traps, trap arms, and canopy flange at wall. FIXTURES A. Drinking Fountain: 1. Antisquirt bubbler, self -closing valve, automatic volume regulator, screwdriver stop, strainer, and concealed wall mounting bracket. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 15445 1 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. American Standard; Saratoga 8310.112. b. Kohler; Millbrook K-5264-A. B. Lavatory (Handicapped): 1. Wall -hung, white, concealed commercial type support arms with rectangular uprights. 2. Maximum Water Consumption: 0.5 gpm. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. American Standard; Lucerne 0355.012 with 2385.478 faucet, grid strainer and tailpiece. b. Kohler; Kingston K-2005 with K-15199 faucet, grid strainer and . tailpiece. C. Shower Trim: 1. Pressure compensating valve with integral check stops, and 2 gpm flow control. 2. Install shower head 78 inches above finished floor. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Symmons; Safetymix S-1-100X, 4-131F adjustable shower head. b. Speakman; Sentinel Mark II Regency SM-1400-AF-2-lS. D. Service Sink: Stainless steel floor -mounted janitor's sink with deep bowl, hot/cold water faucet. E. Water Closet (Flush Valve -Wall -Hung, Handicapped): 1. Elongated bowl. 2. Maximum Water Consumption: 1.6 gallons per flush. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. American Standard; Afwall 2257.103. b. Kohler; Kingston K-4430. 4. Flush Valve Manufacturers and Products: a. Sloan; Royal 111. b. Delaney; 402-1. 5. Commercial Type Closet Support Manufacturers: a. J. R. Smith. b. Josam. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 15445 2 PLUMBING FDCFURFS AND EQUIPMENT F. Urinal (Wall -Hung Type): 1. Maximum Water Consumption: 1 gallon per flush. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. American Standard; Washbrook 6501.010. b. Kohler; Bardon K-4960-T. 3. Flush Valve Manufacturers and Products: a. Sloan; Royal 186-1. b. Delaney; 451-1. 4. Commercial Type Urinal Support Manufacturers: a. J. R. Smith. b. Josam. 2.3 WATER HEATER A. Water Heater: 1. Thirty -gallon capacity minimum, with glass -lined steel tank suitable for 150 psi working pressure, enameled steel insulated jacket and magnesium anode, 220-volt, single-phase power supply. 2. Elements: Each heating element controlled by an individually mounted thermostat and high temperature cutoff switch. 3. Equip with an ASME code rated temperaturelpressure relief valve. 4. Complete Unit: Meet requirements of ASHRAE 90A and be UL listed. 5. Manufacturers: a. Rheem. b. A. O. Smith. C. Or equal. A. Floor Drain: 1. Cast iron body, flashing collar, 6-inch diameter chrome -plated adjustable strainer, removable sediment bucket, cast iron P-trap, trap primer connection. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. J. R. Smith; Figure 2010-A. b. Zurn; Z-415. 2.5 SHOWER A. One-piece molded acrylic sheet reinforced with backing of fiberglass and polyester resin into a seamless unit with smooth, rounded corners, textured BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 15445 3 PLUMBING FDCITJRES AND EQUIPMENT floor suria,..,, soap dish, top and reinforced locations for fastening doors or curtain rods. B. Top may be separate piece. C. Compartment inside dimensions of 36 inches by 40 inches by minimum 78 inches high. D. Meet requirements of ANSI Z124.2. E. Complete with self -caulking brass drain with tailpiece and stainless steel strainer. F. Color: White. G. Constructed of extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T5, satin finished and anodized frame with 3/16-inch tempered glass or acrylic sheet and designed so that water does not leak around sides or bottom when closed. Furnish continuous hinges, guides, handles, latches, fasteners, and other mounting hardware and accessories for a complete installation. H. Hub Drain: 1. Coated cast iron reducing hub adapter with standard cast iron hub. 2. Hub: Two pipe sizes larger than outlet. 2.6 CLEANOUTS A. Floor Cleanout: 1. Cast iron body and frame, and square, adjustable, scoriated, nickel - bronze top. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. J. R. Smith; Figure 4023. b. Zum; Z-1400-2. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Field Obstructions: 1. Install fixtures and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's piping diagrams and instructions. 2. Drawings do not attempt to show exact details of fixtures, nor integral piping accessories for fixtures and equipment to be installed. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 6, 2000 15445 4 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT a. Provide offsets around local obstructions. b. Change location of fixtures and equipment only when approved by ENGINEER. C. Verify measurements and dimensions at the site. 3. Preparation and alteration of structural components required for fixtures and equipment to be installed shall be as approved by ENGINEER. B. Laboratory Service Fixtures: Provide rough -in and connections including stops, flexible supply lines, and traps. C. Plumbing Fixtures and Drains: 1. Trap and vent each plumbing fixture as required by code. 2. Install fixtures and drains true and plumb with separate stops for each fixture supply. 3. Do not use galvanized nipples between copper water supply and angle stops. 4. Provide chrome -plated escutcheons at pipe penetrations of floors, walls, and ceilings. 5. Insulate hot water and drainpipe under lavatories with systems specifically manufactured and approved for handicapped use applications. D. Mounting Heights Above Finished Floor: 1. Drinking Fountain: 38 inches to rim. 2. Drinking Fountain (Wheelchair Unit): Meet local and state laws. 3. Lavatory (Wall -Hung, Handicapped): Meet local and state laws. 4. Shower Trim: 78 inches to shower head. 5. Service Basin: 36 inches to faucet. 6. Water Closet (Flush Valve -Wall -Hung, Handicapped): Meet local and state laws. 7. Urinal (Wall -Hung, Handicapped): Meet local and state laws. 8. Hub Drain: 2 inches to top of hub. icil►�1_�.10 A. Prior to operational startup, inspect and test installed fixtures and equipment for proper connections and operation. BOI158870.A1.FN 15445 JULY • 2000 PLUMBING ► • AND EQUIPMENT 3.3 ADJUSTING/CLEANING A. At end of construction, clean plumbing fixtures, faucet aerators, and drains. Replace fixtures and/or accessories damaged during construction. B. Adjust fixtures and equipment and leave in a working condition. END OF SECTION B0I158870.Al.FN JULY 6, 2000 15445 6 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 15500 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS PARTI GENERAL f . _ �I ,_ ►tom A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA): a. Bulletin 300, Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans, Setup No. 1. b. Standard 99, Standards Handbook. C. Standard 210, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating. d. Standard 2401, Impeller Diameters and Outlet Areas for Centrifugal Fans and Metric Equivalents. 2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers Inc., (ASHRAE): 90A, Energy Conservation in New Building Design. 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): 112, Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators. 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): MG 1-12.53a, Motors and Generators. 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 30, Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code. b. 54, National Fuel Gas Code. C. 88B, Standard for Repair Garages. d. 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. e. 90B, Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning. f. 91, Standard for Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying of Materials. g. 820, Recommended Practice for Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities. 6. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc. (SMACNA): a. Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems. b. HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible. 7. HVAC Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Manual. BOI158870.A1.FN NLY 7, 2000 15500 1 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 8. International Conference : ire Code (UFC): a. Article 79, Flammable and Combustible Liquids. b. Article 80, Hazardous Materials. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Complete specifications, descriptive drawings, catalog cuts, and descriptive literature that include make, model, dimensions, weight of equipment, and electrical schematics for products specified. 2. Complete performance data that indicates full compliance with the Specifications. 3. Recommended procedures for protection and handling of equipment and materials prior to installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EXHAUST FAN UNITS A. Exhaust fans shall be ceiling type, manufactured by Greenheck, Schofield, WI, or approved equal. Fan models shall be as to flows. 1. EF-1, Electrical Room; Model SP-6, 85 cfm at 3/4-inch W.C. 2. EF-2, Janitor Room; Model SP-6, 85 cfm at 3/4-inch W.C. 3. EF-3, Mechanical Room; Model SP-6, 85 cfm at 3/4-inch W.C. 4. EF-4, Shower Room; Model SPA 85 cfm at 3/4-inch W.C. 5. EF-5, Toilet Room; Model SP-12, 167 cfm at 3/4-inch W.C. 6. Exhaust fans shall be installed into 6-inch metal exhaust ducting and exterior exhaust hooded wall cap with built-in damper, Greenheck; Model WC-6. The location of the exhaust fan shall be as shown on the Drawings. 2.2 CONTROL ROOM HVAC UNIT A. HVAC-1, wall -mounted heating and cooling heat pump, manufactured by Carrier, or equal. Model XQB 183D X Series heat pump, capacity 17,100 btu/hr. EER 9.4, for cooling and heating, wall installation, 208 volts. 2.3 HEATING UNITS A. Room heating units shall be TPI Corporation Raywall, (800) 251-0382, wall mounted, Model FPQ Series fan forced wall heaters, for surface wall '? 3 BOI158870.A1.FN DULY 7, 2000 15500 2 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS mou. 240/208 volts, thermal overload cutoff, built-in thermostat, and manual disconnect switch. B. Room Heating Units Shall Be: 1. H3-, Mechanical Room, 2,000/1,500 watts; Model FPQ2-20S. 2. H-2, Janitor Room, 2,000/1,500 watts; Model FPQ2-20S. 3. H-1, Electrical Room, 2,000/1,500 watts; Model FPQ2-20S. 4. H-5, Toilet Room, 4,000/3,000 watts; Model FDQ2-40S. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment and systems in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Condensing Units: Provide refrigeration specialties, combination temperaturelpressure gauges, piping, and refrigerant as required by the manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Packaged Wall Mounted Heat Pumps and Air Conditioning Units: x 1. Mount level and according to manufacturer's instructions. 2. Provide access for maintenance. 3. Provide water tight wall installation. D. Fans and Air Handlers: 1. Pipe drain pan connection through a running trap to floor drain. 2. Isolate sheet metal duct connections from noninternally spring -isolated fan units or other rotating equipment. 3. Locate units approximately where shown to provide access spaces required for filter changing; motor, drive, and bearing servicing; and fan shaft and coil removal. 4. Units with Multiple Heating or Cooling Coils: Pipe such that each coil has a manual balancing cock and gauge cock as required for water balancing. 5. Inspect internal casing insulation, seal exposed edges, and butt joints with mastic to ensure insulation will not be loosened during operation. E. Ductwork: 1. Install sheet metalwork and flexible ductwork in accordance with the latest edition of the SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards." 2. Cross -break horizontal surfaces of rectangular metal ducts. t-, B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 15500 3 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 3. Install additional bracing as required to prey. , or breathing. 4. For interior ductwork, tape joints with Hardcast Lag -Rite tape and bonder or Ray -Chem shrink tape. For exterior ductwork, tape joints with Hardcast outdoor tape and rosin. Tape joints according to the following table: Pressure Class Sealing Required 2-inch WC or less Transverse joints >2-inch WC Transverse joints and longitudinal seams 5. Seal joints of ductwork. 6. Provide balancing dampers for grilles and diffusers in the branch duct as near the main as possible. Add or remove balancing dampers as requested by the air balancing firm for necessary control of air. 7. Make duct size transitions with the maximum inclusive angle of 30 degrees, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 8. Make offsets with maximum angle of 45 degrees. F. Install diffusers, grilles, and registers tight on their respective mounting surfaces, plumb and true with room dimensions. G. Provide appropriate frame to adapt to mounting surface. END OF SECTION BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 15500 4 BEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS LION 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PARTI GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS A. Requirements specified within this section apply to all sections in Division 16, ELECTRICAL. Work specified herein shall be performed as if specified in the individual sections. 1.2 STANDARDS, CODES, PERMITS, AND REGULATIONS A. GENERAL 1. Perform all work; furnish and install all materials and equipment in full accordance with the latest applicable rules, regulations, requirements, and specifications of the following: a. Local Laws and Ordinances. b. State and Federal Laws. C. National Electrical Code (NEC). d. State Fire Marshal. e. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL). f. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). g. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). h. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). i. National Electrical Contractor's Association (NECA) Standard of Installation. j. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). k. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA). 1. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). in. National Electrical Testing Association (NETA). n. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 2. Conflicts, if any, that may exist between the above items will be resolved at the discretion of the ENGINEER. 3. Wherever the requirements of the Specifications or Drawings exceed those of the above items, the requirements of the Specifications or Drawings govern. Code compliance is mandatory. Construe nothing in the Contract Documents as permitting work not in compliance with these codes. 4. Obtain all permits and pay all fees required by any governmental agency having jurisdiction over the work. Arrange all inspections required by these agencies. On completion of the work, furnish satisfactory evidence B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16010 1 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 3. Unbalance Corrections: a. Make written request to power company to correct condition if balance (as defined by NEMA) exceeds 1 percent, or if voltage varies throughout the day and from loaded to unloaded condition more than plus or minus 4 percent of nominal. b. Obtain a written certification from a responsible power company official that the voltage variations and unbalance are within their normal standards if corrections are not made. B. Equipment Line Current Tests: 1. Check line current in each phase for each piece of equipment. 2. Make line current check after power company has made final adjustments to supply voltage magnitude or balance. 3. If any phase current for any piece of equipment is above rated nameplate current, prepare Equipment Line Phase Current Report that identifies cause of problem and corrective action taken. END OF SECTION BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16010 4 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 1.1 SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS GENERAL REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. C55.1, Standard for Shunt Power Capacitors. b. C62.11, Standard for Metal -Oxide Surge Arrestors for AC Circuits. C. Z55.1, Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and Equipment. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. b. A240, Standard Specification for Heat -Resisting Chromium and Chromium -Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels. C. A570, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, and Strip, Carbon, Hot -Rolled, Structural Quality. 3. Federal Specifications (FS): a. W-C-596, Connector, Receptacle, Electrical. b. W-S-896E, Switches, Toggle, Flush Mounted. 4. National Electrical Contractor's Association, Inc. (NECA): 5055, Standard of Installation. 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. AB 1, Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. C. CP 1, Shunt Capacitors. d. ICS 2, Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. e. KS 1, Enclosed Switches. f. LA 1, Surge Arrestors. g. PB 1, Panelboards. h. ST 20, Dry -Type Transformers for General Applications. i. WD 1, General Requirements for Wiring Devices. 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 7. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 67, Standard for Panelboards. b. 98, Standard for Enclosed and Dead -Front Switches. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16050 1 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2) Appleton; FSK-1VTS orFSK-1VS. H. Raised Sheet Metal: 1/2-inch high zinc- or cadmium -plated steel designed for one-piece drawn type sheet steel boxes. I. Sheet Steel: Formed sheet steel or Feraloy designed for installation on cast metal boxes. 2.7 LIGHTING AND POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD A. NEMA PB 1, NFPA 70, and UL 67. B. Panelboards and Circuit Breakers: Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity. C. Short -Circuit Current Equipment Rating: Fully rated; series connected unacceptable. D. Rating: Applicable to a system with available short-circuit current of the indicated value amperes rms symmetrical at 208Y/120 or 120/240 volts amperes rms symmetrical. E. Cabinet: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Material: Code -gauge, hot -dip galvanized sheet steel, with reinforced steel frame. 3. Wiring Gutter: Minimum 4-inch square; both sides, top and bottom. 4. Front: Fastened with adjustable clamps. a. Trim Size: 1) Surface Mounted: Same as box. 2) Flush Mounted: 3/4-inch larger than box on all sides. b. Finish: Rust inhibitor prime, with manufacturer's standard baked enamel or lacquer. 5. Interior: a. Factory assembled; complete with circuit breakers. b. Capable of circuit breaker replacement without disturbing adjacent circuit breakers or without removing main bus. C. Spaces: Cover openings with easily removable metal cover. 6. Door Hinges: Concealed. 7. Locking Device: a. Flush type. b. Doors Over 30 Inches in Height: Multipoint. C. Identical keylocks, with two milled keys each lock. BOI158870.A1.FN - JULY 10, 2000 16050 8 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIAL AND METHODS 8. Circuit Directory: Metal frame with transparent plastic face and enclosed card on interior of door. 1. Material: Copper full sized throughout length. 2. Provide for mounting of future circuit breakers along full length of bus regardless of number of units and spaces shown. Machine, drill, and tap as required for current and future positions. 3. Neutral: Insulated, rated same as phase bus bars with at least one terminal screw for each branch circuit. 4. Ground: Copper, installed on panelboard frame, bonded to box with at least one terminal screw for each circuit. 5. Lugs and Connection Points: a. Suitable for either copper or aluminum conductors. b. Solderless main lugs for main, neutral, and ground bus bars. C. Subfeed or through -feed lugs as shown. 6. Bolt together and rigidly support bus bars and connection straps on molded insulators. G. Circuit Breakers: 1. NEMA AB 1 and UL 489. 2. Thermal -magnetic, quick -make, quick -break, molded case, of indicating type showing ON/OFF and TRIPPED positions of operating handle. 3. Noninterchangeable, in accordance with NFPA 70. 4. Locking: Provisions for handle padlocking, unless otherwise shown. 5. Type: Bolt -on circuit breakers in all panelboards. 6. Multi -pole circuit breakers designed to automatically open all poles when an overload occurs on one pole. 7. Do not substitute single -pole circuit breakers with handle ties for multi -pole breakers. 8. Do not use tandem or dual circuit breakers in normal single -pole spaces. 9. Ground Fault Interrupter: a. Equip with conventional thermal -magnetic trip and ground fault sensor rated to trip in 0.025 second for a 5 mA ground fault (UL 943, Class A sensitivity). b. Sensor with same rating as circuit breaker and a push -to -test button. H. Manufacturers: 1. 2. B0I158870.A1.FN 16050 Bryant. Cutler -Hammer. JULY 10, 2000 9 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 3. General Electric. 4. Gould I-T-E. 5. Square D. 6. Westinghouse. 2.8 NONFUSED SWITCH, INDIVIDUAL, 0 TO 600 VOLTS A. NEMA KS 1. B. Quick -make, quick -break, motor rated, load -break, heavy-duty (HD) type with external markings clearly indicating ON/OFF positions. C. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity. D. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type as indicated in Part 3 of this Specification unless otherwise shown. E. Interlock: Enclosure and switch to prevent opening cover with switch in the ON position. 2.9 FUSE, 0 TO 600 VOLTS A. Current -limiting, with 200,000 ampere rms interrupting rating. B. Provide to fit mountings specified with switches and features to reject Class H fuses. C. Motor and Transformer Circuits, 0- to 600-Volt: 1. Amperage: 0 to 600. 2. UL 198E, Class RK-1, dual element, with time delay. 3. Manufacturers: a. Bussmann; Type LPS-RK. b. Littelfuse; Type LLS-RK. D. Motor and Transformer Circuits, 0- to 250-Volt: 1. Amperage: 0 to 600. 2. UL 198E, Class RK-1, dual element, with time delay. 3. Manufacturers: a. Bussmann; Type LPN-RK. b. Littelfuse; Type LLN-RK. E. Feeder and Service Circuits, 0- to 600-Volt: BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16050 10 BASIC ELECTRICAL } MATERIALS AND METHODS 1. Amperage: 0 to 600. 2. UL 198E, Class RK-1, dual element, with time delay. 3. Manufacturers: a. Bussmann; Type LPS-RK. b. Littelfuse; Type LLS-RK. F. Feeder and Service Circuits, 0- to 250-Volt: 1. Amperage: 0 to 600. 2. UL 198E, Class RK-1, dual element, with time delay. 3. Manufacturers: a. Bussmann; Type LPN-RK. b. Littelfuse; Type LLN-RK. G. Feeder and Service Circuits, 0- to 600-Volt: 1. Amperage: 601 to 6,000. 2. UL 198C, Class L, double O-rings and silver links. 3. Manufacturers: a. Bussmann; Type KRP-C. b. Littelfuse; Type KLPC. 2.10 PUSHBUTTON, INDICATING LIGHT, AND SELECTOR SWITCHES A. Contact Rating: NEMA ICS 2, Type A600. B. Selector Switch Operating Lever: Standard. C. Indicating Lights: Push -to -test, Transformer -type. D. Pushbutton Color: 1. ON or START: Black. 2. OFF or STOP: Red. E. Pushbuttons and selector switches lockable in OFF position where indicated. F. Legend Plate: 1. Material: Aluminum. 2. Engraving: 11 character/spaces on one line, 14 character/spaces on each of two lines, as required, indicating specific function. 3. Letter Height: 7/64-inch. G. Manufacturers: BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16050 11 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS t. 1. Heavy -Duty, Oiltight Type: a. General Electric; Type CR 104P. b. Square D; Type T. C. Cutler -Hammer; Type 10250T. 2. Heavy -Duty, Watertight, and Corrosion -Resistant Type: a. Square D; Type SK. b. General Electric; Type CR 104P. C. Cutler -Hammer; Type E34. d. Crouse -Hinds; Type NCS. 2.11 TERMINAL JUNCTION BOX A. Cover: Hinged, unless otherwise shown. r._ B. Interior Finish: Paint with white enamel or lacquer. C. Terminal Blocks: 1. Separate connection point for each conductor entering or leaving box. 2. Spare Terminal Points: 25 percent. 2.12 TERMINAL BLOCK (0 TO 600 VOLTS) = A. UL 486E and UL 1059. B. Size components to allow insertion of necessary wire sizes. r C. Capable of termination of control circuits entering or leaving equipment, panels, or boxes. D. Screw clamp compression, dead front barrier type, with current bar providing t direct contact with wire between compression screw and yoke.: E. Yoke, current bar, and clamping screw of high strength and high conductivity metal. F. Yoke shall guide all strands of wire into terminal. G. Current bar shall ensure vibration -proof connection. H. Terminals: 1. Capable of wire connections without special preparation other than stripping. 2. Capable of jumper installation with no loss of terminal or rail space. 3. Individual, rail mounted. iL B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16050 12 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS ~' I. Marking system, allowing use of preprinted or field -marked tags. J. Manufacturers: 1. Weidmuller. 2. Ideal. 3. Electrovert. 2.13 MAGNETIC CONTROL RELAY A. NEMA ICS 2, Class A600 (600 volts, 10 amps continuous, 7,200VA make, 720VA break), industrial control with field convertible contacts. B. Time Delay Relay Attachment: 1. Pneumatic type, timer adjustable from 0.2 to 60 seconds (minimum). 2. Field convertible from ON delay to OFF delay and vice versa. C. Latching Attachment: Mechanical latch having unlatching coil and coil clearing contacts. D. Manufacturers: 1. Cutler -Hammer; Type M-300. 2. General Electric; Type CR120A. 2.14 MAGNETIC CONTACTOR A. NEMA ICS 2, UL 508. B. Electrically operated, electrically or mechanically held as shown. C. Main Contacts: 1. Power driven in one direction with gravity dropout. 2. Silver alloy with wiping action and arc quenchers. 3. Continuous -duty, rated 20 amperes, 600 volt. 4. Two -pole. D. Control: Two -wire or three -wire with hold -in contact. As shown. E. One normally open and one normally closed auxiliary contact rated 10 amperes at 480 volt. F. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 12, unless otherwise shown. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16050 13 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS G. Manufacturers: 1. Westinghouse; Class A201. 2. General Electric; CR 353. 3. Allen-Bradley; Bulletin 500 Line. 2.15 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER (0- TO 600-VOLT PRIMARY) A. UL 1561, NEMA ST 20, unless otherwise indicated. B. Self -cooled, two -winding. C. Insulation Class and Temperature Rise: Manufacturer's standard. D. Core and Coil: 1. Encapsulated for single-phase units 1/2 to 25 kVA and for three-phase units 3 to 15 kVA. 2. Thermosetting varnish impregnated for single-phase units 37.5 kVA and above, and for three-phase units 30 kVA and above. E. Units larger than 5 kVA suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity. F. Enclosure: 1. Single -Phase, 3 to 25 kVA: NEMA 250, Type 3R, nonventilated. 2. Single -Phase, 37-1/2 kVA and Above: NEMA 250, Type 2, ventilated. 3. Three -Phase, 3 to 15 kVA: NEMA 250, Type 3R, nonventilated. 4. Three -Phase, 30 kVA and Above: NEMA 250, Type 2, ventilated. 5. Outdoor Transformers: NEMA 250, Type 3R. G. Wall Bracket: For single-phase units, 15 to 37-1/2 kVA, and for three-phase units, 15 to 30 kVA. H. Voltage Taps: 1. Single -Phase, 3 to 10 kVA: Four 2-1/2 percent, full capacity; two above and two below normal voltage rating. 2. Single -Phase, 15 kVA and Above: Four 2-1/2 percent, full capacity; two above and two below normal voltage rating. 3. Three -Phase, 3 to 15 kVA: Four 2-1/2 percent, full capacity; two above and two below normal voltage rating. 4. Three -Phase, 30 kVA and Above: Four 2-1/2 percent, full capacity; two above and two below normal voltage rating. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16050 14 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS I. Impedance: 4.5 percent minimum on units 75 kVA and larger. J. Maximum Sound Level: NEMA ST 20: 1. 40 decibels for 0 to 9 kVA. 2. 45 decibels for 10 to 50 kVA. 3. 50 decibels for 51 to 150 kVA. 4. 55 decibels for 151 to 300 kVA. 5. 60 decibels for 301 to 500 kVA. K. Vibration Isolators: 1. Rated for transformer's weight. 2. Isolation Efficiency: 99 percent, at fundamental frequency of sound emitted by transformer. 3. Less Than 30 kVA: Isolate entire unit from structure with external vibration isolators. 4. 30 kVA and Above: Isolate core and coil assembly from transformer enclosure with integral vibration isolator. L. Manufacturers: 1. General Electric. 2. Square D. 3. Westinghouse. 2.16 IGNMON SYSTEM A. General: The system shall consist of ignitors and ignition exciters, installed and connected as shown for remote control. B. Ignitors: Provide high tension -type units (suitable for operation at 18 to 24 kilovolts) of stainless steel construction and equipped with cooling (drainage) ports. Provide threaded terminal end with matching ARP -type termination kit suitable for connection of the high voltage cable shown and providing a waterproof termination. Ignitors shall be threaded at a suitable location along the barrel for installation in the ignitor box as shown. Provide Champion Aviation Products Division Model CH31723, or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. _ a C. Ignitor Boxes: Provide cast aluminum explosion -proof and waterproof enclosures as shown. Minimum box size shall be 12 inches by 12 inches by ° 8 inches deep. Provide gasketed cover, stainless steel cover bolts, watertight conduit penetrations as required, and an internal grounding lug. The box cover shall be drilled and tapped or provided with welded -on hub as required to t_ B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16050 15 BASIC ELECTRICAL { MATERIALS AND METHODS accommodate the ignitor. Seal this connection for a fully -waterproof installation. Submit ignitor installation details for approval. Provide Crouse - Hinds Model EJB, Style C, or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. D. Exciters: Provide exciters suitable for operation with the specified ignitors. Exciters shall be capacitive -discharge -type delivering an ionization pulse of 18 to 24 kilovolts peak. Exciter stored energy shall be 2 to 4 joules with a spark frequency of approximately 5 per second. Provide exciters suitable for I I5V ac input, with barrier -type terminal blocks for low and high voltage connections and ARP -type connector for the high voltage connection. Provide matching ARP -type termination kit suitable for connection of the high voltage cable shown. Provide Champion Aviation Products Division Model 305116, or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. E. Exciter Panels: Provide NEMA 3R enclosures containing burn pit zone groups, as shown. Provide individual low -voltage primary fusing. Route all interior high -voltage secondary cable in nonmetallic (PVC) flexible conduit (or by other approved method) for insulated support and segregation. F. Ignition Control Panel: Provide burn pit zone ignition control contactors and other components as shown in a NEMA 1 enclosure. All interfaces with remote devices shall utilize numbered terminal blocks. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install equipment in accordance with NECA 5055. t 1 A. Install suitable for conditions encountered at each outlet or device in wiring or raceway system, sized to meet NFPA 70 requirements. B. Size: 1. Depth: Minimum 2 inches, unless otherwise required by structural conditions. Box extensions not permitted. a. Hollow Masonry Construction: Install with sufficient depth such that conduit knockouts or hubs are in masonry void space. 2. Ceiling Outlet: Minimum 4-inch octagonal sheet steel device box, unless otherwise required for installed fixture. 3. Switch and Receptacle: Minimum 2-inch by 4-inch sheet steel device box. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16050 16 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS C. Locations: 1. Drawing locations are approximate. 2. To avoid interference with mechanical equipment or structural features, relocate outlets as directed by ENGINEER. 3. Light Switch: Install on lock side of doors. 4. Light Fixture: Install in symmetrical pattern according to room layout unless otherwise shown. D. Mounting Height: 1. General: a. Dimensions given to centerline of box. b. Where specified heights do not suit building construction or finish, mount as directed by ENGINEER. 2. Light Switch: 48 inches above floor. 3. Thermostat: 54 inches above floor. 4. Telephone Outlet: 6 inches above counter tops or 15 inches above floor. 5. Wall Mounted Telephone Outlet: 52 inches above floor. 6. Convenience Receptacle: a. General Interior Areas: 15 inches above floor. b. General Interior Areas (Counter Tops): Install device plate bottom or side flush with top of splashback, or 6 inches above counter tops without splashback. C. Industrial Areas, Workshops: 48 inches above floor. d. Outdoor, All Areas: 24 inches above finished grade. 7. Special -Purpose Receptacle: 48 inches above floor or as shown. 8. Switch, Motor Starting: 48 inches above floor, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. E. Install plumb and level. F. Flush Mounted: 1. Install with concealed conduit. 2. Install proper type extension rings or plaster covers to make edges of boxes flush with finished surface. 3. Holes in surrounding surface shall be no larger than required to receive box. ` G. Support boxes independently of conduit by attachment to building structure or structural member. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16050 17 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS H. Install bar hangers in frame construction, or fasten boxes directly with wood screws on wood, bolts and expansion shields on concrete or brick, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, and machine screws threaded into steelwork. I. Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts are acceptable in lieu of expansion shields. J. Provide plaster rings where necessary. K. Boxes embedded in concrete or masonry need not be additionally supported L. Install galvanized mounting hardware in industrial areas. M. Install separate junction boxes for flush or recessed lighting fixtures where required by fixture terminal temperature. N. Boxes Supporting Fixtures: Provide means of attachment with adequate strength to support fixture. O. Open no more knockouts in sheet steel device boxes than are required; seal unused openings. P. Box Type (Steel Raceway System): 1. Exterior Locations: a. Exposed Raceways: Cast metal. b. Concealed Raceways: Cast metal. C. Concrete Encased Raceways: Cast metal. d. Class I, II, or III Hazardous Areas: Cast metal. 2. Interior Dry Locations: a. Exposed Rigid Conduit or IMC: Cast metal. b. Exposed EMT: Sheet steel. C. Concealed Raceways: Sheet steel. d. Concrete Encased Raceways: Cast metal. e. Lighting Circuits, Ceiling: Sheet steel. f. Class I, II, or III Hazardous Areas: Cast metal. 3. Interior Wet Locations: a. Exposed Raceways: Cast metal. b. Concealed Raceways: Cast metal. C. Concrete Encased Raceways: Cast metal. d. Lighting Circuits, Ceiling: Sheet steel. e. Class I, II, or III Hazardous Areas: Cast metal. 4. Cast -In -Place Concrete Slabs: Sheet steel. Q. Box Type (Rigid Aluminum Raceway System): Cast aluminum. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16050 18 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS R. Box Type (Nonmetallic Raceway System): 1. Corrosive Locations: Nonmetallic. 2. Exposed Raceways: Nonmetallic. 3. Concealed Raceways: Nonmetallic. 4. Concrete Encased Raceways: Nonmetallic. S. Box Type, Corrosive Locations (PVC -Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Raceway System): PVC -coated cast metal. 3.3 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES A. Install where shown and where necessary to terminate, tap -off, or redirect multiple conduit runs. B. Install pull boxes where necessary in raceway system to facilitate conductor installation. C. Install in conduit runs at least every 150 feet or after the equivalent of three right-angle bends. D. Use outlet boxes as junction and pull boxes wherever possible and allowed by applicable codes. E. Use conduit bodies as junction and pull boxes where no splices are required and their use is allowed by applicable codes. F. Installed boxes shall be accessible. G. Do not install on finished surfaces. H. Install plumb and level. I. Support boxes independently of conduit by attachment to building structure or structural member. J. Install bar hangers in frame construction, or fasten boxes directly with wood screws on wood, bolts and expansion shields on concrete or brick, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, and machine screws or welded threaded studs on steelwork. `-a K. Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lock washers _ and nuts are acceptable in lieu of expansion shields. L. Boxes embedded in concrete or masonry need not be additionally supported. BOI158870.A1.FN DULY 10, 2000 16050 19 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS M. At or Below Grade: 1. Install boxes for below grade conduit flush with finished grade in locations outside of paved areas, roadways, or walkways. 2. If adjacent structure is available, box may be mounted on structure surface just above finished grade in accessible but unobtrusive location. 3. Obtain ENGINEER's written acceptance prior to installation in paved areas, roadways, or walkways. 4. Use boxes and covers suitable to support anticipated weights. N. Flush Mounted: 1. Install with concealed conduit. 2. Holes in surrounding surface shall be no larger than required to receive box. 3. Make edges of boxes flush with final surface. O. Mounting Hardware: 1. Noncorrosive Dry Areas: Galvanized. 2. Noncorrosive Wet Areas: Stainless steel 3. Corrosive Areas: Stainless steel. P. Location/Type: 1. Finished, Indoor, Dry: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Unfinished, Indoor, Dry: NEMA 250, Type 12. 3. Unfinished, Indoor and Outdoor, Wet: NEMA 250, Type 4. 4. Unfinished, Indoor and Outdoor, Wet and Corrosive: NEMA 250, Type 4X. 5. Unfinished, Indoor and Outdoor, Wet, Dust, or Oil: NEMA 250, Type 13. 6. Unfinished, Indoor and Outdoor, Hazardous: NEMA 250, Type 7 and Type 9, where indicated. 7. Underground Conduit: Concrete. 8. Corrosive Locations: NEMA 250 Type 4X, stainless steel. 9. General Use in Finished Areas: NEMA 250, Type 1. 10. Wet or Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R, Outdoor. 11. Industrial Use in Areas Not Otherwise Classified: NEMA 250, Type 12, unless otherwise shown. Q. Install Drain/breather fittings in NEMA 250 Type 4 and Type 4X enclosures. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16050 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 3.4 TELEPHONE TERMINAL CABINET A. Install with top of cabinet 6 feet above floor. B. Minimum Installed Door Opening: 120 degrees. 3.5 TELEPHONE OUTLET A. Provide empty outlet boxes and cover plates meeting requirements of telephone company. 3.6 WIRING DEVICES A. Switches: 1. Mounting Height: See Article OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES. 2. Install with switch operation in vertical position. 3. Install single -pole, two-way switches such that toggle is in up position when switch is on. B. Receptacles: 1. Install with grounding slot down except where horizontal mounting is shown, in which case install with neutral slot up. 2. Ground receptacles to boxes with grounding wire only. 3. Weatherproof Receptacles: a. Install in cast metal box. b. Install such that hinge for protective cover is above receptacle opening. 4. Ground Fault Interrupter: Install feed -through model at locations where ground fault protection is specified for "downstream" conventional receptacles. 5. Special -Purpose Receptacles: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Switch, Motor Rated: 1. Install with switch operation in vertical position such that toggle is in up position when ON. 2. Install within sight of motor when used as a disconnect switch. 3. Mounting Height: See Article OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES. 4. Enclosure Type: See Article OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16050 21 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 3.7 DEVICE PLATES A. Securely fasten to wiring device; ensure a tight fit to box. B. Flush Mounted: Install with all four edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces without use of mats or similar materials. Plaster fillings will not be acceptable. C. Surface Mounted: Plate shall not extend beyond sides of box unless plates have no sharp corners or edges. D. Install with alignment tolerance to box of 1/16 inch. E. Types (Unless Otherwise Shown): 1. Office: Plastic. 2. Exterior: Weatherproof. 3. Interior: a. Flush Mounted Boxes: Plastic. b. Surface Mounted, Metal Boxes: 1) General Purpose Areas: Sheet Steel. 2) Other Areas: Cast. C. Surface Mounted, Aluminum Boxes: 1) General Purpose Areas: Stamped. 2) Other Areas: Cast. d. Surface Mounted, Sheet Steel Boxes: Raised sheet steel. e. Surface Mounted, Nonmetallic Boxes: Manufacturer's standard. 3.8 PUSHBUTTON, INDICATING LIGHT, AND SELECTOR SWITCH A. Heavy -Duty, Oiltight Type: Locations (Unless Otherwise Shown): Nonhazardous, indoor, dry locations, including motor control centers, control panels, and individual stations. B. Heavy -Duty, Watertight, and Corrosion -Resistant Type: 1. Locations (Unless Otherwise Shown): Nonhazardous, outdoor, or normally wet areas. 2. Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosure. 3.9 TERMINAL JUNCTION BOX A. Install in accordance with Article JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES. B. Label each block and terminal with permanently attached, nondestructible tag. BOI158870.A1.FN 16050 22 JULY 10, 2000 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 3.10 3.11 3.12 C. Do not install on finished outdoor surfaces. D. Location/Type: 1. Finished, Indoor, Dry: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Unfinished, Indoor, Dry: NEMA 250, Type 12. 3. Unfinished, Indoor and Outdoor, Wet: NEMA 250, Type 4. 4. Unfinished, Indoor and Outdoor, Wet and Corrosive: NEMA 250, Type 4X. 5. Unfinished, Indoor and Outdoor, Wet, Dust, or Oil: NEMA 250, Type 13. LIGHTING AND POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD A. Install securely, plumb, in -line and square with walls. B. Install top of cabinet 6 feet above floor unless otherwise shown. C. Provide typewritten circuit directory for each panelboard. D. Cabinet Location/Type: 1. General Use in Finished Areas: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Wet or Outdoor: NEMA 250, Type 3R, Outdoor. 3. Industrial Use in Areas Not Otherwise Classified: NEMA 250, Type 12, unless otherwise shown. CIRCUIT BREAKER, FUSED SWITCH, AND NONFUSED SWITCH ENCLOSURES A. Location/Type: 1. Hazardous Gas: NEMA 250, Type 7. 2. Hazardous Dust: NEMA 250, Type 9. 3. Wet: NEMA 250, Type 4. 4. Corrosive: NEMA 250, Type 4X. 5. Wet/Corrosive: NEMA 250, Type 4X. 6. Industrial Use: NEMA 250, Type 12. 7. General Purpose: NEMA 250, Type 1. 8. Where denoted WP: NEMA 250, Type 3R. DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER (0- TO 600-VOLT PRIMARY) A. Load external vibration isolator such that no direct transformer unit metal is in direct contact with mounting surface. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16050 23 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS B. Provide moisture -proof, flexible conduit for electrical connections. C. Connect voltage taps to achieve (approximately) rated output voltage under normal plant load conditions. D. Provide wall brackets for single-phase units, 15 to 167-1/2 kVA, and three-phase units, 15 to 112 kVA. END OF SECTION B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16050 24 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials - (AASHTO): Division I, Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, Fourteenth Edition. 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. C80.1, Rigid Steel Conduit -Zinc Coated. b. C80.3, Electrical Metallic Tubing -Zinc Coated. C. C80.5, Aluminum Rigid Conduit. d. C80.6, Intermediate Metal Conduit OMC)-Zinc Coated. 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A123, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. b. C857, Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures. 4. National Electrical Contractor's Association, Inc. (NECA): 5055, Standard of Installation. 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. RN 1, Polyvinyl -Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. b. TC 2, Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80). C. TC 3, PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. d. TC 6, PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation. e. VE 1, Metallic Cable Tray Systems. 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code. (NEC) 7. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 1, Standard for Safety Flexible Metal Conduit. b. 6, Standard for Safety Rigid Metal Conduit. C. 360, Standard for Safety Liquid -Tight Flexible Steel Conduit. d. 514B, Standard for Safety Fittings for Cable and Conduit. - e. 514C, Standard for Safety Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush - Device Boxes, and Covers. �E f. 651, Standard for Safety Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16110 1 RACEWAYS g. 651A, Standard for Safety Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit. h. 797, Standard for Safety Electrical Metallic Tubing. i. 870, Standard for Safety Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings. j. 1242, Standard for Safety Intermediate Metal Conduit. k. 1660, Standard for Safety Liquid -Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: a. Rigid galvanized steel conduit. b. Electric metallic tubing. C. PVC Schedule 40 conduit. d. Flexible metal, liquid -tight conduit. e. Conduit fittings. f. Wireways. 2. Precast Manholes and Hndholes: a. Dimensional drawings and descriptive literature. b. Traffic loading calculations. C. Accessory information. 3. Conduit Layout: a. Plan and section type, showing arrangement and location of conduit and duct bank required for: 1) Low and medium voltage feeder and branch circuits. 2) Instrumentation and control systems. 3) Communications systems. 4) Empty conduit for future use. b. Reproducible mylar•, scale not greater than 1-inch equals 20 feet. 4. Equipment and machinery proposed for bending metal conduit. 5. Method for bending PVC conduit less than 30 degrees. B. Quality Control Submittals: Submit copy of manufacturers' certification of training for PVC -coated rigid steel conduit installer. 1.3 UL COMPLIANCE A. Materials manufactured within scope of Underwriters Laboratories shall conform to UL Standards and have an applied UL listing mark. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16110 2 RACEWAYS 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. PVC -Coated, Rigid Steel Conduit Installer: Must be certified by the conduit manufacturer as having received minimum 2 hours of training on correct installation procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS): 1. Meet requirements of ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. 2. Material: Hot -dip galvanized, with chromated protective layer. B. Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT): 1. Meet requirements of ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. 2. Material: Hot -dip galvanized, with chromated and lacquered protective layer. C. PVC Schedule 40 Conduit: 1. Meet requirements of NEMA TC 2 and UL 651. 2. UL listed for concrete encasement, underground direct burial, concealed or direct sunlight exposure, and 90 degrees C insulated conductors. 3. Furnish without factory -formed bell. D. Flexible Metal, Liquid -Tight Conduit: 1. UL 360 listed for 105 degrees C insulated conductors. 2. Material: Galvanized steel, with an extruded PVC jacket. 2.2 FITTINGS A. Rigid Galvanized Steel and Intermediate Metal Conduit: 1. General: a. Meet requirements of UL 514B. b. Type: Threaded, galvanized. Set screw and threadless compression fittings not permitted. 2. Bushing: a. Material: Malleable iron with integral insulated throat, rated for 150 degrees C. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16110 3 RACEWAYS b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thomas & Betts; Type BIM. 2) O.Z. Gedney; Type HB. 3. Grounding Bushing: a. Material: Malleable iron with integral insulated throat rated for 150 degrees C, with solderless lugs. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Appleton; Series GIB. 2) O.Z. Gedney; Type HBLG. 4. Conduit Hub: a. Material: Malleable iron with insulated throat with bonding screw. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) O.Z. Gedney; Series CH. 2) T & B; Series 400. 5. Conduit Bodies: a. Sized as required by NFPA 70. b. Manufacturers and Products (For Normal Conditions): 1) Appleton; Form 35 threaded unilets. 2) Crouse -Hinds; Form 7 or 8 threaded condulets. 3) Killark; Series O electrolets. C. Manufacturers and Products (For Hazardous Locations): 1) Appleton. 2) Crouse -Hinds. 3) Killark. 6. Couplings: As supplied by conduit manufacturer. 7. Unions: a. Concrete tight, hot dip galvanized, malleable iron. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) O,Z. Gedney; Type SSP or Type 4 series. 2) Raco; hinged coupling or three-piece coupling. 8. Conduit Sealing Fitting Manufacturers and Products: a. Appleton; Type EYF, EYM, or ESU. b. Crouse -Hinds; Type EYS or EZS. C. Killark; Type EY or EYS. 9. Drain Seal Manufacturers and Products: a. Appleton; Type SF. b. Crouse -Hinds; Type EYD or EZD. 10. Drain/Breather Fitting Manufacturers and Products: a. Appleton; Type ECDB. b. Crouse -Hinds; ECD. 11. Expansion Fitting Manufacturers and Products: a. Deflection/Expansion Movement: 1) Appleton; Type DF. 2) Crouse -Hinds; Type XD. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16110 4 RACEWAYS b. Expansion Movement Only: 1) Appleton; Type XJ. 2) Crouse -Hinds; Type XJ. 12. Cable Sealing Fittings: a. To form watertight nonslip cord or cable connection to conduit. b. For Conductors With OD of 1/2-inch or Less: Neoprene bushing at connector entry. C. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Crouse -Hinds; CGBS. 2) Appleton; CG-S. B. Electric Metallic Tubing: 1. Meet requirements of UL 514B. 2. Type: Steel body and locknuts with steel or malleable iron compression nuts. Set screw and drive -on fittings not permitted. 3. Compression Ring: Stainless steel. 4. Coupling Manufacturers and Products: a. Appleton; Type 95T. b. Crouse -Hinds; Type CPR. 5. Connector Manufacturers and Products: a. Appleton; Type 86T. b. Crouse -Hinds; Type CPR. C. PVC Conduit and Tubing: 1. Meet requirements of NEMA TC-3. 2. Type: PVC, slip-on. D. Flexible Metal, Liquid -Tight Conduit: 1. Metal insulated throat connectors with integral nylon or plastic bushing rated for 105 degrees C. 2. Insulated throat and sealing O-rings. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. T & B; Series 5331. b. O.Z. Gedney; Series 4Q. 2.3 METAL WIREWAYS A. Meet requirements of UL 870. B. Type: Steel -enclosed, with removable, screw type cover. C. Rating: Indoor. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16110 5 RACEWAYS D. Finish: Gray, baked enamel. E. Manufacturers: 1. Square D. 2. B-Line Systems, Inc. 2.4 PRECAST MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES j A. Concrete Strength: Minimum, 3,000 psi compressive, in 28 days. B. Loading: AASHTO Division 1, H-20 in accordance with ASTM C857. C. Access: Provide cast concrete 6- or 12-inch risers and access hole adapters between top of manhole and finished grade at required elevations. D. Drainage: Slope floors toward drain points, leaving no pockets or other nondraining areas. E. Raceway Entrances: 1. Provide on all four sides. 2. For raceways to be installed under this Contract, provide knockout L� panels or precast individual raceway openings. 3. At entrances where raceways are to be installed by others, provide minimum 12-inch high by 24-inch wide knockout panels for future raceway installation. F. Embedded Pulling Iron: j 1. Material: 3/4-inch diameter stock, fastened to overall steel reinforcement before concrete is placed. 2. Location: a. Wall: Opposite each raceway entrance and knockout panel for z future raceway entrance. b. Floor: Centered below manhole or handhole cover. G. Cable Racks: 1. Arms and Insulators: Adjustable, of sufficient number to accommodate cables for each raceway entering or leaving manhole, including spares. 2. Wall Attachment: a. Adjustable inserts in concrete walls. Bolts or embedded studs not permitted. _s b. Insert Spacing: Maximum 3-foot on center entire inside perimeter of manhole. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16110 6 RACEWAYS - C. Arrange so that spare raceway ends are clear for future cable installation. - H. Manhole Frames and Covers: 1. Material: Machined cast iron. -- 2. Diameter:36-1/2-inch. 3. Cover Type: Indented, solid top design, with two drop handles each. 4. Cover Loading: AASHTO Division 1, H-20. 5. Cover Designation: Cast, on upper side, in integral letters, minimum 2 inches in height, appropriate titles: a. Above 600 Volts: ELECTRIC HV. b. 600 Volts and Below: ELECTRIC LV. C. TELEPHONE. I. Handhole Frames and Covers: 1. Material: Steel, hot -dipped galvanized. 2. Cover Type: Solid, bolt -on, of checkered design. 3. Cover Loading: H-20. 4. Cover Designation: Burn by welder, on upper side in integral letters, �._ minimum 2 inches in height, appropriate titles: a. 600 Volts and Below: ELECTRIC LV. b. TELEPHONE. J. Hardware: Steel, hot -dip galvanized. K. Furnish knockout for ground rod in each manhole. L. Manufacturers: 1. Brooks Products, Inc. 2. Penn -Cast Products, Inc. 3. Concrete Conduit Co. _s 4. Associated Concrete Products, Inc. 5. Utility Vault Co. 6. Pipe, Inc. 2.5 ACCESSORIES t,. A. Identification Devices: �. 1. Raceway Tags: a. Material: Permanent, nonferrous metal. b. Shape: Round. C. Raceway Designation: Pressure stamped, embossed, or engraved. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16110 7 RACEWAYS d. Tags relying on adhesives or taped -on markers not permitted. 2. Warning Tape: a. Material: Polyethylene, 4-mil gauge. b. Color: Red. C. Width: Minimum 6-inch. d. Designation: Warning on tape that electric circuit is located below tape. e. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Blackburn; Type RT. 2) Griffolyn Co. 3. Buried Raceway Marker: a. Material: Sheet bronze, consisting of double -ended arrows, straight for straight runs and bent at locations where runs change direction. b. Designation: Incise to depth of 3/32-inch, ELECTRIC CABLES, in letters 1/4-inch high. C. Minimum Dimension: 1/4-inch thick, 10 inches long, and 3/4-inch wide. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Conduit and Tubing sizes shown are based on the use of copper conductors. Reference Section 16120, CONDUCTORS, concerning conduit sizing for aluminum conductors. B. All installed Work shall comply with NECA 5055. C. Crushed or deformed raceways not permitted. D. Maintain raceway entirely free of obstructions and moisture. E. Immediately after installation, plug or cap raceway ends with watertight and dust -tight seals until time for pulling in conductors. F. Aluminum Conduit: Do not install in direct contact with concrete. G. Sealing Fittings: Provide drain seal in vertical raceways where condensate may collect above sealing fitting. H. Avoid moisture traps where possible. When unavoidable in exposed conduit runs, provide junction box and drain fitting at conduit low point. I. Group raceways installed in same area. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16110 8 RACEWAYS I WAK J. Proximity to Heated Piping: Install raceways minimum 12 inches from parallel runs. K. Follow structural surface contours when installing exposed raceways. Avoid obstruction of passageways. L. Run exposed raceways parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members, or intersections of vertical planes. M. Block Walls: Do not install raceways in same horizontal course with reinforcing steel. N. Install watertight fittings in outdoor, underground, or wet locations. O. Paint threads and cut ends, before assembly of fittings, galvanized conduit, PVC coated galvanized conduit, or IMC installed in exposed or damp locations with zinc -rich paint or liquid galvanizing compound. P. Metal conduit to be reamed, burrs removed, and cleaned before installation of conductors, wires, or cables. Q. Do not install raceways in concrete equipment pads, foundations, or beams. R. Horizontal raceways installed under floor slabs shall lie completely under slab, with no part embedded within slab. S. Install concealed, embedded, and buried raceways so that they emerge at right angles to surface and have no curved portion exposed. 3.2 INSTALLATION IN CAST -IN -PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE A. Minimum cover 2 inches, including all fittings. B. Conduit placement shall not require changes in reinforcing steel location or configuration. C. Provide nonmetallic support during placement of concrete to ensure raceways remain in position. D. Conduit larger than 1-inch shall not be embedded in concrete slabs, walls, foundations, columns or beams unless approved by ENGINEER. E. Slabs and Walls: 1. Trade size of conduit not to exceed one-fourth of the slab or wall thickness. 2. Install within middle two -fourths of slab or wall. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16110 9 RACEWAYS 3. Separate conduit less than 2-inch trade size by a minimum ten times conduit trade size, center -to -center, unless otherwise shown. 4. Separate conduit 2-inch and greater trade size by a minimum eight times conduit trade size, center -to -center, unless otherwise shown. 5. Cross conduit at an angle greater than 45 degrees, with minimum separation of 1-inch. 6. Separate conduit by a minimum six times the outside dimension of expansion/deflection fittings at expansion joints. 7. Conduit shall not be installed below the maximum water surface elevation in walls of water holding structures. F. Columns and Beams: 1. Trade size of conduit not to exceed one-fourth of beam thickness. 2. Conduit cross -sectional area not to exceed 4 percent of beam or column cross section. 3.3 CONDUIT APPLICATION A. Diameter: Minimum 1/2-inch. B. Exterior, Exposed: Rigid galvanized steel. C. Interior, Concealed (Not Embedded in Concrete): 1. Rigid galvanized steel. 2. Electric metallic tubing. D. Interior Exposed: 1. Rigid galvanized steel (electrical and mechanical rooms). 2. Electric metallic tubing (all other rooms). E. Aboveground, Embedded in Concrete Walls, Ceilings, or Floors: 1. Rigid galvanized steel. 2. PVC Schedule 40. F. Direct Earth Burial: PVC Schedule 40. G. Under Slabs -On -Grade: 1. Rigid galvanized steel. 2. PVC Schedule 40. H. Corrosive Areas: PVC Schedule 40. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16110 10 RACEWAYS sr� I. Hazardous Gas Areas: Rigid galvanized steel. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. For motors, wall or ceiling mounted fans and unit heaters, dry type transformers, electrically operated valves, instrumentation, and other equipment where flexible connection is required to minimize vibration: 1. Conduit Size 4 Inches or Less: Flexible, liquid -tight conduit. 2. Conduit Size Over 4 Inches: Nonflexible. 3. Wet or Corrosive Areas: Flexible, liquid -tight. 4. Dry Areas: Flexible, metallic liquid -tight. 5. Hazardous Areas: Flexible coupling suitable for Class I, Division 1 and 2 areas. 6. Length: 18-inch minimum, 60-inch maximum, sufficient to allow movement or adjustment of equipment. B. Lighting Fixtures in Dry Areas: Flexible steel, nonliquid-tight conduit. C. Outdoor Areas, Process Areas Exposed to Moisture, and Areas Required to be Oiltight and Dust -Tight: Flexible metal, liquid -tight conduit. D. Transition From Underground or Concrete Embedded to Exposed: Rigid galvanized steel conduit. E. Under Equipment Mounting Pads: Rigid galvanized steel conduit. 3.5 PENETRATIONS A. Make at right angles, unless otherwise shown. B. Notching or penetration of structural members, including footings and beams, not permitted. C. Fire -Rated Walls, Floors, or Ceilings: Firestop openings around penetrations to maintain fire -resistance rating. D. Apply single layer of wraparound duct band to all metallic conduit protruding through concrete floor slabs to a point 2 inches above and 2 inches below concrete surface. `-' E. Concrete Walls, Floors, or Ceilings (Aboveground): Provide nonshrink grout dry -pack, or use watertight seal device. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16110 11 RACEWAYS F. Entering Structures: 1. General: Seal raceway at the first box or outlet with oakum or expandable plastic compound to prevent the entrance of gases or liquids from one area to another. 2. Concrete Roof or Membrane Waterproofed Wall or Floor: a. Provide a watertight seal. b. Without Concrete Encasement: Install watertight entrance seal device on each side. C. With Concrete Encasement: Install watertight entrance seal device on the accessible side. d. Securely anchor malleable iron body of watertight entrance seal device into construction with one or more integral flanges. e. Secure membrane waterproofing to watertight entrance seal device in a permanent, watertight manner. 3. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment: a. Penetrate equipment in area established by manufacturer. b. Terminate conduit with flexible liquid -tight metal conduit at junction box or condulet attached to exterior surface of equipment prior to penetrating equipment. C. Seal penetration with silicone type sealant. 4. Corrosive -Sensitive Areas: a. Seal all conduit passing through corrosive area room walls. b. Seal conduit entering equipment panel boards and field panels containing electronic equipment. C. Seal penetration with silicone type sealant. 5. Existing or Precast Wall (Underground): Core drill wall and install a watertight entrance seal device. 6. Nonwaterproofed Wall or Floor (Underground, without Concrete Encasement): a. Provide Schedule 40 galvanized pipe sleeve, or watertight entrance seal device. b. Fill space between raceway and sleeve with expandable plastic compound or oakum and lead joint, on each side. 7. Manholes and Handholes: a. Metallic Raceways: Provide insulated grounding bushings. b. Nonmetallic Raceways: Provide bell ends flush with wall. C. Install such that raceways enter as near as possible to one end of wall, unless otherwise shown. 3.6 SUPPORT A. Support from structural members only, at intervals not exceeding NFPA 70 requirements, and in any case not exceeding 8 feet. Do not support from piping, pipe supports, or other raceways. 3 B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16110 12 RACEWAYS 3.7 B. Multiple Adjacent Raceways: Provide ceiling trapeze. For trapeze -supported conduit, allow 10 percent space for future conduits. C. Application/Type of Conduit Strap: 1. Aluminum Conduit: Aluminum or stainless steel. 2. Rigid Steel or EMT Conduit: Zinc coated steel, pregalvanized steel or malleable iron. 3. PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit: PVC coated metal. 4. Nonmetallic Conduit: Nonmetallic or PC coated metal. D. Provide and attach wall brackets, strap hangers, or ceiling trapeze as follows: 1. Wood: Wood screws. 2. Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts. 3. Concrete or Brick: Expansion shields, or threaded studs driven in by powder charge, with lock washers and nuts. 4. Steelwork: Machine screws. 5. Location/Type of Hardware: a. Dry, Noncorrosive Areas: Galvanized. b. Wet, Noncorrosive Areas: Stainless steel. C. Corrosive Areas: Stainless steel. E. Nails or wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry for attaching raceway not permitted. Do not weld raceways or pipe straps to steel structures. Do not use wire in lieu of straps or hangers. F. Support aluminum conduit on concrete surfaces with stainless steel or nonmetallic spacers, or aluminum or nonmetallic framing channel. BENDS A. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance. B. Make bends and offsets of longest practical radius. C. Install with symmetrical bends or cast metal fittings. D. Avoid field -made bends and offsets, but where necessary, make with acceptable hickey or bending machine. Do not heat metal raceways to facilitate bending. E. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same center or centerline with same radius so that bends are parallel. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16110 13 RACEWAYS F. Factory elbows may be installed in parallel or banked raceways if there is change in plane of run, and raceways are same size. G. PVC Conduit: L Bends 30-Degree and Larger: Provide factory -made elbows. 2. Use manufacturer's recommended method for forming smaller bends. H. Flexible Conduit: Do not make bends that exceed allowable conductor bending radius of cable to be installed or that significantly restricts conduit flexibility. 3.8 EXPANSION/DEFLECTION FITTINGS A. Provide on all raceways at all structural expansion joints, and in long tangential runs. B. Provide expansion/deflection joints for 25 degrees F maximum temperature variation. C. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.9 PVC CONDUIT A. Solvent Welding: 1. Provide manufacturer recommended solvent; apply to all joints. 2. Install such that joint is watertight. B. Adapters: 1. PVC to Metallic Fittings: PVC terminal type. 2. PVC to Rigid Metal Conduit or IMC: PVC female adapter. C. Belled -End Conduit: Bevel the unbelled end of the joint prior to joining. 3.10 WIREWAYS A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Locate with cover on accessible vertical face of wireway, unless otherwise shown. C. Applications: 1. Metal wireway in indoor dry locations. 2. Nonmetallic wireway in indoor wet, outdoor, and corrosive locations. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16110 14 RACEWAYS 3.11 TERMINATION AT ENCLOSURES A. Cast Metal Enclosure: Provide manufacturer's pre -molded insulating sleeve inside metallic conduit terminating in threaded hubs. B. NEMA 4 and 4X Boxes, Cabinets, and Enclosures: Terminate conduit in threaded conduit hubs, maintaining enclosure integrity. C. Sheet Metal Boxes, Cabinets, and Enclosures: 1. Rigid Galvanized Conduit: a. Provide one lock nut each on inside and outside of enclosure. b. Install grounding bushing. C. Provide bonding jumper from grounding bushing to equipment ground bus or ground pad; if neither ground bus nor pad exists, connect jumper to lag bolt attached to metal enclosure. d. Install insulated bushing on ends of conduit where grounding is not required. e. Provide insulated throat when conduit terminates in sheet metal boxes having threaded hubs. f. Utilize sealing locknuts on outside of NEMA 3R and NEMA 12 enclosures. 2. Electric Metallic Tubing: Provide gland compression, insulated connectors. 3. Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide two screw type, insulated, malleable iron connectors. 4. PVC Schedule 40 Conduit: Provide PVC terminal adapter with lock nut. D. Motor Control Center and Free -Standing Enclosures: Terminate conduit entering bottom with grounding bushing; provide a grounding jumper extending to equipment ground bus or grounding pad. 3.12 UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS A. Grade: Maintain minimum grade of 4 inches in 100 feet, either from one manhole, handhole, or pull box to the next, or from a high point between them, depending on surface contour. B. Cover: Maintain minimum 2-foot cover above conduit unless otherwise shown. C. Make routing changes as necessary to avoid obstructions or conflicts. D. Couplings: In multiple conduit runs, stagger so that couplings in adjacent runs are not in same transverse line. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16110 15 RACEWAYS E. Union type fittings not permitted. F. Spacers: 1. Provide preformed, nonmetallic spacers, designed for such purpose, to secure and separate parallel conduit runs in a trench or concrete encasement. 2. Install at intervals not greater than that specified in NFPA 70 for support of the type conduit used, but in no case greater than 10 feet. G. Support conduit so as to prevent bending or displacement during backfilling or concrete placement. H. Installation with Other Piping Systems: 1. Crossings: Maintain minimum 12-inch vertical separation. 2. Parallel Runs: Maintain minimum 12-inch separation. 3. Installation over valves or couplings not permitted. I. Provide expansion fittings that allow minimum of 4 inches of movement in vertical conduit runs from underground where exposed conduit will be fastened to or will enter building or structure. J. Backfill: 1. As specified in Section 02320, TRENCH BACKFILL. 2. Do not backfill until inspected by ENGINEER. 3.13 MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES A. Excavate, shore, brace, backfill, and final grade in accordance with Section 02316, EXCAVATION and Section 02320, TRENCH BACKFILL. B. Do not install until final raceway grading has been determined. C. Install such that raceways enter at nearly right angles and as near as possible to one end of wall, unless otherwise shown. D. Grounding: As specified in Section 16450, GROUNDING. E. Identification: Field stamp covers with manhole or handhole number as shown. Stamped numbers to be 1-inch minimum height. 3.14 EMPTY RACEWAYS A. Provide permanent, removable cap over each end. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16110 16 RACEWAYS B. Provide PVC plug with pull tab for underground raceways with end bells. C. Provide nylon pull cord. D. Identify, as specified in Article IDENTIFICATION DEVICES, with waterproof tags attached to pull cord at each end, and at intermediate pull point. 3.15 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES A. Raceway Tags: 1. Identify origin and destination. 2. Install at each terminus, near midpoint, and at minimum intervals of every 50 feet of exposed Raceway, whether in ceiling space or surface mounted. 3. Provide nylon strap for attachment. B. Warning Tape: Install approximately 12 inches above underground or concrete -encased raceways. Align parallel to, and within 12 inches of, centerline of runs. C. Buried Raceway Markers: 1. Install at grade to indicate direction of underground raceways. 2. Install at all bends and at intervals not exceeding 100 feet in straight runs. 3. Embed and secure to top of concrete base, sized 14 inches long, 6 inches wide, and 8 inches deep; top set flush with finished grade. 3.16 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect products from effects of moisture, corrosion, and physical damage during construction. B. Provide and maintain manufactured watertight and dust -tight seals over all conduit openings during construction. C. Touch up painted conduit threads after assembly to cover nicks or scars. D. Touch up coating damage to PVC -coated conduit with patching compound approved by manufacturer; compound shall be kept refrigerated according to manufacturers' instructions until time of use. END OF SECTION BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16110 17 RACEWAYS SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 386, Standard for Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power Distribution Systems Above 600V. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium -Nickel -Plated Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. b. B3, Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire. C. B8, Standard Specification for Concentric -Lay -Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium -Hard, or Soft. d. B263, Standard Test Method for Determination of Cross -Sectional Area of Stranded Conductors. 3. Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC): a. CS 5, Crosslinked Polyethylene Insulated Shielded Power Cables Rated 5 Through 35 kV. b. CS 6, Ethylene -Propylene -Rubber -Insulated Shielded Power Cables Rated 5 Through 69 kV. 4. Insulated Cable Engineer's Association, Inc. (ICEA): T-29-520, Procedure for Conducting Vertical Cable Tray Flame Test With a Theoretical Heat Input of 210,000 Btu/hour. 5. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): a. 48, Standard Test Procedures and Requirements for Alternating -Current Cable Terminations. b. 404, Standard for Cable Joints for Use with Extruded Dielectric Cable Rated 5,000V through 138,000V and Cable Joints for Use with Laminated Dielectric Cable Rated 2,500V through 500,000V. 6. National Electrical Contractors Association, Inc. (NECA): 5055, Standard of Installation. 7. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA): a. CC 1, Electric Power Connectors for Substations. b. WC 3, Rubber -Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. C. WC 5, Thermoplastic Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 16120 1 CONDUCTORS d. WC 7, Crosslinked-Thermosetting-Polyethylene-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. e. WC 8, Ethylene -Propylene -Rubber -Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. f. WC 55, Instrumentation Cables and Thermocouple Wire. 8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 9. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 13, Standard for Safety Power -Limited Circuit Cables. b. 44, Standard for Safety Thermoset -Insulated Wires and Cables. C. 62, Standard for Safety Flexible Cord and Fixture Wire. d. 486A, Standard for Safety; Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors. e. 48613, Standard for Safety Wire Connectors for Use with Aluminum Conductors. f. 510, Standard for Safety Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape. g. 854, Standard for Safety Service -Entrance Cables. h. 910, Standard for Safety Test Method for Flame Propagation and Smoke Density Values for Electrical and Optical -Fiber Cables Used in Spaces Transporting Environmental Air. i. 1072, Standard for Safety Medium -Voltage Power Cables. j. 1277, Standard for Safety Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional Optical -Fiber Members. k. 1581, Standard for Safety Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Wire and cable descriptive product information. Wire and cable accessories descriptive product information. Cable fault detection system descriptive product information. Manufactured wiring systems descriptive product information. Manufactured wire systems rating information. Manufactured wire systems dimensional drawings. Manufactured wire systems special fittings. Busway descriptive product information. Busway rating information. Busway dimensional drawings. Busway special fitting information. Busway-equipment interface information for equipment to be connected to busways. B0I158870.A1.FN DULY 7, 2000 16120 2 CONDUCTORS _ 3 B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Certified Factory Test Report for conductors 600 volts and below. 2. Certified Factory Test Report per AEIC CS6, including AEIC qualification report for conductors above 600 volts. 1.3 UL COMPLIANCE A. Materials manufactured within scope of Underwriters Laboratories shall conform to UL Standards and have an applied UL listing mark. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW A. Conform to applicable requirements of NEMA WC 3, WC 5, and WC 7. B. Conductor Type: 1. 120- and 277-Volt Lighting, No. 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid copper. 2. 120-Volt Receptacle Circuits, No. 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid copper. 3. All Other Circuits: Stranded copper. C. Insulation: Type T1HiNfIHWN. D. Direct Burial and Aerial Conductors and Cables: 1. Type USE/RH 4/RHW insulation, UL 854 listed, Type RHW-2/USE-2. 2. Conform to physical and minimum thickness requirements of NEMA WC 3. E. Flexible Cords and Cables: 1. Type SOW-A/50 with ethylene propylene rubber insulation in accordance with UL 62. 2. Conform to physical and minimum thickness requirements of NEMA WC 8. 2.2 CONDUCTORS ABOVE 600 VOLTS A. Type 5: Ignition cable shall be single conductor #18 AWG, stranded copper, 40 kV DC, Belden, or equal acceptable to the ENGINEER. Provide manufacturer's recommended connection kit for connection of ignition cable to ignitor. BOI158870.A1.FN DULY 7, 2000 16120 3 CONDUCTORS 2.3 600-VOLT RATED CABLE A. General: 1. Type: TC, meeting requirements of UL 1277, including Vertical Tray Flame Test at 20,000 Btu/hr, and NFPA 70, Article 340, or UL 13 Listed Power Limited Circuit Cable meeting requirements of NFPA 70, Article 725. 2. Permanently and legibly marked with manufacturer's name, maximum working voltage for which cable was tested, type of cable, and UL listing mark. 3. Suitable for installation in open air, in cable trays, or conduit. 4. Minimum Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C dry locations, 75 degrees C wet locations. 5. Overall Outer Jacket: PVC, flame-retardant, sunlight- and oil -resistant. B. Type 1-Multiconductor Control Cable: 1. Conductors: a. No. 14 AWG, seven -strand copper. b. Insulation: 15-mil PVC with 4-mil nylon. C. UL 1581 listed as Type TEIHN/THWN rated VW-l. d. Conductor group bound with spiral wrap of barrier tape. e. Color Code: In accordance with NEMA WC 5, Method 1, Sequence K-2. 2. Cable: Passes the ICEA T-29-520 210,000 Btu/hr Vertical Tray Flame Test. 3. Cable Sizes: No. of Conductors Max. Outside Diameter (inches) Jacket Thickness (mils) 3 0.41 45 5 0.48 45 7 0.52 45 12 0.72 60 19 0.83 60 25 1.00 60 37 1.15 80 BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 16120 4 CONDUCTORS 2.4 2.5 4. Manufacturers: a. Okonite Co. b. Rome Cable. C. Type 3-No. 16 AWG, Twisted, Shielded Pair, Instrumentation Cable: Single pair, designed for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log applications meeting NEMA WC 55 requirements. 1. Outer Jacket: 45-mil nominal thickness. 2. Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. 3. Dimension: 0.31-inch nominal OD. 4. Conductors: a. Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven -strand concentric, meeting requirements of ASTM B8. b. 20 AWG, seven -strand tinned copper drain wire. C. Insulation: 15-mil nominal PVC. d. Jacket: 4-mil nominal nylon. e. Color Code: Pair conductors black and red. 5. Manufacturers: a. Okonite Co. b. Alpha Wire Corp. GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Equipment: Stranded copper with green, Type USF(RHHIRHW-XLPE or THfIN/THWN, insulation. B. Direct Buried: Bare stranded copper. ACCESSORIES FOR CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW A. Tape: 1. General Purpose, Flame Retardant: 7-mil, vinyl plastic, Scotch Brand 33, rated for 90 degrees C minimum, meeting requirements of UL 510. 2. Flame Retardant, Cold and Weather Resistant: 8.5-mil, vinyl plastic, Scotch Brand 88. 3. Arc and Fireproofing: a. 30-mil, elastomer b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Scotch; Brand 77, with Scotch Brand 69 glass cloth tapebinder. 2) Plymount; Plyarc 30, with Plymount Plyglas glass cloth tapebinder. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 16120 5 CONDUCTORS B. Identification Devices: L Sleeve: Permanent, PVC, yellow or white, with legible machine -printed black markings. 2. Marker Plate: Nylon, with legible designations permanently hot stamped on plate. 3. Grounding Conductor: Permanent green heat -shrink sleeve, 2-inch minimum. C. Connectors and Terminations: 1. Nylon, Self -Insulated Crimp Connectors: a. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon. 2) Burndy; Insulink. 3) ILSCO. 2. Nylon, Self -Insulated, Crimp Locking -Fork, Torque -Type Terminator: a. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon. 2) Burndy; Insulink. 3) ILSCO. 3. Self -Insulated, Freespring Wire Connector (Wire Nuts): a. Plated steel, square wire springs. b. UL Standard 486C. C. Manufacturers and Product: 1) Thomas & Betts. 2) Ideal; Twister. 4. Self -Insulated, Set Screw Wire Connector: a. Two piece compression type with set screw in brass barrel. b. Insulated by insulator cap screwed over brass barrel. C. Manufacturer:3M. D. Cable Lugs: 1. In accordance with NEMA CC 1. 2. Rated 600 volts of same material as conductor metal. 3. Insulated, Locking -Fork, Compression Lugs: a. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity. b. Seamless. C. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon. 2) ILSCO; ILSCONS. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 16120 6 CONDUCTORS 2.6 2.7 4. Uninsulated Crimp Connectors and Terminators: a. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Square D; Versitide. 2) Thomas & Betts; Color -Keyed. 3) ILSCO. 5. Uninsulated, Bolted, Two -Way Connectors and Terminators: a. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thomas & Betts; Locktite. 2) Burndy; Quiklug. 3) ILSCO. E. Cable Ties: 1. Nylon, adjustable, self-locking, and reusable. 2. Manufacturer and Product: Thomas & Betts; TY-RAP. F. Heat Shrinkable Insulation: 1. Thermally stabilized, crosslinked polyolefin. 2. Manufacturer and Product: Thomas & Betts; SBRINK-KON. PULLING COMPOUND A. Nontoxic, noncorrosive, noncombustible, nonflammable, wax -based lubricant; UL listed. B. Suitable for rubber, neoprene, PVC, polyethylene, hypalon, CPE, and lead - covered wire and cable. C. Suitable for zinc -coated steel, aluminum, PVC, bituminized fiber, and fiberglass raceways. D. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Ideal Co.; Yellow 77. 2. Polywater, Inc. 3. Cable Grip Co. WARNING TAPE A. As specified in Section 16110, RACEWAYS. BOI158870.A1.FN DULY 7, 2000 16120 7 CONDUCTORS C. Method: 1. Conductors No. 3 AWG and Smaller: Identify with sleeves. 2. Cables, and Conductors No. 2 AWG and Larger: a. Identify with marker plates. b. Attach marker plates with nylon tie cord. 3. Taped -on markers or tags relying on adhesives not permitted. 3.4 CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW A. Install 10 AWG or 12 AWG conductors for branch circuit power wiring in lighting and receptacle circuits. B. Do not splice incoming service conductors and branch power distribution conductors No. 6 AWG and larger unless specifically indicated or approved by ENGINEER. C. Connections and Terminations: 1. Install wire nuts only on solid conductors. 2. Install nylon self -insulated crimp connectors and terminators for instrumentation and control, circuit conductors. 3. Install self -insulated, set screw wire connectors for two-way connection of power circuit conductors No. 12 AWG and smaller. 4. Install uninsulated crimp connectors and terminators for instrumentation, control, and power circuit conductors No. 4 AWG through No. 2/0 AWG. 5. Install uninsulated, bolted, two-way connectors and terminators for power circuit conductors No. 3/0 AWG and larger. 6. Install uninsulated terminators bolted together on motor circuit conductors No. 10 AWG and larger. 7. Tape insulate all uninsulated connections. 8. Place no more than one conductor in any single -barrel pressure connection. 9. Install crimp connectors with tools approved by connector manufacturer. 10. Install terminals and connectors acceptable for type of material used. 11. Compression Lugs: a. Attach with a tool specifically designed for purpose. b. Tool shall provide complete, controlled crimp and shall not release until crimp is complete. C. Do not use plier type crimpers. D. Do not use soldered mechanical joints. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 i 16120 10 CONDUCTORS_ E. Splices and Terminations: 1. Indoors: Use general purpose, flame retardant tape. 2. Outdoors: Use flame retardant, cold- and weather -resistant tape. F. Cap spare conductors and conductors with UL listed end caps. G. Cabinets, Panels, and Motor Control Centers: 1. Remove surplus wire, bridle and secure. 2. Where conductors pass through openings or over edges in sheet metal, remove burrs, chamfer edges, and install bushings and protective strips of insulating material to protect the conductors. H. Control and Instrumentation Wiring: 1. Where terminals provided will accept such lugs, terminate control and instrumentation wiring, except solid thermocouple leads, with insulated, locking -fork compression lugs. 2. Terminate with methods consistent with terminals provided, and in accordance with terminal manufacturer's instructions. 3. Locate splices in readily accessible cabinets or junction boxes using terminal strips. 4. Where connections of cables installed under this section are to be made under Section 13400, PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS), leave pigtails of adequate length for bundled connections. 5. Cable Protection: a. Under Infinite Access Floors: May be installed without bundling. b. All Other Areas: Install individual wires, pairs, or triads in flex conduit under the floor or grouped into bundles at least 1/2-inch in diameter. C. Maintain integrity of shielding of instrumentation cables. d. Ensure grounds do not occur because of damage to jacket over the shield. I. Extra Conductor Length: For conductors to be connected by others, install minimum 6 feet of extra conductor in freestanding panels and minimum 2 feet in other assemblies. 3.5 CONDUCTORS ABOVE 600 VOLTS A. Do not splice unless specifically indicated or approved by the ENGINEER. B. Make joints and terminations with splice and termination kits, in accordance with kit manufacturer's instructions. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 'y 16120 11 CONDUCTORS C. Install splices or terminations as continuous operation in accessible locations under clean, dry conditions. D. Install terminals or connectors acceptable for type of conductor material used. E. Provide necessary mounting hardware, covers, and connectors. F. Connections and Terminations: 1. Install uninsulated crimp connectors and terminators for instrumentation, control, and power circuit conductors No. 4 AWG through No. 2/0 AWG. G. Give 2 working days notice to ENGINEER prior to making splices or terminations. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. In accordance with Section 16950, ELECTRICAL TESTING. END OF SECTION B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 16120 12 CONDUCTORS PART 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 PART �. 2.1 2.2 SECTION 16450 GROUNDING GENERAL REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): C2, National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code. (NEC). SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product Data: a. Exothermic weld connectors. b. Mechanical connectors. C. Compression connectors. UL COMPLIANCE A. Materials manufactured within scope of Underwriters Laboratories shall conform to UL Standards and have an applied UL listing mark. 2 PRODUCTS GROUND ROD A. Material: Copper -clad. B. Diameter: Minimum 5/8-inch. C. Length: 10 feet. GROUND CONDUCTORS A. As specified in Section 16120, CONDUCTORS. 1-11, BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 7, 2000 16450 1 GROUNDING PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment in accordance with NEMA ICS 2.3, Submittal Drawings, and Manufacturer's Instructions and Recommendations. B. Secure equipment to mounting pads with anchor bolts of sufficient size and number adequate for specified seismic conditions. C. Install equipment plumb and in longitudinal alignment with pad or wall. D. Coordinate terminal connections with installation of secondary feeders. E. Grout mounting channels into floor or mounting pads. F. Retighten current -carrying bolted connections and enclosure support framing and panels to manufacturer's recommendations. 3.2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Field adjust trip settings of motor starter magnetic -trip -only circuit breakers. B. Adjust to approximately 11 times motor rated current. C. Determine motor rated current from motor nameplate following installation. 3.3 OVERLOAD RELAY A. Select and install overload relay heaters after the actual nameplate full -load current rating of motor has been determined. 3.4 MOTOR DATA A. Provide typed, self-adhesive label attached inside each motor starter enclosure door displaying the following information: 1. Motor served by tag number and equipment name. 2. Nameplate horsepower. 3. Motor code letter. 4. Full load amperes. 5. Service factor. 6. Installed overload relay heater catalog number. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. In accordance with Section 16950, ELECTRICAL TESTING. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16480 10 LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL 3.6 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Furnish manufacturer's representative in accordance with Section 01640, MANUFACTURERS' SERVICES, for the following services at jobsite or classroom as designated by OWNER, for minimum person -days listed below, travel time excluded: 1. 2 person -days for installation assistance, and inspection of installation. 2. 3 person -days for functional and performance testing. 3. 2 person -days for plant startup. 4. 3 person -days for training of OWNER'S personel. END OF SECTION B0I158870.Al.FN JULY 10, 2000 16480 11 LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL �..... �wy y p�yII PART 1 1.1 SECTION 16950 ELECTRICAL TESTING GENERAL REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. 450, Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Large lead Storage Batteries for Generator Stations and Substations. b. C2, National Electrical Safety Code. C. C37.20.1, Metal -Enclosed Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear. d. C37.20.2, Metal -Clad and Station -Type Cubicle Switchgear. e. C37.20.3, Metal -Enclosed Interrupter Switchgear. f. C62.33, Standard Test Specifications for Varistor Surge - Protective Devices. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. D665, Standard Test Method for Rust Preventing Characteristics of Inhibited Mineral Oil in the Presence of Water. b. D877, Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating Liquids Using Disk Electrodes. C. D923, Standard Test Method for Sampling Electrical Insulating Liquids. d. D924, Standard Test Methods for A -Class Characteristics and Relative Permittivity (Dielectric Constant) of Electrical Insulating Liquids. e. D971, Standard Test Method for Interfacial Tension of 0.1 Against Water by the Ring Method. f. D974, Standard Test Method for Acid and Base Number by Color - Indicator Titration. g. D 1298, Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), or API Gravity of Crude Petroleum and Liquid Petroleum Products by Hydrometer Method. h. D 1500, Standard Test Method for ASTM Color of Petroleum Products. i. D1524, Standard Test Method for Visual Examination of Used Electrical Insulating Oils of Petroleum Origin in the Field. j. D1533, Standard Test Methods for Water in Insulating Liquids. k. D1816, Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating Oils of Petroleum Origin Using VDE Electrodes. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16950 1 ELECTRICAL TESTING 1. D2285, Standard Test Method for Interfacial Tension of Electrical Insulating Oils of Petroleum Origin Against Water by the Drop - Weight Method. 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): a. 43, Recommended Practice for Testing Insulating Resistance of Rotating Machinery. b. 48, Standard Test Procedures and Requirements for High -Voltage ` Alternating -Current Cable Terminators. C. 81, Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System. d. 95, Recommended Practice for Insulation Testing of Large AC Rotating Machinery with High Direct Voltage. e. 118, Standard Test Code for Resistance Measurement. f. 400, Guide for Making High -Direct -Voltage Tests on Power Cable Systems in the Field. 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. AB 4, Guideline for Inspection and Preventive Maintenance of Molded Case Circuit Breakers Used in Commercial and Industrial Applications. ' b. PB 2, Deadfront Distribution Switchboards. C. WC 7, Cross -Linked -Thermosetting -Polyethylene -Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical F Energy. d. WC 8, Ethylene -Propylene -Rubber -Insulated Wire and Cable for > - the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. 5. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA): ATS, Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. t 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). b. 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Administrative Submittals: Submit 30 days prior to performing inspections or tests: l . Schedule for performing inspection and tests. 2. List of references to be used for each test. 3. Sample copy of equipment and materials inspection form(s). 4. Sample copy of individual device test form. i 5. Sample copy of individual system test form.__ BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 , 16950 2 ELECTRICAL TESTING s�_j B. Quality Control Submittals: Submit within 30 days after completion of test: 1. Test or inspection reports and certificates for each electrical item tested. C. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. In accordance with Section 01430, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. b. After test or inspection reports and certificates have been reviewed by ENGINEER and returned, insert a copy of each in operation and maintenance manual. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Firm Qualifications: 1. Corporately and financially independent organization functioning as an unbiased testing authority. 2. Professionally independent of manufacturers, suppliers, and installers, of electrical equipment and systems being tested. 3. Employer of engineers and technicians regularly engaged in testing and inspecting of electrical equipment, installations, and systems. 4. Supervising engineer accredited as Certified Electrical Test Technologist by National Institute for Certification of Engineering Technologists (NICET), or International Electrical Testing Association and having a minimum of 5 years testing experience on similar projects. 5. Technicians certified by NICET or NETA. 6. Assistants and apprentices assigned to project at ratio not to exceed two certified to one noncertified assistant or apprentice. 7. Registered Professional Engineer to provide comprehensive project report outlining services performed, results of such services, recommendations, actions taken, and opinions. 8. In compliance with OSHA Title 29, Part 1907 criteria for accreditation of testing laboratories or a full Member Company of International Electrical Testing Association. B. Test equipment shall have an operating accuracy equal to, or greater than, requirements established by NETA ATS. C. Test instrument calibration shall be in accordance with META ATS. 1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Perform inspection and electrical tests after equipment has been installed. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16950 3 ELECTRICAL TESTING B. Two weeks prior to the CONTRACTOR's start of testing electrical, I&C, and mechanical systems, the ENGINEER will provide the CONTRACTOR a written Process Systems Test Sequence instructions that will outline the sequence of testing the various process subsystems necessary to fully and completely test all electrical, I&C, and mechanical systems. C. Perform tests with apparatus de -energized whenever feasible. D. Inspection and electrical tests on energized equipment are to be: 1. Scheduled with ENGINEER prior to de-energization. 2. Minimized to avoid extended period of interruption to the operating plant equipment. E. Notify ENGINEER at least 24 hours prior to performing tests on energized electrical equipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Tests specified in this section are to be performed in accordance with the requirements of Section 01810, EQUIPMENT TESTING & FACILITY STARTUP. B. Tests and inspection shall establish that: 1. Electrical equipment is operational within industry and manufacturer's tolerances. 2. Installation operates properly. 3. Equipment is suitable for energization. 4. Installation conforms to requirements of Contract. Documents and NFPA 70, NFPA 70E, and ANSI C2. C. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NETA ATS, industry standards, and manufacturer's recommendations. D. Adjust mechanisms and moving parts for free mechanical movement. E. Adjust adjustable relays and sensors to correspond to operating conditions, or as recommended by manufacturer. F. Verify nameplate data for conformance to Contract Documents. G. Realign equipment not properly aligned and correct unlevelness. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16950 4 ELECTRICAL TESTING H. Properly anchor electrical equipment found to be inadequately anchored. I. Tighten accessible bolted connections, including wiring connections, with calibrated torque wrench to manufacturer's recommendations, or as otherwise specified. J. Clean contaminated surfaces with cleaning solvents as recommended by manufacturer. K. Provide proper lubrication of applicable moving parts. L. Inform ENGINEER of working clearances not in accordance with NFPA 70. M. Investigate and repair or replace: 1. Electrical items that fail tests. 2. Active components not operating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Damaged electrical equipment. N. Electrical Enclosures: 1. Remove foreign material and moisture from enclosure interior. 2. Vacuum and wipe clean enclosure interior. 3. Remove corrosion found on metal surfaces. 4. Repair or replace, as determined by ENGINEER, door and panel sections having dented surfaces. 5. Repair or replace, as determined by ENGINEER, poor fitting doors and panel sections. 6. Repair or replace improperly operating latching, locking, or interlocking devices. 7. Replace missing or damaged hardware. 8. Finish: a. Provide matching paint and touch up scratches and mars. b. If required due to extensive damage, as determined by ENGINEER, refinish the entire assembly. O. Replace fuses and circuit breakers that do not conform to size and type required by the Contract Documents. 3.2 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. 2. Physical and insulator damage. Proper winding connections. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16950 5 ELECTRICAL TESTING 3. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 10. 1, unless_ otherwise specified by manufacturer. 4. Defective wiring. 5. Proper operation of fans, indicators, and auxiliary devices. - 6. Removal of shipping brackets, fixtures, or bracing. 7. Free and properly installed resilient mounts. 8. Cleanliness and improper blockage of ventilation passages. 9. Verify that tap -changer is set at correct ratio for rated output voltage under normal operating conditions. 10. Verify proper secondary voltage phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground after energization and prior to loading. } B. Electrical Tests: , 1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. Applied megohmmeter do voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 7.2.3 for each: 1) Winding -to -winding. 2) Winding -to -ground. b. 10-minute test duration with resistances tabulated at 30 seconds, 1 minute, and 10 minutes. C. Results temperature corrected in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 7.2.4. d. Temperature corrected insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by manufacturer. e. Insulation resistance test results to compare within 1 percent of adjacent windings. 2. Perform tests and adjustments for fans, controls, and alarm functions as suggested by manufacturer. 3.3 LOW VOLTAGE CABLES, 600 VOLTS MAXIMUM A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1 2. Inspect Each Individual Exposed Power Cable No. 6 and Larger For: a. Physical damage. b. Proper connections in accordance with single -line diagram. C. Cable bends not in conformance with manufacturer's minimum allowable bending radius where applicable. d. Color coding conformance with specifications. e. Proper circuit identification. Mechanical Connections For: a. Proper lug type for conductor material. b. Proper lug installation. B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16950 6 ELECTRICAL TESTING :P 3.4 C. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 10.1, unless otherwise specified by manufacturer. 3. Shielded Instrumentation Cables For: a. Proper shield grounding. b. Proper terminations. C. Proper circuit identification. 4. Control Cables for: a. Proper termination. b. Proper circuit identification. 5. Cables Terminated Through Window Type CTs: Verify that neutrals and grounds are terminated for correct operation of protective devices. B. Electrical Tests for Conductors No. 6 and Larger: 1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. Utilize 1,000-volt do megohmmeter for 600-volt insulated conductors and 500-volt do megohmmeter for 300-volt insulated conductors. b. Test each conductor with respect to ground and to adjacent conductors per IEEE 118 procedures for 1 minute. C. Evaluate ohmic values by comparison with conductors of same length and type. d. Investigate values less than 50 megohms. 2. Continuity test by ohmmeter method to ensure proper cable connections. A. General: Inspection and testing limited to circuit breakers rated 20 amperes and larger and to motor circuit protector breakers rated 3 amperes and larger. B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 0 Proper mounting. Proper conductor size. Feeder designation according to nameplate and one -line diagram. Cracked casings. Connection bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 10.1. Operate breaker to verify smooth operation. Compare frame size and trip setting with circuit breaker schedules or one -line diagram. Verify that terminals are suitable for 75 degrees C rated insulated conductors. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16950 7 ELECTRICAL TESTING C. Electrical Tests: 1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. Utilize 1,000-volt do megohmmeter for 480- and 600-volt circuit breakers and 500-volt do megohmmeter for 208-volt circuit breakers. b. Pole -to -pole and pole -to -ground with breaker contacts opened for 1 minute C. Pole -to -pole and pole -to -ground with breaker contacts closed for 1 minute. d. Test values to comply with NETA ATS, Table 10.2. 2. Contact Resistance Tests: a. Contact resistance in microhms across each pole. b. Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent poles and similar breakers. 3. Primary Current Injection Test to Verify: a. Long-time minimum pickup and delay. b. Short -time pickup and delay. C. Ground fault pickup and delay. d. Instantaneous pickup by run-up or pulse method. e. Trip characteristics of adjustable trip breakers shall be within manufacturer's published time -current characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors. f. Trip times shall be within limits established by NEMA AB 4, Table 5-3. g. Instantaneous pickup value shall be within values established by NEMA AB 4, Table 5-4. 3.5 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Visually Check Current, Potential, and Control Transformers For: a. Cracked insulation. b. Broken leads or defective wiring. C. Proper connections. d. Adequate clearances between primary and secondary circuit wiring. 2. Verify Mechanically That: a. Grounding and shorting connections have good contact. b. Withdrawal mechanism and grounding operation, when applicable, operate properly. 3. Verify proper primary and secondary fuse sizes for potential transformers. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 iFT 16950 8 ELECTRICAL TESTING B. Electrical Tests: 1. Current Transformer Tests: a. Insulation resistance test of transformer and wiring -to -ground at 1,000 volts do for 30 seconds. b. Polarity test. 2. Potential Transformer Tests: a. Insulation resistance test at test voltages in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 7.1.1 for 1 minute on: 1) Winding -to -winding. 2) Winding -to -ground. b. Polarity test to verify polarity marks or H1-X1 relationship as applicable. 3. Insulation resistance measurement on instrument transformer shall not be less than that shown in NETA ATS, Table 7.1.1. 3.6 METERING A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Verify meter connections in accordance with appropriate diagrams. 2. Verify meter multipliers. 3. Verify that meter types and scales conform to Contract Documents. 4. Check calibration of meters at cardinal points. 5. Check calibration of electrical transducers. 3.7 GROUNDING SYSTEMS A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Equipment and circuit grounds in motor control center and panelboard assemblies for proper connection and tightness. 2. Ground bus connections in motor control center and panelboard assemblies for proper termination and tightness. 3. Effective transformer core and equipment grounding. 4. Accessible connections to grounding electrodes for proper fit and tightness. 5. Accessible exothermic -weld grounding connections to verify that molds were fully filled and proper bonding was obtained. B. Electrical Tests: 1. Fall -Of -Potential Test: a. In accordance with IEEE 81, Section 8.2.1.5 for measurement of main ground system's resistance. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16950 9 ELECTRICAL TESTING W: b. Main ground electrode system resistance to ground to be no greater than 5 ohms. 2. Two -Point Direct Method Test: a. In accordance with IEEE 81, Section 8.2.1.1 for measurement of ground resistance between main ground system, equipment frames, and system neutral and derived neutral points. b. Equipment ground resistance shall not exceed main ground system resistance by 0.25 ohm. GROUND FAULT SYSTEMS A. Inspection and Testing Limited To: 1. Zero sequence grounding systems. 2. Residual ground fault systems. B. Visual and Manual Inspection: 1. Neutral Main Bonding Connection to Assure: a. Zero sequence sensing system is grounded ahead of neutral disconnect link. b. Ground strap sensing system is grounded through sensing device. C. Neutral ground conductor is solidly grounded. 2. Verify that control power has adequate capacity for system. 3. Manually Operate Monitor Panels For: a. Trip test. b. No trip test. C. Nonautomatic rest. 4. Zero sequence system for symmetrical alignment of core balance transformers about current carrying conductors. 5. Relay check for pickup and time under simulated ground fault conditions. 6. Verify nameplate identification by device operation. C. Electrical Tests: 1. Test system neutral insulation resistance with neutral ground link removed. System neutral insulation resistance minimum 1 megohm. 2. Determine relay pickup by primary current injection at the sensor. Relay pickup current within plus or minus 10 percent of device dial or fixed setting. 3. Test relay timing by injecting 300 percent of pickup current, or as specified by manufacturer. Relay operating time in accordance with manufacturer's time -current characteristic curves. 4. Test system operation at 55 percent rated control voltage, if applicable. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16950 10 ELECTRICAL TESTING 5. Test zone interlock system by simultaneous sensor current injection and monitoring zone blocking functions. 3.9 AC INDUCTION MOTORS A. General: Inspection and testing limited to motors rated 1/2 hp and larger. B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Proper electrical and grounding connections. 2. Shaft alignment. 3. Blockage of ventilating air passageways. 4. Operate Motor and Check For: a. Excessive mechanical and electrical noise. b. Overheating. C. Correct rotation. d. Check vibration detectors, resistance temperature detectors, or motor inherent protectors for functionability and proper operation. e. Excessive vibration. 5. Check operation of space heaters. C. Electrical Tests: 1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. In accordance with IEEE 43 at test voltages established by META ATS, Table 10.2 for: 1) Motors for 1-minute duration with resistances tabulated at 30 and 60 seconds. b. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by manufacturers. 2. Insulation resistance test on insulated bearings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Measure running current and voltage, and evaluate relative to load conditions and nameplate full -load amperes. 3.10 LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Proper barrier and shutter installation and operation. 2. Proper operation of indicating and monitoring devices. 3. Proper overload protection for each motor. 4. Improper blockage of air cooling passages. 5. Proper operation of drawout elements. 6. Integrity and contamination of bus insulation system. B0I158870.A1.FN 16950 DULY 10, 2000 11 ELECTRICAL TESTING 7. Check Door and Device Interlocking System By: a. Closure attempt of device when door is in OFF or OPEN position. b. Opening attempt of door when device is in ON or CLOSED position. 8. Check Key Interlocking Systems For: a. Key captivity when device is in ON or CLOSED position. b. Key removal when device is in OFF or OPEN position. C. Closure attempt of device when key has been removed. d. Correct number of keys in relationship to number of lock cylinders. e. Existence of other keys capable of operating lock cylinders; destroy duplicate sets of keys. 9. Check Nameplates for Proper Identification Of: a. Equipment title and tag number with latest one -line diagram. b. Pushbuttons. C. Control switches. d. Pilot lights. e. Control relays. f. Circuit breakers. g. Indicating meters. 10. Verify that fuse and circuit breaker sizes and types conform to Contract Documents. 11. Verify that current and potential transformer ratios conform to Contract Documents. 12. Check Bus Connections for High Resistance by Low Resistance Ohmmeter and Calibrated Torque Wrench Applied to Bolted Joints: a. Ohmic value to be zero. b. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 10.1, unless otherwise specified by manufacturer. 13. Check Operation and Sequencing of Electrical and Mechanical Interlock Systems By: a. Closure attempt for locked open devices. b. Opening attempt for locked closed devices. C. Key exchange to operate devices in OFF -NORMAL positions. 14. Verify performance of each control device and feature furnished as part of the motor control center. 15. Control Wiring: a. Compare wiring to local and remote control, and protective devices with elementary diagrams. b. Check for proper conductor lacing and bundling. C. Check for proper conductor identification. d. Check for proper conductor lugs and connections. 16. Exercise active components. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16950 12 ELECTRICAL TESTING 17. Inspect Contactors for: a. Correct mechanical operations. b. Correct contact gap, wipe, alignment, and pressure. C. Correct torque of all connections. 18. Compare overload heater rating with full -load current for proper size. 19. Compare fuse motor protector and circuit breaker with motor characteristics for proper size. 20. Perform phasing check on double -ended motor control centers to ensure proper bus phasing from each source. B. Electrical Tests: 1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. Applied megohmmeter do voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 10.2. b. Bus section phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground for 1 minute on each phase. C. Contactor phase -to -ground and across open contacts for 1 minute on each phase. d. Starter section phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground on each phase with starter contacts closed and protective devices open. e. Test values to comply with META ATS, Table 10.2. 2. Overpotential Tests: a. Maximum applied ac or do voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 7.1.2. b. Phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground for 1 minute for each phase of each bus section. C. Test results evaluated on pass/fail basis. 3. Current Injection Through Overload Unit at 300 Percent of Motor Full - Load Current and Monitor Trip Time: a. Trip time in accordance with manufacturer's published data. b. Investigate values in excess of 120 seconds. 4. Control Wiring Tests: a. Apply secondary voltage to control power and potential circuits. b. Check voltage levels at each point on terminal boards and each device terminal. C. Insulation resistance test at 1,000 volts do on control wiring except that connected to solid state components. 1) Insulation resistance to be 1 megohm minimum. 5. Operational test by initiating control devices to affect proper operation. BOI158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16950 13 ELECTRICAL TESTING 3.11 LOW VOLTAGE SURGE ARRESTORS A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Adequate clearances between arrestors and enclosures. 2. Ground connections to ground bus. B. Electrical Tests: 1. Varistor Type Arrestors: a. Clamping voltage test. b. Rated RMS voltage test. C. Rated do voltage test. d. Varistor arrester test values in accordance with ANSI C62.33, Sections 4.4 and 4.7. END OF SECTION B0I158870.A1.FN JULY 10, 2000 16950 14 ELECTRICAL TESTING